Digitized Automation for a Changing World

DVP Series Module Manual

www.deltaww.com
 DVP Series Module Manual

Revision History

Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1st The first version was published. 2 0 2 3 / 11 / 3 0
 DVP Series Module Manual
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 1-2

1.1.1 DVP-E Series Modules .................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 DVP-S Series Modules .................................................................... 1-4

1.2 Specification ...................................................................................... 1-9

1.2.1 General Specification ...................................................................... 1-9

1.3 Installation Before Operation .......................................................... 1-10

1.3.1 Module Installation ........................................................................1-10
1.3.2 Connection and Installation of the PLC and Modules ..........................1-11

1.4 Wiring ............................................................................................. 1-13

1.4.1 DVP-E Series ................................................................................1-13
1.4.2 DVP-S Series ................................................................................1-15

Chapter 2 DVP-E Series Digital Input/Output Module

2.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Module Profiles .................................................................................. 2-4

2.3 Dimension ......................................................................................... 2-5

2.4 Module Terminals .............................................................................. 2-6

2.5 Wiring ............................................................................................... 2-9

2.5.1 Wiring DVP08XM211N .................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Wiring DVP08XN211R ....................................................................2-10
2.5.3 Wiring DVP08XN211T ....................................................................2-10
2.5.4 Wiring DVP08XP211R ....................................................................2-11
2.5.5 Wiring DVP08XP211T ....................................................................2-11
2.5.6 Wiring DVP16XM211N ...................................................................2-12
2.5.7 Wiring DVP16XN211R ....................................................................2-13
2.5.8 Wiring DVP16XN211T ....................................................................2-13
2.5.9 Wiring DVP16XP211R ....................................................................2-14
2.5.10 Wiring DVP16XP211T ....................................................................2-15
2.5.11 Wiring DVP24XP200R ....................................................................2-16
2.5.12 Wiring DVP24XP200T ....................................................................2-17
2.5.13 Wiring DVP24XN200R ....................................................................2-17
2.5.14 Wiring DVP24XN200T ....................................................................2-18
2.5.15 Wiring DVP32XP200R ....................................................................2-18
2.5.16 Wiring DVP32XP200T ....................................................................2-19

2.6 Wiring Digital Input/Output ............................................................ 2-20

2.6.1 Wiring Digital Input .......................................................................2-20
2.6.2 Wiring Digital Output .....................................................................2-24

Chapter 3 DVP-E Series Analog Input/Output Module

3.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 DVP04AD-E2 Specifications ............................................................. 3-2
3.1.2 DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2specifications ........................................... 3-4
 3.1.3 DVP06XA-E2Specification................................................................ 3-5

3.2 Module Profiles .................................................................................. 3-7

3.3 Dimension ......................................................................................... 3-8

3.4 Module I/O Terminals ....................................................................... 3-8

3.5 Control Registers ............................................................................... 3-9

3.5.1 DVP04AD-E2Control Registers ......................................................... 3-9
3.5.2 DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2Control Registers ..................................... 3-15
3.5.3 DVP06XA-E2Control Register .......................................................... 3-20

3.6 Wiring ............................................................................................. 3-31

3.6.1 Wiring DVP04AD-E2 ...................................................................... 3-31
3.6.2 Wiring DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2 ................................................... 3-32
3.6.3 Wiring DVP06XA-E2 ...................................................................... 3-33

3.7 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 3-35

Chapter 4 DVP-E Series Temperature Measurement Module

4.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2 Specifications ........................................... 4-2
4.1.2 DVP04TC-E2 Specifications ............................................................. 4-4

4.2 Module Profiles .................................................................................. 4-6

4.3 Module Dimensions ........................................................................... 4-7

4.4 Module Terminals .............................................................................. 4-7

4.5 Control Registers ............................................................................... 4-8

4.5.1 DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2Control Registers ....................................... 4-8
4.5.2 DVP04TC-E2 Control Registers ....................................................... 4-13

4.6 Wiring ............................................................................................. 4-18

4.6.1 Wiring DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2 .................................................... 4-18
4.6.2 Wiring DVP04TC-E2 ...................................................................... 4-19

4.7 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 4-20

Chapter 5 DVP-E Series Position Control Module

5.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 5-2

5.1.1 DVP02PU-E2 Specifications ............................................................. 5-2

5.2 Module Profiles .................................................................................. 5-3

5.3 Module Dimensions ........................................................................... 5-4

5.4 Module Terminals .............................................................................. 5-4

5.5 Control Register ................................................................................ 5-5

5.6 Wiring ............................................................................................... 5-5

5.7 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 5-6

Chapter 6 DVP-E Series Extension Cable Interface Module

6.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 6-2

6.2 Module Profiles .................................................................................. 6-2

6.3 Installlation and Wiring ..................................................................... 6-3

Chapter 7 DVP-S Series Digital Input/Output Module

7.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Module Profiles .................................................................................. 7-4

7.4 Terminals .......................................................................................... 7-5

7.5 Wiring ............................................................................................... 7-6

7.5.1 Wiring DVP08SM10N ...................................................................... 7-6
7.5.2 Wiring DVP08SM11N ...................................................................... 7-7
7.5.3 Wiring DVP16SM11N ...................................................................... 7-8
7.5.4 Wiring DVP32SM11N ...................................................................... 7-9
7.5.5 Wiring DVP06SN11R......................................................................7-10
7.5.6 Wiring DVP08SN11R......................................................................7-11
7.5.7 Wiring DVP08SN11T ......................................................................7-11
7.5.8 Wiring DVP16SN11T ......................................................................7-12
7.5.9 Wiring DVP32SN11TN ....................................................................7-13
7.5.10 Wiring DVP08SN11TS ....................................................................7-14
7.5.11 Wiring DVP16SN11TS ....................................................................7-15
7.5.12 Wiring DVP08SP11R ......................................................................7-16
7.5.13 Wiring DVP08SP11T ......................................................................7-17
7.5.14 Wiring DVP16SP11R ......................................................................7-18
7.5.15 Wiring DVP16SP11T ......................................................................7-19
7.5.16 Wiring DVP08SP11TS ....................................................................7-20
7.5.17 Wiring DVP16SP11TS ....................................................................7-21

7.6 Wiring Digital Input/Output ............................................................ 7-22

7.6.1 Wiring Digital Input .......................................................................7-22
7.6.2 Wiring Digital Output .....................................................................7-26

Chapter 8 DVP-S Series Analog Input/Output Module

8.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 8-2

8.1.1 DVP04AD-S2/DVP06AD-S Specifications ........................................... 8-2
8.1.2 DVP02DA-S/ DVP04DA-S2 Specifications .......................................... 8-3
8.1.3 DVP06XA-S2 Specifications ............................................................. 8-4

8.2 Module Profiles .................................................................................. 8-5

8.3 Terminals .......................................................................................... 8-6

8.4 Control Register ................................................................................ 8-7

8.4.1 DVP04AD-S2 Control Register ......................................................... 8-7
8.4.2 DVP04DA-S2 Control Register ........................................................8-11
8.4.3 DVP06XA-S2 Control Register .........................................................8-15
8.4.4 DVP02DA-S Control Register ..........................................................8-20
8.4.5 DVP06AD-S Control Register ..........................................................8-24
8.5 Wiring ............................................................................................. 8-28
8.5.1 Wiring DVP04AD-S2 ...................................................................... 8-28
8.5.2 Wiring DVP04DA-S2 ...................................................................... 8-29
8.5.3 Wiring DVP06XA-S2 ...................................................................... 8-30
8.5.4 Wiring DVP06AD-S ........................................................................ 8-31
8.5.5 Wiring DVP02DA-S ........................................................................ 8-32

8.6 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 8-33

Chapter 9 DVP-S Series Temperature Measurement Module

9.1 General Specification ......................................................................... 9-3

9.1.1 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S Specification ................................................ 9-3
9.1.2 DVP04TC-S Specifications ............................................................... 9-5
9.1.3 DVP08NTC-S Specifications ............................................................. 9-6
9.1.4 DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKN-S/ DVP02TKR-S
/DVP02TKL-S Specifications ........................................................... 9-8

9.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ...................................................... 9-11

9.3 Terminals ........................................................................................ 9-12

9.4 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S/DVP04TC-S/DVP08NTC-S Control Register9-13

9.4.1 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S Control Register .......................................... 9-13
9.4.2 DVP04TC-S Control Register ........................................................... 9-17
9.4.3 DVP08NTC-S Control Register ......................................................... 9-20

9.5 DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/

DVP02TKN-S/DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S Control Registers ............ 9-23

9.5.1 Control Registers .......................................................................... 9-23
9.5.2 Examples of Setting a Control Register ............................................ 9-39
9.5.3 Analog Input Description ............................................................... 9-40
9.5.4 Outputs ....................................................................................... 9-41
9.5.5 ON/OFF Control Mode .................................................................... 9-43
9.5.6 Control Mode................................................................................ 9-45
9.5.7 Programmable SV Control Mode ..................................................... 9-49
9.5.8 ERROR LEDIndicator ..................................................................... 9-49
9.5.9 Automatic PID Calculation Feature
(Support TK V1.06/TU V4.18 and above) .......................................... 9-50
9.5.10 RS-485 Communication Setup for DVP02TK-S .................................. 9-51
9.5.11 TK Wizard-Connection Setup .......................................................... 9-54

9.6 Wiring ............................................................................................. 9-57

9.6.1 Wiring DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S ........................................................ 9-57
9.6.2 Wiring DVP04TC-S ........................................................................ 9-58
9.6.3 Wiring DVP08NTC-S ...................................................................... 9-59
9.6.4 Wiring DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/ DVP02TKN-S/
DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S............................................................. 9-60

9.7 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 9-63

Chapter 10 DVP-S Series Position Control Module

10.1 DVP01PU-S Specification ................................................................. 10-2

10.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ...................................................... 10-3

10.2.1 LED Display .................................................................................... 10-4

10.3 Terminals ........................................................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Input/Output Terminal ..................................................................... 10-5

10.4 Control Register .............................................................................. 10-6

10.5 Wiring............................................................................................ 10-10

10.6 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 10-11

Chapter 11 DVP-S Series Left-Side High-Speed Analog Input/Output Module

11.1 General Specifications ..................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 DVP04AD-SL Specifications ........................................................... 11-2

11.1.2 DVP04DA-SL Specifications ........................................................... 11-3

11.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ...................................................... 11-4

11.3 Terminals ........................................................................................ 11-5

11.4 Control Registers ............................................................................. 11-5

11.4.1 DVP04AD-SL Control Register ........................................................ 11-5

11.4.2 DVP04DA-SL Control Register ....................................................... 11-10

11.5 Wiring............................................................................................ 11-16

11.5.1 Wiring DVP04AD-SL .................................................................... 11-16

11.5.2 Wiring DVP04DA-SL .................................................................... 11-17

11.6 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 11-18

Chapter 12 DVP-S Series Left-Side High-Speed Load Cell Module

12.1 Principle of Load Cell ....................................................................... 12-3

12.2 Introduction of Load Cell ................................................................. 12-3

12.3 General Specification ....................................................................... 12-3

12.3.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL Specification ........................................... 12-3

12.3.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Specification ................... 12-4

12.4 Module Profiles and Dimensions ...................................................... 12-6

i
 12.4.1 Indicators of DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL............................................ 12-7
12.4.2 Indicators of DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL .................... 12-8

12.5 Terminals ........................................................................................ 12-9

12.6 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SLControl Registers .................................. 12-10

12.6.1 DVP01LC-SLControl Register ........................................................ 12-10

12.6.2 DVP02LC-SL Control Register ....................................................... 12-13
12.6.3 Functions Description .................................................................. 12-16

12.7 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Control Register ........ 12-19

12.7.1 Control Register.......................................................................... 12-19

12.7.2 Functions Descriptions ................................................................. 12-25

12.8 Wiring ........................................................................................... 12-30

12.8.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL/DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/ DVP211LC-SL12-30

12.8.2 DVP211LC-SL Wiring Digital Input................................................. 12-31
12.8.3 DVP211LC-SL Wiring Output ........................................................ 12-32

12.9 Software Interface Instructions .................................................... 12-33

12.9.1 Initial Settings ............................................................................ 12-33

12.9.2 Communication Settings .............................................................. 12-35
12.9.3 Parameter Settings ..................................................................... 12-37
12.9.4 Correction Setting ....................................................................... 12-38
12.9.5 Status Settings ........................................................................... 12-39

12.10 Correction ..................................................................................... 12-41

12.10.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL Correction ............................................. 12-41

12.10.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Correction ..................... 12-45

12.11 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 12-53

12.11.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL ............................................................ 12-53

12.11.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL .................................... 12-53

Chapter 13 DVP-S Series Left-Side High-Speed Communication Module

13.1 DVPEN01-SL .................................................................................... 13-3

13.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................. 13-3
13.1.2 Module Profiles and Dimension ....................................................... 13-5
13.1.3 Terminals .................................................................................... 13-6
13.1.4 Installation and Wiring .................................................................. 13-6
13.1.5 Control Register ........................................................................... 13-9
13.1.6 Software Setting ......................................................................... 13-14
13.1.7 Application Examples .................................................................. 13-37

ii
 13.1.8 LED Indictor and Troubleshooting ................................................. 13-66

13.2 DVPDNET-SL .................................................................................. 13-67

13.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 13-67
13.2.2 Module Profiles and Dimension ..................................................... 13-69
13.2.3 Terminals ................................................................................... 13-70
13.2.4 Installation ................................................................................. 13-71
13.2.5 Connect to DeviceNet .................................................................. 13-72
13.2.6 Software Introduction .................................................................. 13-73
13.2.7 Input and Output Mapping Areas .................................................. 13-77
13.2.8 Sending Explicit Message from Ladder Diagram .............................. 13-80
13.2.9 Bit-Strobe Command ................................................................... 13-87
13.2.10 Display of Node Status on Network ............................................... 13-88
13.2.11 Setup of Slave Mode ................................................................... 13-89
13.2.12 Extended Baud Rate Setup ........................................................... 13-91
13.2.13 Application Example .................................................................... 13-96
13.2.14 Error Diagnosis & Troubleshooting ............................................... 13-104

13.3 DVPCOPM-SL ............................................................................... 13-107

13.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 13-107
13.3.2 Module Profiles and Dimension ................................................... 13-109
13.3.3 Terminals ................................................................................. 13-110
13.3.4 Installation ............................................................................... 13-111
13.3.5 Construct a CANopen Network .................................................... 13-112
13.3.6 Input and Output Mapping Areas ................................................ 13-128
13.3.7 Send SDO, NMT and Read Emergency by Ladder Diagram .............. 13-131
13.3.8 Network Node Status Display ..................................................... 13-141
13.3.9 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting .............................................. 13-146
13.3.10 Indexes and Sub-indexes for DVPCOPM-SL
Working as CANopen Slave ....................................................... 13-149

13.4 DVPPF02-SL................................................................................. 13-152

13.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 13-152
13.4.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions .................................................. 13-153
13.4.3 Terminals ................................................................................. 13-154
13.4.4 Installation ............................................................................... 13-155
13.4.5 Establish PROFIBUS DP Network ................................................. 13-156
13.4.6 Transmission Distance and Baud Rate .......................................... 13-157
13.4.7 GSD File .................................................................................. 13-157
13.4.8 Mapping Areas and Status Registers ............................................ 13-157

iii
 13.4.9 DVPPF02-SL Configure .............................................................. 13-158
13.4.10 Application Example .................................................................. 13-159
13.4.11 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting .............................................. 13-164

13.5 DVPSCM12-SL/DVPSCM52-SL...................................................... 13-166

13.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 13-166
13.5.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions .................................................. 13-168
13.5.3 Terminals ................................................................................. 13-169
13.5.4 Installation and Wiring .............................................................. 13-169
13.5.5 Control Register........................................................................ 13-171
13.5.6 Rapid Start .............................................................................. 13-178
13.5.7 SCMSoft Introduction ................................................................ 13-185
13.5.8 Application ............................................................................... 13-194
13.5.9 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting .............................................. 13-223

Chapter 14 DVP-S Series Left-Side Position Module

14.1 DVP02PU-SL Specification .................................................................... 2

14.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ........................................................... 4

14.3 Terminals ............................................................................................. 5

14.3.1 Installation Precautions ....................................................................................... 5

14.4 Control Register ................................................................................... 6

14.5 Wiring .................................................................................................. 6

14.6 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 7

iv
 1
Chapter 1 Introduction

Table of Contents
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1 DVP-E Series Modules ................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.2 DVP-S Series Modules ................................................................................ 1-4

1.2 Specification .................................................................................................. 1-9

1.2.1 General Specification .................................................................................. 1-9

1.3 Installation Before Operation ...................................................................... 1-10

1.3.1 Module Installation ................................................................................... 1-10
1.3.2 Connection and Installation of the PLC and Modules ..................................... 1-11
1.3.2.1 Connection and Installation of DVP-E Series PLC and Modules ................. 1-11
1.3.2.2 Connection and Installation of DVP-S Series PLC and Modules ................. 1-12

1.4 Wiring ......................................................................................................... 1-13

1.4.1 DVP-E Series ........................................................................................... 1-13
1.4.2 DVP-S Series ........................................................................................... 1-15

1-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

1.1 Introduction
_1
Weighing moduleThe manual covers the usage instructions for special modules in the DVP-E (DVP-ES3/EX3/ES2/EX2)
series and DVP-S (DVP-SV3/SX3/SV2/SX2/SA2/SS2/SE/SE2) series. This includes analog modules, temperature
modules, weighing modules, communication modules, etc. For specific details about the special modules in the DVP-EH
series, please refer to the detailed installation manuals for each module.

1.1.1 DVP-E Series Modules

Classification Model name Description
DVP08XM211N 8-point input，24VDC，5mA

4-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP08XP211R
4-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC or below，2A/output，5A/COM

4-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP08XP211T
4-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.5A/output，4A/COM

DVP08XN211R 8-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC or below，2A/output，5A/COM

DVP08XN211T 8-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.5A/output，4A/COM

DVP16XM211N 16-point input，24VDC，5mA

8-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP16XP211R
8-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC or below，2A/output，5A/COM

8-point input，24VDC，5mA，8-point input

DVP16XP211T
8-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.5A/output，4A/COM
Digital I/O Module
DVP16XN211R 16-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC or below，2A/output，5A/COM

DVP16XN211T 16-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.5A/output，4A/COM

16-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP24XP200R
8-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC OR BELOW，2A/output，5A/COM

16-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP24XP200T
8-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.5A/output，4A/COM

DVP24XN200R 24-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC or below，2A/output，5A/COM

DVP24XN200T 24-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.5A/output，4A/COM

16-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP32XP200R
16-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC or below，2A/output，5A/COM

16-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP32XP200T
16-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.5A/output，4A/COM
4-channel analog signal input
14-bitresolution-bit resolution：-5V~+5V，-10~+10V，-20mA~+20mA
Analog I/O module DVP04AD-E2
13-bitresolution-bit resolution：0/4~20mA
conversion time：400μs/channel

2-channel analog signal output

Analog I/O module DVP02DA-E2 14-bitresolution-bit resolution：-10V~10V，0~20mA，4~20mA
conversion time：400μs/channel

1-2
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

Classification Model name Description

4-channel analog signal output
1_
DVP04DA-E2 14-bitresolution-bit resolution：-10V~10V，0~20mA，4~20mA
conversion time：400μs/channel

4-channel analog signal input

14-bitresolution-bit resolution：-5V~+5V，-10~+10V，-20mA~+20mA
13-bitresolution-bit resolution：0/4~20mA
DVP06XA-E2 conversion time：400μs/channel
2-channel analog signal output
14-bitresolution-bit resolution：-10V~10V，0~20mA，4~20mA
conversion time：400μs/channel

4-channel 3-wire or 2-wire RTD temperature sensing.

Sensor typeSensor type：Pt100、Pt1000、Ni100、Ni1000、0~300Ω、0~3000Ω
DVP04PT-E2 resolution：0.1℃/0.1℉（16-bit）
conversion time：200ms/channel
Equipped with PID temperature control

6-channel3-wire or 2-wire RTD temperature sensing.

Sensor typeSensor type：Pt100、Pt1000、Ni100、Ni1000、Cu50、Cu100、
Temperature
measurement 0~300Ω、0~3000Ω、JPt100、LG-Ni1000
DVP06PT-E2
module resolution：0.1℃/0.1℉（16-bit）
conversion time：200ms/channel
Equipped with PID temperature control
4-channelthermocouplet emperature sensing
Sensor type：J、K、R、S、T、E、N 或-80~+80mV
DVP04TC-E2 resolution：0.1℃/0.1℉（16-bitconverter）
conversion time：200ms/channel
Equipped with PID temperature control
2-axispositioning control.
5~24VDC，one set of（A/B/Z phase）differential input, hardware input
bandwidth up to a maximum of 200 kHz.
Positioning module DVP02PU-E2 24VDC，5mA，5-point input, hardware input bandwidth up to a maximum of
1 kHz.
5VDC，2-axis（4 points）differential output, highest output frequency of 200
kHz
Extension cable
DVPAEXT01-E2 Extension of I/O module usage
interface module

1-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

1.1.2 DVP-S Series Modules

_1 Classification Model name Description
DVP06SN11R 6-point relay output，250VAC/30VDC or below，6A/output

8-point relay output，250VAC/30VDC or below，1.5A/output，

DVP08SN11R
5A/COM
8-point transistor output(sinking)，30VDC，55°C 0.1A/output、50°C
DVP08SN11T
0.15A/output、45°C 0.2A/output、40°C 0.3A/output，2A/COM

16-point transistor output(sinking)，30VDC，55°C 0.1A/output、50°C

DVP16SN11T
0.15A/output、45°C 0.2A/output、40°C 0.3A/output，2A/COM

4-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP08SP11R 4-point relay output，250VAC，30VDC or below，1.5A/output，
5A/COM
4-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP08SP11T 4-point transistor output(sinking)，30VDC，55°C 0.1A/output、50°C
0.15A/output、45°C 0.2A/output、40°C 0.3A/output，2A/COM

DVP08SM11N 8-point input，24VDC，5mA

DVP08SM10N 8-point input，85~132VAC（50~60Hz）

，9.2mA（10VAC/60Hz）

DVP08SN11TS 8-bit transistor output(sourcing)，30VDC，55°C 0.3A/output，2A/COM

DVP08ST11N 8-point input（Selector switch）

Analog I/O module
8-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP16SP11R 8-point relay output，250VAC/30VDC or below，1.5A/output，
5A/COM
4-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP08SP11TS
4-bit transistor output(sourcing)，30VDC，55°C 0.3A/output，2A/COM

8-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP16SP11T 8-point transistor output(sinking)，30VDC，55°C 0.1A/output、50°C
0.15A/output、45°C 0.2A/output、40°C 0.3A/output，2A/COM

8-point input，24VDC，5mA
DVP16SP11TS
8-bit transistor output(sourcing)，30VDC，55°C 0.3A/output，2A/COM

16-bit transistor output(sourcing)，30VDC，55°C 0.3A/output，

DVP16SN11TS
2A/COM
DVP16SM11N 16-point input，24VDC，5mA

32-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.1A/output，55°C

DVP32SN11TN
1.0A/COM、25°C 2.2A/COM

32-point transistor output(sinking)，5~30VDC，0.1A/output，55°C

DVP32SM11N
1.0A/COM、25°C 2.2A/COM

4-channel-channel analog signal input（Differential mode）

14-bitresolution-bit resolution∶-10~10V，-6~10V
Analog I/O module DVP04AD-S2
13-bitresolution-bit resolution∶-20~20mA，-12~20mA
conversion time：3ms/channel

1-4
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

Classification Model name Description

4-channel-channel analog signal output
1_
DVP04DA-S2 12-bitresolution-bit resolution∶0~10V，2~10V，0~20mA，4~20mA
conversion time：3ms/channel

4-channel-channel analog signal input（Differential mode）

12-bitresolution-bit resolution∶-10~10V，-6~10V
11-bitresolution-bit resolution∶-20~20mA，-12~20mA
DVP06XA-S2 conversion time：3ms/channel
2-channel analog signal output
12-bitresolution-bit resolution∶0~10V，2~10V，0~20mA，4~20mA
Analog I/O module
conversion time：3ms/channel

2-channel analog signal output

DVP02DA-S 12-bitresolution-bit resolution∶0~10V，2~10V，0~20mA，4~20mA
conversion time：3ms/channel

6-channel-channel analog signal input（Single-ended mode）

14-bitresolution-bit resolution∶-10~10V，-6~10V
DVP06AD-S
13-bitresolution-bit resolution∶-20~20mA，-12~20mA
conversion time：3ms/channel

4-channel-channel analog signal input（Differential mode）

16-bitresolution-bit resolution∶-10~10V，-5~5V，-20~20mA
DVP04AD-SL
15-bitresolution-bit resolution∶0~20mA，4~20mA

Left-side High-speed conversion time：250us/channel

Analog I/O module
4-channel-channel analog signal output
16-bitresolution-bit resolution∶0~10V，-10~10V
DVP04DA-SL
15-bitresolution-bit resolution∶0~20mA，4~20mA
conversion time：250us/channel
one set ofLoad cellWeighing module
24-bitresolution-bit resolution
DVP201LC-SL Measurement range：0~80mV/V
Built-in RS-485 communication port, capable of standalone
operation.
Left-side High-speed
one set ofLoad cellWeighing module
Load cell weighing module
24-bitresolution-bit resolution
Measurement range：0~80mV/V
DVP211LC-SL
Built-in I/O point control：2DI/4DO/1AO
Built-in RS-485 communication port, capable of standalone
operation.
two set ofLoad cellWeighing module
24-bitresolution-bit resolution
Left-side High-speed
DVP202LC-SL Measurement range：0~80mV/V
Load cell weighing module
Built-in RS-485 communication port, capable of standalone
operation.

1-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Classification Model name Description

two set ofLoad cellWeighing module
_1
DVP02LC-SL 20-bitresolution-bit resolution
Measurement range：0~6mV/V
one set ofLoad cellWeighing module
DVP01LC-SL 20-bitresolution-bit resolution
Measurement range：0~6mV/V
4-channel3-wire or 2-wire RTD temperature sensing.
Sensor typeSensor type：Pt100、Pt1000、Ni100、Ni1000、
LG-Ni1000、Cu100、Cu50、0~300Ω、0~3000Ω
DVP04PT-S
resolution：0.1℃/0.18℉
conversion time：200ms/channel
Equipped with PID temperature control

6-channel3-wire or 2-wire RTD temperature sensing.

Sensor typeSensor type：Pt100、Pt1000、Ni100、Ni1000、
DVP06PT-S LG-Ni1000、Cu100、Cu50、0~300Ω、0~3000Ω
resolution：0.1℃/0.18℉
conversion time：160ms/channel
Temperature measurement
module
4-channelthermocouple temperature sensing
Sensor type：J、K、R、S、T
DVP04TC-S resolution：0.1℃/0.18℉
conversion time：200ms/channel
Equipped with PID temperature control

8-channel Thermistor (NTC) temperature sensor input.

Sensor typeSensor type：Pt1000、Ni1000、LG-Ni1000、CTN10K、
DVP08NTC-S CTN100K、NTC20K、NTC30K、PT-42H、PT-43、PT-51F、PT-25E2、
PT-312、KTY81、two self-filled forms
resolution：0.1°C

2-point universal analog input：0~10V、0~20mA、4~20mA

thermocouple：J、K、R、S、T、E、N、B 、C、L、U、TXK（L）、
PLII
Temperature measurement input impedance：Pt100、JPt100、Pt1000、Cu50、Cu100、Ni100、
DVP02TUN-S
module Ni120、Ni1000、LG-Ni1000
resolution：16-bit、Sensor0.1°C
4-point transistor output(sinking)：24VDC/300mA
Output points: PID control/manual control.

1-6
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

Classification Model name Description

2-point universal analog input：0~10V、0~20mA、4~20mA
1_
thermocouple：J、K、R、S、T、E、N、B、C、L、U、TXK（L）
、
PLII
input impedance：Pt100、JPt100、Pt1000、Cu50、Cu100、Ni100、
DVP02TUR-S
Ni120、Ni1000、LG-Ni1000
resolution：16-bit、Sensor 0.1°C
4-point relay output：240VAC/2A
Output points: PID control/manual control.
2-point universal analog input：0~10V、0~20mA、4~20mA
thermocouple：J、K、R、S、T、E、N、B 、C、L、U、TXK（L）、
PLII
input impedance：Pt100、JPt100、Pt1000、Cu50、Cu100、Ni100、
DVP02TUL-S Ni120、Ni1000、LG-Ni1000
resolution：16-bit、Sensor0.1°C
2-point analog output，12-bitresolution-bit resolution：0~10V、
0~20mA、4~20mA
Output points: PID control/manual control.
2-point universal analog input：0~10V、0~20mA、4~20mA
thermocouple：J、K、R、S、T、E、N、B 、C、L、U、TXK（L）、
PLII
input impedance：Pt100、JPt100、Pt1000、Cu50、Cu100、Ni100、
DVP02TKN-S
Ni120、Ni1000、LG-Ni1000
resolution：16-bit、Sensor0.1°C
4 -point transistor output(sinking)：24VDC/300mA
Remote temperature Output points: PID control/manual control.
measurement module 2-point universal analog input：0~10V、0~20mA、4~20mA
thermocouple：J、K、R、S、T、E、N、B 、C、L、U、TXK（L）、
PLII
input impedance：Pt100、JPt100、Pt1000、Cu50、Cu100、Ni100、
DVP02TKR-S
Ni120、Ni1000、LG-Ni1000
resolution：16-bit、Sensor0.1°C
4 -point relay output：240VAC/2A
Output points: PID control/manual control.
2-point universal analog input：0~10V、0~20mA、4~20mA
thermocouple：J、K、R、S、T、E、N、B 、C、L、U、TXK（L）、
PLII
input impedance：Pt100、JPt100、Pt1000、Cu50、Cu100、Ni100、
Remote temperature
DVP02TKL-S Ni120、Ni1000、LG-Ni1000
measurement module
resolution：16-bit、Sensor0.1°C
2 -point analog output，12-bitresolution-bit resolution：0~10V、
0~20mA、4~20mA
Output points: PID control/manual control.

1-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Classification Model name Description

_1 Positioning module DVP01PU-S Single-axis 200 kHz positioning control expansion module

2-axispositioning control.
5~24VDC，one set of（A/B/Z phase）differential input, Hardware input
bandwidth up to a maximum of 1 kHz
Left-side positioning
DVP02PU-SL 24VDC，5mA，5-point input，Hardware input bandwidth up to a
module
maximum of 1 kHz
5VDC，2-axis（4 points）differential output，Maximum output
frequency of 200 kHz

DVPEN01-SL Ethernet module，10/100Mbps

DVPDNET-SL DeviceNetMaster station module，500kbps

DVPCOPM-SL CANopenMaster station module，1Mbps

Left-side High-speed
communication module PROFIBUS DPSlave station module，12Mbps
DVPPF02-SL

DVPSCM12-SL RS-485/RS-422Serial communication module，460kbps

DVPSCM52-SL BACnet MS/TPSlave station module，460kbps

1-8
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.2 Specification
1_
1.2.1 General Specification
Item Specification
Operating environment
0~55°C
temperature

Storage environment DVP-E Series：-40~70°C

temperature DVP-S Series：-25~70°C
Operating environment
5~95%，non-condensing
humidity
Storage environment
5~95%，non-condensing
humidity
Working environment. No corrosive gases present.
Installation location Inside the control box (indoor use only)
Pollution degree 2
Protection rating IP20（Not UL certified）
EMCregulation Please refer to Appendix C
Tested with：
5Hz ≦ f ≦ 8.4Hz，constant amplitude 3.5mm；
8.4Hz ≦ f ≦ 150Hz，constant acceleration 1g
Vibration resistance.
Duration of oscillation：10 sweep cycles
per axis on each direction of the 3 mutually perpendicular axes
International standard specifications IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-6（TEST Fc）

Tested with：
Half-sine wave：
Strength of shock 15g peak value，11ms duration；
Impact
Shock direction：The shocks in each in direction per axis，on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
（total of 18 shocks）
International standard specifications IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-27（TEST Ea）

Safety regulations IEC 61131-2、UL 61010-2-201、UL 508

Applicable atmospheric Operating：1013~795hPa（Equivalent to an altitude of 0-2000 meters above sea level）

pressure Storage：1013~660hPa（Equivalent to an altitude of 0-3500 meters above sea level）
Enclosure fire
UL94V-0
protection rating

1-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

1.3 Installation Before Operation

_1
1.3.1 Module Installation

The installation methods for the module are illustrated as follows:

1. Direct Screw Locking Method: Please use M4 screws according to the product dimensions for direct locking.

2. Installation on DIN Rail: During installation, hang the groove at the back of the module in the direction of arrow 1
onto the aluminum rail. Press it down in the direction of arrow 2 until you hear a click sound, indicating the
completion of the installation. To remove the module, use a flathead screwdriver to pry open the fixed plastic piece
first, then lift and pull the module out in an upward direction.

DVP-ESeries DVP-SSeries

2
2

1-10
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.3.2 Connection and Installation of the PLC and Modules

1.3.2.1 Connection and Installation of DVP-E Series PLC and Modules 1_
Step One: Use a flathead screwdriver to open the module Step Two: Use a flathead screwdriver to pry open the
connector port cover on the side of the PLC. locking tab of the I/O module.

Step Four: Press the upper and lower locking tabs of the
Step Three: Connect the PLC I/O module connector port
I/O module in the direction of the arrow to secure the
with the module connector port.
modules in place.

1 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

1.3.2.2 Connection and Installation of DVP-S Series PLC and Modules

_1 Step One: Use a screwdriver to open the expansion side Step Two: Use the screwdriver to flip the expansion
cover, revealing the expansion module connection
module locking tab upwards.。
interface.

Step Three: Align the positioning holes of the host and

the expansion module, then connect the host's expansion Step Four: Press the expansion module locking tab
module interface with the expansion module. downward to secure it, completing the assembly with the
At this point, the PLC and the expansion module are host system.
tightly coupled.

Note: The connection and installation method of the host with the left-side modules are the same as the installation with
the right-side modules described above, as shown in the following diagram.

1-12
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.4 Wiring
1.4.1 DVP-E Series 1_
1. Wiring Precautions
 During installation or wiring, it is imperative to ensure that all external power sources are switched
off. Failure to turn off all power sources may result in electric shock to users or damage to the
product.
 Lors de l'installation ou du câblage, il est impératif de s'assurer que toutes les sources
d'alimentation externes soient éteintes. Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait entraîner un
risque de choc électrique pour les utilisateurs ou des dommages au produit.
 After completing the installation or wiring, when powering on or operating the module, it is
essential to confirm the correct installation of the module terminal cover. Failure to do so may lead
to electric shock or operational errors.
 Une fois l'installation ou le câblage terminé, lors de la mise sous tension ou de l'utilisation du
module, il est essentiel de vérifier que le capot terminal du module est correctement installé. Ne
pas le faire pourrait entraîner un risque de choc électrique ou des erreurs opérationnelles.
 The (Protective Ground) / (Functional Ground) terminals must be grounded using
protective grounding conductors. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or operational
errors.
 Les bornes (Protective Ground) / (Functional Ground) doivent être mises à la terre à
l'aide de conducteurs de mise à la terre de protection. Ne pas le faire pourrait entraîner un risque
de choc électrique ou des erreurs opérationnelles.
 When wiring the PLC, check the rated voltage and terminal configuration defined in the product
specifications to ensure correct and safe wiring. Connecting an incorrect power supply or
improperly wiring the product contrary to the rated values may pose risks such as fire or damage.
 Lors du câblage du PLC, vérifiez la tension nominale et la configuration des bornes définies dans
les spécifications du produit pour garantir un câblage correct et sûr. Connecter une alimentation
incorrecte ou câbler le produit de manière contraire aux valeurs nominales peut entraîner des
risques tels que l'incendie ou des dommages.
 External wiring configurations should be carried out using dedicated tools for bending, welding,
and proper soldering. Poor wiring configurations may lead to short circuits, fires, or operational
errors.
 Les configurations de câblage externe doivent être réalisées à l'aide d'outils dédiés pour le pliage,
la soudure et un soudage approprié. Des configurations de câblage médiocres peuvent entraîner
des courts-circuits, des incendies ou des erreurs opérationnelles.
 It is crucial to ensure that each module is free of foreign objects such as iron filings or wiring
residues. These foreign objects may cause fires, damage, or operational errors.
 Il est crucial de s'assurer que chaque module est exempt de corps étrangers tels que des limailles
de fer ou des résidus de câblage. Ces objets étrangers peuvent provoquer des incendies, des
dommages ou des erreurs opérationnelles

2. Module Wiring
(1) Definitions of Two-Wire, Three-Wire, and Four-Wire Configurations

 Two-Wire, Three-Wire (Passive Sensors): The sensor shares a power circuit with the system

 Four-Wire (Active Sensors): The sensor utilizes an independent power supply and is recommended not to
share the power circuit with the system.

1-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

(2) Wiring for terminal connections should use 24-12AWG single-core or multi-core wires. It is recommended to
use needle-type terminals with a hole diameter smaller than 2mm (insulated with a protective sleeve) for wiring, as
_1
specified in the diagram. The screw torque for PLC terminal screws is 3.8kgf-cm (3.3lbf-in), and only copper wires
rated at 60/75°C should be used.

< 2 mm 8-10 mm 24-12 AWG

Note: For relay output wiring, the wire diameter specifications vary depending on the provided power type.
Refer to section 2.6.2.1 for details.

(3) Please separate the input, output, and power lines.

(4) When it is not possible to keep a certain distance between the main circuit and power lines, use grouped
shielded cables and ground them at the I/O end. In some environments, ground the other end.
I/O

shield ed cab le
Y0 AC Load

C0
AC Power supply

(5) When using cable conduits for wiring, ensure proper grounding of the conduits.

(6) Separate the DC 24V input line from the AC 110V and 220V input lines.

(7) When the wiring length exceeds 200m (686.67 inches), leakage current may be generated by line capacitance,
leading to system equipment malfunctions and damage.

3. Grouding

Grounding of the cable should be done according to steps (1) to (3).

(1) Use the correct independent grounding method.

(2) Use 18-12AWG single-core or multi-core wires for grounding, and it is recommended to use needle-type
terminals with a hole diameter smaller than 2mm for wiring, as specified in the diagram.

< 2 mm 8-10 mm 18-12 AWG

(3) Place the grounding point close to the PLC and securely connect the grounding cable.

Caution:

1. For wiring of 110V/220V and 24VDC power cables, use 18-12AWG conductors. Twist the power conductors at
the terminal connections, and it is recommended to use needle-type terminals with a hole diameter smaller than
2mm for wiring, as specified in the diagram.

< 2 mm 8-10 mm 18-12 AWG

2. When wiring is connected to the / terminals, ensure that it is grounded. Apart from grounding, do not connect
the / terminals to any other devices. Failure to ground the / terminals may result in interference
affecting the PLC or pose a risk of electric shock due to the potential of the / terminals.

1-14
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.4.2 DVP-S Series

1. Wiring Precautions 1_
 During installation or wiring, it is imperative to ensure that all external power sources are switched
off. Failure to turn off all power sources may result in electric shock to users or damage to the
product.
 Lors de l'installation ou du câblage, il est impératif de s'assurer que toutes les sources
d'alimentation externes soient éteintes. Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait entraîner un
risque de choc électrique pour les utilisateurs ou des dommages au produit.
 After completing the installation or wiring, when powering on or operating the module, it is
essential to confirm the correct installation of the module terminal cover. Failure to do so may lead
to electric shock or operational errors.
 Une fois l'installation ou le câblage terminé, lors de la mise sous tension ou de l'utilisation du
module, il est essentiel de vérifier que le capot terminal du module est correctement installé. Ne
pas le faire pourrait entraîner un risque de choc électrique ou des erreurs opérationnelles.
 The (Protective Ground) / (Functional Ground) terminals must be grounded using
protective grounding conductors. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or operational
errors.
 Les bornes (Protective Ground) / (Functional Ground) doivent être mises à la terre à
l'aide de conducteurs de mise à la terre de protection. Ne pas le faire pourrait entraîner un risque
de choc électrique ou des erreurs opérationnelles.
 When wiring the PLC, check the rated voltage and terminal configuration defined in the product
specifications to ensure correct and safe wiring. Connecting an incorrect power supply or
improperly wiring the product contrary to the rated values may pose risks such as fire or damage.
 Lors du câblage du PLC, vérifiez la tension nominale et la configuration des bornes définies dans
les spécifications du produit pour garantir un câblage correct et sûr. Connecter une alimentation
incorrecte ou câbler le produit de manière contraire aux valeurs nominales peut entraîner des
risques tels que l'incendie ou des dommages.
 External wiring configurations should be carried out using dedicated tools for bending, welding,
and proper soldering. Poor wiring configurations may lead to short circuits, fires, or operational
errors.
 Les configurations de câblage externe doivent être réalisées à l'aide d'outils dédiés pour le pliage,
la soudure et un soudage approprié. Des configurations de câblage médiocres peuvent entraîner
des courts-circuits, des incendies ou des erreurs opérationnelles.
 It is crucial to ensure that each module is free of foreign objects such as iron filings or wiring
residues. These foreign objects may cause fires, damage, or operational errors.
 Il est crucial de s'assurer que chaque module est exempt de corps étrangers tels que des limailles
de fer ou des résidus de câblage. Ces objets étrangers peuvent provoquer des incendies, des
dommages ou des erreurs opérationnelles.

2. Module Wiring

(1) Definitions of Two-Wire, Three-Wire, and Four-Wire Configurations:

 Two, Three-Wire (Passive Sensors): Sensors share a power circuit with the system.

 Four-Wire (Active Sensors): Sensors use an independent power supply, and it is recommended not to share
the power circuit with the system.

1-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

(2) Wiring to the connection terminals should use 24-16AWG single-core or multi-core wires. It is recommended
to use needle-type terminals with a hole diameter smaller than 2mm (insulated with a protective sleeve) for
_1
wiring, as specified in the diagram. The specifications are as follows: PLC terminal screw torque is 2.0kgf-cm
(1.77lbf-in), and only copper wires rated at 60/75°C should be used

< 2 mm 6-8 mm 24-16

- AWG

Note: For relay models, the output wiring specifications vary depending on the provided power type. Refer to
section 7.6.2.1 for details.

(3) Please separate the input, output, and power lines.

(4) When it is not possible to keep a certain distance between the main circuit and power lines, use grouped
shielded cables and ground them at the I/O end. In some environments, ground the other end.
I/O

S hield ed cab le
Y0 AC Load

C0
AC power supply

(5) When wiring using conduit, ensure that the conduit is grounded in the correct manner.

(6) Please separate the DC 24V input line from the AC 110V and 220V input lines.

(7) When the wiring length exceeds 200m (686.67 inches), leakage current may be generated by line
capacitance, leading to system equipment malfunctions and damage.

Caution:

When wiring is connected to the / terminals, ensure that it is grounded. Apart from grounding, do not connect
the / terminals to any other devices. Failure to ground the / terminals may result in interference
affecting the PLC or pose a risk of electric shock due to the potential of the / terminals.

1-16
 2
Chapter 2 DVP-E Series Digital Input/Output
Module

Table of Contents
2.1 General Specifications ................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Module Profiles .............................................................................................. 2-4

2.3 Dimension ..................................................................................................... 2-5

2.4 Module Terminals .......................................................................................... 2-6

2.5 Wiring ............................................................................................................ 2-9

2.5.1 Wiring DVP08XM211N .......................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Wiring DVP08XN211R ........................................................................ 2-10
2.5.3 Wiring DVP08XN211T ........................................................................ 2-10
2.5.4 Wiring DVP08XP211R......................................................................... 2-11
2.5.5 Wiring DVP08XP211T ......................................................................... 2-11
2.5.6 Wiring DVP16XM211N ........................................................................ 2-12
2.5.7 Wiring DVP16XN211R ........................................................................ 2-13
2.5.8 Wiring DVP16XN211T ........................................................................ 2-13
2.5.9 Wiring DVP16XP211R......................................................................... 2-14
2.5.10 Wiring DVP16XP211T ......................................................................... 2-15
2.5.11 Wiring DVP24XP200R......................................................................... 2-16
2.5.12 Wiring DVP24XP200T ......................................................................... 2-17
2.5.13 Wiring DVP24XN200R ........................................................................ 2-17
2.5.14 Wiring DVP24XN200T ........................................................................ 2-18
2.5.15 Wiring DVP32XP200R......................................................................... 2-18
2.5.16 Wiring DVP32XP200T ......................................................................... 2-19

2.6 Wiring Digital Input/Output ........................................................................ 2-20

2.6.1 Wiring Digital Input ........................................................................... 2-20
2.6.2 Wiring Digital Output ......................................................................... 2-24

2-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.1 General Specifications

Model (DVP) 08XM 08XN 08XN 08XP 08XP 16XM 16XP 16XN 16XP 16XN
Item 211N 211R 211T 211R 211T 211N 211T 211T 211R 211R
Power supply 24VDC (Provided by CPU module)

_2 Weight (g) 105 135 109 120 107 148 149 143 179 209

Model (DVP) 24XN 24XN 24XP 24XP 32XP 32XP

Item 200R 200T 200R 200T 200R 200T
Power supply 100VAC~240VAC
Weight (g) 390 310 300 260 340 280

 Electrical specifications for the inputs on digital input/output modules

(The signals passing through the inputs are 24 VDC signals.)

Model（DVP） 08XM 08XP 08XP 16XM 16XP 16XP 24XP 24XP 32XP 32XP
Item 211N 211R 211T 211N 211R 211T 200R 200T 200R 200T
Number of inputs 8 4 4 16 8 8 16 16 16 16
Connector type Removable terminal block
Input type Digital input
Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input voltage 24VDC，5mA

OFF→ON >15VDC
Action level
ON→OFF <5VDC

OFF→ON 10ms±10%
Response time
ON→OFF 15ms±10%
Input impedance 4.7kΩ
Input isolation 500VAC
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.

2-2
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

 Electrical specifications for the outputs on a digital input/output module

Model（DVP） 08XP 08XN 16XP 16XN 24XP 24XN 32XP 08XP 08XN 16XP 16XN 24XP 24XN 32XP
Item 211R 211R 211R 211R 200R 200R 200R 211T 211T 211T 211T 200T 200T 200T
Number of outputs 4 8 8 16 8 24 16 4 8 8 16 8 24 16
Connector type Removable terminal block
Output type Relay-R Transistor-T
Voltage 10~250VAC，5~30VDC 5~30VDC 2_
Leakage current – <10uA
Resistance 2A/output，5A/COM*3 0.3A/output，1.2A/COM*2
Max.
Inductance Life cycle curve*4 N/A
load
Bulb 20WDC/100WAC N/A
Minimum load 1mA/5V
Output isolation 1500VAC 500VAC
Switching
≦1Hz ≦100Hz
frequency*1
Resp OFF→ON 50μs
onse Approximately 10ms
time ON→OFF 200μs

*1. The scan cycle affects the frequency.

*2. UP, ZP should include external aid power 24VDC (-15% ~ +20%) and the rated comsumption is around 1mA/point

*3. DVP16XN211R and DVP16XP211R should include external aid power 24VDC (-15% ~ +20%) and the rated
comsumption is around 5mA/point

*4. Life cycle curve: The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the power factor cosø,
the time constant t(L/R)), and the current passing through the terminal. The life cycle curve is shown below.

120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operation(X10 )

500
3

300
200

100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)

2-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.2 Module Profiles

4
1
5
6
7

_2

2 1 6X P 2 9
8DI / 8 DO
R

10
11
3 12

No. Name Description

The inputs are connected to sensors.
1 Removable terminal block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
External module
2 Connect the modules.
connection port
3 Terminal number Terminal number
4 Mounting hole Secure the module on the set
5 Model name Model name of the module
6 Power LED Indicates the power status of the CPU module.
If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
7 Input/Output LED indicator
If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.
External module
8 Connect the modules.
connection port
9 DIN rail slot (35mm） For the DIN rail.
10 I/O module securing clip Secure the modules
R: Relay output
11 Output type
T: Transistor output.
If there is an input signal, the input LED indicator is ON.
12 Input/Output LED
If there is an output signal, the output LED indicator is ON.

2-4
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.3 Dimension

105.82 2_
98

110

106
110
90

90
98
61 .5
L1 L1
78
L L

Unit:mm

08XM2 08XP2 08XN2 16XM2 16XP2 16XN2 24XP2 24XN2 32XP2

DVP
11N 11R/T 11R/T 11N 11R/T 11R/T 00R/T 00R/T 00R/T

L 45 70 145

L1 37 62 137

Refer to   

2-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.4 Module Terminals

 DVP08XM211N
1 2 3 4 5 6
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC

_2
DVP08XM2 (8DI)
NC X4 X5 X6 X7 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6

 DVP08XN211R/T
1 2 3 4 5 6
C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 NC
DVP08XN2-R (8DO)
C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
NC NC Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
DVP08XN2-T (8DO)
UP ZP Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
1 2 3 4 5 6

 DVP08XP211R/T
1 2 3 4 5 6
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC
DVP08XP2-R (4DI/4DO)
C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC
DVP08XP2-T (4DI/4DO)
UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
1 2 3 4 5 6

 DVP16XM211N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC
DVP16XM2 (16DI)
S/S X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 NC NC NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2-6
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

 DVP16XN211R/T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
DVP16XN2-R (16DO)
24V 0V C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2_
UP0 ZP0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
DVP16XN2-T (16DO)
UP1 ZP1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

 DVP16XP211R/T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC
DVP16XP2-R (8DI/8DO)
24V 0V C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC
DVP16XP2-T (8DI/8DO)
UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

 DVP24XP200R/T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
DVP24XP2-R (16DI/8DO)
+24V 24G NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
DVP24XP2-T (16DI/8DO)
+24V 24G UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 DVP24XN200R/T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L N NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C4 Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23 NC NC
DVP24XN2-R (24DO)
+24V 24G NC NC C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 C5 Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27 NC NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

_2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L N NC UP0 ZP0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 UP2 ZP2 Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23 NC
DVP24XN2-T (24DO)
+24V 24G NC NC UP1 ZP1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 UP3 ZP3 Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27 NC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

 DVP32XP200R/T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
DVP32XP2-R (16DI/16DO)
+24V 24G NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
DVP32XP2-T (16DI/16DO)
+24V 24G UP ZP0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 ZP1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

2-8
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.5 Wiring
This section illustrates how to wire digital input/output modules. The wiring diagrams below also illustrate how the power
supplies are connected to S/S, and COM. If you need more information about wiring of digital input/output terminals, refer
to Section 2.6 in this manual.

2.5.1 Wiring DVP08XM211N

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing) 2_
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA

Sinking Sourcing

S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC

IN D VP08 XM211N ( 8 D I)
IN D VP08 XM211N ( 8 D I)

NC X4 X5 X6 X7 NC NC X4 X5 X6 X7 NC

2-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.5.2 Wiring DVP08XN211R

Output form Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，2A/output，5A/COM

_2

C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 NC

O UT DVP08 XN 211 R ( 8 DO)

C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 NC

2.5.3 Wiring DVP08XN211T

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

NC NC Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

O UT D VP0 8XN211T ( 8 D O)

UP ZP Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

Note: You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP and ZP; power consumption is up to 10 mA

2-10
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.5.4 Wiring DVP08XP211R

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，2A/output，5A/COM
2_
Sinking input and relay output Sourcing input and relay output

IN IN
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC

DVP08XP211 R ( 4 DI /4 DO) DVP08XP211 R ( 4 DI /4 DO)

C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 NC

O UT O UT

2.5.5 Wiring DVP08XP211T

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

Sinking input and output Sourcing input and sinking output

IN IN
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 NC

DVP08XP211 T ( 4 DI/4 DO) DVP08XP211 T ( 4 DI/4 DO)

UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3

O UT O UT
Note: You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP and ZP; power consumption is up to 5 mA.

2 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.5.6 Wiring DVP16XM211N

Input from Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA

_2

S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC

Sinking input IN DVP16XM211 N ( 1 6D I)

S/S X1 0 X11 X12 X13 X14 X1 5 X16 X17 NC NC NC

S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC

Sourcing input IN DVP16XM211 N ( 1 6D I)

S/S X1 0 X11 X12 X13 X14 X1 5 X16 X17 NC NC NC

2-12
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.5.7 Wiring DVP16XN211R

Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，2A/output，5A/COM

2_

C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

O UT D VP16XN211R ( 1 6 DO)

24 V 0V C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y1 3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

Note: Connect the terminal to ground.

2.5.8 Wiring DVP16XN211T

Output type Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

UP0 ZP0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

O UT D VP16XN211T ( 1 6D O)

UP1 ZP1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y1 4 Y15 Y16 Y17 NC

Note:

1. You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP0, ZP0 and UP1, ZP1; power consumption is up
to 30 mA.

2. Connect the terminal to ground.

2-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.5.9 Wiring DVP16XP211R

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，2A/output，5A/COM
_2

IN
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC

Sinking input and

D VP1 6XP211R ( 8 DI/8 DO)
relay output

2 4V 0V C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

O UT

IN
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC

Sourcing input and

D VP1 6XP211R ( 8 DI/8 DO)
relay output

2 4V 0V C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

O UT

Note: Connect the terminal to ground.

2-14
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.5.10 Wiring DVP16XP211T

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM
2_

IN
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC

Sinking input and output DVP16XP211T ( 8 DI/8DO)

UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 NC

OUT

IN
S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 NC

Sourcing input and

DVP16XP211T ( 8 DI/8DO)
sinking output

UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 NC

OUT

Note:

1. You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP and ZP; power consumption is up to 15 mA.

2. Connect the terminal to ground.

2-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.5.11 Wiring DVP24XP200R

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，2A/output，5A/COM
_2

IN
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

Sinking input and

DVP24XP2 00R ( 1 6DI/8DO)
relay output
+24V 24G NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

OUT

IN
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

Sourcing input and

DVP24XP2 00R ( 1 6DI/8DO)
relay output
+24V 24G NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

OUT

Note:

1. Connect the terminal to ground.

2. The module is built-in with a +24 V power supply for I/Os to use.

2-16
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.5.12 Wiring DVP24XP200T

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

2_

IN
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

Sinking input and output DVP24XP2 00T ( 1 6DI/8DO)

+24V 24G UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

OUT

IN
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

Sourcing input and DVP24XP2 00T ( 1 6DI/8DO)

sinking output
+24V 24G UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

OUT

Note:

1. You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP and ZP; power consumption is up to 15 mA.

2. Connect the terminal to ground.

2.5.13 Wiring DVP24XN200R

Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，2A/output，5A/COM

L N NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C4 Y20 Y21 Y2 2 Y2 3 NC NC

OUT DVP24XN200R ( 2 4D O)

+2 4V 24G NC NC C2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 C3 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 C5 Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27 NC NC

Note:

1. Connect the terminal to ground.

2. The module is built-in with a +24 V power supply for I/Os to use.

2-17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.5.14 Wiring DVP24XN200T

Output type Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

_2 L N NC UP0 ZP0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 UP2 ZP2 Y20 Y2 1 Y22 Y23 NC

OUT DVP24XN200 T ( 24 DO)

+24V 24G NC NC UP1 ZP1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 UP3 ZP3 Y2 4 Y25 Y26 Y27 NC

Note:

1.You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP0, UP1, UP2, UP3 and ZP0, ZP1, ZP2, ZP3;
power consumption is up to 30 mA.

2.Connect the terminal to ground.

2.5.15 Wiring DVP32XP200R

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，2A/output，5A/COM

IN

Sinking input and L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

relay output DVP32XP2 00R ( 1 6DI/16D O)

+24V 24G NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

OUT

IN

Sourcing input and L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

relay output DVP32XP2 00R ( 1 6DI/16D O)

+24V 24G NC C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 C1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

OUT

Note:

1. Connect the terminal to ground.

2. The module is built-in with a +24 V power supply for I/Os to use.

2-18
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.5.16 Wiring DVP32XP200T

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output type Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

2_

IN
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

Sinking input and output DVP32XP2 00T ( 1 6DI/16DO)

+24V 24G UP ZP0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 ZP1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

OUT

IN
L N NC S/S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X1 3 X14 X15 X16 X17

Sourcing input and DVP32XP2 00T ( 1 6DI/16DO)

sinking output
+24V 24G UP ZP0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 ZP1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17

OUT

Note:

1.You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP, ZP0 and ZP1; power consumption is up to 30
mA.

2. Connect the terminal to ground.

2-19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.6 Wiring Digital Input/Output

2.6.1 Wiring Digital Input

2.6.1.1 Direct Current Power Supply (24 VDC)

When the digital input signal is DC input, there are two DC input types, Sinking and Sourcing. See the definition below.
_2
 Sinking  Sourcing

Sink= The current flows into the terminal X0. Source= The current flows from the terminal X0.

X0 S/S

S/S X0

2.6.1.2 Wiring Input V.S. Relay Types

 Sinking

I/O
X0
Internal c ircui t

Internal cir cuit

S /S
+
2 4V D C

 Sourcing

I/O
X0
I nte r na l c ir cu it

Int ernal c ircui t

S /S
+
2 4 V DC

2-20
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.6.1.3 Wiring Input V.S. Open-collector Input Types

 Sinking (PNP input type)

I/O
+V cc
X0
I nte rn al Cir cui t

2_
Internal Circuit

0V S/S

+
P NP 2 4V D C

 Sourcing (NPN input type)

I/O
+ Vcc X0
Inte r na l Ci r cui t

Internal Circ uit

0V S/ S
+
24 V DC
NP N

2-21
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.6.1.4 Wiring Input V.S. Two-Wire Proximity Switch

Use the two-wire proximity switch whose leakage current IL is less than 1.5 mA when the switch is OFF. If the leakage
current IL is larger than 1.5 mA, connect the divider resistance Rb using the formula below.

6
Rb ≤ （k Ω）
IL − 1.5
_2  Sinking

I/O
IL
X0

Rb Intern al Ci rc uit

+ S /S

24 VD C
Tw o-w ire P roximity Switch

 Sourcing

I/O
IL X0

Rb Internal Ci rcui t

S/S
+
2 4VD C
Two- wire Proximity Sw itch

2-22
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.6.1.5 Wiring Input V.S. Three-Wire Proximity Switch

 Sinking

Thre e-wi re Pro xi mity Switch

I/O
X0

In tern al Ci rc uit

S /S 2_
+
24V DC

 Sourcing
Th r ee - wi r e P r o xim it y S wi tch

I/O
X0

Internal C irc uit

S /S

+
24VDC

2.6.1.6 Wiring Input V.S. Optoelectronic Switch

 Sinking
I/O
X0

Ab o ve
I nt ernal Circuit
15 V DC
S/S
+
24 V DC
Op toe le ctro ni c swi tch

 Sourcing
I/O
X0

Ab ove I nt ernal Circuit

15 V DC
S /S
+
2 4V DC
Op toe le ctro ni c swi tch

2-23
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2.6.2 Wiring Digital Output

2.6.2.1 Output Circuits

There are two types of output units: relay outputs and transistor outputs.
1. Relay output
_2 Relay output wiring varies according to the provided power type and requires different wire sizes for different
applications. The specifications are as shown in the diagram. The terminal screw torque at the PLC is 3.8 kgf-cm
(3.3 lbf-in). Only copper wires rated for 60/75°C can be used.
AC power supply DC power supply

Terminal
Specifications < 2 mm 8-10 mm 24-12 AWG
< 2 m m 8-10 m m 18-16
- AWG

I/O Rel ay I/O R elay

Y0 Y0

Wiring 10~ 250VAC 5~30VD C

Max. 2A Ma x. 2 A

C0 C0

*1. For the relays output terminals within the common point COM (those with the same color in the diagram below), it
is necessary to use the same voltage (10~250VAC or 5~30VDC).

C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 ˙ C1 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

2. Transistor output

UP UP

Y0 + Y0 +
24 + 24
0.5A V DC 0.5A 5-30 VDC
VDC
ZP ZP

2-24
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.6.2.2 Relay Output Circuit

Relay terminals have no polarity. They can be used with alternating current that passes through a load, or with direct
current that passes through a load. The maximum current that can pass through every relay terminal is 2A and refer to
each product specification for the maximum current that can pass through every common terminal. The lifetime of a relay
terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the power factor cosψ), and the current passing through the
terminal. The relation is shown in the life cycle curve below.
2_
120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operation(X10 )

500
3

300
200

100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)

 Relay output circuit

C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 C0 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

① Direct-current power supply

② Emergency stop using an external switch.
Fuse: to protect the output circuit, a fuse having a breaking capacity between 5 A to 10 A is connected to the
③
common terminal.
④ Alternating-current power supply

2-25
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

A relay or a solenoid valve is used as a DC load. A diode is connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage that
occurs when the load is OFF.
Relay output
Relay/ Solenoid valve
Y0
VDC
⑤ D
+ pow er s upply

_2 C0

D: 1 N400 1 diode

An electromagnetic contactor is used as an AC load. A resistor and a capacitor are connected in parallel to absorb
the surge voltage that occurs when the load is OFF.
Relay output
Electromagnetic contactor

Y7

R A C powe r supply
⑥ C
C0

R: 1 00~120
C: 0 .1 ~0.24 uF

A bulb (incandescent lamp) is used as a DC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the surge current
that occurs when the load is ON.
Re lay o utput
Bulk NTC
Y 0.1 /
Y 0.2
V DC
⑦
+ power supply
C0

NTC:10

A bulb (neon lamp) is used as an AC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the surge current that
occurs when the load is ON.
Rela y outp ut NT C
Bulk
Y0 .6/
Y0 .7

⑦ A C po we r supply

C0

NT C:1 0

.
Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y0.3 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y0.4 controls the
⑧ counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC ensure that there are
protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.

2-26
 Ch a pt er 2 D V P- E S er i es D ig i ta l I /O M od u l e

2.6.2.3 Transistor Output Circuit (NPN）

2_

UP
UP H igh Power and
Low power ON/ OFF frequently
+
Y + Y VDC
VD C
ZD D
D
ZP
ZP D: 1N4001Diode or its equivalent
D: 1N400 1Diode or its equi vale nt ZD: 9V Zener, 5W

 Direct-current power supply

 Emergency stop
 Fuse
The output terminals of a transistor module are open-collector output terminals. If Y0.0/Y0.1 is a pulse train output
terminal of a transistor module, the output current passing through its output pull-up resistor must be greater than
0.1 A to ensure that the transistor module operates normally.

1. A diode is connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage: used in low-power situations (refer to Figure 1).
2. A diode and Zener are connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage: used in high-power and power-on/off
frequently situations (refer to Figure 2).
Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y2 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y3 controls the
 counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC ensure that there are
protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.

2-27
 3
Chapter 3 DVP-E Series Analog Input/Output
Module

Table of Content
3.1 General Specifications ................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 DVP04AD-E2 Specifications ...................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2specifications .................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 DVP06XA-E2Specification ........................................................................ 3-5

3.2 Module Profiles .......................................................................................... 3-7

3.3 Dimension .................................................................................................. 3-8

3.4 Module I/O Terminals ................................................................................ 3-8

3.5 Control Registers ....................................................................................... 3-9

3.5.1 DVP04AD-E2Control Registers .................................................................. 3-9
3.5.2 DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2Control Registers ............................................ 3-15
3.5.3 DVP06XA-E2Control Register ................................................................. 3-20

3.6 Wiring ...................................................................................................... 3-31

3.6.1 Wiring DVP04AD-E2 .............................................................................. 3-31
3.6.2 Wiring DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2 .......................................................... 3-32
3.6.3 Wiring DVP06XA-E2 .............................................................................. 3-33

3.7 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 3-35

3-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3.1 General Specifications

3.1.1 DVP04AD-E2 Specifications

 Electrical specifications

Module name DVP04AD-E2

Number of inputs Four
Analog-to-digital
Voltage input/Current input
conversion

_3 Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）

（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block(distance to the terminal is 5mm)
Conversion time 400μs/channel
Weight 204g

Things to note when connecting the module to a PLC CPU:

1. Up to 8 modules can be connected to a PLC CPU.

2. The connected module is numbered automatically from 0 (nearest to the PLC CPU) to 7 (furthest away from the PLC
CPU).

3. The connected modules do NOT take up any digital I/O points.

 Functional specifications

Analog/digital module Voltage input Current input

Analog input channel 4channels

Rated input range ±10V ±5V ±20mA 0~20mA 4~20mA
Digital conversion
±32,000 ±32,000 ±32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000
range
-0.24~20.24
Hardware input limit*1 ±10.12V ±5.06V ±20.24mA 3.81~20.19mA
mA
Digital conversion
±32,384 ±32,384 ±32,384 -384 ~+32,384 -384 ~+32,384
limit*2
Hardware resolution 14-bit 14-bit 14-bit 13-bit 13-bit

Input impedance ≧1MΩ 250Ω

Absolute input range*3 ±15V ±32mA

Digital data format 16 -bit two’s complement number

Average function Yes, CR#8 ~ CR#11, setting range: K1 ~ K100

Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limits or channel disconnection
25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall Accuracy
0° C to 55° C/32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±1% of full scale
Response time 400μs/channel

3-2
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

Analog/digital module Voltage input Current input

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground:500VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground:500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit:500VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500VAC

*1. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input signal is
below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.
3_
*2. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit, and a conversion limit
error appears. For example, in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal is 10.15 V, exceeding
the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper limit value (32387) as
the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3. If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

3-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3.1.2 DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2 Specifications

 Electrical specifications

Module name DVP02DA-E2 DVP04DA-E2

Number of outputs Two Four
Analog-to-digital
Voltage output/Current output
conversion
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block (distance to the terminal is 5mm)
Conversion time 400μs /channel
Short circuit protection*1 Yes
_3 Weight 194g 207g
*1: The module is with short circuit protection, but if the duration of a short circuit is too long, it can cause circuit damage.
Current output can be open circuit.

Things to note when connecting the module to a PLC CPU:

1. Up to 8 modules can be connected to a PLC CPU.

2. The connected module is numbered automatically from 0 (nearest to the PLC CPU) to 7 (furthest away from the PLC
CPU).

3. The connected modules do NOT take up any digital I/O points.

 Functional specifications

Digital/analog module Voltage output Current output

Rated output range -10~10V 0~20mA 4~20mA
Digital conversion
-32,000~+32,000 0~+32,000 0~+32,000
range
Digital conversion limit -32,768~+32,767 0~+32,767 -6,400~+32,767
Hardware resolution 14-bit 14-bit 14-bit
Maximum output
5mA －
current
Load impedance 1KΩ~2MΩ 0~500Ω
Output impedance 0.5Ω or lower
25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall accuracy
0° C to 55° C / 32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±1% of full scale.
Response time 400μs/channel
Digital data format 16-bit two’s complement number
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground:500VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground:500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit:500VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500VAC

3-4
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

3.1.3 DVP06XA-E2 Specification

 Electrical specifications

Module name DVP06XA-E2

Number of
Inputs: four; Outputs: two
inputs/outputs
Analog-to-digital
Voltage input/Current input; Voltage output/Current output
conversion
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block (distance to the terminal is 5mm)
Weight 213g
3_
Things to note when connecting the module to a PLC CPU:

1. Up to 8 modules can be connected to a PLC CPU.

2. The connected module is numbered automatically from 0 (nearest to the PLC CPU) to 7 (furthest away from the PLC
CPU).

3. The connected modules do NOT take up any digital I/O points.

 A/D Functional specifications

Voltage input Current input

Analog input channel 4 channels
Rated input range ±10V ±5V ±20mA 0~20mA 4~20mA
Digital conversion
±32,000 ±32,000 ±32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000
range
Hardware input limit*1 ±10.12V ±5.06V ±20.24mA -0.24~20.24mA 3.81~20.19mA
Digital conversion
±32,384 ±32,384 ±32,384 -384 ~+32,384 -384 ~+32,384
limit*2
Hardware resolution 14-bit-bit 14-bit-bit 14-bit-bit 13-bit-bit 13-bit-bit
Input impedance ≧1MΩ 250Ω
Absolute input range*3 ±15V ±32mA
Digital data format 16-bit two’s complement numbe
Conversion time 400 μs /channel
Average function Yes, CR#8 ~ CR#11, setting range: K1 ~ K100
Self-diagnosis
Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limts or channel disconnection
function
25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall Accuracy
0° C to 55° C/-32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±1% of full scale.

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VAC.
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VAC.
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC.
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VAC.

3-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input signal is
below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit, and a conversion limit
error appears. For example, in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal is 10.15 V, exceeding
the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the upper limit value (32387) as
the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

 D/A Functional specifications

Voltage output Current output

_3
Analog output channel 2 channels
Rated output range -10~10V 0~20mA 4~20mA
Digital conversion range -32,000~+32,000 0~+32,000 0~+32,000
Digital conversion limit -32,768~+32,767 0~+32,767 -6,400~+32,767
Hardware resolution 14-bit 14-bit 14-bit
Maximum output current 5mA －

Load impedance 1KΩ~2MΩ 0~500Ω

Output impedance 5Ω or lower

Yes. The module is with short circuit protection, but if the duration of a short circuit is too
Short circuit Protection
long, it can cause circuit damage. Current output can be open circuit.

3-6
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

3.2 Module Profiles

1
4

2
0 4AD -E 2
4AI
7 3_

8
9
3

Number Name Description

The inputs are connected to sensors.
1 Removable terminal block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

2 External module connection port Connect the modules.

3 Terminal number Terminal number

4 Model name Model name of the module

Indicates the status of the power supply

POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Indicates Error status of the module
ON: a serious error occurs in the module.
5 ERROR LED indicator
OFF: the module is normal.
Blinking: a minor error occurs in the module.

Indicates the analog to digital conversion status

Analog to digital conversion
Blinking: conversion is taking place
indicator
OFF: stop conversion

6 External module connection port Connects the modules

7 DIN rail slot（35mm） For the DIN rail

8 I/O module securing clip Secures the modules
9 Mounting hole Secures the module on the set

3-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3.3 Dimension

1 10
98
106
90
_3

62 6 1.5
70 78

Unit: mm

3.4 Module I/O Terminals

 DVP04AD-E2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
V1+ I1+ VI1- FE V2+ I2+ VI2- FE V3+ I3+ VI3- FE
DVP04AD-E2 (4AI)
24V 0V FE V4+ I4+ VI4- FE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 DVP02DA-E2

DVP02DA-E2 (2AO)
24V 0V FE FE FE VO1 IO1 AG VO2 IO2 AG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

 DVP04DA-E2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VO1 IO1 AG FE VO2 IO2 AG FE VO3 IO3 AG FE
DVP04DA-E2 (4AO)
24V 0V FE VO4 IO4 AG FE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 DVP06XA-E2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
V1+ I1+ VI1- V2+ I2+ VI2- V3+ I3+ VI3- V4+ I4+ VI4-
DVP06XA-E2 (4AI/2AO)
24V 0V FE FE FE VO1 IO1 AG VO2 IO2 AG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3-8
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

3.5 Control Registers

3.5.1 DVP04AD-E2Control Registers
CR# Attrib. Register name Description
Set up by the system: DVP04AD-E2 model code = H’0080
0 O R Model name
For detailed explanation, please see the list below.
1 O R Firmware version Display the current firmware version in hex. format

2 O R/W CH1 input mode setting Input mode: Default = H’0000.

Mode0（H’0000）
：Voltage input（±10V）
Mode1（H’0001）
：Voltage input（±5V）
3 O R/W CH2 input mode setting
3_
Mode2（H’0002）
：Voltage input（0~+10V）
Mode3（H’0003）
：Voltage input（0~+5V）
Mode4（H’0004）
：Current input（±20mA）
4 O R/W CH3 input mode setting
Mode5（H’0005）
：Current input（0~+20mA）
Mode6（H’0006）
：Current input（4~+20mA）
5 O R/W CH4 input mode setting Mode-1（H’FFFF）
：Not in use

8 O R/W CH1 sampling range

CH2 sampling range Set sampling range in CH1~CH4
9 O R/W
Range = K1~K100
10 O R/W CH3 sampling range
Default = K10
11 O R/W CH4 sampling range
12 X R CH1 average input value
13 X R CH2 average input value
Average value of input signals at CH1 ~ CH4
14 X R CH3 average input value
15 X R CH4 average input value
20 X R CH1 present input value
21 X R CH2 present input value
Present value of input signals at CH1 ~ CH4
22 X R CH3 present input value
23 X R CH4 present input value
28 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH1
29 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH2
Set the adjusted Offset value of CH1 ~ CH4. Default = K0
30 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH3
31 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH4
34 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH1
35 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH2 Set the adjusted Gain value in CH1 ~ CH4. Default =
36 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH3 K16,000
37 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH4

Adjusted Offset Value, Adjusted Gain Value:

Note1: When using Mode 6 for input, the channel do NOT provide setups for adjusted Offset or Gain value.
Note2: When input mode changes, the adjusted Offset or Gain value automatically returns to defaults.

3-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Attrib. Register name Description

Function: Set value changing Prohibit set value changing in CH1 ~ CH4. Default=
40 O R/W prohibited H’0000

41 X R/W Function: Save all the set values Save all the set values, Default =H’0000

Register for storing all error status. Refer to table of error

43 X R Error status
status for more information.

Function: Enable/Disable limit Upper and lower bound detection, b0~b3 corresponds to
100 O R/W
detection Ch1~Ch4 (0: Disable/1: Enable). Default= H’0000

_3 Display the upper and lower bound status

(0: Not exceed /1: Exceeds upper or lower bound value),
101 X R/W Upper and lower bound status b0~b3 corresponds to Ch1~Ch4 for lower bound detection
result; b8~b11 corresponds to CH1~CH4 for upper bound
detection result

102 O R/W Set value of CH1 upper bound

103 O R/W Set value of CH2 upper bound
Set value of CH1~CH4 upper bound. Default = K32000.
104 O R/W Set value of CH3 upper bound
105 O R/W Set value of CH4 upper bound
108 O R/W Set value of CH1 lower bound
109 O R/W Set value of CH2 lower bound
Set value of CH1~CH4 lower bound. Default = K-32000.
110 O R/W Set value of CH3 lower bound
111 O R/W Set value of CH4 lower bound
Symbols:
O: When CR#41 is set to H’5678, the set value of CR will be saved.
X: Set value will not be saved.
R: You can use FROM instruction to read data.
W: You can use TO instruction to write data.

※ CR#0 for mudule reset

You can use CR#0 to reset all the settings by simply writing H’4352 in CR#0 and wait for one second before turning
the power OFF and then ON again, all the modules connected will be initialized. It is suggested to connect to only
one module for module reset. And this is only available for firmware V1.10 or later.

3-10
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

※ CR#43Error status value. See the table below:

Description

bit0 K1（H’1） Power supply error bit6 K64（H’40） CH4 Conversion error

bit1 K2（H’2） Reserved bit9 K512（H’0200） Mode setting error

bit2 K4（H’4） Upper/lower bound error bit10 K1024（H’0400） Sampling range error

Upper/lower bound setting

bit3 K8（H’8） CH1 Conversion error bit11 K2048（H’0800）
error
Set balue changing
bit4 K16（H’10） CH2 Conversion error bit12 K4096（H’1000）
prohibited
3_
Communication breakdown
bit5 K32（H’20） CH3 Conversion error bit13 K8192（H’2000）
on next module

Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit (b0 ~ b13) and there may be more than 2 errors
occurring at the same time. 0 = normal; 1 = error.

※ Adjust A/D Conversion Curve

Users can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the Offset value (CR#28 ~
CR#31) and Gain value (CR#34 ~ CR#37).

 Equation for voltage input Mode 0 / Mode 2:

 X (V ) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 10(V ) 
Y=Digital output, X=Voltage input

Resolution: 0.3125mV = 20V/64,000 = 10V/32,000

 Equation for voltage input Mode 1 / Mode 3:

 X (V ) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 5(V ) 
Y=Digital output, X=Voltage input

Resolution: 0.15625mV = 10V/64,000 = 5V/32,000

 Equation for current input Mode 4/ Mode 5:

 X ( mA) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 20( mA) 
Y=Digital output, X=Current input

Resolution: 0.625μA = 40mA/64,000 = 20mA/32,000

3 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Equation for current input Mode 6:

 X ( mA) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − 6400  (19200 − 6400 )
 20( mA) 
Y=Digital output, X=Current input

Resolution: 0.5μA = 16mA/32,000

Gain: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 16,000.

Offset: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 0.
_3

Mode 0 of CR#2~CR#5 -10V~+10V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Mode 1 of CR#2~CR#5 -5V~+5V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -32,384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 0 Mode 1

+32384
10V +32000

Gain
Voltage Digital
output 5V output +16000

-32000 0 +32767 -5V 0 2.5V

-32768 +16000 +32000 5V

Offset Offset Gain

-5V -16000

Digital input Voltage input

-32000
-10V -32384

3-12
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

Mode 2 of CR#2~CR#5 0V~+10V，Gain=16,000（= ），Offset=0

Mode 3 of CR#2~CR#5 0V~+5V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 2 Mode 3

+32384 +32384
+32000 +32000
3_
Digital Digital
output +16000 output +16000

Gain Gain
0 0

-384 5V 10V -384 2.5V 5V

Offset Offset
Voltage input Voltage input

Mode 4 of CR#2~CR#5 -20mA~+20mA，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -32,384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 4
+32384
+32000

Digital
output +16000

-20mA 0 10mA
20mA
Offset Gain

-16000

Current input

-32000
-32384

3-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Mode 5 of CR#2~CR#5 0mA~+20mA，default: Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

+4mA~+20mA，Gain=19,200（= ）
，
Mode 6 of CR#2~CR#5
Offset=6,400（= ）

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 5 Mode 6

_3 +32384
+32000 +32384
+32000

Digital
output Digital
+16000 output +16000
Gain
Gain
0
0
-384 10mA 20mA -384 4mA 12mA 20mA
Offset
Current input Offset
Current input

3-14
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

3.5.2 DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2Control Registers

CR# Attrib. Register name Description

Set up by the system, model code:
0 O R Model name DVP02DA-E2=H’0041;
DVP04DA-E2=H’0081

1 O R Firmware version Display the current firmware version in hex.

2 O R/W CH1output mode setting

Output mode: Default = H’0000.
3 O R/W CH2output mode setting Mode 0 (H’0000): Voltage output (±10V).
Mode 1 (H’0001): Current output (0~+20mA).
4 O R/W CH3output mode setting Mode 2 (H’0002): Current output (+4~+20mA).
3_
Mode -1 (H’FFFF): All channels are unavailable
5 O R/W CH4output mode setting

16 X R/W CH1output signal value

Voltage output range: K-32,000~K32,000
17 X R/W CH2output signal value Current output range: K0~K32,000
18 X R/W CH3output signal value Default: K0
CR#18~CR#19 of DVP02DA-E2 are reserved.
19 X R/W CH4output signal value

28 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH1

29 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH2

Set the adjusted Offset value of CH1 ~ CH4. Default = K0
30 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH3

31 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH4

34 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH1

35 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH2

Set the adjusted Gain value of CH1 ~ CH4. Default = K16,000
36 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH3

37 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH4

Adjusted Offset Value, Adjusted Gain Value:

*1. When using Mode 2, the channel do NOT provide setups for adjusted Offset or Gain value.
*2. When output mode changes, the adjusted Offset or Gain value automatically returns to defaults.

Function: Set value changing

40 O R/W Prohibit set value changing in CH1 ~ CH4. Default= H’0000
prohibited
Function: Save all the set
41 X R/W Save all the set values. Default = H’0000。
values

Register for storing all error status. Refer to table of error

43 X R Error status
status for more information.

Function: Enable/Disable limit Upper and lower bound detection, b0~b3 corresponds to
100 O R/W
detection CH1~CH4 (0: Disable/ 1: Enable). Default= H’0000.

3-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Attrib. Register name Description

Display the upper and lower bound status.

(0: Not exceed /1: Exceeds upper or lower bound value),
b0~b3 corresponds to Ch1~Ch4 for lower bound detection
101 X R/W Upper and lower bound status
result;
b8~b11 corresponds to CH1~CH4 for upper bound detection
result.
102 O R/W Set value of CH1 upper bound
103 O R/W Set value of CH2 upper bound
Set value of CH1~CH4 upper bound. Default = K32000。
104 O R/W Set value of CH3 upper bound
105 O R/W Set value of CH4 upper bound
_3
108 O R/W Set value of CH1 lower bound
109 O R/W Set value of CH2 lower bound
Set value of CH1~CH4 lower bound. Default = K-32000。
110 O R/W Set value of CH3 lower bound
111 O R/W Set value of CH4 lower bound
114 O R/W Output update time of CH1
115 O R/W Output update time of CH2 Set value of CH1~CH4 output update time. Setting range:
116 O R/W Output update time of CH3 K0~K100. Default = H’0000。

117 O R/W Output update time of CH4

Set the output mode of CH1~CH4 when the power is at LV

118 O R/W LV output mode setting (low voltage) condition.
Default= H’0000

Symbols:
O: When CR#41 is set to H’5678, the set value of CR will be saved.
X: Set value will not be saved.
R: You can use FROM instruction to read data.
W: You can use TO instruction to write data.

※ CR#0 for module reset

You can use CR#0 to reset all the settings by simply writing H’4352 in CR#0 and wait for one second before turning
the power OFF and then ON again, all the modules connected will be initialized. It is suggested to connect to only
one module for module reset. And this is only available for firmware V1.12 or later.

※ CR#43Error status value. See the table below:

Description
Upper / lower bound setting
bit0 K1 (H’1) Power supply error bit11 K2048 (H’0800)
error
Set value changing
bit1 K2 (H’2) Reserved bit12 K4096 (H’1000)
prohibited
Communication breakdown
bit2 K4 (H’4) Upper/lower bound error bit13 K8192 (H’2000)
on next module
bit9 K512 (H’0200) Mode setting error －

Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit (b0 ~ b13) and there may be more than 2 errors
occurring at the same time. 0 = normal; 1 = error

3-16
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

※ Adjust D/A Conversion Curve

You can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the Offset value (CR#28 ~ CR#31)
and Gain value (CR#34 ~ CR#37).

Gain: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 16,000.

Offset: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 0.

 Equation for voltage output Mode0:

 X × (Gain − Offset )   10(V ) 

Y (V ) =  + Offset  ×  
 16000   32000 
3_
Y=Voltage output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.3125mV = 20V/64,000

 Equation for current output Mode1:

 X × (Gain − Offset )   20(mA) 

Y (mA) =  + Offset  ×  
 16000   32000 
Y=Current output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.625μA = 20mA/32,000

 Equation for current output Mode2:

 X × (19200 − 6400 )   20(mA) 

Y (mA) =  + 6400 ×  
 16000   32000 
Y=Current output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.5μA = 16mA/32,000

3-17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Mode 0 of CR#2~CR#5 -10V~+10V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion -32,000~+32,000

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -32,768~+32,767

Mode 0

10V

_3 Voltage
Gain
output 5V

-32000 0 +32767
-32768 +16000 +32000
Offset

-5V

Digital input

-10V

Mode 1 of CR#2~CR#5 0mA~+20mA，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 1

20mA

Gain
Current
output 10mA

0 +32767
+16000 +32000
Offset

Digital input

3-18
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

+4mA~+20mA，Gain=19,200（= ）
，
Mode 2 of CR#2~CR#5
Offset=6,400（= ）

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -6400 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 2

20mA
Gain
3_
Current 12mA
output

4mA
+32767
-6400 0 +16000 +32000
Offset

Digital input

3-19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3.5.3 DVP06XA-E2Control Register

CR# Attrib. Register name Description

0 O R Model name Set up by the system: DVP06XA-E2 model code = H’00C4

1 O R Firmware version Display the current firmware version in hex

Input mode: Default = H’0000

2 O R/W CH1 Input mode setting
Mode 0 (H’0000）:Voltage input（±10V）
Mode 1 (H’0001）:Voltage input（±5V）
3 O R/W CH2 Input mode setting
_3 Mode 2 (H’0002）:Voltage input（0~+10V）
Mode 3 (H’0003）:Voltage input（0~+5V）
Mode 4 (H’0004）:Current input（±20mA）
4 O R/W CH3 Input mode setting
Mode 5 (H’0005）:Current input（0~+20mA）
Mode 6 (H’0006）:Current input（4~+20mA）
5 O R/W CH4 Input mode setting Mode -1 (H’FFFF）: Channel 1 unavailable

Output mode: Default = H’0000Take CH5 for example:

6 O R/W CH5 output mode setting Mode 0（H’0000）
：Voltage output（±10V）
Mode 1（H’0001）
：Current output（0~+20mA）
Mode 2（H’0002）
：Current output（4~+20mA）
7 O R/W CH6 output mode setting
Mode -1（H’FFFF）
：Channel 5 unavailable

8 O R/W CH1 average times

9 O R/W CH2 average times Average times setting of CH1~CH4:

Range = K1~K100
10 O R/W CH3 average times Default = K10
11 O R/W CH4 average times

12 X R CH1 average input value

13 X R CH2 average input value

Average value of input signals at CH1~CH4
14 X R CH3 average input value

15 X R CH4 average input value

16 X R/W CH5 output signal value Voltage output range: K-32,000~K32,000

Current output range: K0~K32,000.
17 X R/W CH6 output signal value Default: K0

20 X R CH1 present input value

21 X R CH2 present input value
Present value of input signals at CH1~CH4
22 X R CH3 present input value
23 X R CH4 present input value
28 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH1
Set the adjusted Offset value of CH1 ~ CH3
29 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH2
Default = K0.
30 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH3

3-20
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

CR# Attrib. Register name Description

31 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH4

Set the adjusted Offset value of CH4 ~ CH6
32 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH5
Default = K0.
33 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH6
34 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH1
35 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH2
36 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH3 Set the adjusted Gain value in CH1 ~ CH6
37 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH4 Default = K16,000

38 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH5

39 O R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH6
3_
Adjusted Offset Value, Adjusted Gain Value:
Note 1: When using Mode 6 for input or Mode 2 for output, the channel do NOT provide setups for adjusted Offset
and Gain value.
Note 2: When mode changes, the adjusted Offset and Gain value returns to defaults.

40 O R/W Set value changing prohibited Prohibit set value changing in CH1 ~ CH4. Default= H’0000.

41 X R/W Save all the set values Save all the set values. Default =H’0000

Register for storing all error status. Refer to table of error

43 X R Error status
status for more information.

Upper and lower bound detection, b0~b5 corresponds to

100 O R/W Enable/Disable limit detection
CH1~CH6 (0: Disable/ 1: Enable). Default= H’0000.

Display the upper and lower bound status. (0: Not exceed /1:
Exceeds upper or lower bound value), b0~b5 corresponds to
101 X R/W Upper and lower bound status
Ch1~Ch6 for lower bound detection result; b8~b13
corresponds to CH1~CH6 for upper bound detection result.

102 O R/W Set value of CH1 upper bound

103 O R/W Set value of CH2 upper bound
104 O R/W Set value of CH3 upper bound
Set value of CH1~CH6 upper bound. Default = K32000.
105 O R/W Set value of CH4 upper bound
106 O R/W Set value of CH5 upper bound
107 O R/W Set value of CH6 upper bound
108 O R/W Set value of CH1 lower bound
109 O R/W Set value of CH2 lower bound
110 O R/W Set value of CH3 lower bound
Set value of CH1~CH6 lower bound. Default = K-32000.
111 O R/W Set value of CH4 lower bound
112 O R/W Set value of CH5 lower bound
113 O R/W Set value of CH1 lower bound
114 O R/W Output update time of CH5
Set output update time of CH5 ~ CH6. Default = H’0000.
115 O R/W Output update time of CH6
Set the output mode of CH5~CH6 when the power is at LV
118 O R/W LV output mode setting of Ch5~Ch6
(low voltage) condition. Default= H’0000

3-21
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Attrib. Register name Description

Symbols:
O: When CR#41 is set to H’5678, the set value of CR will be saved
X: Set value will not be saved.
R: You can use FROM instruction to read data.
W: You can use TO instruction to write data.
※ CR#0 for module reset

You can use CR#0 to reset all the settings by simply writing H’4352 in CR#0 and wait for one second before turning
the power OFF and then ON again, all the modules connected will be initialized. It is suggested to connect to only
one module for module reset. And this is only available for firmware V1.14 or later.

_3 ※ CR#43Error status value. See the table below:

Description

bit0 K1（H’1） Power supply error bit6 K64（H’40） CH4Conversion error

bit1 K2（H’2） Reserved bit9 K512（H’0200） Mode setting error

bit2 K4（H’4） Upper/lower bound error bit10 K1024（H’0400） Sampling range error

Upper/lower bound setting

bit3 K8（H’8） CH1Conversion error bit11 K2048（H’0800）
error

bit4 K16（H’10） CH2Conversion error bit12 K4096（H’1000） Set value changing prohibited

Communication breakdown on
bit5 K32（H’20） CH3Conversion error bit13 K8192（H’2000）
next module
Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit (b0 ~ b13) and there may be more than 2 errors
occurring at the same time. 0 = normal; 1 = error

※ Adjust A/D Conversion Curve

You can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the Offset value (CR#28 ~ CR#31)
and Gain value (CR#34 ~ CR#37).

Offset: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 0.

Gain: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 16,000.

3-22
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

 Equation for voltage input Mode0 / Mode2:

 X (V ) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 10(V ) 
Y=Digital output, X=Voltage input

Resolution: 0.3125mV = 20V/64,000 = 10V/32,000

 Equation for voltage input Mode1 / Mode3:

3_

 X (V ) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 5(V ) 
Y=Digital output, X=Voltage input

Resolution: 0.15625mV = 10V/64,000 = 5V/32,000

 Equation for current input Mode4 / Mode5:

 X ( mA) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 20( mA) 
Y=Digital output, X=Current input

Resolution: 0.625μA = 40mA/64,000 = 20mA/32,000

 Equation for current input Mode6:

 X ( mA) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − 6400  (19200 − 6400)
 20( mA) 
Y=Digital output, X=Current input

Resolution: 0.5μA = 16mA/32,000

3-23
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Mode 0 of CR#2~CR#5 -10V~+10V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Mode 1 of CR#2~CR#5 -5V~+5V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -32,384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 0 Mode 1

+32384
10V
_3 +32000

Gain
Voltage Digital
output 5V output +16000

-32000 0 +327 -5V 0 2.5V

-32768 +16000 +32000 5V
Offset Offset Gain

-5V -16000

Digital input Voltage input

-10V -32000
-32384

3-24
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

Mode 2 of CR#2~CR#5 0V~+10V，Gain=16,000（= ），Offset=0

Mode 3 of CR#2~CR#5 0V~+5V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 2 Mode 3

+32384
+32000 +32384 3_
+32000
Digital
output +16000 Digital
output +16000
Gain
0 Gain
0
-384 5V 10V
Offset -384 2.5V 5V
Voltage input Offset
Voltage input

3-25
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Mode 4 of CR#2~CR#5 -20mA~+20mA，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -32,384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 4

+32384
+32000
_3
Digital
output +16000

-20mA 0 10mA
20mA
Offset Gain

-16000

Current input

-32000
-32384

3-26
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

Mode 5 of CR#2~CR#5 0mA~+20mA，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

+4mA~+20mA，Gain=19,200（= ）
，
Mode 6 of CR#2~CR#5
Offset=6,400（= ）

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -384 LSB~+32,384 LSB

Mode 5 Mode 6

3_
+32384 +32384
+32000 +32000

Digital Digital
output +16000 output +16000

Gain Gain
0 0

-384 10mA 20mA -384 4mA 12mA 20mA

Offset Offset
Current input Current input

3-27
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

※ Adjust D/A Conversion Curve

You can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the Offset value (CR#32 ~ CR#33)
and Gain value (CR#38 ~ CR#39).

Offset: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 0.

Gain: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 16,000.

 Equation for voltage output Mode0:

 X × (Gain − Offset )   10(V ) 

_3 Y (V ) =  + Offset  ×  
 16000   32000 
Y=Voltage output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.3125mV = 20V/64,000

 Equation for current output Mode1:

 X × (Gain − Offset )   20(mA) 

Y (mA) =  + Offset  ×  
 16000   32000 
Y=Current output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.625μA = 20mA/32,000

 Equation for current output Mode2:

 X × (19200 − 6400 )   20(mA) 

Y (mA) =  + 6400 ×  
 16000   32000 
Y=Current output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.5μA = 16mA/32,000

3-28
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

Mode 0 of CR#6~CR#7 -10V~+10V，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -32,768 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 0

10V

Gain
Voltage
output 5V
3_
-32000 0 +32767
-32768 +16000 +32000
Offset

-5V

Digital input

-10V

Mode 1 of CR#6~CR#7 0mA~+20mA，Gain=16,000（= ）

，Offset=0

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 1

20mA

Gain
Current
output 10mA

0 +32767
+16000 +32000
Offset

Digital input

3-29
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

+4mA~+20mA，Gain=19,200（= ）
，
Mode 2 of CR#6~CR#7
Offset=6,400（= ）

Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital conversion -6400 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 2

20mA
Gain

_3 Current
output
12mA

4mA
+32767
-6400 0 +16000 +32000
Offset

Digital input

3-30
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

3.6 Wiring
3.6.1 Wiring DVP04AD-E2

AG
*6
4-w ir e: v ol tage inp ut
CHX
-10 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed cabl e *1 1M
+ V I+
+ 2 4V 250 CH1
- *3 I1 +
0V 1M
VI 1-
*4
FE
*6 AG
4-w ir e: c urr ent inp ut CHX
-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Shi eld ed c abl e *1 1M

3_
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V V I2 -

*4
FE
2-wi re: cu rrent i np ut
4 mA ~ +2 0m A
*6 AG
+ 2 4V CHX
Shi eld ed c abl e *1
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2 25 0 CH3
I3 +
1M
0V V I3 -
*4
FE
3-wi re: vo ltag e inpu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed c abl e *1 *6 AG

+ 2 4V CH X
+ 1M
V4 +
25 0 CH4
0V - I 4+
1M
*4 V I4 -

FE

3-wi re: cur rent i npu t

-2 0m A~ + 20 m A *6 AG
Shi eld ed c abl e *1 CHX
+ 24 V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
25 0 CH1
I1 +
0V -
1M
V I1 -
*4
FE
*5

+ 15 V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C on ve rt e r
-15 V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.

*3. If noise in the input voltage results in noise interference in the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor with a
capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. Connect FE of the shielded cable to ground.*5. Connect the terminal to ground.

*6. Every channel can work with the wiring shown above.

3-31
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3.6.2 Wiring DVP02DA-E2/DVP04DA-E2

Vol ta ge outp ut
-10V ~+10V *4
CHX
VO1 CH1
*2
I O1
AC moto r drive, Sh ield ed ca ble *1 AG
AG
record er, FE
prop orti onin g val ve

*4
_3
C urren t ou tput
CHX
0mA~20mA
V O4 CH4
IO4
AG
AG
AC motor drive , Shiel ded cabl e*1 FE
reco rd er,
propo rti oning val ve *3
FE

+15V
0V DC/DC
24VDC AG
24V Conv er ter
-15V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If noise in the input voltage results in noise interference in the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor with a
capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.

*3. Connect the terminal to ground.

*4. Every channel can work with the wiring shown above.

3-32
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

3.6.3 Wiring DVP06XA-E2

AG
4-wire: v ol tage inp ut *8
-1 0V~+ 10 V Shiel ded c ab le *1 CH X-I
1M
+ V1 +
+2 4V C H1
*3 I1+ 2 50
-
0V 1M
VI1 -
*6
FE

*8 AG
4-wire: c urr en t inp ut
CH X-I
-2 0mA~ +2 0mA Shiel ded c ab le *1 1M
V 2+
*2 250
3_
+ CH 2
+ 24V I 2+
- 1M
0V VI 2-

*6
FE
2-wi re: cu rrent i npu t
4m A~+ 20m A
*8 AG
+2 4V Shiel ded c ab le *1 C HX-I
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2
250 CH 3
I 3+
VI 3- 1M
0V
*6
FE
3-wi re: vo ltag e inpu t
-1 0V~ +10 V
Shiel ded c ab le *1 *8 AG
+ 24V CH X-I
+ 1M
V4+
25 0 C H4
0V - I 4+
1M
VI4-
*6
FE
3-wi re: cur rent i npu t
*8 AG
-20 mA~+ 20 mA Shiel ded c ab le *1 CH X-I
+ 24V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
25 0 C H1
I1 +
0V - 1M
VI1-
*6
FE
AC motor dr ive,
rec order, Vo lt ag e outp ut
-10V ~+ 10V *8
proportioning v alv e CH X-O
VO1 C H5
*5
IO1
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 *6 AG
AG
FE
AC motor dr ive, *8
rec order, Cur rent ou tpu t CHX -O
proportioning v alv e 0mA~ 20 mA
VO2 CH 6
IO2
AG
AG
*6
Sh iel ded cab le *4
FE
*7
+ 15V
0V DC /D C
2 4VD C AG
24V C on ve rte r
-15 V

3-33
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input/output signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.

*3. If noise in the input voltage results in noise interference with the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor with a
capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog output signal cable from other power cables.

*5. If noise in the output voltage results in noise interference in the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor with a
capacitance between 0.1 μF–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.

*6. Connect FE of the shielded cable to ground.

*7. Connect the terminal to ground.

_3
*8. CHX-I: Every channel can work with the input wiring shown above. CHX-O: Every channel can work with the output
wiring shown above.

3-34
 Ch a pt er 3 D V P- E S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

3.7 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in AD, DA, XA modules, an error indicator will start blinking. Once you see an error indicator starts
blinking, you can use the FROM instruction to read the error codes stored in CR#43. The bit 0 to bit 13 indicates the error
codes. It is possible to have two errors at the same time. 0 indicates normal and 1 indicates error. Refer to the following
table for more the causes and the solutions for troubleshooting.

Bit No. RUN LED ERROR LED Description Solution

bit0 OFF ON The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply

bit1 Hardware error Contact the factory 3_

Conversion value exceeds the set
bit2 Check the upper and lower value
upper/lower value
Conversion value at Channel 1 is Check the Conversion value at
bit3
abnormal Channel 1
Conversion value at Channel 2 is Check the Conversion value at
bit4
abnormal Channel 2
Conversion value at Channel 3 is Check the Conversion value at
bit5
abnormal Channel 3
Conversion value at Channel 4 is Check the Conversion value at
bit6 Blinking every Blinking every
abnormal Channel 4
0.2 seconds 0.2 seconds
bit9 Mode setting error Check the mode setting

bit10 Average time setting error Check the average time setting

Check the upper/lower value

bit11 Upper/lower value setting error
setting

Check the value in CR#40 (set

bit12 Set value cannot be changed.
value changing prohibited)

bit13 The later module is disconnected. Check the wiring of the modules.

3-35
 4
Chapter 4 DVP-E Series Temperature
Measurement Module

Table of Contents
4.1 General Specifications ................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.1 DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2 Specifications .................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 DVP04TC-E2 Specifications ...................................................................... 4-4

4.2 Module Profiles .......................................................................................... 4-6

4.3 Module Dimensions .................................................................................... 4-7

4.4 Module Terminals ....................................................................................... 4-7

4.5 Control Registers ....................................................................................... 4-8

4.5.1 DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2Control Registers ................................................ 4-8
4.5.2 DVP04TC-E2 Control Registers ............................................................... 4-13

4.6 Wiring ...................................................................................................... 4-18

4.6.1 Wiring DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2 ............................................................ 4-18
4.6.2 Wiring DVP04TC-E2 .............................................................................. 4-19

4.7 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 4-20

4-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4.1 General Specifications

4.1.1 DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Model name DVP04PT-E2 DVP06PT-E2

Number of inputs Four Six
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block (distance to the terminal is 5 mm)
Conversion time 200 ms /channel
Weight 207g 176g

Things to note when connecting the module to a PLC CP:

1. Up to 8 modules can be connected to a PLC CPU.

2. The connected module is numbered automatically from 0 (nearest to the PLC CPU) to 7 (furthest away

_4 from the PLC CPU).

3. The connected modules do NOT take up any digital I/O points.

 Functional specifications

Digital data format 16-bit two’s complement number

25°C/77°F: The error is ±0.3% of the input within the range.
Overall accuracy 0 to +55°C / 32 to 131°F: The error is ±0.6% of the input within the
range.
2-Wire/3-Wire:
Pt100：DIN 43760-1980 JIS C1604-1989，100Ω 3850 PPM/°C
04PT Pt1000：DIN EN60751，1 kΩ 3850 PPM/°C
Ni100/Ni1000：DIN 43760
0~300Ω/0~3000Ω
2-Wire/3-Wire:
Applicable sensor Pt100：DIN 43760-1980 JIS C1604-1989，100Ω 3850 PPM/°C
Pt1000：DIN EN60751，1 kΩ 3850 PPM/°C
Ni100/Ni1000：DIN 43760
06PT
Cu50/Cu100
JPt100：JIS C1604-1989
LG-Ni1000
0~300Ω/0~3000Ω
Rated measurement range Please refer to the table Note*1 below.
Rated analog-to-digital conversion range Please refer to the table Note*2 below.
Maximum measurable temperature range Please refer to the table Note*3 below.
Centigrade（°C） 0.1°C
Hardware
Fahrenheit（°F） 0.18°F*4
resolution
Input impedance 0.1Ω
Average function Setting range:K1~K100
Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limts or channel disconnection.

4-2
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated

circuit/an optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one
another by optocouplers.
Isolation Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500VAC
Isolation between the 24 VAC and a ground:500VAC

Note*1. Rated measurement range

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F） Input impedance

Pt100 -180°C~800°C -292°F~1,472°F
Ni100 -80°C~170°C -112°F~338°F
Pt1000 -180°C~800°C -292°F~1,472°F
Ni1000 -80°C~170°C -112°F~338°F 0~300Ω
JPt100 -180°C~500°C -292°F~932°F 0~3000Ω
Cu50 -50°C~150°C -58°F~302°F 4_
Cu100 -50°C~150°C -58°F~302°F
LG-Ni1000 -50°C~180°C -58°F~356°F

Note*2. Rated analog-to-digital conversion range

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F） Input impedance

Pt100 K-1,800~K8,000 K-2,920~K14,720
Ni100 K-800~K1,700 K-1,120~K3,380
Pt1000 K-1,800~K8,000 K-2,920~K14,720
Ni1000 K-800~K1,700 K-1,120~K3,380 K0~K3,000
JPt100 K-1,800~K5,000 K-2,920~K9,320 K0~K30,000
Cu50 K-500~K1,500 K-580~K3,020
Cu100 K-500~K1,500 K-580~K3,020
LG-Ni1000 K-500~K1,800 K-580~K3,560

4-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Note*3. Maximum measurable temperature range

 DVP04PT-E2

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F） Input impedance

Pt100 -190°C~810°C -310°F~1,490°F
Ni100 -90°C~180°C -130°F~356°F 0~320Ω
Pt1000 -190°C~810°C -310°F~1,490°F 0~3200Ω
Ni1000 -90°C~180°C -130°F~356°F

 DVP06PT-E2

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F） Input impedance

Pt100 -200°C~850°C -328°F~1,562°F
Ni100 -100°C~180°C -148°F~356°F
Pt1000 -200°C~850°C -328°F~1,562°F
Ni1000 -100°C~180°C -148°F~356°F 0~320Ω
JPt100 -200°C~510°C -328°F~950°F 0~3200Ω
Cu50 -60°C~160°C -76°F~320°F
_4 Cu100 -60°C~160°C -76°F~320°F
LG-Ni1000 -60°C~200°C -76°F~392°F

Note*4. The temperature unit to be displayed is 0.1 °C and 0.1 °F. If the display mode is Fahrenheit, the number
in the second decimal place will not be displayed.

4.1.2 DVP04TC-E2 Specifications

 Electrical specifications

Number of inputs Four

Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4VDC~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block (distance to the terminal is 5 mm)
Conversion time 200 ms /channel
Weight 205g
Things to note when connecting the module to a PLC CPU:
1. Up to 8 modules can be connected to a PLC CPU.

2. The connected module is numbered automatically from 0 (nearest to the PLC CPU) to 7 (furthest away from the PLC
CPU).

3. The connected modules do NOT take up any digital I/O points.

4-4
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

 Functional specifications

Analog input channel Four

Digital data format 16-bit two’s complement number
25°C/77°F: The allowed error range is ±0.3% of full scale.
Overall accuracy
0 to +55°C / 32 to 131°F: The allowed error range is ±0.6% of full scale.
J-type，K-type，R-type，S-type，T-type，E-type，N-type thermocouple; input
Applicable sensor
impedance: ±80mV
Rated input range Please refer to the table Note*1 below.
Analog-to-digital conversion Please refer to the table Note*2 below.
Centigrade（°C） 0.1°C
Hardware Fahrenheit（°F） 0.18°F*3
resolution
Input
0.01mV
impedance
Average function Yes, CR#8 ~ CR#11, setting range: K1 ~ K100
Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limts or channel disconnection.
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit / an 4_
optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by optocouplers.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between analog channels: 120 VAC

Note*1. Rated input range

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F） Input impedance

J-type -100°C~1,150°C -148°F~2,102°F
K-type -100°C~1,350°C -148°F~2,462°F
R-type 0°C~1,750°C 32°F~3,182°F
S-type 0°C~1,750°C 32°F~3,182°F ±80mV
T-type -150°C~390°C -238°F~734°F
E-type -150°C~980°C -238°F~1,796°F
N-type -150°C~1,280°C -238°F~2,336°F

Note*2. Analog-to-digital conversion

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F） Input impedance

J-type K-1,000~K11,500 K-1,480~K21,020
K-type K-1,000~K13,500 K-1,480~K24,620
R-type K0~K17,500 K320~K31,820
S-type K0~K17,500 K320~K31,820 ±8,000
T-type K-1,500~K3,900 K-2,380~K7,340
E-type K-1,500~K9,800 K-2,380~K17,960
N-type K-1,500~K12,800 K-2,380~K23,360

Note*3. The temperature unit to be displayed is 0.1 °C and 0.1 °F. If the display mode is Fahrenheit, the number
in the second decimal place will not be displayed.

4-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4.2 Module Profiles

1
4

2
0 4P T- E 2
4AI -P T
7

_4 8
9
3

No. Name Description

1 Removable terminal block The inputs are connected to sensors.

The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
2 External module connection port Connects the modules
3 Terminal number Terminal number
4 Model name Model name of the module
Indicates the status of the power supply
5 POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Error status of the module
ERROR LED indicator ON: a serious error occurs in the module.
5
OFF: the module is normal.
Blinking: a minor error occurs in the module.
Indicates the analog to digital conversion status
Analog to digital conversion
5 Blinking: conversion is taking place
indicator
OFF: stop conversion
6 External module connection port Connects the modules
7 DIN rail slot (35 mm) For the DIN rail
8 I/O module securing clip Secures the modules
9 Mounting hole Secures the module on the set

4-6
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

4.3 Module Dimensions

1 10
98
106
90

62 6 1.5
70 78 4_

Unit: mm

4.4 Module Terminals

 DVP04PT-E2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
O1 + I 1+ I1 - FE O2 + I2 + I2 - FE O 3+ I3 + I3- FE
DVP04PT-E2 (4A I)
24V 0V FE O4 + I4 + I4 - FE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 DVP06PT-E2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
O1 + I 1+ I1 - O2 + I2 + I2 - O3 + I3 + I3 - O4 + I4 + I 4-
DVP06PT-E2 (6A I)
24V 0V FE FE FE O5 + I5+ I5 - O6 + I6+ I6 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

 DVP04TC-E2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
I1+ I1- FE I2+ I2- FE I3+ I3- FE I4+ I4- FE
DVP04TC-E2 (4AI)
24V 0V FE FE FE FE FE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4.5 Control Registers

4.5.1 DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2Control Registers
CR#
Attrib. Registers content Description
04PT 06PT

DVP04PT-E2 model code = H’0082

0 0 O R Model name
DVP06PT-E2 model code = H’00C2

1 1 O R Firmware version Display the current firmware version in hex.

Input mode: Default = H’0000。

2 2 O R/W CH1 Input mode setting Mode 0（H’0000）
：Pt100（-180°C~800°C）
Mode1（H’0001）
：Ni100（-80°C~170°C）
Mode2（H’0002）
：Pt1000（-180°C~800°C）
3 3 O R/W CH2 Input mode setting
Mode3（H’0003）
：Ni1000（-80°C~170°C）

_4 Mode4（H’0004）
：0~300Ω
4 4 O R/W CH3 Input mode setting Mode5（H’0005）
：0~3000Ω
Mode6（H’0006）
：JPt100（-180°C~500°C）
Mode7（H’0007）
：Cu50（-50°C~150°C）
5 5 O R/W CH4 Input mode setting
Mode8（H’0008）
：Cu100（-50°C~150°C）
Mode9（H’0009）
：LG-Ni1000（-50°C~180°C）
6 O R/W CH5 Input mode setting Mode-1（H’FFFF）
：Channel unavailable
Note1：DVP04PT-E2 do NOT support mode 6-9.
Note2：DVP04PT-E2 mode 5 requires firmware
7 O R/W CH6 Input mode setting
version V1.11 or above
Select the temperature unit (Celsius °C / Fahrenheit
7 O R/W Temperature unit setting °F).
Default= H’0（°C）
8 8 O R/W CH1 average times
9 9 O R/W CH2 average times
Average times setting of channels CH1 ~ CH6
10 10 O R/W CH3 average times
Setting range: K1 ~ K100
11 11 O R/W CH4 average times
Default = K10
12 O R/W CH5 average times
13 O R/W CH6 average times
Average temperature
12 14 X R
measured at CH1
Average temperature
13 15 X R
measured at CH2
Average temperature Average temperature measured.
14 16 X R Setting Temperature Unit:
measured at CH3
Average temperature  DVP04PT-E2：CR#7
15 17 X R
measured at CH4  DVP06PT-E2：CR#27
Average temperature
18 X R
measured at CH5
Average temperature
19 X R
measured at CH6

4-8
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

CR#
Attrib. Registers content Description
04PT 06PT

Present temperature measured

20 20 X R
at CH1
Present temperature measured
21 21 X R
at CH2 Present temperature measured.
Present temperature measured
22 22 X R Setting Temperature Unit:
at CH3
Present temperature measured  DVP04PT-E2：CR#7
23 23 X R
at CH4  DVP06PT-E2：CR#27
Present temperature measured
24 X R
at CH5
Present temperature measured
25 X R
at CH6
In mode 4 (0~300Ω), temperature display decimal
Mode 4: 0~300Ω. Temperature
26 O R/W changes (0: 1 digit after the decimal place/ 1: 2 digits
display decimal digit changes
after the decimal place). Default= H0
Select the temperature unit (Celsius °C / Fahrenheit
27 O R/W Temperature unit setting °F). 4_
Default = H’0（°C）
28 28 O R/W Adjusted offset value of CH1 Adjusted offset value, range K-1000 ~ K1000. Default =
29 29 O R/W Adjusted offset value of CH2 K0
30 30 O R/W Adjusted offset value of CH3 Measured Value = Original Value – Adjusted offset
value
31 31 O R/W Adjusted offset value of CH4
Unit Setup:
32 O R/W Adjusted offset value of CH5
 DVP04PT-E2：CR#7
33 O R/W Adjusted offset value of CH6
 DVP06PT-E2：CR#27

Prohibit set value changing,

40 40 O R/W Set value changing prohibited
b0~b5 corresponds to CH1 ~ CH6. Default =H’0000

41 41 X R/W Save all the set values Save all the set values. Default =H’0000

Register for storing all error status. See the table of

43 43 X R Error status
error status for more information.
Upper and lower bound detection, b0~b5 corresponds
100 100 O R/W Enable/Disable limit detection to CH1 ~ CH6 (0: Disable/ 1: Enable). Default=
H’0000.

Display the upper and lower bound status (0: Not

Exceeding; 1: Exceeding upper and lower bound
101 101 X R/W Upper and lower bound status value), b0~b5 corresponds to CH1 ~ CH6 lower
bound, b8~b13 corresponds to CH1 ~ CH6 upper
bound.
Default =H’0000
102 102 O R/W Set value of CH1 upper bound

103 103 O R/W Set value of CH2 upper bound

104 104 O R/W Set value of CH3 upper bound

Set upper bound value. Default = K32000.
105 105 O R/W Set value of CH4 upper bound

106 O R/W Set value of CH5 upper bound

107 O R/W Set value of CH6 upper bound

4-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR#
Attrib. Registers content Description
04PT 06PT

108 108 O R/W Set value of CH1 lower bound

109 109 O R/W Set value of CH2 lower bound

110 110 O R/W Set value of CH3 lower bound

Set lower bound value. Default = K-32000.
111 111 O R/W Set value of CH4 lower bound

112 O R/W Set value of CH5 lower bound

113 O R/W Set value of CH6 lower bound

Symbols:
O: When CR#41 is set to H’5678, the set value of CR will be saved.
X: Set value will not be saved.
R: You can use FROM instruction to read data.
_4 W: You can use TO instruction to write data.

※ CR#0 for module reset

You can use CR#0 to reset all the settings by simply writing H’4352 in CR#0 and wait for one second before turning
the power OFF and then ON again, all the modules connected will be initialized. It is suggested to connect to only
one module for module reset.

※ CR#43 Error status value. See the table below:

Description

bit0 K1（H’1） Power supply error Bit7 K128（H’80） CH5 Conversion error

bit1 K2（H’2） Reserved Bit8 K256（H’0100） CH6 Conversion error

bit2 K4（H’4） Upper/lower bound error bit9 K512（H’0200） Mode setting error

bit3 K8（H’8） CH1 Conversion error bit10 K1024（H’0400） Sampling range error

Upper / lower bound setting

bit4 K16（H’10） CH2 Conversion error bit11 K2048（H’0800）
error

bit5 K32（H’20） CH3 Conversion error bit12 K4096（H’1000） Set value changing prohibited

Communication breakdown
bit6 K64（H’40） CH4 Conversion error bit13 K8192（H’2000）
on next module

Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit (b0 ~ b13) and there may be more than 2 errors
occurring at the same time. 0 = normal; 1 = error

4-10
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

※ PIDControl Registers
PID control function is not available for CH5 and CH6 of DVP06PT-E2.
CR
Attrib. Register content Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Please set the temperature value according to proper
120 140 160 180 O R/W Set temperature value
range of each sensor type. Default = K0
121 141 161 181 O R/W Sampling time (s) Range: K1 ~ K30 (s). Default = K2
122 142 162 182 O R/W KP Proportional control constant. Default = K121
123 143 163 183 O R/W KI Integral constant. Default = K2,098
124 144 164 184 O R/W KD Derivative constant. Default = K-29
125 145 165 185 O R/W Upper limit of I value Upper limit of I value. Default = K0
126 146 166 186 O R/W Lower limit of I value Lower limit of I value. Default = K0
127 147 167 187 X R I value Current accumulated offset value
128 148 168 188 O R/W Heating/cooling 0: Heater, 1: Cooler. Default = H’0000
129 149 169 189 O R/W Upper limit of output Setting range: K-32,760~K32,760. Default = K32,000
130 150 170 190 O R/W Lower limit of output Setting range: K-32,760~K32,760. Default = K0 4_
131 151 171 191 X R Output percentage Range: K0~K1,000. (Unit: 0.1%)
132 152 172 192 X R Output width (ms) Width of control output. Unit: ms
133 153 173 193 X R Output cycle (ms) Cycle of control output. Unit: ms
134 154 174 194 X R Output volume Output volume
135 155 175 195 X R/W PID_RUN/STOP 0: STOP, 1: RUN. Default = K0
136 156 176 196 X R/W Auto-tuning 0: Disabled, 1: Auto-tuning. Default = K0
Symbols:
O: Set value will be saved.
X: Set value will not be saved.
R: You can use FROM instruction to read data.
W: You can use TO instruction to write data.

※ Adjust PT Conversion Curve

You can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the Offset value.

Offset in DVP04/06PT-E2: Deviation digital value from the target value.

(Measured Value= Original Value – Adjust Value Offset)

 Mode0 ~ Mode3, Mode6 ~ Mode9: output unit 0.1°

 X ( °) 
Y =  − Offset 
 0.1(°) 
Y= Digital output,

X= Measured temperature input

 Mode4 ~ Mode5: output unit 0.1Ω
 X (Ohm) 
Y =  − Offset 
 0.1(Ohm) 
Y= Digital output,
X= Measured temperature input

4 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Mode 0 Mode 1
Digital output Digital output

+8,000 +1,700

+4,000

Measured Measured
-180 C temperature input -80 C temperature input

0 +400 +800 C 0 +170 C

-1,800 -800

Mode 2 Mode 3
Digital output Digital output

_4 +14,720 +3,380

+7,360

Measured Measured
-292 F temperature input -112 F temperature input

0 +736 +1,472 F 0 +338 F

-2,920 -1,120

Mode 4 Mode 5

Digital output
D ig ita l Outpu t

+3,000 +3 0 ,0 0 0

M ea sured
Measured input Inpu t
impedance Im peda nc e
0 3 ,0 0 0 Ω
0 300Ω

4-12
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

4.5.2 DVP04TC-E2 Control Registers

CR# Attrib. Register content Description
Set up by the system:
0 O R Model name
DVP04TC-E2 model code = H’0083
1 O R Firmware version Display the current firmware version in hex.
Input mode: Default = H’0000.
2 O R/W CH1 Input mode setting
Mode 0 (H’0000): J-type (-100°C ~1,150°C)
Mode 1 (H’0001): K-type (-100°C ~ 1,350°C)
3 O R/W CH2 Input mode setting Mode 2 (H’0002): R-type (0°C ~ 1,750°C)
Mode 3 (H’0003): S-type (0°C ~ 1,750°C)
4 O R/W CH3 Input mode setting Mode 4 (H’0004): T-type (-150°C ~ 390°C)
Mode 5 (H’0005): E-type (-150°C ~ 980°C)
Mode 6 (H’0006): N-type (-150°C ~ 1,280°C)
5 O R/W CH4 Input mode setting Mode 7 (H’0007): -80mV~+80mV
Mode -1(H’FFFF): Close

7 O R/W Temperature unit setting

Select the temperature unit (Celsius °C / Fahrenheit °F). 4_
Default = H0(°C)
8 O R/W CH1 sampling range
Set sampling range at CH1 ~ CH4
9 O R/W CH2 sampling range
Range = K1 ~ K100
10 O R/W CH3 sampling range
Default = K10
11 O R/W CH4 sampling range
12 X R Average temperature measured at CH1
13 X R Average temperature measured at CH2 Average temperature measured at CH1 ~ Ch4
14 X R Average temperature measured at CH3 Temperature unit: set in CR#7
15 X R Average temperature measured at CH4
20 X R Present temperature measured at CH1
21 X R Present temperature measured at CH2 Present temperature measured at CH1 ~ CH4
22 X R Present temperature measured at CH3 Temperature unit: set in CR#7
23 X R Present temperature measured at CH4
28 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH1 Set the adjusted Offset value of Ch1 ~ Ch4. Default = K0
29 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH2 Range: K-400 ~ K400
30 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH3 Temperature unit: set in CR#7
31 O R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH4 (Measured Value= Original Value – Adjust Value Offset)

40 O R/W Set value changing prohibited Prohibit set value changing in CH1 ~ CH4. Default =H’0000
41 X R/W Save all the set values Save all the set values. Default =H’0000
Register for storing all error status. See the table of error status
43 X R Error status
for more information.
Upper and lower bound detection,
Function: Enable / Disable limit
100 O R/W b0~b3 corresponds to CH1 ~ CH4 (0: Disable/ 1: Enable).
detection
Default= H’0000.
Display the upper and lower bound status
(0: Not Exceeding; 1: Exceeding upper and lower bound value),
101 X R/W Upper and lower bound status
b0~b3 corresponds to CH1 ~ CH4 lower bound, b8~b11
corresponds to CH1 ~ CH4 upper bound.

4-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Attrib. Register content Description

102 O R/W Set value of CH1 upper bound
103 O R/W Set value of CH2 upper bound
Set value of CH1~CH4 upper bound. Default = K32000.
104 O R/W Set value of CH3 upper bound
105 O R/W Set value of CH4 upper bound
108 O R/W Set value of CH1 lower bound
109 O R/W Set value of CH2 lower bound
Set value of CH1~CH4 lower bound. Default = K-32000.
110 O R/W Set value of CH3 lower bound
111 O R/W Set value of CH4 lower bound
Symbols:
O: When CR#41 is set to H’5678, the set value of CR will be saved.
X: Set value will not be saved.
R: You can use FROM instruction to read data.
W: You can use TO instruction to write data.

_4 ※ CR#0 for module reset

You can use CR#0 to reset all the settings by simply writing H’4352 in CR#0 and wait for one second before turning
the power OFF and then ON again, all the modules connected will be initialized. It is suggested to connect to only
one module for module reset. And this is only available for firmware V1.10 or later.

CR#43Error status value. See the table below.

Description
bit0 K1 (H’1) Power supply error bit6 K64 (H’40) CH4 Conversion error
bit1 K2 (H’2) Temperature sensing componet error bit9 K512 (H’0200) Mode setting error
bit2 K4 (H’4) Upper/lower bound error bit10 K1024 (H’0400) Sampling range error
bit3 K8 (H’8) CH1 Conversion error bit11 K2048 (H’0800) Upper / lower bound setting error
bit4 K16 (H’10) CH2 Conversion error bit12 K4096 (H’1000) Set value changing prohibited
Communication breakdown on
bit5 K32 (H’20) CH3 Conversion error bit13 K8192 (H’2000)
next module
Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit (b0 ~ b13) and there may be more than 2 errors
occurring at the same time. 0 = normal; 1 = error

※ PID Control Registers

CR
Attrib. Register content Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Please set the temperature value according to proper
120 140 160 180 O R/W Set temperature value
range of each sensor type. Default = K0
121 141 161 181 O R/W Sampling time (s) Range: K1 ~ K30 (s). Default = K2
122 142 162 182 O R/W KP Proportional control constant. Default = K121
123 143 163 183 O R/W KI Integral constant. Default = K2,098
124 144 164 184 O R/W KD Derivative constant. Default = K-29
125 145 165 185 O R/W Upper limit of I value Upper limit of I value. Default = K0
126 146 166 186 O R/W Lower limit of I value Lower limit of I value. Default = K0
127 147 167 187 X R I value Current accumulated offset value
128 148 168 188 O R/W Heating/cooling 0: Heater, 1: Cooler. Default = H’0000

4-14
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

CR
Attrib. Register content Description
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Upper limit of output. Setting range: K-32,760 ~ K32,760.
129 149 169 189 O R/W Upper limit of output
Default = K32,000
Lower limit of output. Setting range: K-32,760 ~ K32,760.
130 150 170 190 O R/W Lower limit of output
Default = K0
131 151 171 191 X R Output percentage Range: K0~K1,000 (Unit: 0.1%)
132 152 172 192 X R Output width (ms) Width of control output. Unit: ms
133 153 173 193 X R Output cycle (ms) Cycle of control output. Unit: ms
134 154 174 194 X R Output volume Output volume
135 155 175 195 X R/W PID_RUN/STOP 0: STOP, 1: RUN. Default = K0
136 156 176 196 X R/W Auto-tuning 0: Disabled, 1: Auto-tuning. Default = K0
Symbols:
O: Set value will be saved.
X: Set value will not be saved.
R: You can use FROM instruction to read data.
W: You can use TO instruction to write data. 4_
※ Adjust TC Conversion Curve

You can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the Offset value (CR#28 ~ CR#31).

Offset: Deviation digital value from the target value. (Measured Value= Original Value – Adjust Value Offset)

 Mode0 ~ Mode6: output unit 0.1°

 X ( °) 
Y =  − Offset 
 0.1(°) 
Y= Digital output,

X= Measured temperature input

 Mode7: 0.01 mV = 80 mV/8000

 X (mV ) 
Y =  − Offset 
 0.01(mV ) 
Y= Digital output,

X= Current input

4-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

-100°C~1150°C（-1000~11500）
Mode 0 of CR#2~CR#5
-148°F~2102°F（-1480~21020）

-100°C~1350°C（-1000~13500）
Mode1 of CR#2~CR#5
-148°F~2462°F（-1480~24620）
0°C~1750°C（0~17500）
Mode2，3 of CR#2~CR#5
32°F~3182°F（320~31820）
-150°C~390°C（-1500~3900）
Mode4 of CR#2~CR#5
-238°F~734°F（-2380~7340）

-150°C~980°C（-1500~9800）
Mode5 of CR#2~CR#5
-238°F~1796°F（-2380~17960）

-150°C~1280°C（-1500~12800）
Mode6 of CR#2~CR#5
-238°F~2336°F（-2380~23360）

_4 Mode 0: J-type thermocouple Mode 1: K-type thermocouple

Digital output Digital output

+11,500 +13,500
(+21,020) (+24,620)

Measured Measured
-100 C temperature -100 C temperature
(-148 F) input (-148 F) input
0 +1,150 C 0 +1,350 C
(+2,102 F) (+2,462 F)
-1,000(-1,480) -1,000(-1,480)
Mode 2: R-type thermocouple Mode 4: T-type thermocouple
Mode 3: S-type thermocouple

Digital output Digital output

+17,500 +3,900
(+31,820) (+7,340)

Measured Measured
0C -150 C temperature
temperature (-238 F)
(-32 F) input input
0 +390 C
0(-320) +1,750 C (+734 F)
(+3,182 F)
-1,500(-2,380)

4-16
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

Mode 5: E-type thermocouple Mode 6: N-type thermocouple

Digital output Digital output

+9,800 +12,800
(+17,960) (+23,360)

Measured Measured
-150 C temperature -150 C input
(-238 F) input (-238 F) impedance
0 +980 C 0 +1,280 C
(+1,796 F) (+2,336 F)
-1,500(-2,380) -1,500(-2,380)
4_

Mode 7 of CR#2~CR#5 -80mV~+80mV（-8000~8000）

Mode 7

+8,000

Digital
output

-80mV 0
+80mV

Voltage input

-8,000

4-17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4.6 Wiring
4.6.1 Wiring DVP04PT-E2/DVP06PT-E2
0~300Ω, 0~3000Ω
Ni100/Ni1000/Pt100/Pt1000 Ni100/Pt100/J Pt100
Cu50/Cu100/JPt100/LG-Ni1000 Cu50/Cu100
*6 Ni1000/Pt1000/
CHX LG -Ni1000 *3
O1+
I1+ ADC

I1- INA
AG
Shielded cable*1 FE
2 - Wire

0~300Ω, 0~3000Ω
Ni100/Ni1000/Pt100/Pt1000
Cu50/Cu100/JPt100/LG-Ni1000
*6
CHX
O4+
I4+
I4-
Shielded cable*1 FE AG
3 - Wire

_4 *5

+15V
0V DC/DC
converter AG
24V
-15V
24V DC

*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors, including Ni100/Ni1000, Pt100/Pt1000, Cu50/Cu100, JPt100,
LG-Ni1000 for analog input module wiring and keep them away from power cables and other cables that generate noise.
Use 3-wire temperature sensors. But if you use two-wire temperature sensors, In-+and In- must be short-circuited
(where n is between 1–6).

*2. When the impedance to be measured is 0~300Ω or 0~3000Ω, it is recommended to use a 2-wire or 3-wire temperature
sensor instead of a 4-wire one.

*3. Choose a suitable temperature sensor.

 DVP06PT-E2:
When using temperature sensors such as Ni100, Pt100, JPt100, Cu50, Cu100 and 0~300 Ω impedance sensor, the
internal excitation current is 1.0389 mA.

When using temperature sensors such as Ni1000, Pt1000, LG-Ni1000 and 0~3000 Ω impedance sensor, the internal
excitation current is 208.3μA。

 DVP04PT-E2：
When using temperature sensors such as Ni100, Pt100 and 0~300 Ω impedance sensor, the internal excitation
current is 1.53mA.

When using temperature sensors such as Ni1000, Pt1000 and 0~3000 Ω impedance sensor, the internal excitation
current is 200μA.

*4. Connect FE of the shielded cable to ground when the noise it too loud.

*5. Connect the terminal to ground.

*6. CHX: Every channel can work with the input wiring shown above.

Note 1: Use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use terminal resistors of less than 200 ohm.

Note 2: Please refer to the functional specifications for the sensor types supported by each model.

4-18
 Ch a pt er 4 D V P- E S e r i es Tem p er at ur e Me as ur e m en t M od u le

4.6.2 Wiring DVP04TC-E2

J,K,R,S,T,E,N *3
CH X

+ I 1+ MU X
- I 1-
S hielded cable*1 FE

- 80mV ~80 mV *3
C HX
+
I4 +
-
I4-

Shielded c abl e*1

FE
Col d conjunction
compensation
*2

5V
0V D C /D C
Conv er ter AG
24V
2 4V D C 4_

*1. The cable connected to the input terminal should be the cable or the shielded twisted pair cable connected to a type J,
K, R, S, T, E, N thermocouple. It should be kept separate from other power cables and cables that generate noise.

*2. Connect the terminal to ground.

*3. CHX: Every channel can work with the input wiring shown above.

Note 1: only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C and the length must be less
than 50 m.

Note2: TC modules must run for 30 minutes before they start to take any temperature measurement.

4-19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4.7 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in PT, TC modules, an error indicator will start blinking. Once you see an error indicator starts blinking,
you can use the FROM instruction to read the error codes stored in CR#43. The bit 0 to bit 13 indicates the error codes. It
is possible to have two errors at the same time. 0 indicates normal and 1 indicates error. Refer to the following table for
more the causes and the solutions for troubleshooting.

Bit
RUN LED ERROR LED Description Solution
No.
bit0 OFF ON The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.

bit1 Temperature sensor is abnormal. Contact the factory.

Conversion value exceeds the set Check the upper and lower
bit2
upper/lower value value
The signal received by channel 1
Check the signal received by
bit3 exceeds the range of analog inputs
channel 1
(temperature).
The signal received by channel 2
Check the signal received by
_4 bit4 exceeds the range of analog inputs
channel 2
(temperature).
The signal received by channel 3
Check the signal received by
bit5 exceeds the range of analog inputs
channel 3
(temperature).
The signal received by channel 4
Check the signal received by
bit6 exceeds the range of analog inputs
Blinking every Blinking every channel 4
(temperature).
0.2 seconds 0.2 seconds
The signal received by channel 5
Check the signal received by
bit7 exceeds the range of analog inputs
channel 5
(temperature).
The signal received by channel 6
Check the signal received by
bit8 exceeds the range of analog inputs
channel 6
(temperature).
bit9 Mode setting error Check the mode setting
Check the average time
bit10 Average time setting error
setting
Check the upper/lower value
bit11 Upper/lower value setting error
setting
Check the value in CR#40 (set
bit12 Set value cannot be changed.
value changing prohibited)
Check the wiring of the
bit13 The later module is disconnected.
modules.

4-20
 5
Chapter 5 DVP-E Series Position Control
Module

Table of Contens
5.1 General Specifications ................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 DVP02PU-E2 Specifications ......................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Module Profiles .............................................................................................. 5-3

5.3 Module Dimensions ....................................................................................... 5-4

5.4 Module Terminals .......................................................................................... 5-4

5.5 Control Register ............................................................................................ 5-5

5.6 Wiring ........................................................................................................... 5-5

5.7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 5-6

5-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

5.1 General Specifications

5.1.1 DVP02PU-E2 Specifications
 Electrical specifications
Model name DVP02PU-E2
Number of inputs High-speed input points: 3; normal input points 5; high-speed output: 4 (2-axis)
Supply voltage 24VDC from PLC CPU
Connector type Removable terminal block (distance to the terminal is 5 mm)
Up to 8 modules can be connected and no digital I/O will be taken. Numbering is from
Connect to DVP PLC CPU
0 to 7 in a consecutive order; the one closes to the PLC CPU is 0.
Weight 180g

 Functional specifications – Input Points

Model
High-speed Input Normal Input
Item
Number of inputs 3（A+/A-，B+/B-，Z+/Z-） 5（X0~X4）
Connector type Removable terminal blocks
Input form Differential input Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input current 5~24VDC，5~15mA 24VDC，5mA

OFF→ON >3VDC >15VDC

Action level
_5 ON→OFF <1.5VDC <5VDC
Response time <1.5us <0.1ms
200kHz（A+/A-，B+/B-）
Maximum input frequency 1kHz
20kHz（Z+/Z-）
Input impedance 4.7kΩ
Input isolation 500VAC
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.

 Functional specifications – Output Points

Model
High-speed Output
Item
Number of outputs Four(2-axis）
Connector type Removable terminal blocks
Output form differential output
Output voltage 5VDC *1
Leakage current < 10uA
Minimum load 1mA / 5VDC
Resistance 20mA
Maximum load Inductance N/A
Bulb N/A
Maximum output frequency 200kHz
OFF→ON 0.15us
Maximum Response time
ON→OFF 0.15us

Output isolation 500VAC

Note*1: Actual output4VDC（No load）~2.66VDC（20mA）

5-2
 Ch a pt er 5 D V P- E S e r i es P os i t io n C on tr ol M od u l e

5.2 Module Profiles

4
1
5
6
7

IN

8
OUT

2 0 2 PU -E2 9

10

11
3

No. Name Description

5__
The inputs are connected to sensors.
1 Removable terminal block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

External module connection

2 Connects the modules
port
Arrangement of the
3 Arrangement of the terminals
input/output terminals

4 Installation hole For module installation

5 Model serial Model serial

Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator
ON: the power is on
(Green)
OFF: no power
Error status of the module
Error LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
6
(Red) Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF):
hardware error occurs in the module, can NOT operate normally
Operating status of the module
Run LED indicator (Green) ON: the module is running and ready to accept instructions.
OFF: the module is stopped and can NOT accept instrucitons.
Input LED indicator ON: Receives an input signal
7
(Red) OFF: Receives no input signal
8 I/O module connecting port Connects to the next module
9 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail
10 I/O module securing clip Secures the modules
Output LED indicator ON: Receives an output signal
11
(Red) OFF: Receives no output signal

5-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

5.3 Module Dimensions

106
110
98
90

62 61.5
70 78

_5 Unit: mm

5.4 Module Terminals

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z- S /S X0 X1 X2 X3 X4
DVP02PU -E2
Y 0+ Y0 - Y 1+ Y 1- Y2 + Y2 - Y 3+ Y3 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

5-4
 Ch a pt er 5 D V P- E S e r i es P os i t io n C on tr ol M od u l e

5.5 Control Register

Since this module does NOT use control registers to read/write data, you need to use API to perform data reading and
writing. You can use API to execute DVP positioning module features, including setting output control parameters of PU
module (API1402 PUCONF), reading PU module output state (API1403 PUSTAT), PU module output pulse without
acceleration (API1404 DPUPLS), Relative position output of PU module with acceleration and deceleration (API1405
DPUDRI), Absolute addressing output of PU module with acceleration and deceleration (API1406 DPUDRA), PU module
homing (API 1407 DPUZRN), PU module jog output (API1408 DPUJOG), PU module MPG output (API1409 DPUMPG),
and High-speed counter function of PU module (API1410 DPUCNT). Refer to API14 Module Instruction form DVP-
ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Programming Manual for more information on operation.

5.6 Wiring

X4
Del ta s erv o driv e
ASDA - A2 S eries
X3
Y0+ PLS 43
Y0- /PLS 41
X2 Y1+ SIGN 36
Y1- /SIGN 37

5__
X1

X0

+24V Del ta s erv o driv e

S/ S
ASDA - A2 Seri es
Y2+ PLS 43
MPG Shielded
cable Y2- /PLS 41
A+
Y3+ SIGN 36
Phas e A
A- Y3- /SIGN 37
B+
Phas e B
B-
Z+
Phas e Z
Z-

Note: Refer to Chapter 6 Applied Instruction (Module Instructions API14xx) from DVP-ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Series
Programming Manual and Delta Servo Drive Manual for more details on output modes.

5-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

5.7 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in PU modules, you can check the state code to identify the causes, error indicator will not display.
Please refer to special extension module exchange function (SM228, you can find more detailed information in section
2.2.16 ‘Additional Remarks on SM/SR’ in the DVP-ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Series Programming Manual).

For detailed operation and application examples regarding the API instructions, please refter to ‘API14 Module Instructions’
in DVP-ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Series Programming Manual.

 Error indicator and troubleshooting description

RUN LED ERROR LED Description Solution

1. Check if the power supply of PLC CPU
is normal.
2. Check if the connection between PLC
The power supply from PLC CPU
OFF ON CPU and the module is well-connected.
to the module is abnormal.

If the above points are ture, change your

module.
The previous firmware update was failed.
Blinking every The previous firmware update is
OFF Contact your local authorized distributors for
0.2 seconds abnormal.
another firmware update for the module.
1. Check if the positive and negative is set.
2. Check if the software/hardware positive
_5 The light is lit for 0.5
limit is reached?
No change seconds and then The postivie limit is reached.
unlit for 3 seconds.
Leave the positive limit and go towards the
negative direction.
1. Check if the positive and negative is set.
The light is blinking 2. Check if the software/hardware negative
every 0.5 seconds limit is reached?
No change The negative limit is reached.
for two times and
unlit for 3 seconds. Leave the negative limit and go towards
the positive direction.
The light is blinking
Incorrect position setting may lead to
every 0.5 seconds
No change Current position value overflow incorrect movement. You can use PUSTAT
for three times and
instruction to clear the current position.
unlit for 3 seconds.

5-6
 6
Chapter 6 DVP-E Series Extension Cable
Interface Module

Table of Contens
6.1 General Specifications ................................................................................... 6-2

6.2 Module Profiles .............................................................................................. 6-2

6.3 Installlation and Wiring ................................................................................. 6-3

6-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

6.1 General Specifications

DVPAEXT01-E2 (DVPAEXT1R-E2 + DVPAEXT1L-E2) is an extension cable interface module. The extension distance is
0.7 meters. DVPAEXT01-E2 is only applicable to the connection between DVP-ES2/EX2 series CPU and the DI/DO or
AI/AO extension modules, and the installation does not count as any digital extension point or analog module.

Model DVPAEXT01-E2
Item DVPAEXT1R-E2 DVPAEXT1L-E2
Weight 50g 55g

6.2 Module Profiles

DVPAEXT1R-E2 (right side, previous one) DVPAEXT1L-E2 (left side, latter one)

78 78

4 27
1
1
90

3 3
90
96

_6
4
23
2
1 2 1

No. Name Description

1 I/O module securing clip Secures the modules
2 External module connection port Connects the modules
3 DIN rail slot (35 mm) For the DIN rail
4 Extension cable port Connects the extension cable

6-2
 Ch a pt er 6 D V P- E S er i es Ex te ns io n C a bl e I nt er f ac e M od u le

6.3 Installlation and Wiring

 Use DVPAEXT01-E2 (DVPAEXT1R-E2 + DVPAEXT1L-E2) to extend the connections

Since the installation space is limited, you can use DVPAEXT01-E2 (DVPAEXT1R-E2 + DVPAEXT1L-E2) to extend the
communication signal and the connection between DVP-ES2/EX2 series CPU and the DI/DO or AI/AO extension modules.

D V PAEXT1R-E2
D VPAE XT1L-E 2

6__

 Pin Definition

Use the enclosed cable to connect DVPAEXT1R-E2 and DVPAEXT1L-E2.

1 23 4 5
1 2 34 5

6789
6789

6-3
 7
Chapter 7 DVP-S Series Digital Input/Output
Module

Table of Contents
7.1 General Specifications ................................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Module Profiles .............................................................................................. 7-5

7.4 Terminals ...................................................................................................... 7-6

7.5 Wiring ........................................................................................................... 7-7

7.5.1 Wiring DVP08SM10N .................................................................................. 7-7
7.5.2 Wiring DVP08SM11N .................................................................................. 7-8
7.5.3 Wiring DVP16SM11N .................................................................................. 7-9
7.5.4 Wiring DVP32SM11N ................................................................................ 7-10
7.5.5 Wiring DVP06SN11R................................................................................. 7-11
7.5.6 Wiring DVP08SN11R................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.7 Wiring DVP08SN11T ................................................................................. 7-12
7.5.8 Wiring DVP16SN11T ................................................................................. 7-13
7.5.9 Wiring DVP32SN11TN ............................................................................... 7-14
7.5.10 Wiring DVP08SN11TS............................................................................ 7-15
7.5.11 Wiring DVP16SN11TS............................................................................ 7-16
7.5.12 Wiring DVP08SP11R .............................................................................. 7-17
7.5.13 Wiring DVP08SP11T .............................................................................. 7-18
7.5.14 Wiring DVP16SP11R .............................................................................. 7-19
7.5.15 Wiring DVP16SP11T .............................................................................. 7-20
7.5.16 Wiring DVP08SP11TS ............................................................................ 7-21
7.5.17 Wiring DVP16SP11TS ............................................................................ 7-22

7.6 Wiring Digital Input/Output ........................................................................ 7-23

7.6.1 Wiring Digital Input .................................................................................. 7-23
7.6.1.1 Direct Current Power Supply (24 VDC) ..................................................7-23
7.6.1.2 Wiring Input V.S. Relay Types ..............................................................7-23
7.6.1.3 Wiring Input V.S. Open-collector Input Types .........................................7-24
7.6.1.4 Wiring Input V.S. Two-Wire Proximity Switch .........................................7-25
7.6.1.5 Wiring Input V.S. Three-Wire Proximity Switch .......................................7-26
7.6.1.6 Wiring Input V.S. Optoelectronic Switch ................................................7-26
7.6.1.7 Alternating Current Power Supply (Applicable to DVP08SM10N) ...............7-27

7-1
DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.6.2 Wiring Digital Output .................................................................................7-27

7.6.2.1 Output Circuits .................................................................................. 7-27
7.6.2.2 Relay Output Circuit ........................................................................... 7-29
7.6.2.3 Transistor Output Circuit ..................................................................... 7-31

7-2
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.1 General Specifications

Model（DVP） 08SM11 08SM10 08SN11T 08SP11T 16SM11
06SN11R 08SN11R 08SN11T 08SP11R 08SP11T
Item N N S S N
Power supply
24VDC from PLC CPU
voltage
Weight(g) 200 162 141 154 146 146 141 136 136 146

Model（DVP） 16SP11T 16SN11T 32SM11 32SN11T

16SP11R 16SP11T 16SN11T
Item S S N N
Power supply
24VDC from PLC CPU
voltage
Weight(g) 162 154 151 70 70 70 70

 Electrical specifications for the inputs on digital input/output modules

Model（DVP） 08SM 16SM 08SP1 08SP1 08SP1 16SP1 16SP1 16SP1

32SM11N 08SM10N
Item 11N 11N 1T 1R 1TS 1T 1R 1TS
Number of inputs 8 16 4 4 4 8 8 8 32 8
Connector type Removable terminal block
Input type Digital input
Input form DC (sinking or sourcing) AC
85~132VAC 50~60Hz
Input voltage 24VDC，5mA
9.2mA 110VAC/60Hz
OFF→ON >16.5VDC >79VAC
Acti
on ON→OFF <8VDC <30VAC
level
OFF→ON < 15ms
Res
Approximately
pon Approximately 10ms
ON→OFF 20ms < 20ms
se
time 7_
Input impedance 4.7kΩ 19kΩ/50Hz 16kΩ/60Hz
Input isolation 500VAC
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.

 Electrical specifications for the outputs on digital input/output modules

Model（DVP） 08SP 16SP 08SN 16SN 32SN 08SP 16SP 08SN 16SN 08SP 16SP 08SN 06SN
Item 11T 11T 11T 11T 11TN 11TS 11TS 11TS 11TS 11R 11R 11R 11R
Number of outputs 4 8 8 16 32 4 8 8 16 4 8 8 6
Connector type Removable terminal block
Output type Transistor -T（Sinking） Transistor -T（Sourcing） Relay-R
10~250VAC，
Voltage 5~30VDC 5~30VDC 5~30VDC
5~30VDC
Leakage current < 10uA < 250uA <10uA –

Resis- 0.3A/output*2 0.1A/output*2， 0.3A/output*2 1.5A/output 6A/ou

Max. load
tance （1.2A/COM） （3.2A/COM） （2A/COM） （5A/COM） tput

7-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Model（DVP） 08SP 16SP 08SN 16SN 32SN 08SP 16SP 08SN 16SN 08SP 16SP 08SN 06SN
Item 11T 11T 11T 11T 11TN 11TS 11TS 11TS 11TS 11R 11R 11R 11R
Induc- Life
N/A
tance cycle
Life cycle curve*3
curve
Bulk N/A *4

Minimum load 1mA/5V

Output isolation 500VAC 1500VAC
Switching frequency*1 ≦100Hz ≦1Hz

Response OFF→ON 15us <0.1ms 15us

Approximately 10ms
time ON→OFF 25us <0.3ms 25us
*1. The scan cycle affects the frequency.

*2. UP, ZP should include external aid power 24VDC (-15% ~ +20%) and the rated comsumption is around 1mA/point

*3. Life cycle curve: The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the power factor cosø,
the time constant t(L/R)), and the current passing through the terminal. The life cycle curve is shown below.

120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operation(X10 )

500
3

300
200

100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms )
30
20

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Contact Current(A)

*4. Life cycle curve: The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the power factor cosø,
_7 the time constant t(L/R)), and the current passing through the terminal. The life cycle curve is shown below.
1000 250VAC Resistive
250VAC cos=0.7
φ
500 24VDC Resistive
250VAC cos=0.4
φ
Operat ion(X 103 )

200 24VDC t=7ms

100

50
24VDC t=15ms

0 2 4 6
Contact Current (A)

7-4
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.2 Module Profiles

60.00
3.00

3.00
4 6
1 25.20 60.00 3.40
5 7

8 12
10
2 11
90.00

3
3
3.00

Unit: mm

No. Name Description

Indicates the power status of the power supply
Power LED
ON: the power is onOFF: no power
1 Indicates the low voltage status of module
Low Voltage indicator ON: low voltage occurs
OFF: low voltage resolved
2 Model name Model name of the module
3 DIN rail securing clip Secure the modules on the set
The inputs are connected to sensors.
4 I/O Terminal
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
5 Terminal number Terminal number
6 Extension unit positioning hole For positioning between modules.
7 Nameplate Label of the module
8 Extension module connection port Connect the modules
9 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module. 7_
10 Din rail slot(35mm) For the DIN rail.
11 Securing module slot For securing the extension module.
12 Extension module connection port Connect the PLC or the module.

7-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.4 Terminals
08SN11R
08SM11N 08SM10N 16SM11N 06SN11R 16SN11T
08SN11T
C0 UP
S /S CO M S /S Y0 C0
．
Y0
X0 X0 X0 Y0 Y1
X1 X1 X1 C1 Y1 Y2
X2 X2 X2 Y1 Y2 Y3
X3
X4
X5
X3
X4
X5
X3
X4
X5
．C2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y4
Y5
Y2 Y6
X6
X7
X6
X7
X6
X7 ． Y6
Y7
Y7

C3 ZP 0
S /S Y1 0
Y3
X1 0
X1 1
X1 2
．C4
Y1 1
Y1 2
Y1 3
Y4
X1 3
X1 4
X1 5
．C5
Y1 4
Y1 5
Y1 6
Y5
X1 6
X1 7 ． Y1 7
ZP 1

08SP11R 16SP11R
08SN11TS 16SN11TS 08SP11TS 16SP11TS
08SP11T 16SP11T
UP 0 S /S S /S
S /S S /S X0
Y0 X0
X0 X0
Y1 X1 X1
Y2 X1 X1 X2 X2
X2 X2 X3
Y3 X3
Y4
．
X3 X3
X4 ．
．
X4
Y5
．
．
X5
．
X5
X6
．
Y6
X6

UP
Y7

UP 1
． X7
UP
X7

UP
Y0 Y10 C0 C0 Y0 Y0
Y1 Y0 Y0 Y1 Y1
Y11
Y2 C1 Y1 Y2 Y2
Y12
Y3 Y1 Y2 Y3
．
Y13 Y3
Y4 C2 Y3
．
Y14 Y4
Y5 Y2 Y4
Y6
Y7
Y15
Y16 C3
Y3
Y5
Y6
．
．
Y5
Y6

．
Y17 Y7
ZP ZP Y7 ZP ZP

32SM11N 32SN11TN
X0 1 2 X1 Y0 1 2 Y1
X2 3 4 X3 Y2 3 4 Y3
X4 5 6 X5 Y4 5 6 Y5
X6 7 8 X7 Y6 7 8 Y7
X10 9 10 X11 Y10 9 10 Y11
X12 11 12 X13 Y12 11 12 Y13

_7 X14
X16
13
15
14
16
X15
X17
Y14
Y16
13
15
14
16
Y15
Y17
S/S 17 18 S/S ZP 17 18 ZP
NC 19 20 NC UP 19 20 UP
X20 21 22 X21 Y20 21 22 Y21
X22 23 24 X23 Y22 23 24 Y23
X24 25 26 X25 Y24 25 26 Y25
X26 27 28 X27 Y26 27 28 Y27
X30 29 30 X31 Y30 29 30 Y31
X32 31 32 X33 Y32 31 32 Y33
X34 33 34 X35 Y34 33 34 Y35
X36 35 36 X37 Y36 35 36 Y37
S/S 37 38 S/S ZP 37 38 ZP
NC 39 40 NC UP 39 40 UP

DVP32SM DVP32SN

7-6
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5 Wiring
This section illustrates how to wire digital input/output modules. The wiring diagrams below also illustrate how the power
supplies are connected to S/S, and COM. If you need more information about wiring of digital input/output terminals, refer
to Section 7.6 in this manual.

7.5.1 Wiring DVP08SM10N

Input form AC (Alternating Current)
Voltage specifications 85~132VAC（50~60Hz）
，9.2mA（110VAC/60Hz）

C OM

X0

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

7_

7-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.2 Wiring DVP08SM11N

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA

Sinking Sourcing

S /S S /S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

X4 X4

X5 X5

X6 X6

X7 X7

_7

7-8
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5.3 Wiring DVP16SM11N

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA

Sinking Sourcing

S /S S /S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

X4 X4

X5 X5

X6 X6

X7 X7

S/S S/S

X 10 X10

X11 X 11

X 12 X12

X 13 X13

X 14 X14
7_
X15 X15

X 16 X16

X 17 X17

7-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.4 Wiring DVP32SM11N

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA

X0 X1
X2 X3
X4 X5
X6 X7
X 10 X11
X 12 X 13
X 14 X 15
X 16 X 17

X 20 X 21
X 22 X 23
X 24 X 25
X 26 X 27
X 30 X 31
X 32 X 33
X 34 X 35
X 36 X 37

_7

7-10
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5.5 Wiring DVP06SN11R

Output form Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，6A/output

OU T
C0

Y0

C1

Y1

C2

Y2

C3

Y3

C4

Y4

C5 7_
Y5

7 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.6 Wiring DVP08SN11R

Output form Relay
Voltage specifications 10~240VAC，5~30VDC，1.5A/output，5A/COM

OU T
C0

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

7.5.7 Wiring DVP08SN11T

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)

Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

OU T
C0
_7 Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

7-12
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5.8 Wiring DVP16SN11T

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/oupput，1.2A/COM

UP

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

Z P0

Y10

Y 11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15
7_
Y16

Y17

ZP1

Note: You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP, ZP0, ZP1; power consumption is up to 30
mA.

7-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.9 Wiring DVP32SN11TN

Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.1A/output，2.2A/COM

Y0 Y1
Y2 Y3
Y4 Y5
Y6 Y7
Y10 Y11
Y12 Y13
Y14 Y15
Y16 Y17
ZP ZP
UP UP
Y20 Y21
Y22 Y23
Y24 Y25
Y26 Y27
Y30 Y31
Y32 Y33
Y34 Y35
Y36 Y37
ZP ZP
UP UP
_7

7-14
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5.10 Wiring DVP08SN11TS

Output form Transistor-P(sourcing)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，2A/COM

UP

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

ZP

Note: You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP and ZP; power consumption is up to 15 mA.

7_

7-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.11 Wiring DVP16SN11TS

Output form Transistor-P(sourcing)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，2A/COM

UP 0

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

U P1

Y 10

Y11

Y 12

Y 13

Y 14

Y 15

_7 Y 16

Y 17

ZP

Note: You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP0, UP1 and ZP; power consumption is up to
25 mA.

7-16
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5.12 Wiring DVP08SP11R

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output form Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，1.5A/output，5A/COM

Sinking input and relay output Sourcing input and relay output

S /S S /S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

OUT OUT
C0 C0

Y0 Y0

C1 C1

Y1 Y1 7_
C2 C2

Y2 Y2

C3 C3

Y3 Y3

7-17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.13 Wiring DVP08SP11T

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

Sinking input and output Sourcing input and Sinking output

S/S S /S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

OU T OUT
C0 C0

Y0 Y0

C1 C1

_7 Y1 Y1

C2 C2

Y2 Y2

C3 C3

Y3 Y3

7-18
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5.14 Wiring DVP16SP11R

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output form Relay
Voltage specifications 10~250VAC，5~30VDC，1.5A/點，5A/共點

Sinking input and relay output Sourcing input and relay output

S/S S /S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

X4 X4

X5 X5

X6 X6

X7 X7

OU T OU T
C0 C0

Y0 Y0

Y1 Y1

Y2 Y2 7_
Y3 Y3

Y4 Y4

Y5 Y5

Y6 Y6

Y7 Y7

7-19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.15 Wiring DVP16SP11T

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output form Transistor-T (sinking)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，1.2A/COM

Sinking input and output Sourcing inputand Sinking output

S/S S /S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

X4 X4

X5 X5

X6 X6

X7 X7

OU T OU T
C0 C0

Y0 Y0

Y1 Y1

_7 Y2 Y2

Y3 Y3

Y4 Y4

Y5 Y5

Y6 Y6

Y7 Y7

7-20
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.5.16 Wiring DVP08SP11TS

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output form Transistor-P(sourcing)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，2A/COM

Sinking input and Sourcing output Sourcing input and output

S/S S/S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

OU T OU T
UP UP

Y0 Y0

Y1 Y1

Y2 Y2 7_
Y3 Y3

ZP ZP

Note: You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP and ZP; power consumption is up to 10 mA.

7-21
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.5.17 Wiring DVP16SP11TS

Input form Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Voltage specifications 24VDC，5mA
Output form Transistor-P(sourcing)
Voltage specifications 5~30VDC，0.3A/output，2A/COM

Sinking input and sourcing output Sourcing input and output

S/S S /S

X0 X0

X1 X1

X2 X2

X3 X3

X4 X4

X5 X5

X6 X6

X7 X7

OU T OU T
UP UP

Y0 Y0

Y1 Y1

_7 Y2 Y2

Y3 Y3

Y4 Y4

Y5 Y5

Y6 Y6

Y7 Y7

ZP ZP

Note: You need to add external power supply 24 VDC (-15% ~ +20%) for UP and ZP; power consumption is up to 15 mA.

7-22
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.6 Wiring Digital Input/Output

7.6.1 Wiring Digital Input
7.6.1.1 Direct Current Power Supply (24 VDC)

When the digital input signal is DC input, there are two DC input types, Sinking and Sourcing. See the definition below.
 Sinking  Sourcing
Sink=The current flows into the terminal X0. Source=The current flows from the terminal X0

X0 S/S

S/S X0

7.6.1.2 Wiring Input V.S. Relay Types

 Sinking

I/O
X0
Internal c ircui t

Internal cir cuit

S /S
+
2 4V D C

 Sourcing

7_
I/O
X0
I nte r na l c ir cu it

Int ernal c ircui t

S /S
+
2 4 V DC

7-23
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.6.1.3 Wiring Input V.S. Open-collector Input Types

 Sinking (PNP input type)

I/O
+V cc
X0
I nte rn al Cir cui t

Internal Circuit

0V S/S

+
P NP 2 4V D C

 Sourcing (NPN input type)

I/O
+ Vcc X0
Inte r na l Ci r cui t

Internal Circ uit

0V S/ S
+
24 V DC
NP N

_7

7-24
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.6.1.4 Wiring Input V.S. Two-Wire Proximity Switch

Use the two-wire proximity switch whose leakage current IL is less than 1.5 mA when the switch is OFF. If the leakage
current IL is larger than 1.5 mA, connect the divider resistance Rb using the formula below.

6
Rb ≤ （k Ω）
IL − 1.5

 Sinking

I/O
IL
X0

Rb Intern al Ci rc uit

+ S /S

24 VD C
Tw o-w ire P roximity Switch

 Sourcing

I/O
IL X0

Rb Internal Ci rcui t

S/S
+
2 4VD C
Two- wire Proximity Sw itch
7_

7-25
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7.6.1.5 Wiring Input V.S. Three-Wire Proximity Switch

 Sinking Thre e-wi re Pro xi mity Switch

I/O
X0

In tern al Ci rc uit

S /S

+
24V DC

 Sourcing
Th r ee - wi r e P r o xim it y S wi tch

I/O
X0

Internal C irc uit

S /S

+
24VDC

7.6.1.6 Wiring Input V.S. Optoelectronic Switch

 Sinking

I/O
X0

Ab o ve
I nt ernal Circuit
15 V DC
_7 S/S
+
24 V DC
Op toe le ctro ni c swi tch

 Sourcing

I/O
X0

Ab ove I nt ernal Circuit

15 V DC
S /S
+
2 4V DC
Op toe le ctro ni c swi tch

7-26
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.6.1.7 Alternating Current Power Supply (Applicable to DVP08SM10N)

I/O
X0
Internal ci rcuit

Internal c irc uit

C OM

85~132VAC
50/60Hz

7.6.2 Wiring Digital Output

7.6.2.1 Output Circuits

There are three types of output units: relay outputs and transistor outputs (NPN and PNP).
1. Relay output

Relay output wiring requires different wire sizes depending on the provided power type, as specified in the diagram.
The terminal screw torque at the PLC is 2.0 kgf-cm (1.77 lbf-in). Only copper wires rated for 60/75°C can be used.
AC power supply DC power supply 7_
Terminal
Specifications
< 2 m m 6-8 mm 18-16
- AWG < 2 mm 6-8 mm 24-16
- AWG

I/O Rel ay I/O R elay

Y0 Y0

Wiring 10~ 250 VAC 5~30VD C

Max. 1.5A Ma x. 1 .5A

C0 C0
(DVP06SN11R: 6A) (DVP06S N11R: 6A)

*1. The relay output terminals within the common point COM (those with the same color in the diagram below) should
use the same voltage (10~240VAC or 5~24VDC).
C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

7-27
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2. NPN Transistor output

I/O(Sink)
UP

Y0 +
+ 5~30VDC Y0 24
0.3A V DC
0.3A

ZP
C0
UP

Y0 +
+ 24
0.3A 5-30 VDC
VDC
ZP

3. PNP Transistor output

UP

0.3A +
24
V DC
Y0
ZP

_7

7-28
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.6.2.2 Relay Output Circuit

Relay terminals have no polarity. They can be used with alternating current that passes through a load, or with direct current
that passes through a load. The maximum current that can pass through every relay terminal of DVP06SN11R is 6 A,
same as the maximum current that can pass through common terminal.

For other models, the maximum current that can pass through every relay terminal is 1.5A, and the maximum current that
can pass through common terminal is 5A. The lifetime of a relay terminal varies with the working voltage, the load type (the
power factor cosψ), and the current passing through the terminal. The relation is shown in the life cycle curve below.

2. Applicable to all module models (except

1. Only applicable to DVP06SN11R
DVP06SN11R)
1000 250VAC Resistive 120VAC Resistive
3000
250VAC cos=0.7
φ 30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
500 2000
24VDC Resistive 240VAC Inductive(cosψ = 0.4)
1000
250VAC cos=0.4
φ 120VAC Inductive(cosψ =0.4)
Operat ion(X 10 )
3

Operation(X10 )
500

3
200 24VDC t=7ms
300
200
100
100
30VDC
50 Inductive
50 (t=40ms )
24VDC t=15ms 30
20

0 2 4 6 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

Cont act Current (A ) Contact Current(A)

 Relay output circuit

C0 Y0 Y1 Y2 C0 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

7_

① Direct-current power supply

② Emergency stop using an external switch.
Fuse: to protect the output circuit, a fuse having a breaking capacity between 5 A to 8 A is connected to the
③
common terminal.(DVP06SN11R utilizes 6~9A）

④ Alternating-current power supply

7-29
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

A relay or a solenoid valve is used as a DC load. A diode is connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage
that occurs when the load is OFF.
Relay output
Relay/ Solenoid valve
Y0
VDC
⑤ D
+ pow er s upply
C0

D: 1 N400 1 diode

An electromagnetic contactor is used as an AC load. A resistor and a capacitor are connected in parallel to absorb
the surge voltage that occurs when the load is OFF.
Relay output
Electromagnetic contactor

Y7

R A C powe r supply
⑥ C
C0

R: 1 00~120
C: 0 .1 ~0.24 uF

A bulb (incandescent lamp) is used as a DC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the surge current
that occurs when the load is ON.
Re lay o utput
Bulk NTC
Y 0.1 /
Y 0.2
V DC
+ power supply
C0

_7 NTC:10

⑦
A bulb (neon lamp) is used as an AC load. A thermistor is connected in series to absorb the surge current that
occurs when the load is ON.
Rela y outp ut NT C
Bulk
Y0 .6/
Y0 .7

A C po we r supply

C0

NT C:1 0

Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y0.3 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y0.4 controls the
8
○ counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC ensure that there are
protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.

7-30
 Ch a pt er 7 D V P- S S e r i es D i g it a l I/O M o d u l e

7.6.2.3 Transistor Output Circuit

NPN PNP

C0

① Direct-current power supply

② Emergency stop
③ Fuse
1. A diode is connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage: used in low-power situations.
NPN PNP
Lo w pow er +
UP
Y + VD C
D
Y Lo w power
VD C
D
ZP
C
D: 1N4 001 Di od e or its equi va le nt D: 1N4 00 1Di od e or its equi va le nt

2. A diode and Zener are connected in parallel to absorb the surge voltage: used in high-power and power-
④ on/off frequently situations.
NPN PNP
UP
High power a nd
ON/OF F fr eque nt ly Hi g h p ow er an d + VD C +
O N /O FF
Y + fr equ en tly VD C
VD C Y
7_
ZD D
ZP D ZD
C
D: 1N4 00 1Diode o r it s equiva lent D: 1N4 001 Diode o r its e quivale nt
ZD: 9V Ze ne r, 5W ZD: 9V Zen er, 5W

Mutually exclusive output: For example, Y3 controls the clockwise rotation of the motor, and Y4 controls the
⑤ counterclockwise rotation of the motor. This interlock circuit and the program in the PLC ensure that there are
protective measures if an abnormal condition occurs.

7-31
 8
Chapter 8 DVP-S Series Analog Input/Output
Module

Table of Contents
8.1 General Specifications ............................................................................ 8-2
8.1.1 DVP04AD-S2/DVP06AD-S Specifications ....................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 DVP02DA-S/ DVP04DA-S2 Specifications ...................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 DVP06XA-S2 specifications .......................................................................... 8-4

8.2 Module Profiles ....................................................................................... 8-5

8.3 Terminals ................................................................................................ 8-6

8.4 Control Register ...................................................................................... 8-7

8.4.1 DVP04AD-S2 Control Register...................................................................... 8-7
8.4.2 DVP04DA-S2 Control Register .................................................................... 8-11
8.4.3 DVP06XA-S2 Control Register .................................................................... 8-15
8.4.4 DVP02DA-S Control Register ..................................................................... 8-20
8.4.5 DVP06AD-S Control Register ..................................................................... 8-24

8.5 Wiring ................................................................................................... 8-28

8.5.1 Wiring DVP04AD-S2 ................................................................................. 8-28
8.5.2 Wiring DVP04DA-S2 ................................................................................. 8-29
8.5.3 Wiring DVP06XA-S2 ................................................................................. 8-30
8.5.4 Wiring DVP06AD-S ................................................................................... 8-31
8.5.5 Wiring DVP02DA-S ................................................................................... 8-32

8.6 Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 8-33

8-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.1 General Specifications

8.1.1 DVP04AD-S2/DVP06AD-S Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module name DVP04AD-S2 DVP06AD-S

Number of inputs 4 6
Analog input channel 4 channel/each module 6 channel/each module
Analog-to-digital
Voltage input / Current input
conversion
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4VDC~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
Conversion time 3ms/channel
Up to 8 modules can be connected and no digital I/O will be taken. Numbering is from 0 to
Connect to DVP PLC CPU
7 in a consecutive order; the one closes to the PLC CPU is 0.
Weight 90g 91g

 Functional specifications

Analog/digital module Voltage input Current input

Rated input range ±10V -6~10V ±20mA -12~20mA

Digital conversion
±8,000 ±8,000 ±4,000 ±4,000
range
Hardware input limit*1 ±10.1V -6.08~10.08V ±20.2mA -12.16~20.16mA
Digital conversion
±8,192 ±8,192 ±4,096 ±4,096
limit*2
Hardware resolution 14 bits 14 bits 13 bits 13 bits
DVP06AD-S
200KΩ 250Ω
Input impedance
DVP04AD-S2
≧1MΩ 250Ω
Input impedance
Absolute input range*3 ±15V ±32mA

Digital data format 16-bits two’s complement number

Average function Yes, 04AD-S2:CR#2 ~ CR#5; 06AD-S: CR#2 ~ CR#7, setting range: K1 ~ K20

Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limits or channel disconnection.
_8 25° C / 77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall Accuracy
0° C to 55° C / 32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±1% of full scale.
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500VAC
*1. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input signal is
below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit, and a conversion limit
error appears. For example, in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal is -10.25 V, exceeding

8-2
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

the hardware lower limit, it also exceeds the conversion lower limit. The module uses the lower limit value (-8192) as
the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3. If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

8.1.2 DVP02DA-S/ DVP04DA-S2 Specifications

 Electrical specifications

Module name DVP02DA-S DVP04DA-S2

Number of outputs 2 4
Analog-to-digital conversion Voltage output / Current output
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
The module is with short circuit protection, but if the duration of a short circuit is too
Short circuit protection
long, it can cause circuit damage. Current output can be open circuit.
Up to 8 modules can be connected and no digital I/O will be taken. Numbering is from
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
0 to 7 in a consecutive order; the one closes to the PLC CPU is 0.
Weight 89g 94g

 Functional specifications

Analog/digital module Voltage output Current output

Rated output range 0~10V 2~10V 0~20mA 4~20mA
Digital conversion range 0~+4,000 0~+4,000 0~+4,000 0~+4,000
Digital conversion limit 0~+4,095 0~+4,095 0~+4,095 0~+4,095
Hardware resolution 12 bits 12 bits 12 bits 12 bits
Maximum output current 10mA －

Load impedance ≧1KΩ ≦500Ω

Output impedance ≦0.5Ω ≧1MΩ

25° C / 77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall accuracy
0° C to 55° C / 32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±1% of full scale.
Response time 3ms/channel

Digital data format 16-bits two’s complement number

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an 8_
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VAC.
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VAC.
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC.
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VAC.

8-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.1.3 DVP06XA-S2 specifications

 Electrical/common specification

Module name DVP06XA-S2

Number of inputs/outputs Input: 4 / output: 2
Analog-to-digital conversion Voltage input/current input/voltage output/ current output
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Digital data format 16-bits two’s complement number
Response time 3ms/channel
25° C / 77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall accuracy
0° C to 55° C / 32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±1% of full scale.
Connector type Removable terminal block
Up to 8 modules can be connected and no digital I/O will be taken. Numbering is from
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
0 to 7 in a consecutive order; the one closes to the PLC CPU is 0
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500VAC
Weight 91g

 A/D Functional specifications

Voltage input Current input
Analog input channel 4 channel/each module
Rated input range ±10V -6~10V ±20mA -12~20mA
Digital conversion range ±2,000 ±2,000 ±1,000 ±1,000
Hardware resolution 12 bits 12 bits 11 bits 11 bits
06XA-S2 input impedance ≧1MΩ 250Ω
Absolute input range*1 ±15V ±32mA
Average function Yes, CR#2 ~ CR#5, setting range: K1 ~ K20.
Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limits or channel disconnection.

*1. If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.
 D/A Functional specifications

_8 Analog/digital module Voltage output Current output

Analog output channel 2 channel/each module
Rated output range 0~10V 2~10V 0~20mA 4~20mA
Digital conversion range 0~+4,000 0~+4,000 0~+4,000 0~+4,000
Digital conversion limit 0~+4,095 0~+4,095 0~+4,095 0~+4,095
Hardware resolution 12bits 12bits 12bits 12bits
Maximum output current 10mA －
Load impedance ≧1KΩ ≦500Ω
Output impedance ≦0.5Ω ≧1MΩ
The module is with short circuit protection, but if the duration of a short circuit is too
Short circuit protection
long, it can cause circuit damage. Current output can be open circuit.

8-4
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

8.2 Module Profiles

60.00

3.00
3.00 4 6
1 25.20 60.00 3.40
5 7

8 14
10 12
2
11
90.00

3 13
3
3.00

Unit: mm

No. Name Description

Indicates the status of the power supply.
Power LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Run LED indicator Indicates the operating status of the module
1 Error status of the module.
ON: A serious module error has occurred
ERROR LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF):
A non-serious module error occurs, can NOT operate normally
2 Model name Model name of the module
3 DIN rail securing clip Secure the module on the set
The inputs are connected to sensors.
4 I/O Terminals
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
5 Terminal number Terminal number
6 Extension unit positioning hole For positioning between modules
7 Nameplate Label of the module
8 Extension module connection port Connect the modules
9 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module. 8_
10 DIN rail slot(35mm) For the DIN rail.
11 Securing module slot for securing the extension module.
12 RS-485communication port Provide RS-485 communication wiring
13 Power input port Expansion unit power input.
14 Extension port Connect the PLC or the modules.

8-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.3 Terminals
DVP04AD-S2 DVP06AD-S DVP04DA-S2 DVP02DA-S DVP06XA-S2
V1+ V+ V1+ V+ V1+
I1+ I+ I1+ I+ I1+
C O M1 COM COM COM COM1
FG V+ FG FG V2+
V2+ I+ V2+ V+ I2+
I2+ COM I2+ I+ COM2
C OM 2 COM COM
V+ FG
V3+
FG FG
．V3+
I+
COM ．V3+
． I3+
COM3

V+ V4+
I3+ I3+
I+ I4+
C OM 3 COM
COM COM4
FG FG
V4+ V+ V4+ V5+
I4+ I+ I4+ I5+
C OM 4 COM COM COM
FG V+ FG V6+
． I+
COM
． I6+
COM

_8

8-6
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

8.4 Control Register

8.4.1 DVP04AD-S2 Control Register
RS-485 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
CR# Parameter Latched Register name
address Reserved CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
For system use. Data length: 8 bits (b7 ~ b0)
Model code of DVP04AD-S2: H’90
0 H’4000 ○ R Model type
Users can read the model type by means of a program to check if the
expansion module exists.
Input mode setting: The factory setting is H0000.
Mode0：Voltage input mode（-10~+10V）
Mode1：Voltage input mode（-6~+10V）
1 H’4001 ○ R/W Input mode setting
Mode2：current input mode（-12~+20mA）
Mode3：current input mode（-20~+20mA）
Mode7：Disabling a channel
CR#1: used to set 4 internal channels working mode of analog input module. Every channel has four modes that can be
set individually. For example: if set CH1 to mode 0 (b2 ~ b0 = 000), CH2 to mode 1 (b5 ~ b3 = 001), CH3: mode 2 (b8 ~
b6 = 010), CH4: mode 3 (b11 ~ b9 = 011). Then CR#1 is set to H’0688 and the upper bits (b12 ~ b15) will be reserved.
The factory setting of CR#1 is H’0000.

2 H’4002 ○ R/W CH1average times

3 H’4003 ○ R/W CH2average times Average times setting of channels CH1 ~ CH4.
4 H’4004 ○ R/W CH3average times Setting range is K1 ~ K20 and factory setting is K10.

5 H’4005 ○ R/W CH4average times

Average value of
6 H’4006 ╳ R
CH1 input signal
Average value of
7 H’4007 ╳ R Display average value of CH1 ~ CH4 input signal.
CH2 input signal
The default value is 10, that is, the average value of the
Average value of
8 H’4008 ╳ R CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 input signal is calculated every 10 times.
CH3 input signal
Average value of
9 H’4009 ╳ R
CH4 input signal
present value of CH1
12 H’400C ╳ R
input signal
present value of CH2
13 H’400D ╳ R
input signal
Display present value of CH1 ~ CH4 input signal.
present value of CH3
14 H’400E ╳ R
input signal
15 H’400F ╳ R
present value of CH4 8_
input signal
To adjust OFFSET
18 H’4012 ○ R/W
value of CH1
To adjust OFFSET Offset setting of CH1 ~ CH4. Factory setting is K0, and unit is LSB.
19 H’4013 ○ R/W
value of CH2
Voltage input: setting range is K-4,000 ~ K4,000.
To adjust OFFSET
20 H’4014 ○ R/W Current input: setting range is K-4,000 ~ K4,000.
value of CH3
To adjust OFFSET
21 H’4015 ○ R/W
value of CH4
To adjust GAIN value
24 H’4018 ○ R/W GAIN setting of CH1 ~ CH4. Factory setting is K4,000 and unit is
of CH1
LSB.
To adjust GAIN value
25 H’4019 ○ R/W Voltage input: setting range is K-3,200 ~ K16,000.
of CH2

8-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

RS-485 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

CR# Parameter Latched Register name
address Reserved CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
To adjust GAIN value Current input: setting range is K-3,200 ~ K10,400.
26 H’401A ○ R/W
of CH3
To adjust GAIN value
27 H’401B ○ R/W
of CH4
CR#18~CR#27: Please notice that GAIN value – OFFSET value=+800 LSB ~ +12,000LSB (voltage) or +800 LSB ~ +6,400
LSB (current). If the value difference comes up small (within range), the output signal resolution is then slim, and the
variation is definitely larger. On the contrast, if the value difference exceeds the range, the output signal resolution
becomes larger, and the variation is definitely smaller.
The data register to save all error status. Please refer to error code
30 H’401E ╳ R Error status
chart for detail.
CR#30： Error status value (see the table below)
Error description Value b15~b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Abnormal power K1（H’1） 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Mode error K4（H’4） 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Offset/gain error K8（H’8） 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Abnormal digital value K32（H’20） 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Incorrect number of
K64（H’40） 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
values averaged
Instruction error K128（H’80） Reserved 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The input received by
K256（H’100） 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH1 out of the range
The input received by
K512（H’200） 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH2 out of the range
The input received by
K1024（H’400） 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH3 out of the range
The input received by
K2048（H’800） 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH4 out of the range
Note: Each error code corresponds to a bit (b0 ~ b11). Two or more errors may happen at the same time. 0 means
normal, and 1 means there is an error.
Communication Setting RS-485 communication address. Setting range is 01 ~ 254
31 H’401F ○ R/W
address setting and factory setting is K1.
Set the communication format.
For baud rate, the settings are
4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps.
Communication format:DVP04AD-S2

Communication ASCII：7 E 1，7 O 1，7 N 1，8 E 1，8 O 1，8 N 1，

32 H’4020 ○ R/W
format setting 7 E 2，7 O 2，7 N 2，8 E 2，8 O 2，8 N 2
_8 RTU：8 E 1，8 O 1，8 N 1，8 E 2，8 O 2，8 N 2
Factory default: ASCII,9600,7,E,1 (CR#32=H’0002)
Refer to ※CR#32 communication format settings at the end of this
table for more information.
Factory setting is H’0000. Take CH1 setting for example:
1. When b0=0, user can set OFFSET and GAIN value of CH1
Reset to factory
(CR#18, CR#24). When b0=1, inhibits user to adjust OFFSET and
setting and set
33 H’4021 ○ R/W GAIN value of CH1 (CR#18, CR#24).
characteristics
2. b1 means if characteristic register is latched. b1=0 (factory setting,
adjustable priority
latched), b1=1 (not latched).
3. When b2 is set to 1, all settings will be reset to factory setting.
CR#33 is used to set the internal function priority. For example: characteristic register. Output latched function will save
output setting in the internal memory before power loss.

8-8
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

RS-485 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

CR# Parameter Latched Register name
address Reserved CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
In hexadecimal to display software version. For example: H’010A
34 H’4022 ○ R Firmware version
means 1.0A.
35~48 System used.
Symbols:

○ means latched.
╳ means not latched.
R means can read data by using FROM instruction or RS-485.
W means can write data by using TO instruction or RS-485.LSB（Least Significant Bits）:
1. Voltage input:1LSB=10V/8,000=1.25mV
2. Current input:1LSB=20mA/4,000=5μA
※Added the RESET function for 04AD-S2 with firmware V4.16 or later. Connect the module power input to 24 VDC and
write H’4352 into CR#0 and then turn the power off and on again; all parameters in modules, including communication
parameters are restored to factory defaults.

※ The corresponding parameters address H’4000 ~ H’4022 of CR#0 ~ CR#34 are provided for users to read/ write data
via RS-485 communication.

※ Function codes: 03’H is for reading data from registers. 06’H is for writing a word data into registers. 10’H is for writing
multiple word data into registers.

※ If you want to use Modbus address in decimal format, you can transfer a hexadecimal register to decimal format and
then add one to have it become a decimal Modbus register address. For example, transferring the address “H’4000” of
CR#0 in hexadecimal format to decimal format, to have the result 16384 and then adding one to it, you have 16385,
the Modbus address in decimal format.

※ DVP04AD-S2 CR#32communication format settings: for modules with firmware V4.14 or previous versions, b11~b8
data format selection is not available. For ASCII mode, the format is fixed to 7, E, 1 (H’00XX) and for RTU mode, the
format is fixed to 8, E, 1 (H’C0xx/H’80xx). For modules with firmware V4.15 or later, refer to the following table for setups.
Note that the original code H’C0XX/H’80XX will be seen as RTU, 8, E, 1 for modules with firmware V4.15 or later.

8_

8-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

b15~b12 b11~b8 b7~b0

ASCII/RTU
exchange low and high byte of CRC Data format Baud rate
check code
Description
H'0 ASCII H'0 7，E，1*1 H'01 4800bps

RTU， H'1 8，E，1 H'02 9600bps

H'8 do NOT exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'2 7，N，1*1 H'04 19200bps

RTU， H'3 8，N，1 H'08 38400bps

H'C do NOT exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'4 7，O，1*1 H'10 57600bps

H'5 8，O，1 H'20 115200bps

H'6 7，E，2*1
H'7 8，E，2
H'8 7，N，2*1
H'9 8，N，2
H'A 7，O，2*1
H'B 8，O，2

Ex: Write H’C310 into CR#32 for a result of RTU, exchange low and high byte of CRC check code, 8,N,1 and baud rate
at 57600 bps.

*1. This is only available for ASCII format.

 Adjust A/D Conversion Characteristic Curves

Voltage input mode:
+8,000
Mode 0
Digital
+4,000
Mode 0 of CR#1: GAIN=5V (4,000LSB), OFFSET=0V (0LSB).
output Mode 1
Mode 1 of CR#1: GAIN=6V (4,800LSB), OFFSET=2V (1,600LSB).
5V 6V
0 Voltage input value when digital output is 4,000
-10V -6V 2V 10V GAIN:
GAIN Setting range is -3,200LSB ~ +16,000LSB.
Voltage input value when digital output is 0
-4,000 OFFSET:
Setting range: -4,000LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
Voltage input GAIN－OFFSET: Setting range is +800LSB ~ +12,000LSB.
-8,000

Current input mode:

_8 +4,000
Mode 3
Mode 2 of CR#1: GAIN=20mA (4,000LSB), OFFSET=4mA (800LSB).
Digital
Mode 2 Mode 3 of CR#1: GAIN=20mA (4,000LSB), OFFSET=0mA (0LSB).
output
Current input value when digital output is +4,000.
GAIN:
Setting range is -3,200LSB ~ +10,400LSB.
-20mA -12mA 0
Current input value when digital output value is 0.
4mA 20mA OFFSET:
OFFSET GAIN Setting range is -4,000LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
GAIN－OFFSET: Setting range is +800LSB ~ +6,400LSB.

Current input
-4,000

The chart above is to adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of voltage input mode and current input mode. Users can
adjust conversion characteristic curve by changing OFFSET values (CR#18 ~ CR#21) and GAIN values (CR#24 ~ CR#27)
depend on application.

8-10
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

8.4.2 DVP04DA-S2 Control Register

RS-485
CR# Parameter Latched Register name b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
address
For system use.Data length: 8 bits (b7 ~ b0)
0 H’4032 ○ R Model type Model code of DVP04DA-S2: H’91
Users can read the model type by means of a program to check if the
expansion module exists.
Reserved CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Input mode setting: The factory setting is H’0000.
1 H’4033 ○ R/W Output mode setting Mode 0: Voltage output mode (0V ~ +10V)
Mode 1: Voltage output mode (2V ~ +10V)
Mode 2: Current output mode (4mA ~ +20mA)
Mode 3: Current output mode (0mA ~ +20mA)
CR#1: used to set 2 internal channels working mode of analog output module. Every channel has four modes that can
be set individually. For example: if set CH1 to mode 2 (b2 ~ b0 = 010), CH2 to mode 1 (b5 ~ b3 = 001), CH3: mode 0 (b8
~ b6 = 000), CH4: mode 0 (b11 ~ b9 = 000). Then CR#1 is set to H’000A and the upper bits (b12 ~ b15) will be reserved.
The factory setting of CR#1 is H’0000.
6 H’4038 ╳ R/W CH1output value
7 H’4039 ╳ R/W CH2output value The output value of CH1~CH4, setting range: K0~K4,000.
8 H’403A ╳ R/W CH3output value The factory setting is K0, unit is LSB.

9 H’403B ╳ R/W CH4output value

To adjust OFFSET
18 H’4044 ○ R/W
value of CH1
To adjust OFFSET Offset setting of CH1 ~ CH4. Setting range: K-2,000~K2,000.
19 H’4045 ○ R/W
value of CH2 Factory setting is K0 and unit is LSB.
To adjust OFFSET Voltage setting range is -2,000 ~ +2,000.
20 H’4046 ○ R/W
value of CH3 Current setting range is -2,000 ~ +2,000.(LSB)
To adjust OFFSET
21 H’4047 ○ R/W
value of CH4
To adjust GAIN value
24 H’404A ○ R/W
of CH1
To adjust GAIN value GAIN setting of CH1 ~ CH4. Setting range: K0~K4,000.
25 H’404B ○ R/W
of CH2 Factory setting is K2,000 and unit is LSB.
To adjust GAIN value Voltage setting range is 0 ~ +4,000.
26 H’404C ○ R/W
of CH3 Current setting range is 0 ~ +4,000.(LSB)
To adjust GAIN value
27 H’404D ○ R/W
of CH4
CR#18~CR#27: Please notice that GAIN value – OFFSET value=+400 LSB ~ +6,000LSB (voltage or current). If the value
difference comes up small (within range), the output signal resolution is then slim and the variation is definitely larger.
On the contrast, if the value difference exceeds the range, the output signal resolution becomes larger, and the variation
is definitely smaller.
Data register to save all error status. Please refer to error code chart
8_
30 H’4050 ╳ R Error status
for detail.

8 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

RS-485
CR# Parameter Latched Register name b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
address
CR#30：Error status value (see the table below)
Error description Value b15~b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Abnormal power K1（H’1） 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Scale over error K2（H’2） 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Mode error K4（H’4） 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Offset/gain error K8（H’8） Reserved 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Abnormal digital value K32（H’20） 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Incorrect number of
K64（H’40） 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
values averaged
Instruction error K128（H’80） 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: Each error code corresponds to a bits(b0 ~ b7). Two or more errors may happen at the same time. 0 means
normal, and 1 means there is an error.
Ex: When the digital input exceeds 4000, the scale over (K2) error will be displayed; when the analog output
exceeds 10V, Abnormal digital value (K32) and scale over (K2) error states will be displayed at the same time.
Communication Setting RS-485 communication address.
31 H’4051 ○ R/W
address setting Setting range is 01 ~ 254 and factory setting is K1.
Used to set communication format. For baud rate, the settings are
4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps.
Communication format:
DVP04DA-S2

Communication ASCII：7 E 1，7 O 1，7 N 1，8 E 1，8 O 1，8 N 1，

32 H’4052 ○ R/W
format setting 7 E 2，7 O 2，7 N 2，8 E 2，8 O 2，8 N 2
RTU：8 E 1，8 O 1，8 N 1，8 E 2，8 O 2，8 N 2
Factory default: ASCII,9600,7,E,1 (CR#32=H’0002)
Refer to ※CR#32 communication format settings at the end of this
table for more information.
Reserved CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Factory setting is H’0000.Take CH1 setting for example:
Reset to factory 1. When b0=0, user can set OFFSET and GAIN value of CH1 (CR#18,
setting and set CR#24). When b0=1, inhibits user to adjust OFFSET and GAIN
33 H’4053 ○ R/W
characteristics value of CH1 (CR#18, CR#24).
adjustable priority 2. b1 means if characteristic register is latched. b1=0 (factory setting,
latched), b1=1 (not latched).
3. When b2 is set to 1, all settings will be reset to factory setting.

_8 CR#33 is used to set the internal function priority. For example: characteristic register. Output latched function will save
output setting in the internal memory before power loss.
In hexadecimal to display software version. For example: H’010A
34 H’4054 ○ R Firmware version
means 1.0A.
35~48 System used
Symbols:

○ Means latched.
╳ Means not latched.
R means can read data by using FROM instruction or RS-485.
W means can write data by using TO instruction or RS-485.
LSB(Least Significant Bits):
1. Voltage output: 1LSB =10V/4,000=2.5mV
2. Current output:1LSB =20mA/4,000=5μA

8-12
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

※ Added the RESET function for 04AD-S2 with firmware V4.16 or later. Connect the module power input to 24 VDC and
write H’4352 into CR#0 and then turn the power off and on again; all parameters in modules, including communication
parameters are restored to factory defaults.

※ The corresponding parameters address H’4032 ~ H’4054 of CR#0 ~ CR#34 are provided for users to read/ write data
via RS-485 communication.

※ Function codes: 03’H is for reading data from registers. 06’H is for writing a word data into registers. 10’H is for writing
multiple word data into registers

※ If you want to use Modbus address in decimal format, you can transfer a hexadecimal register to decimal format and
then add one to have it become a decimal Modbus register address. For example, transferring the address “H’4032” of
CR#0 in hexadecimal format to decimal format, to have the result 16434 and then adding one to it, you have 16435,
the Modbus address in decimal format.

※ DVP04DA-S2 CR#32 communication format settings: for modules with firmware V4.14 or previous versions, b11~b8
data format selection is not available. For ASCII mode, the format is fixed to 7, E, 1 (H’00XX) and for RTU mode, the
format is fixed to 8, E, 1 (H’C0xx/H’80xx). For modules with firmware V4.15 or later, refer to the following table for
setups. Note that the original code H’C0XX/H’80XX will be seen as RTU, 8, E, 1 for modules with firmware V4.15 or
later.

b15~b12 b11~b8 b7~b0

ASCII/RTU
exchange low and high byte of CRC Data format Baud rate
check code
Description
H'0 ASCII H'0 7，E，1*1 H'01 4800 bps

RTU， H'1 8，E，1 H'02 9600 bps

H'8 do NOT exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'2 7，N，1*1 H'04 19200 bps

RTU， H'3 8，N，1 H'08 38400 bps

H'C do NOT exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'4 7，O，1*1 H'10 57600 bps

H'5 8，O，1 H'20 115200 bps

H'6 7，E，2*1
H'7 8，E，2
H'8 7，N，2*1
H'9 8，N，2 8_
H'A 7，O，2*1
H'B 8，O，2

Ex: Write H’C310 into CR#32 for a result of RTU, exchange low and high byte of CRC check code, 8,N,1 and baud rate at
57600 bps.

Note *1: This is only available for ASCII format.

8-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Adjusting D/A Conversion Characteristic Curves

Voltage output mode:

10V
mode 1
Mode 0 of CR#1: GAIN=5V（2,000LSB）
，OFFSET=0V（0LSB）.

Mode 1 of CR#1: GAIN=6V（2,400LSB）

，OFFSET=2V（800LSB）.
mode 0
6V GAIN
5V The setting range of voltage output value when digital
GAIN：
voltage
input value is K2,000 should be 0LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
output
The setting range of voltage output value when digital
2V OFFSET：
input value is K0 should be -2,000LSB ~ +2,000LSB.
0 +2,000 +4,000
OFFSET

Digital input
GAIN - OFFSET： Setting range: +400LSB ~ +6,000LSB.

Current output mode:

20mA Mode 2 of CR#1: GAIN=12mA（2,400LSB）
，OFFSET=4mA（800LSB）.
mode 2

Mode 3 of CR#1: GAIN=10mA（2,000LSB）

，OFFSET=0mA（0LSB）.
mode 3
12mA
10mA GAIN The setting range of current output when digital input
GAIN：
value is K2,000 should be 0LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
current
output The setting range of current output when digital input
OFFSET：
4mA value is K0 should be -2,000LSB ~ +2,000LSB.
0
+2,000 +4,000
OFFSET
GAIN - OFFSET： Setting range: +400LSB ~ +6,000LSB.
digital input

The charts above are D/A conversion characteristic curve of voltage output mode and current output mode. Users can
adjust conversion characteristic curve by changing OFFSET values (CR#18 ~ CR#21) and GAIN values (CR#24 ~
CR#27) depend on application.

_8

8-14
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

8.4.3 DVP06XA-S2 Control Register

RS-485 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
CR# parameter Latched Register name
CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
address
For system use. Data length: 8 bits (b7 ~ b0)
Model code of DVP06XA-S2: H’D4
#0 H’40C8 ○ R Model type
Users can read the model type by means of a program to check if the
extension module exists.
Input mode setting: (CH1 ~ CH4)
Mode 0: Voltage input mode (-10V ~ +10V)
Mode 1: Voltage input mode (-6V ~ +10V)
Mode 2: Current input mode (-12mA ~ +20mA)
Mode 3: Current input mode (-20mA ~ +20mA)
#1 H’40C9 ○ R/W Input mode setting
Output mode setting: (CH5 ~ CH6)
Mode 0: Voltage output mode (0V ~ 10V)
Mode 1: Voltage output mode (2V ~ 10V)
Mode 2: Current output mode (4mA ~ 20mA)
Mode 3: Current output mode (0mA ~ 20mA)
CR#1: b11~b0 are used to set 4 internal channels working mode of analog input module (AD). b12~b15 are used to set 2
channels working mode of analog output module (DA). Every channel has four modes that can be set individually. For
example: if setting CH1 to mode 0 (b2~b0=000), CH2 to mode 1 (b5~b3=001), CH3: mode 2 (b8~b6=010), CH4: mode 3
(b11~b9=011), b0~b11 need be set to H’688. If setting CH5: mode 2 (b13~b12=10), CH6: mode 1 (b15~b14=01),
b12~b15 need be set to H’6. Factory Setting is H’0000.
CH1 average
#2 H’40CA ○ R/W
number
CH2 average The number of readings used for “average” on channels CH1 ~ CH4.
#3 H’40CB ○ R/W
number Setting range is K1 ~ K20 and factory setting is K10. Please note that
CH3 average the average number of writes to CR#2~CR#5 only needs to be written
#4 H’40CC ○ R/W
number once. If written continuously, the average value cannot be obtained.
CH4 average
#5 H’40CD ○ R/W
number
Average value of
#6 H’40CE ╳ R
CH1 input signal
Average value of Display average value of CH1 ~ CH4 input signal.
#7 H’40CF ╳ R
CH2 input signal Assume that the average number of times is set to 10, that is, an
Average value of average is taken every 10 accumulated input signals from channels
#8 H’40D0 ╳ R
CH3 input signal CH1~CH4.
Average value of
#9 H’40D1 ╳ R
CH4 input signal
CH5 output signal
#10 H’40D2 ╳ R/W
value Output value of CH5 ~ CH6, the setting range is K0 ~ K4,000. The
CH6 output signal factory setting is K0 and the unit is LSB.
#11 H’40D3 ╳ R/W
value
#12 H’40D4 ╳ R
Present value of
CH1 input signal
8_
Present value of
#13 H’40D5 ╳ R
CH2 input signal
Display present value of CH1 ~ CH4 input signal
Present value of
#14 H’40D6 ╳ R
CH3 input signal
Present value of
#15 H’40D7 ╳ R
CH4 input signal
To adjust OFFSET
#18 H’40DA ○ R/W
value of CH1
To adjust OFFSET Offset setting of CH1 ~ CH4. Factory setting is K0 and unit is LSB.
#19 H’40DB ○ R/W
value of CH2
To adjust OFFSET Voltage input: setting range is K-1,000LSB ~ K1,000LSB.
#20 H’40DC ○ R/W Current input: setting range is K-1,000LSB ~ K1,000LSB.
value of CH3
To adjust OFFSET
#21 H’40DD ○ R/W
value of CH4

8-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

RS-485 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

CR# parameter Latched Register name
CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
address
To adjust OFFSET
#22 H’40DE ○ R/W
value of CH5 Offset setting of CH5 ~ CH6. Factory setting is K0 and unit is LSB.
To adjust OFFSET The setting range is K-2,000LSB ~ K2,000LSB.
#23 H’40DF ○ R/W
value of CH6
To adjust GAIN
#24 H’40E0 ○ R/W
value of CH1 GAIN setting of CH1~CH4. Factory setting is K1,000 and unit is LSB.
To adjust GAIN Voltage input: setting range is K-800LSB ~ K4,000LSB.
#25 H’40E1 ○ R/W
value of CH2
To adjust GAIN Current input: setting range is K-800LSB ~ K2,600LSB.
#26 H’40E2 ○ R/W
value of CH3 Please notice that GAIN VALUE - OFFSET VALUE=+200LSB ~
To adjust GAIN +3,000LSB (voltage) or +200LSB ~ +1,600LSB (current)
#27 H’40E3 ○ R/W
value of CH4
To adjust GAIN GAIN setting of CH5 ~ CH6. Factory setting is K2,000 and unit is LSB.
#28 H’40E4 ○ R/W
value of CH5
The setting range is K0 ~ K4,000.
To adjust GAIN Please notice that GAIN value – OFFSET value= +400LSB ~ +6,000LSB
#29 H’40E5 ○ R/W
value of CH6
(voltage or current).
CR#24~CR#29: If the value difference comes up small (within range), the output signal resolution is then slim and the
variation is definitely larger. On the contrast, if the value difference exceeds the range, the output signal resolution
becomes larger and the variation is definitely smaller.
#30 H’40E6 ╳ R Error status Data register stores the error status, see error code chart for details.
Communication RS-485 communication address.
#31 H’40E7 ○ R/W
address setting Setting range is K1 ~ K254 and factory setting is K1.
For baud rate, the settings are 4,800 / 9,600 / 19,200 / 38,400 / 57,600 /
115,200 bps.
Communication format: For DVP06XA-S2
ASCII：7,E,1 / 7,O,1 / 7,N,1 / 8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1 / 7,E,2 /
Communication
#32 H’40E8 ○ R/W 7,O,2 / 7,N,2 / 8,E,2 / 8,O,2 / 8,N,2
format setting
RTU ：8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1 / 8,E,2 / 8,O,2 / 8,N,2
Factory default: ASCII,9600,7,E,1 (CR#32=H’0002)
Refer to ※CR#32 communication format settings at the end of this
table for more information.
Example: Setting of CH1
1. When b0=0, user can set OFFSET and GAIN value of CH1 (CR#18,
CR#24). When b0=1, inhibits user to adjust OFFSET and GAIN value
of CH1 (CR#18, CR#24).
Reset to factory 2. b1 means if characteristic register is latched. b1=0 (factory setting,
setting and set latched), b1=1 (not latched).
#33 H’40E9 ○ R/W
characteristics 3. b2: Set to 1 and PLC will be reset to factory settings.
adjustable priority
The setting of CH5 ~ CH6, give CH5 setting for example (b13, b12):
_8 00: can be adjusted, latched. 01: can be adjusted,
non-latched.(DVP06XA-S2 do NOT support this function, always
remain latched.)
10: inhibits adjust. 11: reset to factory settings and clear b12, b13 to 0.
CR#33 is used to set the internal function priority. For example: characteristic register. Output latched function will save
output setting in the internal memory before power loss.
Display software version in hexadecimal. Example: H’010A=version
#34 H’40EA ○ R Software version
1.0A.
#35 ~ #48 System used
Symbols: ○ means latched. R means can read data by using FROM instruction or RS-485. ╳ means non-latched.
W means can write data by using TO instruction or RS-485.
LSB (Least Significant Bits): 1. Voltage input: 1LSB=10V/2,000=5mV. 2. Current input: 1LSB=20mA/1,000=20μA.
1. Voltage output: 1LSB=10V/4,000=2.5mV. 2. Current output: 1LSB=20mA/4,000=5μA.

8-16
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

※ Added the RESET function for 06XA-S2 with firmware V4.16 or later. Connect the module power input to 24 VDC and
write H’4352 into CR#0 and then turn the power off and on again; all parameters in modules, including communication
parameters are restored to factory defaults.

※ The corresponding parameters address H’40C8 ~ H’40EA of CR#0 ~ CR#34 will allow user to read/write data via
RS-485 communication.

※ Function codes: 03’H is for reading data from registers. 06’H is for writing a word data into registers. 10’H is for writing
multiple word data into registers.
CR#30 is the error code. Please refer to the chart below.
Error Description Value b15~ b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Abnormal power K1 (H’1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
The D/A output exceeds
K2 (H’2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
the range.
Mode error K4 (H’4) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Offset/gain error K8 (H’8) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Hardware malfunction K16 (H’10) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Abnormal digital value K32 (H’20) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Incorrect number of
K64 (H’40) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
values averaged
Reserved
Instruction error K128 (H’80) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The input received by
K256 (H’100) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH1 is out of the range.
The input received by
K512 (H’200) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH2 is out of the range.
The input received by
K1024 (H’400) 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH3 is out of the range.
The input received by
K2048 (H’800) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CH4 is out of the range.
Note: Each error code corresponds to a bits(b0 ~ b11).
Two or more errors may happen at the same time. 0 means there normal, and 1 means there is an error.
Example: If the digital input exceeds 4,000, the error K2 will occur.
If the analog output exceeds 10V, the errors K2 and K32 will occur. (A/D does not support displaying the error K2.)
※ If you want to use Modbus address in decimal format, you can transfer a hexadecimal register to decimal format and
then add one to have it become a decimal Modbus register address. For example, transferring the address “H’40C8” of
CR#0 in hexadecimal format to decimal format, to have the result 16584 and then adding one to it, you have 16585,
the Modbus address in decimal format.

※ DVP06XA-S2 CR#32 communication format settings: for modules with firmware V4.14 or previous versions, b11~b8 8_
data format selection is not available. For ASCII mode, the format is fixed to 7, E, 1 (H’00XX) and for RTU mode, the
format is fixed to 8, E, 1 (H’C0xx/H’80xx). For modules with firmware V4.15 or later, refer to the following table for
setups. Note that the original code H’C0XX/H’80XX will be seen as RTU, 8, E, 1 for modules with firmware V4.15 or
later.

8-17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

b15 ~ b12 b11 ~ b8 b7 ~ b0

ASCII/RTU
exchange low and high byte of CRC Data format Baud rate
check code
Description
H'0 ASCII H'0 7,E,1*1 H'01 4800 bps
RTU, H'1 8,E,1 H'02 9600 bps
H'8 do not exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'2 7,N,1*1 H'04 19200 bps
RTU, H'3 8,N,1 H'08 38400 bps
H'C exchange low and high byte of
CRC check code H'4 7,O,1*1 H'10 57600 bps
H'5 8.O,1 H'20 115200 bps
H'6 7,E,2*1
H'7 8,E,2
H'8 7,N,2*1
H'9 8,N,2
H'A 7,O,2*1
H'B 8.O,2
Note *1: This is only available for ASCII format.

Ex: Write H’C310 into CR#32 for a result of RTU, exchange low and high byte of CRC check code, 8,N,1 and baud rate at
57600 bps.

 Analog/Digital Curves
 Adjusting the A/D Conversion Curves of CH1~Ch4
Voltage input mode:
Di gi tal ou tpu t
+2,0 00
Mode 0 of CR#1: GAIN=5V（1,000LSB）
，OFFSET=0V（0LSB）.
Mo de 0
Mode 1 of CR#1: GAIN=6V（1,200LSB）
，OFFSET=2V（400LSB）.
+1,0 00
Mo de 1
Voltage input value when digital output is 1,000. Setting
GAIN：
0 5V 6V range is -800LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
- 10 V - 6V 2V 1 0V
OFFSET GAIN
Vo lta ge in pu t Voltage input value when digital output is 0.
OFFSET：
- 1,0 00 Setting range is -1,000LSB ~ +1,000LSB

GAIN－OFFSET： Setting range is +200LSB~+3,000LSB

- 2,0 00

Current input mode:

D ig ita l o utp u t Mode 2 of CR#1: GAIN=20mA（1,000LSB）
，OFFSET=4mA（200LSB）.
Mo de 3
+1 ,00 0
Mo de 2 Mode 3 of CR#1: GAIN=20mA（1,000LSB）
，OFFSET=0mA（0LSB）.
Current input value when digital output is +1,000. Setting
GAIN：
-20 mA -12 mA C urren t in p ut range is -800LSB ~ +2,600LSB
_8
0
4 mA 2 0mA
Current input value when digital output value is 0. Setting
OF FSET GAIN
OFFSET：
range is -1,000LSB ~ +1,000LSB

-1, 00 0 GAIN-OFFSET： Setting range is +200LSB~+1,600LSB

Use the chart above to adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of voltage input mode and current input mode. Users
can adjust conversion characteristic curve by changing OFFSET values (CR#18~CR#21) and GAIN values
(CR#24~CR#27) according to application.

8-18
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

 Adjust the D/A Conversion Curves of CH5~CH6

Voltage output mode:

Voltage output
Mode 0 of CR#1: GAIN=5V（2,000LSB）
，OFFSET=0V（0LSB）.
10V
mode 1
Mode 1 of CR#1: GAIN=6V（2,400LSB）
，OFFSET=2V（800LSB）.
mode 0 Voltage output value when digital input value is K2,000.
GAIN：
6V
5V GAIN Setting range is 0LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
Voltage output value when digital input is K0. Setting range
OFFSET：
is -2,000LSB ~ +2,000LSB.
2V

0 +2,000
Digital
+4,000input
GAIN-OFFSET： Setting range is +400LSB~+6,000LSB
OFFSET

Current output mode:

Current output Mode 2 of CR#1: GAIN=12mA（2,400LSB）
，OFFSET=4mA（800LSB）.
20mA
Mode 2 Mode 3 of CR#1: GAIN=10mA（2,000LSB）
，OFFSET=0mA（0LSB）.
Current output value when digital input value is K2,000.
Mode 3 GAIN：
12mA
10mA GAIN Setting range is 0LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
Current output value when digital input is K0. Setting range
OFFSET：
is -2,000LSB ~ +2,000LSB.
4mA
Digital
0
+2,000 +4,000
input GAIN-OFFSET： Setting range is +400LSB~+6,000LSB
OFFSET

Use the chart above to adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of voltage output mode and current output mode. Users
can adjust conversion characteristic curve by changing OFFSET values (CR#14~CR#15) and GAIN values
(CR#18~CR#19) according to application.

8_

8-19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.4.4 DVP02DA-S Control Register

RS-485
CR# parameters Latched Register name b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
address
System used, data length is 8 bits (b7 ~ b0).
DVP-02DA model code=H’49.
#0 H’4032 ○ R Model type
User can read the data from program to check if there is extension
module.
Reserved CH2 CH1
Output mode setting: default setting is H’0000.
Mode 0: voltage output mode (0V ~ 10V).
Output mode
#1 H’4033 ○ R/W Mode 1: voltage output mode (2V ~ 10V).
setting
Mode 2: current output mode (4mA ~ 20mA).
Mode 3: current output mode (0mA ~ 20mA).
Mode 4: none use.
CR#1: used to set two internal channels working mode of analog output module. Every channel has four modes that can
be set individually. For example: if set CH1 to mode 2 (b2 ~ b0 = 010), CH2 to mode 1 (b5 ~ b3 = 001). It needs to set
CR#1 to H’000A and the upper bits (b6 ~ b15) will be reserved.
#10 H’403C ╳ R/W CH1 output value The output value of CH1~CH2, setting range is K0 ~ K4,000. Default
#11 H’403D ╳ R/W CH2 output value setting is K0 and unit is LSB.
To adjust OFFSET
#22 H’4048 ○ R/W It is used to set the OFFSET value of CH1 ~ CH2.
value of CH1
The setting range is K-2,000 ~ K2,000.
To adjust OFFSET
#23 H’4049 ○ R/W The default setting is K0 and unit is LSB.
value of CH2
#28 To adjust GAIN It is used to set the GAIN value of CH1 ~ CH2.
H’404E ○ R/W
value of CH1 The setting range is K0 ~ K4,000.
To adjust GAIN The default setting is K2,000 and unit is LSB.
#29 H’404F ○ R/W
value of CH2
CR#22~CR#29: Please be noticed that GAIN value – OFFSET value=+400LSB ~+6,000 LSB (voltage or current). When
this value within this range, the resolution of the output signal will be thin and the value variation will be larger. When this
value exceeds this range, the resolution of output signal will be thick and the variation of value will be smaller.
The data register to save all error status. Please refer to error code
#30 H’4050 ╳ R Error status
chart for detail.
CR#30 is the error code. Please refer to the following chart.
Error description Content b15 ~ b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Power source abnormal K1 (H’1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Analog input value error K2 (H’2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
_8 Setting mode error K4 (H’4) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Offset/gain error K8 (H’8) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Reserved
Digital range error K32 (H’20) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Average times setting K64 (H’40) 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
error
Instruction error K128 (H’80) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: Each error code will have corresponding bits (b0 ~ b7). Two or more errors may happen at the same time. 0 means
normal and 1 means error happened.
EX: if the digital input exceeds 4,000, error (K2) will occur. If the analog output exceeds 10V, both analog input value
error K2 and K32 will occur.
Communication It is used to set RS-485 communication address. The setting range is
#31 H’4051 ○ R/W
address setting from 01 to 254 and the default setting is K1.

8-20
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

RS-485
CR# parameters Latched Register name b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
address
It is used to set communication format.
For baud rate, the settings are
4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps.
Communication format:
Communication
#32 H’4052 ○ R/W ASCII：7,E,1 / 7,O,1 / 8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
format setting
RTU ：8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
Factory default: ASCII,9600,7,E,1 (CR#32=H’0002)
Refer to ※CR#32 communication format settings at the end of this
table for more information.
Reserved CH2 CH1
Output latched setting, default setting H’0000.
Give CH1 setting for example:
Reset to default 1. When b0=0, user can set OFFSET and GAIN value of CH1
setting and set (CR#22, CR#28). When b1=1, inhibits user to adjust OFFSET and
#33 H’4053 ○ R/W
characteristics GAIN value of CH1 (CR#22, CR#28).
adjustable priority 2. b1 means if characteristic register is latched. b1=0 (default setting,
latched), b1=1 (not latched).
3. When b2 is set to 1, all settings will be reset to default setting.

CR#33 is used to set the internal function priority. For example: characteristic register. Output latched function will save
output setting to the internal memory before power loss.
In hexadecimal to display software version. For
#34 H’4054 ○ R Firmware version.
example: H’010A means 1.0A.
#35 ~ #48 System used
Symbols: ○ means latched.
╳ means not latched.
R means can read data by using FROM instruction via RS-485.
W means can write data by using TO instruction via RS-485.
LSB (Least Significant Bits): 1. Voltage output: 1LSB=10V/4,000=2.5mV.
2. Current output: 1LSB=20mA/4,000=5μA.
※ Added the RESET function for modules with firmware V4.06 or later. Connect the module power input to 24 VDC and
write H’4352 into CR#0 and then turn the power off and on again; all parameters in modules, including communication
parameters are restored to factory defaults.

※ The corresponding parameters address H’4032 ~ H’4054 of CR#0 ~ CR#34 are provided for users to read/ write data
via RS-485 communication. 8_
※ If you want to use Modbus address in decimal format, you can transfer a hexadecimal register to decimal format and
then add one to have it become a decimal Modbus register address. For example, transferring the address “H’4032” of
CR#0 in hexadecimal format to decimal format, to have the result 16434 and then adding one to it, you have 16435,
the Modbus address in decimal format.

※ Function codes: 03’H is for reading data from registers. 06’H is for writing a word data into registers. 10’H is for writing
multiple word data into registers.

※ CR#32 communication format settings: for modules with firmware V4.04 or previous versions, b11~b8 data format
selection is not available. For ASCII mode, the format is fixed to 7, E, 1 (H’00XX) and for RTU mode, the format is
fixed to 8, E, 1 (H’C0xx/H’80xx). For modules with firmware V4.05 or later, refer to the following table for setups. Note
that the original code H’C0XX/H’80XX will be seen as RTU, 8, E, 1 for modules with firmware V4.05 or later.

8-21
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

b15 ~ b12 b11 ~ b8 b7 ~ b0

ASCII/RTU,
exchange low and high byte of CRC Data format Baud rate
check code
Description
H'0 ASCII H'0 7,E,1*1 H'01 4800 bps

RTU, H'1 8,E,1 H'02 9600 bps

H'8 do not exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'2 reserved H'04 19200 bps

RTU, H'3 8,N,1 H'08 38400 bps

H'C exchange low and high byte
of CRC check code H'4 7,O,1*1 H'10 57600 bps

H'5 8.O,1 H'20 115200 bps

Note *1: This is only available for ASCII format.

Ex: Write H’C310 into CR#32 for a result of RTU, exchange low and high byte of CRC check code, 8,N,1 and baud rate at
57600 bps.

_8

8-22
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

 Adjust D/A Conversion Curve

Voltage output mode:

10V Mode 0 of CR#1: GAIN=5V（2,000 LSB）

，OFFSET=0V（0 LSB）
mode 1

Mode 1 of CR#1: GAIN=6V（2,400 LSB）

，OFFSET=2V（800 LSB）
mode 0
6V GAIN The setting range of voltage output value when digital input
5V GAIN：
value is K2,000 should be 0LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
voltage
output The setting range of voltage output value when digital input
OFFSET：
2V value is K0 should be -2,000LSB ~ +2,000LSB.
0 +2,000 +4,000
OFFSET
GAIN－OFFSET： Setting range: +400 LSB~+6,000 LSB
Digital input

Current output mode:

20mA
mode 2
Mode 2 of CR#1: GAIN=12mA（2,400 LSB）
，OFFSET=4mA（800 LSB）

mode 3
Mode 3 pf CR#1: GAIN=10mA（2,000 LSB）
，OFFSET=0mA（0 LSB）
12mA
10mA GAIN
The setting range of current output when digital input value is
GAIN：
current K2,000 should be 0LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
output
4mA The setting range of current output when digital input value is
OFFSET：
K0 should be -2,000LSB ~ +2,000LSB.
0
+2,000 +4,000
OFFSET

digital input
GAIN－OFFSET： Setting range: +400 LSB~+6,000 LSB

The charts above are D/A conversion characteristic curve of voltage output mode and current output mode. Users can
adjust conversion characteristic curve by changing OFFSET values (CR#14 ~ CR#15) and GAIN values (CR#18 ~
CR#19) depend on application.

8_

8-23
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.4.5 DVP06AD-S Control Register

RS-485
CR
parameter Latched Register content b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
#
address
Set by the system. Data length: 8 bits (b7 ~ b0).
#0 H’4000 ○ R Model name
DVP06AD-S model code=H’C8.
Reserved CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Input mode: Default=H’0000.
Mode 0: Voltage input (-10V ~ +10V)
#1 H’4001 ○ R/W Input mode setting
Mode 1: Voltage input (-6V ~ +10V)
Mode 2: Current input (-12mA ~ +20mA)
Mode 3: Current input (-20mA ~ +20mA)
CR#1: The working mode of the 6 channels in the analog input module. There are 4 modes for each channel which
can be set up separately. For example, if the user needs to set up CH1: mode 0 (b1 ~ b0=00) and CH2: mode 1 (b3 ~
b2=01), CH3: mode 2 (b5 ~ b4=10), CH4: mode 3 (b7 ~ b6=11), CH5: mode 0 (b9 ~ b8=00), CH6: mode 1 (b11 ~
b10=01), CR#1 has to be set as H’04E4 and the higher bits (b12 ~ b15) have to be reserved. Default value=H’0000.
#2 H’4002 ○ R/W CH1 ~ CH6 CH2 CH1
#3 H’4003 ○ R/W Average times CH4 CH3
#4 H’4004 ○ R/W setting CH6 CH5
CR#2 ~ CR#4: The settings of average times of the signals at CH1 ~ CH6. Range of settings in CH1 ~ CH6: K1 ~ K20.
For example, if the average time at CH1 is to be set as K10 and CH2 as K18, CR#2 must be set as H’120A. CR#3 ~ 4
apply the same rule. The default setting of each channel=K10. Default settings of CR#2 ~ CR#4 are all H’0A0A.
#6 H’4006 ╳ R CH1 input average
#7 H’4007 ╳ R CH2 input average
#8 H’4008 ╳ R CH3 input average
Average of input signals at CH1 ~ CH6
#9 H’4009 ╳ R CH4 input average
#10 H’400A ╳ R CH5 input average
#11 H’400B ╳ R CH6 input average
CR#6 ~ CR#11: The average of the signals at CH1~CH6 obtained from the settings in CR#2~CR#4. For example, if the
settings in CR#2~CR#4 is 10, the content in CR#6~CR#11 will be the average of the most recent 10 signals at
CH1~CH6.
CH1 input present
#12 H’400C ╳ R
value
CH2 input present
#13 H’400D ╳ R
value
CH3 input present
#14 H’400E ╳ R
value
Present value of input signals at CH1 ~ CH6
CH4 input present
#15 H’400F ╳ R
value
CH5 input present
#16 H’4010 ╳ R
_8 value
CH6 input present
#17 H’4011 ╳ R
value
Adjusted OFFSET
#18 H’4012 ○ R/W
value of CH1
Adjusted OFFSET
#19 H’4013 ○ R/W
value of CH2
OFFSET settings at CH1 ~ CH6. Default=K0; Unit: LSB.
Adjusted OFFSET
#20 H’4014 ○ R/W When voltage input, range: K-4,000LSB ~ K4,000LSB.
value of CH3
When current input, range: K-4,000LSB ~ K4,000LSB.
Adjusted OFFSET
#21 H’4015 ○ R/W Please refer to this instruction sheet when setting OFFSET and GAIN.
value of CH4
Adjusted OFFSET
#22 H’4016 ○ R/W
value of CH5
#23 H’4017 ○ R/W Adjusted OFFSET

8-24
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

RS-485
CR
parameter Latched Register content b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
#
address
value of CH6
Adjusted GAIN
#24 H’4018 ○ R/W
value of CH1
Adjusted GAIN
#25 H’4019 ○ R/W
value of CH2
Adjusted GAIN GAIN settings at CH1 ~ CH6. Default=K4,000; Unit: LSB.
#26 H’401A ○ R/W
value of CH3 When voltage input, range: K-3,200LSB ~ K16,000LSB.
Adjusted GAIN When current input, range: K-3,200LSB ~ K10,400LSB.
#27 H’401B ○ R/W
value of CH4 Please refer to this instruction sheet when setting OFFSET and GAIN.
Adjusted GAIN
#28 H’401C ○ R/W
value of CH5
Adjusted GAIN
#29 H’401D ○ R/W
value of CH6
CR#18 ~ CR#29: Please note that: GAIN value – OFFSET value=+800LSB ~ +12,000LSB (voltage) or +800LSB ~
+6,400LSB (current) When GAIN – OFFSET is small (steep oblique), the resolution of input signal will be finer and
variation on the digital value will be greater. When GAIN – OFFSET is big (gradual oblique), the resolution of input
signal will be rougher and variation on the digital value will be smaller.
Register for storing all error status.
#30 H’401E ╳ R Error status
See the table of error status for more information.
CR #30: Error status value (see the table below):
Error status Content b15 ~ b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Abnormal power supply K1 (H’1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Incorrect mode setting K4 (H’4) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Offset/Gain error K8 (H’8) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Abnormal digital range K32 (H’20) Reserved 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Incorrect average times
K64 (H’40) 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
setting
Instruction error K128 (H’80) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bits (b0 ~ b7) and there may be more than 2 errors
occurring at the same time. 0=normal; 1=error
Communication For setting RS-485 communication address. Range: 01 ~ 254.
#31 H’401F ○ R/W
address setting Default=K1.
For baud rate, the settings are
4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps.
Communication format:
Communication ASCII：7,E,1 / 7,O,1 / 8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
#32 H’4020 ○ R/W
format setting RTU ：8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
Factory default: ASCII, 9600, 7, E,1 (CR#32=H’0002) 8_
Refer to ※CR#32 communication format settings at the end of this
table for more information.
Return to default CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Take the setting of CH1 for example:
Return to default 1. b0: Switch for upper/lower bound alarm on the input value for the
setting; channel. 0=disabled; 1=enabled (default).
#33 H’4021 ○ R/W
OFFSET/GAIN 2. b1: OFFSET/GAIN tuning. 0=forbidden; 1=allowed (default).
tuning authorization 3. When b12 ~ b15=1, all values in CH1 ~ CH6 will return to default
settings. b12 ~ b15 will return to 0 automatically after the setting is
completed.
CR#33 for input mode, setting of average times, OFFSET value and GAIN value will be reset after returning to default
settings.

8-25
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

RS-485
CR
parameter Latched Register content b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
#
address
Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. version 1.00 is
#34 H’4022 ○ R Firmware version
indicated as H’0100.
#35 ~ #48 For system use
Symbols: ○: Latched (when written in through RS-485 communication).
╳: Non-latched.
R: Able to read data by FROM instruction or RS-485 communication.
W: Able to write data by TO instruction or RS-485 communication.
LSB (Least Significant Bits): 1. For voltage input: 1LSB=10V/8,000=1.25mV.
2. For current input: 1LSB=20mA/4,000=5μA.
※ Added the RESET function for modules with firmware V4.12 or later. Connect the module power input to 24 VDC and
write H’4352 into CR#0 and then turn the power off and on again; all parameters in modules, including communication
parameters are restored to factory defaults.

※ The corresponding parameters address H’4000 ~ H’4022 of CR#0 ~ CR#34 are provided for users to read/ write data
via RS-485 communication.

※ If you want to use Modbus address in decimal format, you can transfer a hexadecimal register to decimal format and
then add one to have it become a decimal Modbus register address. For example, transferring the address “H’4000” of
CR#0 in hexadecimal format to decimal format, to have the result 16384 and then adding one to it, you have 16385,
the Modbus address in decimal format.

※ Function codes: 03’H is for reading data from registers. 06’H is for writing a word data into registers. 10’H is for writing
multiple word data into registers.

※The latched CR must be written through RS-485 communication to have the power-off latching function. If it is written by
the host using the TO/DTO command, it will not have the power-off latching function.

※ CR#32 communication format settings: for modules with firmware V4.10 or previous versions, b11~b8 data format
selection is not available. For ASCII mode, the format is fixed to 7, E, 1 (H’00XX) and for RTU mode, the format is
fixed to 8, E, 1 (H’C0xx/H’80xx). For modules with firmware V4.11 or later, refer to the following table for setups. Note
that the original code H’C0XX/H’80XX will be seen as RTU, 8, E, 1 for modules with firmware V4.11 or later.
b15 ~ b12 b11 ~ b8 b7 ~ b0
ASCII/RTU,
exchange low and high byte of CRC Data format Baud rate
check code
Description
H'0 ASCII H'0 7,E,1*1 H'01 4800 bps
_8 RTU, H'1 8,E,1 H'02 9600 bps
H'8 do not exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'2 reserved H'04 19200 bps

RTU, H'3 8,N,1 H'08 38400 bps

H'C exchange low and high byte
of CRC check code H'4 7,O,1*1 H'10 57600 bps

H'5 8.O,1 H'20 115200 bps

Note *1: This is only available for ASCII format.

Ex: Write H’C310 into CR#32 for a result of RTU, exchange low and high byte of CRC check code, 8,N,1 and baud rate at
57600 bps.

8-26
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

 Adjusting A/D Conversion Curve

Voltage input mode:

+ 0 0 CR#1 mode 0: GAIN=5V（4,000LSB）

，OFFSET=0V（0LSB）.
Mode 0
digital output

CR#1 mode 1: GAIN=6V（4,800LSB）

，OFFSET=2V（1,600LSB）.
+ 4, 000 Mode 1

The voltage input value when the digital input

0 5V 6V GAIN： value=4,000.
-10V -6V 2V
10V Range: -3,200LSB ~ +16,000LSB.
OFFSET GAIN

The voltage input value when the digital output value=0.

-4, 000 OFFSET：
Range: -4,000LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
Voltage input
-8, 000
GAIN－OFFSET： Range: +800LSB~+12,000LSB

Current input mode:

GAIN=20mA（4,000LSB）
，
CR#1 mode 2:
+ 4, 000
Mode 3 OFFSET=4mA（800LSB）.
Mode 2 GAIN=20mA（4,000LSB）
，
CR#1 mode 3:
OFFSET=0mA（0LSB）.

-20mA -12mA
The current input value when the digital output
0
GAIN： value=+4,000.
4mA 20mA
GAIN
Range: -3,200LSB ~ +10,400LSB.
OFFSET

The current input value when the digital output value=0.

OFFSET：
current input Range: -4,000LSB ~ +4,000LSB.
- 4, 000
GAIN－OFFSET： Range:+800LSB~+6,400LSB

The user can adjust the OFFSET/GAIN curves according to the actual needs by changing the OFFSET value (CR#18 ~
CR#23) and GAIN value (CR#24 ~ CR#29).

8_

8-27
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.5 Wiring
8.5.1 Wiring DVP04AD-S2

Voltage input AG
-10V~+10V CH1 1M
V1+ CH1
*5 I1+ 250
1M
COM1
FG
Shielded cable*1
AG
Current input
-20mA~+20mA CH4 1M
*2 V4+ 250 CH4
I4+ 1M
COM4
FG
Shielded cable*1
*3
Terminal of
power module +15V
DC24V 24V DC/DC
System *4 0V con ver ter AG
-15V
grounding
(100 or less)

*1: When performing analog input, please isolate other power wirings.

*2: When connecting to current signals, please make sure to short-circuit “V+” and “I+” (V4+ and I4+) terminals.

*3: If the noise is too loud, please connect the FG and ground terminals.

*4: Please connect the terminal on both the power module and DVP04AD-S2 to the system earth point and ground the
system contact or connect it to the cover of power distribution cabinet.

*5: If the ripple voltage of the input terminal of the load connected is large, and results in interference with the wiring,
please connect a 0.1~0.47 μF and 25 V capacitor.

※ DO NOT wire empty terminals ( ).

※ Use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

_8

8-28
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

8.5.2 Wiring DVP04DA-S2

Voltage output
0V~ +10V CH1
V1+ CH1
*2
I1+
AC motor drive, recorder, COM
proportioning valve... Shielded FG
cable*1
Current output CH4
0mA~20mA V4+ CH4
I4+
COM
AC motor drive, recorder, FG
Shielded
proportioning valve...
cable*1
*4

Connected to on
a power supply module +15V
*3 DC24V 0V D C /D C
24V AG
System ground converter -15V
Ground (Impedance: Less than 100 )

Note 1: Please isolate the analog output cable from other power cables.

Note 2: If noise interferes with the wiring and makes the ripple voltage of the input terminal of the load connected high,
please connect a 0.1~0.47 μF and 25 V capacitor.

Note 3: Please connect on a power supply module and on the analog output module to the system ground, and
then ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

Note 4: If there is much noise, please connect the terminal FG to the ground terminal.

※ DO NOT wire to the empty terminal ( ).

※ Use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

8_

8-29
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.5.3 Wiring DVP06XA-S2

Voltage input AG
-10 V~+10 V
CH1 1M
V1+
*3 I1+ 250 CH1
1M
COM1

Shielded cable*1
AG
Current input
CH4 1M
-20 mA~+20 mA
*2 V4+ 250 CH4
I4+ 1M
COM4

Shielded cable*1
Connected to on
a power supply module +15V
24V D C /D C
DC24V converter AG
*6 0V
System ground -15V
Ground (Impedance: Less than 100 )

Voltage output
0V ~ +10V
CH5
V5+ CH5
*5 I5+
COM
AC motor drive, recorder,
proportioning valve...
Shielded cable*4

Current output
0mA ~ 20mA CH6
V6+ CH6
I6+
COM
AC motor drive, recorder,
proportioning valve...
Shielded cable*4

Connected to on
a power supply module +15V
24V D C /D C

System ground *6 DC24V 0V converter AG

-15V
Ground (Impedance: Less than 100 )

Note 1: Please isolate the analog input cable from other power cables.

Note 2: If current is connected, the connection between V+ and I+ (the connection between V4+ and I4+) needs to be a
short circuit.

_8 Note 3: If ripple voltage results in interference with the wiring, please connect a 0.1~0.47 μF and 25 V capacitor.

Note 4: Please isolate the analog output cable from other power cables.

Note 5: If noise interferes with the wiring and makes the ripple voltage of the output terminal of the load connected high,
please connect a 0.1~0.47 μF and 25 V capacitor.

Note 6: Please connect on a power supply module and on the analog output module to the system ground, and
then ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

※ Use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

8-30
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

8.5.4 Wiring DVP06AD-S

Voltage input
-10V ~ +10V 104.7K
C H1 C H1
V+
250
*4 I+ 100K
CO M

AG Shielded cable *1 AG
Current input
-20mA ~ +20mA C H6 104.7K C H6
V+
*2 250
I+ 100K
CO M

AG AG
Shielded cable *1

Terminal of
+15V
power m odule 0V DC/DC
*3 AG
24V converter
S ys te m -15V
gro u n din g
Class 3 grounding
(100 Or less)

*1: When performing analog input, please isolate other power wirings.

*2: When connecting to current signals, please make sure to short-circuit “V+” and “I+” terminals.

*3: Please connect the terminal on both the power module and DVP06AD-S to the system earth point and ground the
system contact or connect it to the cover of power distribution cabinet.

*4: If the ripple voltage of the input terminal of the load connected is large, and results in interference with the wiring,
please connect a 0.1~0.47 μF and 25 V capacitor.

※ DO NOT wire empty terminals ( ).

※ Use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

8_

8-31
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8.5.5 Wiring DVP02DA-S

Voltage output
*2 0V ~ 10V CH1
V+ CH1
I+
AC drive, recorder, COM
scale valve... FG
Shielded cable*1

Current output CH2

0mA~20mA V+ CH2
I+
COM
AC drive, recorder, FG
Shielded cable *1
scale valve...
*4

terminal of
power module +15V
0V DC/DC
*3 DC24V
24V converter AG
System -15V
grounding
Class 3 grounding
(100 or less)

Note 1: Please isolate analog output and other power wiring.

Note 2: If noise interferes from loaded input wiring terminal is significant, please connect a capacitor with 0.1 ~ 0.47μF 25V
for noise filtering.

Note 3: Please connect power module terminal and analog output module terminal to system earth point and
make system earth point be grounded or connects to machine cover.

Note 4: If there is much noise, please connect the terminal FG to the ground terminal.

※ Use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

※ DO NOT wire empty terminals.

_8

8-32
 Ch a pt er 8 D V P- S S e r i es A na l og I /O M od u le

8.6 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in AD, DA, XA modules, an error indicator will start blinking. Once you see an error indicator starts
blinking, you can use the FROM instruction to read the error codes stored in CR#30. The bits 0 to bits 15 indicates the
corresponding error codes. It is possible to have two errors at the same time. 0 indicates normal and 1 indicates error.
Refer to the following table for more the causes and the solutions for troubleshooting

Bits RUN ERROR

Description Solution
No. LED LED

bits0 OFF ON The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.
Input value exceeds the set
bits1 Blinking Blinking Check the input signal
upper/lower bound
Check whether the value written in the
Communication address setting
bits2 communication address is correct and
error
rewrite it
Blinking OFF Check if the written value of OFFSET
bits3 OFFSET/GAIN error
and GAIN are correct and rewrite them.
Analog measuring sensor is
bits4 Contact the factory
abnormal
Input value exceeds the set
bits5 Blinking Blinking Check the input signal
upper/lower bound
bits6 Average time setting error Check the average time setting
Check whether the instruction reads or
Blinking OFF writes from incorrect CR.
bits7 FROM/TO instruction error
Check whether the module is properly
connected.
The signal received by channel 1
bits8 Check the signal received by channel 1
exceeds the range of analog inputs
The signal received by channel 2
bits9 Check the signal received by channel 2
exceeds the range of analog inputs
Blinking Blinking
The signal received by channel 3
bits10 Check the signal received by channel 3
exceeds the range of analog inputs
The signal received by channel 4
bits11 Check the signal received by channel 4
exceeds the range of analog inputs

8_

8-33
 9
Chapter 9 DVP-S Series Temperature
Measurement Module

Table of Contents
9.1 General Specification ........................................................................................ 3
9.1.1 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S Specification ............................................................... 3
9.1.2 DVP04TC-S Specifications .............................................................................. 5
9.1.3 DVP08NTC-S Specifications ............................................................................ 6
9.1.4 DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKN-S/ DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S
Specifications ............................................................................................... 8

9.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ..................................................................... 11

9.3 Terminals ....................................................................................................... 12

9.4 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S/DVP04TC-S/DVP08NTC-S Control Register .............. 13

9.4.1 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S Control Register ......................................................... 13
9.4.2 DVP04TC-S Control Register ......................................................................... 17
9.4.3 DVP08NTC-S Control Register ....................................................................... 20

9.5 DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/
DVP02TKN-S/DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S Control Registers ..................................... 23
9.5.1 Control Registers......................................................................................... 23
9.5.1.1 MODBUS Address List for DVP02TK-SSeries ............................................. 23
9.5.1.2 MODBUS Hex Address List for DVP02TK-S Series ..................................... 23
9.5.1.3 List of the Control Registers ................................................................... 24
9.5.1.4 Basic Setup Page.................................................................................. 26
9.5.1.5 PID Setup Page .................................................................................... 30
9.5.1.6 Program Control Setup Page .................................................................. 32
9.5.1.7 Pattern0, 1 Setup Page ......................................................................... 33
9.5.1.8 Pattern 2, 3 Setup Page ........................................................................ 34
9.5.1.9 Pattern 4, 5 Setup Page ........................................................................ 36
9.5.1.10 Pattern 6, 7 Setup Page ........................................................................ 37
9.5.1.11 Automatic PID Calculation Setup Page .................................................... 38
9.5.2 Examples of Setting a Control Register .......................................................... 39
9.5.3 Analog Input Description .............................................................................. 40
9.5.4 Outputs ..................................................................................................... 41
9.5.4.1 The output value varies with the PV value ............................................... 41

1
 9.5.4.2 Alarm Outputs ......................................................................................41
9.5.5 ON/OFF Control Mode ...................................................................................43
9.5.6 Control Mode ...............................................................................................45
9.5.7 Programmable SV Control Mode .....................................................................49
9.5.8 ERROR LEDIndicator .....................................................................................49
9.5.9 Automatic PID Calculation Feature (Support TK V1.06/TU V4.18 and above) .......50
9.5.9.1 Feature Description ...............................................................................50
9.5.9.2 Setup Instructions .................................................................................50
9.5.9.3 Additional Instructions ...........................................................................51
9.5.10 RS-485 Communication Setup for DVP02TK-S .................................................51
9.5.10.1 MODBUS Communication Protocol ...........................................................51
9.5.10.2 Restore to Factory Settings ....................................................................51
9.5.10.3 RS-485 Communication Setup ................................................................52
9.5.11 TK Wizard-Connection Setup .........................................................................54
9.5.11.1 Restore to Factory Settings for DVP02TK-S ...............................................54
9.5.11.2 COMMGR Setup ....................................................................................54
9.5.11.3 Settings in TKSoft .................................................................................55
9.5.11.4 TKSoft-Scan the Connected Device ..........................................................56

9.6 Wiring ............................................................................................................ 57

9.6.1 Wiring DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S.......................................................................57
9.6.2 Wiring DVP04TC-S........................................................................................58
9.6.3 Wiring DVP08NTC-S .....................................................................................59
9.6.4 Wiring DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/ DVP02TKN-S/
DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S.............................................................................60

9.7 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 63

2
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.1 General Specification

9.1.1 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S Specification
 Electrical Specifications
Model name DVP04PT-S DVP06PT-S
Number of inputs 4 6
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
Up to 8 modules can be connected and no digital I/O will be taken. Numbering is from 0 to
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
7 in a consecutive order; the one closes to the PLC CPU is 0.
Weight 91.5g 84.5g

 Functional Specifications
Digital data format 16-bits two’s complement number
Response time DVP04PT-S：200ms/channels; DVP06PT-S：160ms/channels
Overall accuracy 0° C to 55° C / 32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±6% of full scale.
2-wire/3-wire:
Pt100：DIN 43760-1980 JIS C1604-1989，100Ω 3850 PPM/°C
Pt1000：DIN EN60751，1 kΩ 3850 PPM/°C
Applicable sensors Ni100/Ni1000：DIN 43760
Cu50/Cu100
LG-Ni1000
0~300Ω/0~3000Ω
Rated measurement range Please refer to the table Note*1 below.
Digital analog-to-digital
Please refer to the table Note*2 below.
conversion range
Maximum measurable
Please refer to the table Note*3 below.
temperature range
Centigrade（°C） 0.1°C

Fahrenheit（°F） 0.18°F*4
Resolution
Input 0~300Ω：0.01Ω
impedance 0~3000Ω：0.1Ω

Average function Yes（DVP04PT-S：CR#2~CR#5/DVP06PT-S：CR#2）

，Setting range:K1~K20
Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limits or channel disconnection.
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500VAC
9_
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500VAC

3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Note*1. Rated measurement range

Input
Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F）
impedance
Pt100 -180°C~800°C -292°F~1,472°F
Ni100 -80°C~170°C -112°F~338°F
Pt1000 -180°C~800°C -292°F~1,472°F
Ni1000 -80°C~170°C -112°F~338°F
Cu50 -50°C~150°C -58°F~302°F
Cu100 -50°C~150°C -58°F~302°F
LG-Ni1000 -60°C~200°C -76°F~392°F
0~300Ω - - 0~300Ω
0~3000Ω - - 0~3000Ω

Note*2. Rated analog-to-digital conversion range

Input
Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F）
impedance
Pt100 K-1,800~K8,000 K-2,920~K14,720
Ni100 K-800~K1,700 K-1,120~K3,380
Pt1000 K-1,800~K8,000 K-2,920~K14,720
Ni1000 K-800~K1,700 K-1,120~K3,380
Cu50 K-500~K1,500 K-580~K3,020
Cu100 K-500~K1,500 K-580~K3,020
LG-Ni1000 K-600~K2,000 K-760~K3,920
0~300Ω - - K0~K30,000

0~3000Ω - - K0~K30,000

Note*3. Maximum measurable temperature range

Input
Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F）
impedance
Pt100 -200°C~800°C -328°F~1,472°F
Ni100 -90°C~180°C -130°F~356°F
Pt1000 -200°C~800°C -328°F~1,472°F
Ni1000 -90°C~180°C -130°F~356°F
Cu50 -50°C~150°C -58°F~302°F
Cu100 -50°C~150°C -58°F~302°F
LG-Ni1000 -60°C~250°C -76°F~482°F
0~300Ω - - 0~320Ω
_9
0~3000Ω - - 0~3200Ω

Note*4. The temperature unit to be displayed is 0.1 °C and 0.1 °F. If the display mode is Fahrenheit, the
number in the second decimal place will not be displayed.

4
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.1.2 DVP04TC-S Specifications

 Electrical Specifications
Number of inputs 4
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
Up to 8 modules can be connected and no digital I/O will be taken. Numbering is from 0 to
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
7 in a consecutive order; the one closes to the PLC CPU is 0.
Weight 78.7g

 Functional specifications
Analog input channel 4 channel/each module
Digital conversion range 16 bits two’s complement number
Response time 200ms/channel
25°C/77°F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale. 0 to +55°C / 32 to 131°F: The
Overall accuracy
allowed error range is ±1% of full scale.
Applicable sensors J-type，K-type，R-type，S-type，T-type thermocouple
Rated input range Please refer to the table Note*1 below.
Analog-to-digital
Please refer to the table Note*2 below.
conversion
Centigrade
0.1°C
Hardware （°C）
resolution Fahrenheit
0.18°F*3
（°F）
Average function Yes, CR#2~CR#5, setting range:K1~K20
Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limts or channel disconnection.

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit / an

optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by optocouplers.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between analog channels: 120 VAC

Note*1. Rated input range

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F）
J-type -100°C~700°C -148°F~1,292°F
K-type -100°C~1,000°C -148°F~1,832°F
R-type -10°C~1,700°C -14°F~3,092°F
S-type -10°C~1,700°C -14°F~3,092°F 9_
T-type -100°C~350°C -148°F~662°F

5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Note*2. Analog-to-digital conversion

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F）
J-type K-1,000~K7,000 K-3,280~K12,920
K-type K-1,000~K10,000 K-1,480~K18,320
R-type K-100~K17,000 K-140~K30,920
S-type K-100~K17,000 K-140~K30,920
T-type K-1,000~K3,500 K-1,480~K6,620

Note*3. The temperature unit to be displayed is 0.1 °C and 0.1 °F. If the display mode is Fahrenheit, the number in
the second decimal place will not be displayed

9.1.3 DVP08NTC-S Specifications

 Electrical specifications
Number of inputs 8
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
Up to 8 modules can be connected and no digital I/O will be taken. Numbering is from 0 to
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
7 in a consecutive order; the one closes to the PLC CPU is 0.
Weight 70g

 Functional specifications
Analog input channel 8 channel/each module
Digital data format 16 bits two’s complement number
Response time 200ms/channel
25°C/77°F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall accuracy
0 to +55°C / 32 to 131°F: The allowed error range is ±1% of full scale.
Pt1000: DIN 43760
Ni1000: DIN EN60751
LG-Ni1000
NTC 10K B25 B85 3977K
NTC 100K B25 B85 4260K
NTC 20K B25 B85 4200
NTC 30K B25 B50 4200
PT-42H 10K B25 B85 3435K
PT-43 10.74K B25 B85 3480K
Applicable sensors
PT-51F 49.12K B25 B85 3992K
PT-25E2 98..63K B25 B85 4066K
PT-312 231.4K B25 B85 4240K
KTY81 110 120
KTY81 121
KTY81 122
KTY81 210 220
_9 KTY81 221
KTY81 222
Drive current 213.33uA（RTD）/109.17uA（NTC）/1.009mA（KTY81 Series）

Rated input range Please refer to the table Note*1 below.

Analog-to-digital
Please refer to the table Note*2 below.
conversion

6
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

Hardw Centigrade（°C） 0.1°C

are
resolut Fahrenheit（°F） 0.1°F
ion
Average function Yes, CR#6, setting range:K1~K100
Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limts or channel disconnection.

There is no isolation between channels.

Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC

Note*1. Rated input range

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F）
Pt1000 -180°C~800°C -292~1,472°F
Ni1000 -100°C~180°C -148~356°F
LG-Ni1000 -60°C~200°C -76~392°F
NTC 10K B25 B85 3977K -40~110°C -40~230°F
NTC 100K B25 B85 4260K -20°C~150°C -4~302°F
NTC 20K B25 B85 4200 -40°C~125°C -40~257°F
NTC 30K B25 B50 4200 -30°C~130°C -22~266°F
PT-42H 10K B25 B85 3435K -50°C~130°C -58~266°F
PT-43 10.74K B25 B85 3480K -50°C~130°C -58~266°F
PT-51F 49.12K B25 B85 3992K -25°C~180°C -13~356°F
PT-25E2 98..63K B25 B85 4066K -25°C~210°C -13~410°F
PT-312 231.4K B25 B85 4240K 0°C~240°C 32~464°F
KTY81 110 120 -55°C~150°C -67~302°F
KTY81 121 -55°C~150°C -67~302°F
KTY81 122 -55°C~150°C -67~302°F
KTY81 210 220 -55°C~150°C -67~302°F
KTY81 221 -55°C~150°C -67~302°F
KTY81 222 -55°C~150°C -67~302°F

9_

7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Note*2. Analog-to-digital conversion

Sensor Centigrade（°C） Fahrenheit（°F）
Pt1000 K-1,800~K8,000 K-2,920~K14,720
Ni1000 K-1,000~K1,800 K-1,480~K3,560
LG-Ni1000 K-600~K2,000 K-760~K3,920
NTC 10K B25 B85 3977K K-400~K1,100 K-400~K2,300
NTC 100K B25 B85 4260K K-200~K1,500 K-40~K3,020
NTC 20K B25 B85 4200 K-400~K1,250 K-400~K2,570
NTC 30K B25 B50 4200 K-300~K1,300 K-220~K2,660
PT-42H 10K B25 B85 3435K K-500~K1,300 K-580~K2,660
PT-43 10.74K B25 B85 3480K K-500~K1,300 K-580~K2,660
PT-51F 49.12K B25 B85 3992K K-250~K1,800 K-130~K3,560
PT-25E2 98..63K B25 B85 4066K K-250~K2,100 K-130~K4,100
PT-312 231.4K B25 B85 4240K K 0~K2,400 K-320~K4,640
KTY81 110 120 K-550~K1,500 K-670~K3,020
KTY81 121 K-550~K1,500 K-670~K3,020
KTY81 122 K-550~K1,500 K-670~K3,020
KTY81 210 220 K-550~K1,500 K-670~K3,020
KTY81 221 K-550~K1,500 K-670~K3,020
KTY81 222 K-550~K1,500 K-670~K3,020

9.1.4 DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKN-S/
DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S Specifications
 Electrical specifications
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
Hardware resolution 16 bits
Distance 100 meters
Input disconnection detection Temperature input supports disconnection detection
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit.
There is no isolation between channels.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
_9 Isolation between an analog circuit and digital circuit: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC
The modules are numbered from 0 to 7 automatically by their distance from
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU DVP-PLC. Max. 8 modules are allowed to connect to DVP-PLC and will not occupy
any digital I/O points.
Weight 70g

8
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

 Analog input function specification

DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S
Models
DVP02TKN-S/DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S
Analog Voltage input Current input Temperature input
0~10V
Thermocouple*1
0~5V 0~20mA
Rated input range Thermistor*2
0~+50mV 4~20mA
-100~+100mV
Overall accuracy
±0.5% ±0.4%
(normal temperature)
Overall accuracy
±1% ±0.8%
(full temperature range)
Hardware resolution 16 bits 24 bits
Input impedance 650KΩ 2MΩ 2MΩ
*1. Thermocouple: J、K、R、S、T、E、N、B、U、L、TXK（L）
、C、PL II
*2. Thermistor: Pt100、JPt100、Pt1000、Ni100、Ni120、Ni1000、Cu50、Cu100、LG-Ni1000

 Analog sampling time (by channel)

DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S
Model
DVP02TKN-S/DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S
Quick AI Quick AI
Analog input type AI Thermocouple Thermistor
（0~10V）*2 （4~20mA）*2

Setting time（ms） 80 80 160 3 3

Conversion time（ms） 50 50 100 2 2

Response time（ms） 130 130 260 5 5

Response time = setting time + conversion time
*1. Compared to the response time of the thermocouple temperature, it needs two times of time for the thermistor
temperature to respond, since the thermistor channels require a temperature compensation.
*2. Since there is only one channel used, the time to stabilize the circuit is not required.

 Analog output function specification

Model DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S
Analog Voltage output Current output
0~20mA
Rated output range 0~10V
4~20mA
Overall accuracy
±0.5%
(normal temperature)
Overall accuracy
±1%
(full temperature range)
Hardware resolution 12 bits
Allowable load impedance 1kΩ~2MΩ at0V~10V ≦550Ω
Setting time（µs） 100 250
Conversion time（µs） 500 500
Response time（µs） 600 750
Response time = setting time + conversion time 9_

9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Digital output Function Specification

Model DVP02TUR-S DVP02TUN-S
Item DVP02TKR-S DVP02TKN-S
Number of outputs 4 4
Connector type Removable terminal block
Output point type Relay-R Transistor-T (NPN)
Voltage specification Below 250VAC，30VDC 12~30VDC
2A/1 point 0.3A/1 point
Resistive
（3A/COM）*1 （0.6A/COM）*1

Maximum load Inductive Life curves *2, *4 7.2W（24VDC）*3

20W（24VDC）
Bulk 2W（24VDC）
100W（230VAC）
Resistive 1Hz 100Hz
Maximum output
Inductive 0.5Hz 0.5Hz
frequency
Bulk 1Hz 10Hz

Maximum OFF→ON
10ms 0.5ms
response time ON→OFF

*1. Complied with UL61010-2-201 & IEC61131-2 (AC or DC resistance)

*2. Complied with UL61010-2-201 & IEC61131-2 (AC/DC general-use)
AC pilot duty: Rated making capacity: 7.5A; rated breaking capacity: 0.75A; 2.5A thermal continuous at 240VAC
DC pilot duty: rated making capacity: 0.22A; rated breaking capacity: 0.22A; 1A thermal continuous at 30VDC
*3. Complied with IEC/UL61010-2-201 (DC general-use)
Disconnect power before servicing to avoid the risk of electric shock.
*4. Life curves
120VAC Resistive
3000
30VDC Inductive(t=7ms)
2000
240VAC Inductive(cosψ= 0.4)
1000
120VAC Inductive(cosψ=0.4)
Operation(X10 )

500
3

300
200

100
30VDC
50 Inductive
(t=40ms)
30
20

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2

_9 Contact Current(A)

10
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions

60.00
3.00

3.00
4 6
1 25.20 60.00 3.40
5 7

8 14
10 12
2
11
90.00

3 13
3
3.00

Unit:mm

No. Name Description

Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Run LED indicator Indicates the operating status of the module
1 Error status of the module.
ON: A serious module error has occurred
ERROR LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF):
A non-serious module error occurs, can NOT operate normally
2 Model name Model name of the module
3 DIN rail securing clip Secure the module on the set
The inputs are connected to sensors.
4 I/O Terminals
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
5 Terminal number Terminal number
Extension unit
6 For positioning between modules
positioning hole
7 Nameplate Lable of the module
Extension module
8 Connect the modules.
connection port
9 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module.
10 DIN rail slot（35mm） For the DIN rail.
11 Securing module slot For securing the extension module
RS-485communication
12 Provide RS-485 communication wiring
port
13 Power input port Expansion unit power input. 9_
14 Extension port Connect the PLC or the modules.

11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.3 Terminals
DVP04PT-S
DVP04PT-S CH1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4
L+ L- I- FG L+ L- I- FG L+ L- I- FG L+ L- I- FG

DVP06PT
DVP06PT-S CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6
L+ L- I- L+ L- I- L+ L- I- L+ L- I- L+ L- I- L+ L- I-

DVP04TC-S
DVP04TC-S CH1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4
L+ L- SLD L+ L- SLD L+ L- SLD L+ L- SLD

DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUN-S DVP02TUL-S
DVP08NTC-S
DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKN-S DVP02TKL-S
L+ L+
I+ I+
CH1 CH1
L- L-
I- I-
L+ L+
I+ I+
CH2
CH2
L- L-
I- I-
SL D SLD

．
OUT1
． VO
O UT2 IO O U T1
C0 AG

．
OUT3
． VO
OUT4 IO O U T2
C1 AG

． ．

_9

12
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.4 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S/DVP04TC-S/DVP08NTC-S
Control Register
9.4.1 DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S Control Register
CR# Address Latched Attribute Register content Description
Model name DVP04PT-S model code= H’8A
#0 H’4064 O R
(Set up by the system) DVP06PT-S model code = H’CA
b15~12 b11~8 b7~4 b3~0
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Take CH1 mode (b3,b2,b1,b0) for example.
1. (0,0,0,0): Pt100 (default)
2. (0,0,0,1): Ni100
3. (0,0,1,0): Pt1000
4. (0,0,1,1): Ni1000
CH1~CH4 Mode
#1 H’4065 X R/W 5. (0,1,0,0): LG-Ni1000
setting
6. (0,1,0,1): Cu100
7. (0,1,1,0): Cu50
8. (0,1,1,1): 0~300 Ω
9. (1,0,0,0): 0~3000 Ω
10. (1,1,1,1)The channel is disabled.
Mode 8 and 9 are only available for DVP04PT-S V4.16 or
later and DVP06PT-S V4.12 or later.
Number piece of readings used for the calculation of
DVP04PT-S: “average” temperature on CH1.
H’4066
CH1 average number Setting range: K1~K20.
Default setting is K10.
#2 O R/W
Number piece of readings used for the calculation of
DVP06PT-S:
“average” temperature on CH1 ~ 6.
-- CH1~CH6 average
Setting range: K1~K20.
number
Default setting is K10.
Number piece of readings used for the calculation of
DVP04PT-S: “average” temperature on CH2.
#3 H’4067 O R/W
CH2 average number Setting range: K1~K20.
Default setting is K10.
Number piece of readings used for the calculation of
DVP04PT-S: “average” temperature on CH3.
#4 H’4068 O R/W
CH3 average number Setting range: K1~K20.
Default setting is K10.
Number piece of readings used for the calculation of
DVP04PT-S: “average” temperature on CH4.
#5 H’4069 O R/W
CH4 average number Setting range: K1~K20.
Default setting is K10.
#6 H’406A X R CH1 average degrees 9_
#7 H’406B X R CH2 average degrees DVP04PT-S:
#8 H’406C X R CH3 average degrees Average Celsius degrees for CH1 ~ 4
DVP06PT-S:
#9 H’406D X R CH4 average degrees
Average Celsius degrees for CH1 ~ 6
#10 -- X R CH5 average degrees Unit: 0.1°C/ 0.01 Ω (0~300 Ω)/ 0.1 Ω (0~3000 Ω)
#11 -- X R CH6 average degrees

13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Address Latched Attribute Register content Description

#12 H’4070 X R CH1 average degrees
#13 H’4071 X R CH2 average degrees DVP04PT-S:
#14 H’4072 X R CH3 average degrees Average Fahrenheit degrees for CH1 ~ 4 DVP06PT-S:
#15 H’4073 X R CH4 average degrees Average Fahrenheit degrees for CH1 ~ 6
#16 -- X R CH5 average degrees Unit: 0.1°F/ 0.01 Ω (0~300 Ω)/ 0.1 Ω (0~3000 Ω)

#17 -- X R CH6 average degrees

#18 H’4076 X R Present temp. of CH1
#19 H’4077 X R Present temp. of CH2 DVP04PT-S:
Present Celsius temperature of CH 1~4
#20 H’4078 X R Present temp. of CH3
DVP06PT-S:
#21 H’4079 X R Present temp. of CH4
Present Celsius temperature of CH1~6
#22 -- X R Present temp. of CH5 Unit: 0.1°C/ 0.01 Ω (0~300 Ω)/ 0.1 Ω (0~3000 Ω)
#23 -- X R Present temp. of CH6
#24 H’407C X R Present temp. of CH1
#25 H’407D X R Present temp. of CH2 DVP04PT-S:
#26 H’407E X R Present temp. of CH3 Present Fahrenheit temperature of CH 1~4 DVP06PT-S:
#27 H’407F X R Present temp. of CH4 Present Fahrenheit temperature of CH 1~6
#28 -- X R Present temp. of CH5 Unit: 0.1°F/ 0.01 Ω (0~300 Ω)/ 0.1 Ω (0~3000 Ω)
#29 -- X R Present temp. of CH6
DVP04PT-S: Set H’5678 as PID mode and other values as normal mode
#29 H’4081 X R/W
PID mode setup Default value is H’0000.
Data register stores the error status. Refer to the error code
#30 H’4082 X R Error status
chart for details.
DVP04PT-S:
Set up the RS-485 communication address; setting range:
H’4083 O R/W Communication
01~254. Default: K1
address setup
#31
DVP06PT-S: CH5 mode: b0 ~ b3
-- X R/W CH5~CH6 Mode CH6 mode: b4 ~ b7
setting See CR#1 for reference
For baud rate, the settings are
4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps.
Communication format:
DVP04PT-S:
ASCII: 7,E,1 / 7,O,1 / 8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
H’4084 O R/W Communication format
RTU: 8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
setting
Factory default : ASCII,9600,7,E,1 (CR#32=H’0002)
Refer to ※CR#32 communication format settings at the end
32 of this table for more information.
b15~12 b11~9 b8~6 b5~3 b2~0
ERR
DVP06PT-S: reserved CH6 CH5
LED
CH5~CH6
-- X R/W b12~13 respectively correspond to CH5~6 error display
Error LED indicator
_9 setting enable/disable,
when bit is ON, the scale exceeds the range, and the Error
LED indicator flashes. OFF: disabled.
DVP04PT-S: b15~12 b11~9 b8~6 b5~3 b2~0
CH1~CH4
ERR
#33 H’4085 O R/W Reset to default setting CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
LED
And Error LED indicator
setting

14
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

CR# Address Latched Attribute Register content Description

If b2~b0 are set to 100, all the setting values of CH1 will be
reset to the defaults. To reset all channels to defaults, set
DVP06PT-S:
b11~0 to H’924 (DVP04PT-S supports single and all
All channels reset to
channels reset; DVP06PT-S supports all channels reset
-- X R/W default setting And
only).
CH1~CH4 Error LED
b12~15 respectively correspond to CH1~4 error display
indicator setting
enable/disable, when bit is ON, the scale exceeds the range,
and the Error LED indicator flashes. OFF: disabled.
#34 H’4086 O R Firmware version Display version in hexadecimal. ex: H’010A = version 1.0A
#35 ~ #48 For system use
Symbols:
O means latched. (Supported with RS485, but does not support when connecting to MPUs.)
X means not latched.
R means can read data by using FROM instruction or RS-485.
W means can write data by using TO instruction or RS-485.
1. Added the RESET function is only for 04PT-S modules with firmware V4.16 or later and not available for 06PT-S.
Connect the module power input to 24 VDC and write H’4352 into CR#0 and then turn the power off and on again; all
parameters in modules, including communication parameters are restored to factory defaults.

2. If you want to use Modbus address in decimal format, you can transfer a hexadecimal register to decimal format and
then add one to have it become a decimal Modbus register address. For example transferring the address “H’4064” of
CR#0 in hexadecimal format to decimal format, to have the result 16484 and then adding one to it, you have 16485, the
Modbus address in decimal format.

3. CR#32 communication format settings: for DVP04PT-S modules with firmware V4.14 or previous versions, b11~b8 data
format selection is not available. For ASCII mode, the format is fixed to 7, E, 1 (H’00XX) and for RTU mode, the format
is fixed to 8, E, 1 (H’C0xx/H’80xx). For modules with firmware V4.15 or later, refer to the following table for setups. Note
that the original code H’C0XX/H’80XX will be seen as RTU, 8, E, 1 for modules with firmware V4.15 or later.
b15 ~ b12 b11 ~ b8 b7 ~ b0
ASCII/RTU,
exchange low and high byte of CRC Data format Baud rate
check code
Description
H'0 ASCII H'0 7,E,1*1 H'01 4800 bps
RTU, H'1 8,E,1 H'02 9600 bps
H'8 do not exchange low and high
byte of CRC check code H'2 reserved H'04 19200 bps

RTU, H'3 8,N,1 H'08 38400 bps

exchange low and high byte
H'C
of CRC check code H'4 7,O,1*1 H'10 57600 bps

H'5 8.O,1 H'20 115200 bps

Ex: Write H’C310 into CR#32 for a result of RTU, exchange low and high byte of CRC check code, 8,N,1 and baud rate
at 57600 bps.

Note *1: This is only available for ASCII format.

9_
4. RS-485 function codes: 03’H is for reading data from registers. 06’H is for writing a data word to registers. 10’H is for
writing multiple data words to registers.

15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

5. CR#30 is the error code register.

Note: Each error code will have a corresponding bit and should be converted to 16-bit binary numbers (Bit0~15). When
each bit is ON, it means that an error state has occurred. Therefore, when an error occurs, there may be more than 2
bits showed ON. For example: bit1=ON, bit8=ON, which means that there is an open connection on the channel contact,
and it is CH1. Refer to the chart below:

Bit number 0 1 2 3
Power source The contact is not
Description Reserved Reserved
abnormal connected to anything.
Bit number 4 5 6 7

Description Reserved Reserved Average number error Instruction error

Bit number 8 9 10 11
CH1 Abnormal CH2 Abnormal CH3 Abnormal CH4 Abnormal
Description
conversion conversion conversion conversion
Bit number 12 13 14 15
CH5 Abnormal CH6 Abnormal
Description Reserved Reserved
conversion conversion

6. When CR#29 is set to H’5678, CR#0 ~ CR#34 can be used for PID settings with DVP04PT-S version V3.08 and above.
PID Mode description
CR# Keep R/W CR# Keep R/W
#0 O R Model name #24 O R/W CH1 KD
#1 X R/W CH1~CH4 Mode setting #25 O R/W CH2 KD
#2 X R PID Output % at CH1 #26 O R/W CH3 KD
#3 X R PID Output % at CH2 #27 O R/W CH4 KD
#4 X R PID Output % at CH3 Run/Stop & Auto tuning
#5 X R PID Output % at CH4
Bit0：CH1 PID Run/Stop
CR#2~CR#5: 0~1000; Unit: 0.1%
Bit1：CH2 PID Run/Stop
#6 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH1
Bit2：CH3 PID Run/Stop
#7 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH2
Bit3：CH4 PID Run/Stop
#8 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH3 0=PID Stop，1=PID Run
#9 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH4 #28 X R/W
CR#6~CR#9：Unit: 0.1% Bit4：CH1 Auto tuning
#10 O R/W Set temperature at CH1 Bit5：CH2 Auto tuning
#11 O R/W Set temperature at CH2 Bit6：CH3 Auto tuning
Bit7：CH4 Auto tuning
#12 O R/W Set temperature at CH3
1: The auto tuning function is
#13 O R/W Set temperature at CH4
enabled. After the auto tuning action
CR#10~CR#13: Set the PID target value (SV) completed, the value becomes 0.
#14 O R/W CH1 KP Enter PID mode(H’5678)
#29 X R/W
#15 O R/W CH2 KP K0: Exit the PID mode
#16 O R/W CH3 KP #30 X R Error code
_9
#17 O R/W CH4 KP #31 O R/W CH1 Sampling time
#19 O R/W CH1 KI #32 O R/W CH2 Sampling time
#20 O R/W CH2 KI #33 O R/W CH3 Sampling time
#21 O R/W CH3 KI #34 O R/W CH4 Sampling time
#22 O R/W CH4 KI CR#31~CR#34: 1~30; Unit: 1s
Note: CR#29 must be set to H’5678 to enter the PID mode before configuring settings on other control registers.

16
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.4.2 DVP04TC-S Control Register

CR# Address Save Register content Description
Set up by the system:
#0 H’4096 O R Model name
DVP04TC-S model code=H’8B
b15~b12 b11~b9 b8~b6 b5~b3 b2~b0
Reserved CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Example: Setting of CH1
1. (b2, b1, b0) set to (0, 0, 0), use J-type.
2. (b2, b1, b0) set to (0, 0, 1), use K-type.
#1 H’4097 O R/W Thermocouple type
3. (b2, b1, b0) set to (0, 1, 0), use R-type.
4. (b2, b1, b0) set to (0, 1, 1), use S-type.
5. (b2, b1, b0) set to (1, 0, 0), use T-type.
Note: With version V4.20 and above, you can close a certain channel.
For example, set (b2, b1, b0) to (1, 1, 0) and CH1 would be closed.
CR#1: Used to set the working mode of four channels. There are 5 modes (J-type, K-type, R-type, S-type, and T-type)
for each channel and can be set individually. For example, if you want to set CH1~CH4 as following: CH1: J-type (b2 ~
b0=000), CH2: K-type (b5 ~ b3=001), CH3: J-type (b8 ~ b6=000) and CH4: K-type (b11 ~ b9=001), you should set CR#1
to H’0208. The higher bits (b12 ~ b15) will be reserved, and the default setting is H’0000.
#2 H’4098 O R/W CH1 average number Average times setting of channels CH1 ~ CH4. Setting range:
#3 H’4099 O R/W CH2 average number For versions prior to V3.04: K1 ~ K4,095.
#4 H’409A O R/W CH3 average number For versions after V3.05: K1 ~ K20.
#5 H’409B O R/W CH4 average number Default setting is K10.
CR#2 ~ CR#5: Please notice that when setting average times via TO/DTO instructions, please use
rising-edge/falling-edge detection instruction (such as LDP and LDF) to get correct average times.
#6 H’409C X R CH1 average degrees
#7 H’409D X R CH2 average degrees
Average Celsius degrees for channels CH1 ~ CH4. (Unit: 0.1°C).
#8 H’409E X R CH3 average degrees
#9 H’409F X R CH4 average degrees
#10 H’40A0 X R CH1 average degrees
#11 H’40A1 X R CH2 average degrees
Average Fahrenheit degrees for channels CH1 ~ CH4. (Unit: 0.1°F).
#12 H’40A2 X R CH3 average degrees
#13 H’40A3 X R CH4 average degrees
#14 H’40A4 X R Present temp. of CH1
#15 H’40A5 X R Present temp. of CH2
Present Celsius temperature of channels CH1 ~ CH4. (Unit: 0.1°C).
#16 H’40A6 X R Present temp. of CH3
#17 H’40A7 X R Present temp. of CH4
#19 H’40A9 X R Present temp. of CH1 Present Fahrenheit temperature of channels CH1 ~ CH2.
#20 H’40AA X R Present temp. of CH2 (Unit: 0.1°F).
#21 H’40AB X R Present temp. of CH3 Present Fahrenheit temperature of channels CH3 ~ CH4.
#22 H’40AC X R Present temp. of CH4 (Unit: 0.1°F).
#24 H’40AE O R/W CH1 OFFSET Value Adjust offset value of channels CH1 ~ CH4.
#25 H’40AF O R/W CH2 OFFSET Value The range is -1,000 ~ +1,000 and default setting is K0.(Unit: 0.1°C).
#26 H’40B0 O R/W CH3 OFFSET Value OFFSET = module measured temperature - OFFSET value = actual
#27 H’40B1 O R/W CH4 OFFSET Value displayed temperature
Set H'5678 to enable PID mode, all other settings are normal mode.
#29 H’40B3 X R/W PID mode setting
Default: H’0000.
9_
Data register stores the error status.
#30 H’40B4 X R Error status
Refer to the error code chart for details.
Communication RS-485 communication address. Setting range is 1 ~ 254 and default
#31 H’40B5 O R/W
address setting setting is K1.

17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

It is used to set communication format.

For baud rate, the settings are
4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps.
Communication format:
Communication format ASCII：7,E,1 / 7,O,1 / 8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
#32 H’40B6 O R/W
setting RTU ：8,E,1 / 8,O,1 / 8,N,1
Factory default: ASCII,9600,7,E,1 (CR#32=H’0002)
Refer to ※CR#32 communication format settings at the end of this
table for more information.
b15~b12 b11~ b9 b8~b6 b5~b3 b2~b0
ERR LED CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Example: Setting of CH1
1. b0 ~ b1: Reserved.
2. b2: Set to 1 and PLC will be reset to default settings.
Definition of ERR LED: b12~b15=1111 (default settings)
#33 H’40B7 O R/W Reset to default setting 1. b12 corresponds to CH1: when b12=1, scale exceeds the range,
ERR LED flashes.
2. b13 corresponds to CH2: when b13=1, scale exceeds the range,
ERR LED flashes.
3. b14 corresponds to CH3: when b14=1, scale exceeds the range,
ERR LED flashes.
4. b15 corresponds to CH4: when b15=1, scale exceeds the range,
ERR LED flashes
Display the software version in hexadecimal.
#34 H’40B8 O R Software version
Example: H’010A = version 1.0A
#35 ~ #48 System used
Symbols: O: means latched. (Support when using RS-485 communication, not support when connecting with MPU)
X: means not latched. R: able to read data by using FROM instruction or RS-485.
W: able to write data by using TO instruction or RS-485.

1. Added the RESET function for modules with firmware V4.14 or later. Connect the module power input to 24 VDC
and write H’4352 into CR#0 and then turn the power off and on again; all parameters in modules, including
communication parameters are restored to factory defaults.
2. If you want to use Modbus address in decimal format, you can transfer a hexadecimal register to decimal format and
then add one to have it become a decimal Modbus register address. For example, transferring the address “H’4096” of
CR#0 in hexadecimal format to decimal format, to have the result 16534 and then adding one to it, you have 16535, the
Modbus address in decimal format.
3. CR#32 communication format settings: for modules with firmware V4.12 or previous versions, b11~b8 data format
selection is not available. For ASCII mode, the format is fixed to 7, E, 1 (H’00XX) and for RTU mode, the format is fixed
to 8, E, 1 (H’C0xx/H’80xx). For modules with firmware V4.13 or later, refer to the following table for setups. Note that the
original code H’C0XX/H’80XX will be seen as RTU, 8, E, 1 for modules with firmware V4.13 or later.
b15 ~ b12 b11 ~ b8 b7 ~ b0
ASCII/RTU,
exchange low and high byte of CRC Data format Baud rate
check code
Description
_9 H'0 ASCII H'0 7,E,1*1 H'01 4800 bps
RTU, H'1 8,E,1 H'02 9600 bps
H'8 do not exchange low and high
H'2 reserved H'04 19200 bps
byte of CRC check code
RTU, H'3 8,N,1 H'08 38400 bps
H'C exchange low and high byte H'4 7,O,1*1 H'10 57600 bps
of CRC check code H'5 8.O,1 H'20 115200 bps

18
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

Note *1: This is only available for ASCII format.

Ex: Write H’C310 into CR#32 for a result of RTU, exchange low and high byte of CRC check code, 8,N,1 and baud rate
at 57600 bps.
4. Function codes: 03’H is for reading data from registers. 06’H is for writing a word data into registers. 10’H is for
writing multiple word data into registers.
5. CR#30 is the error code register. Refer to the chart below:
Error description Content b15 ~ b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Power source abnormal K1 (H’1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Wiring to empty external contact K2 (H’2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Setting mode error K4 (H’4) 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Offset/Gain error K8 (H’8) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Reserved
Temperature sensor error K16 (H’10) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Digital range error K32 (H’20) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Average times setting error K64 (H’40) 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Instruction error K128 (H’80) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: Each error code will have corresponding bit (b0 ~ b7). Two or more errors may happen at the same time. 0
means normal and 1 means having error.

6. When CR#29 is set to H’5678, CR#0 ~ CR#34 can be used for PID settings in DVP04TC-S V3.08 and versions above.
PID Mode description
CR# Keep R/W CR# Keep R/W
#0 O R Model name #24 O R/W CH1 KD
#1 X R/W Thermocouple type #25 O R/W CH2 KD
#2 X R PID Output % at CH1 #26 O R/W CH3 KD
#3 X R PID Output % at CH2 #27 O R/W CH4 KD
#4 X R PID Output % at CH3 Run/Stop & Auto tuning
#5 X R PID Output % at CH4
Bit0：CH1 PID Run/Stop
CR#2~CR#5: 0~1000; Unit: 0.1%
Bit1：CH2 PID Run/Stop
#6 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH1
Bit2：CH3 PID Run/Stop
#7 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH2
Bit3：CH4 PID Run/Stop
#8 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH3 0=PID Stop，1=PID Run
#9 X R Average temperature (0C) at CH4 #28 X R/W
CR#6~CR#9：Unit: 0.1% Bit4：CH1 Auto tuning
#10 O R/W Set temperature at CH1 Bit5：CH2 Auto tuning
#11 O R/W Set temperature at CH2 Bit6：CH3 Auto tuning
Bit7：CH4 Auto tuning
#12 O R/W Set temperature at CH3
1: The auto tuning function is
#13 O R/W Set temperature at CH4
enabled. After the auto tuning
CR#10~CR#13: Set the PID target value (SV) completed, the value becomes 0.
#14 O R/W CH1 KP Enter PID mode(H’5678)
#29 X R/W
#15 O R/W CH2 KP K0: Exit the PID mode
#16 O R/W CH3 KP #30 X R Error code 9_
#17 O R/W CH4 KP #31 O R/W CH1 Sampling time
#19 O R/W CH1 KI #32 O R/W CH2 Sampling time
#20 O R/W CH2 KI #33 O R/W CH3 Sampling time
#21 O R/W CH3 KI #34 O R/W CH4 Sampling time
#22 O R/W CH4 KI CR#31~CR#34: 1~30; Unit: 1s
Note: Users must enter the PID mode (CR#29=H’5678) before setting other control registers.

19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.4.3 DVP08NTC-S Control Register

MODBUS
CR# Latched Attribute Register content Description
Address
#0 H4000 O R Model name H010D
#1 H4001 O R/W CH1 & CH2 Mode setting
#2 H4002 O R/W CH3 & CH4 Mode setting Please refer to the content description
#3 H4003 O R/W CH5 & CH6 Mode setting - Sensor Settings (CR#1~CR#4)
#4 H4004 O R/W CH7 & CH8 Mode setting
K0: Celsius(°C) (Default)
#5 H4005 O R/W Temperature scales setting
K1: Fahrenheit(°F)
#6 H4006 O R/W Moving average Setting range: 1~100. Default: 3
#7 H4007 X R CH1 average degrees
#8 H4008 X R CH2 average degrees
#9 H4009 X R CH3 average degrees
#10 H400A X R CH4 average degrees Average degrees,
#11 H400B X R CH5 average degrees unit: 0.1°C.
#12 H400C X R CH6 average degrees
#13 H400D X R CH7 average degrees
#14 H400E X R CH8 average degrees
Please refer to the content description
#15 H400F X R Error code register
– Error code register
#16 H4010 O R/W RS-485 station setting Setting range:1~254. Default: 1
Communication format Please refer to the content description
#17 H4011 O R/W
Setting – communication format setting
#18 H4012 Low word
X R CH1 ADC Raw Data
#19 H4013 High word Raw conversion
#20 H4014 Low word data
X R CH2 ADC Raw Data
#21 H4015 High word
#22 H4016 Low word
X R CH3 ADC Raw Data
#23 H4017 High word
#24 H4018 Low word
X R CH4 ADC Raw Data
#25 H4019 High word
#26 H401A Low word
X R CH5 ADC Raw Data
#27 H401B High word
Raw conversion data
#28 H401C Low word
X R CH6 ADC Raw Data
#29 H401D High word
#30 H401E Low word
X R CH7 ADC Raw Data
#31 H401F High word
#32 H4020 Low word
X R CH8 ADC Raw Data
_9 #33 H4021 High word
#34 H4022 O R Firmware version Example:H0123 represents V1.23
Please refer to the content description
#35 H4023 X R/W Instruction
- Instruction
#36~
#49 For system use
Symbols:

20
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

MODBUS
CR# Latched Attribute Register content Description
Address
O means latched.
X means not latched (Power-off latching command must be issued to maintain power-off state.)
R means can read data by using FROM instruction or RS-485.
W means can write data by using TO instruction or RS-485.

Sensors setting (CR#1~CR#4)

The content and allocations of registers are shown below:

MODBUS Register Allocations

CR# Register Name
Address High byte（b15~b8） Low byte（b7~b0）
#1 H4001 CH1 & CH2 Sensors setting CH2 Setting value CH1 Setting value
#2 H4002 CH3 & CH4 Sensors setting CH4 Setting value CH3 Setting value
#3 H4003 CH5 & CH6 Sensors setting CH6 Setting value CH5 Setting value
#4 H4004 CH7 & CH8 Sensors setting CH8 Setting value CH7 Setting value

The corresponding sensor types are as follows:

Value
Sensor Type
Demical Hexademical
K0 H00 Pt1000
K1 H01 Ni1000
K2 H02 LG-Ni1000
K3 H03 NTC 10K B25 B85 3977K
K4 H04 NTC 100K B25 B85 4260K
K5 H05 NTC 20K B25 B85 4200
K6 H06 NTC 30K B25 B50 4200
K7 H07 PT-42H 10K B25 B85 3435K
K8 H08 PT-43 10.74K B25 B85 3480K
K9 H09 PT-51F 49.12K B25 B85 3992K
K10 H0A PT-25E2 98..63K B25 B85 4066K
K11 H0B PT-312 231.4K B25 B85 4240K
K12 H0C KTY81-110/120
K13 H0D KTY81-121
K14 H0E KTY81-122
K15 H0F KTY81-210/220
K16 H10 KTY81-221
K17 H11 KTY81-222
K18 H12 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 1
K19 H13 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 2
K20 H14 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 3
K21 H15 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 4 9_
K22 H16 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 5
K23 H17 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 6
K24 H18 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 7
K25 H19 Self-defined temperature/resistance table 8
K255 HFF Channel disabled (Default)
Example:

21
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

1. To set CH1 to use Pt1000 (H00) and CH2 to use NTC 30K (H06), write H0600 to CR#1.
2. To set CH5 to use self-defined table 8 (H19) and close CH6 channel (HFF), write HFF19 to CR#3.
Error Code Register (CR#15)

Error Status Value b15 ~ b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

CH1 Invalid measured value or
K1（H1） 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
sensor connection failure
CH2 Invalid measured value or
K2（H2） 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
sensor connection failure
CH3 Invalid measured value or
K4（H4） 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
sensor connection failure
CH4 Invalid measured value or
K8（H8） 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
sensor connection failure
CH5 Invalid measured value or
K16（H10） 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
sensor connection failure Reserved
CH6 Invalid measured value or
K32（H20） 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
sensor connection failure
CH7 Invalid measured value or
K64（H40） 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
sensor connection failure
CH8 Invalid measured value or
K128（H’80） 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
sensor connection failure
Power source abnormal K256（H100） 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Hardware malfunction K512（H200） 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit (b0~b9). Two or more errors may occur at the same
time. 0 means normal, 1 mans an error has occurred.

 Communication format setting (CR#17)

b15~b12 b11~b8 b7~b0

ASCII/RTU Data format Baud rate

H0 ASCII (Default) H'0 7,E,1(Only for ASCII) (Default) H02 9600(Default)

HC RTU H1 8，E，1 H04 19200
H2 7，N，1(Only for ASCII) H08 38400
H3 8，N，1 H10 57600
H4 7，O，1(Only for ASCII) H20 115200
H5 8，O，1
H6 7，E，2(Only for ASCII)
H7 8，E，2
H8 7，N，2(Only for ASCII)
H9 8，N，2
HA 7，O，2(Only for ASCII)
_9
HB 8，O，2

 Instruction (CR#35)

22
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

Instruction Description
H6001 Retain values after power loss.
Restore to factory settings. Self-defined table will
H5AA5
not be reset.
H5AA6 Clear all self-defined tables.

After writing, CR#35 can be read once, where a reading of 1 indicates a successful write command, and a reading of 0
indicates a failed write command. After reading, the value will reset to 0.

9.5 DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/
DVP02TKN-S/DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S Control
Registers
9.5.1 Control Registers
9.5.1.1 MODBUS Address List for DVP02TK-S Series

TK MODBUS Address Description

H0000 TK CR#0: starting address

H1000 The 1st module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

H2000 The 2nd module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

H3000 The 3rd module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

H4000 The 4th module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

H5000 The 5 th module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

H6000 The 6 th module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

H7000 The 7 th module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

H8000 The 8 th module on the right side of TK series, CR#0: starting address

Note: Modbus address is required while using Modbus-tk to read-write registers over a RS-485 network.

9.5.1.2 MODBUS Hex Address List for DVP02TK-S Series

Address
(Hex) Attribute Name Description Default
Number of connected Detecting number of the extension modules
0F00 R X --
extension modules connected to the right side of the TK series
Code of the 1st module on the right side of
0F01 R X Code of the 1st module --
TK series
Code of the 2nd module on the right side of
0F02 R X Code of the 2nd module --
TK series
Code of the 3rd module on the right side of 9_
0F03 R X Code of the 3rd module --
TK series
Code of the 4th module on the right side of
0F04 R X Code of the 4th module --
TK series
Code of the 5th module on the right side of
0F05 R X Code of the 5th module --
TK series
Code of the 6th module on the right side of
0F06 R X Code of the 6th module --
TK series

23
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Address
(Hex) Attribute Name Description Default
Code of the 7th
module on the right side of
0F07 R X Code of the 7th module --
TK series
Code of the 8th module on the right side of
0F08 R X Code of the 8th module --
TK series
Refer to sections for setting up the RS-485
0F09 R/W O RS-485 communication setup K0
communication mode
0F0A R/W X Reserved
0F0B R/W O RS-485 communication format 0：ASCII / 1：RTU K0
0F0C R/W O TK station number TK station number setup K1
0F0D R/W X TK operation 0：Stop / 1：Run --

9.5.1.3 List of the Control Registers

TK
TU
Add. Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
(Hex)
By default, you can see the model’s name in the program
and determine whether there is any extension module.
DVP02TUL-S: H014F
DVP02TUN-S: H024F
#0 000 R O Model --
DVP02TUR-S: H034F
DVP02TKL-S: H044F
DVP02TKN-S: H054F
DVP02TKR-S: H064F
Hexadecimal, displaying the current firmware version, for
#1 001 R O Firmware version example the current firmware is 1.02 and it will display --
H’0102.

#2 002 R O CH1 PV
Channel current value --
#3 003 R O CH2 PV

#4 004 R/W O CH1 SV setups

Channel target value K0
#5 005 R/W O CH2 SV setups
CH1 setups to
#6 006 R/W X K0: stop
run/stop an operation
K1: run K0
CH2 setups to K2: pause (programmable)
#7 007 R/W X
run/stop an operation
K0: Auto control mode
#8 008 R/W X CH1 Auto tuning
K1: Auto adjust mode, after adjusting it will switch to the auto
control mode and input the most suitable parameters, e.g.,
Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd and Tf.
K0
K2: Auto adjust mode (enhanced), recommended when the
_9 #9 009 R/W X CH2 Auto tuning change in temperature reaches 2 degrees /second. Another
channel would be turned off automatically while adjusting,
then revert to the original channel setting once completed.
CR#11~CR#42: Definitions may vary according to
Setups to switch different setups on the specific page.
#10 00A R/W X K0
pages K0: Basic setup page for CH1
K1: PID setup page for CH1

24
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

TK
TU
Add. Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
(Hex)
K2: Program control setup page for CH1
K3: Pattern 0, 1 setup page for CH1
K4: Pattern 2, 3 setup page for CH1
K5: Pattern 4, 5 setup page for CH1
K6: Pattern 6, 7 setup page for CH1
K7: Automatic PID calculation setup page for CH1
K10: Basic setup page for CH2
K11: PID setup page for CH2
K12: Program control setup page for CH2
K13: Pattern 0, 1 setup page for CH2
K14: Pattern 2, 3 setup page for CH2
K15: Pattern 4, 5 setup page for CH2
K16: Pattern 6, 7 setup page for CH2
K17: Automatic PID calculation setup page for CH2
#11
According to each
~ -- R/W X Please refer to each setup page. K0
setup page
#42
-- 00B R/W -- Page0 Basic setup page for CH1 --
-- 02B R/W -- Page1 PID setup page for CH1 --
-- 04B R/W -- Page2 Program control setup page for CH1 --

-- 06B R/W O Page3 Pattern 0, 1 setup page for CH1 --

-- 08B R/W O Page4 Pattern 2, 3 setup page for CH1 --

-- 0AB R/W O Page5 Pattern 4, 5 setup page for CH1 --

-- 0CB R/W O Page6 Pattern 6, 7 setup page for CH1 --
-- 291 R/W O Page7 Automatic PID calculation setup page for CH1 --
-- 0EB R/W O Page10 Basic setup page for CH2 --

-- 10B R/W O Page11 PID setup page for CH2 --

-- 12B R/W O Page12 Program control setup page for CH2 --

-- 14B R/W O Page13 Pattern 0, 1 setup page for CH2 --

-- 16B R/W O Page14 Pattern 2, 3 setup page for CH2 --
-- 18B R/W O Page15 Pattern 4, 5 setup page for CH2 --
-- 1AB R/W O Page16 Pattern 6, 7 setup page for CH2 --

-- 2B1 R/W O Page17 Automatic PID calculation setup page for CH2 --

#43 24B X Error code Please refer to error code descriptions. K0

0x0501: Restore to defaults
0x0502: Settings written on flash 9_
0x0504: RS-485 mode and latched (parameter/mode/station
number)
#45 24D R/W X User-defined 0x51CC: Manually output K0
0x51DD：Auto output
(the PID will be invalid after switching to manually output
mode.)
CR control can be set up by the analog output of

25
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

TK
TU
Add. Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
(Hex)
DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S and the digital output of
/DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKN-S.
DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S：
CR#4: CH1 analog output value range K0~K4000
CR#5: CH2 analog output value range K0~K4000
DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKN-S：
CR#4 (bit0/bit1): CH1 digital output Y0/Y1
CR#5 (bit0/bit1): CH2 digital output Y2/Y3

#46 24E R O CH1 display value The display value is the measured value after being rounded
24F off or the value set to be displayed for the channels.
#47 R O CH2 display value

Symbols: O: Latched. X: Non-latched.

R: Able to read data by FROM instruction. W: Able to write data by TO instruction.

 CR#43 Error code descriptions

Error Code 1 0

Bit0 Power Supply abnormal Abnormal Normal

Bit1 Hardware abnormal Abnormal Normal

Bit2 CH1 conversion error Abnormal Normal

Bit3 CH2 conversion error Abnormal Normal

Bit4 CH1 circuit control abnormal Abnormal Normal

Bit5 CH2 circuit control abnormal Abnormal Normal

Bit6 Manually / Auto Output Manually Output Auto Output

Bit7-15 Reserved

9.5.1.4 Basic Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU
Page0 Page10 Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
Add. (Hex) Add. (Hex)
K-255: Channel closed
K0: 0 ~ 5V
K1: 0~10V
K2: 0 ~ 20mA
_9 K3: 4 ~ 20mA
#11 00B 0EB R/W O Sensor type K4: 0 ~ 50mV K0
K5: Pt100
K6: JPt100
K7: Pt1000
K8: J
K9: K

26
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU
Page0 Page10 Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
Add. (Hex) Add. (Hex)
K10: R
K11: S
K12: T
K13: E
K14: N
K15: B
K16: L
K17: U
K18: TXK
K19: C
K20: PL II
K21: Cu50
K22: Cu100
K23: Ni100
K24: Ni1000
K25: LGNi1000
K26: 0~10V (Quick AI)
K27: Ni120
K28：-100mV ~ 100mV
K29：4 ~ 20mA (Quick AI)

Unit of K0: OC
#12 00C 0EC R/W O K0
temperature K1: OF
Offset temperature
#13 00D 0ED R/W O K-999 ~ K999 K0
error
Temperature filter ranges from K10
to K10000.
When the value inputted is in the
range of ±10 of the last inputted
Temperature filter
#14 00E 0EE R/W O value, the system will run the K10
range
filtering measurement. Hence, when
the noise interference is bigger, the
filter range setting should be
bigger too.
Ranging K0~K50.
Operational formula: value = (last
value*n + this measurement) / (n+1)
When the set value is less, the PV
#15 00F 0EF R/W O Filtering factor
will be closer to this measurement.
K1 9_
When the set value is bigger, the
filtering factor will be bigger and the
PV will be similar.
K0: PID Auto
#16 010 0F0 R/W O Control type K1: PID Manual K0
K2: PID program control

27
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU
Page0 Page10 Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
Add. (Hex) Add. (Hex)
K3: ON/OFF
(for DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUN-S/
DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKN-S)
K0: Heating
K1: Cooling
K2: Alarm
#17 011 0F1 R/W O Output 1 control (for DVP02TUR-S /DVP02TUN-S/ K0
DVP02TKR-S /DVP02TKN-S)
K3: Proportion (for DVP02TUL-S/
DVP02TKL-S)
K0: Heating
K1: Cooling
#18 012 0F2 R/W O Output 2 control K2: Alarm K0
Note: not for DVP02TUL-S/
DVP02TKL-S
K0: cyclic output
K1: immediately output
DVP02TUN-S/ DVP02TKN-S:

015 0F5 K0 (default)

#21 R/W O Output setup K0
DVP02TUR-S/ DVP02TKR-S:
K0 (default)
Note: not available for
DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S
Output 1: DVP02TUN-S/ DVP02TKN-S:
#23 017 0F7 R/W O heating/cooling K1~K990 at 0.1 per second,
control cycle setup default: K10.
DVP02TUR-S/ DVP02TKR-S: K10

Output 2: K30~K990 at 0.1 per second /K200

#24 018 0F8 R/W O heating/cooling (default), default: K200.
control cycle setup Note: not available for
DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S.
#25 019 0F9 R/W O Alarm 1 output
#26 01A 0FA R/W O Alarm 2 output
Alarm output 1
#27 01B 0FB R/W O
upper-limit setup K0~K12, please refer to chapter
9.5.4.2 Alarm Features.
_9 #28 01C 0FC R/W O
Alarm output 1
K0
lower-limit setup Note: not available for
Alarm output 2 DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S.
#29 01D 0FD R/W O
upper-limit setup
Alarm output 2
#30 01E 0FE R/W O
lower-limit setup

28
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU
Page0 Page10 Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
Add. (Hex) Add. (Hex)

PV upper-limit For DVP02TUL-S series, when the

setup for a input value varies, the
#32 020 100 R/W O K4000
corresponding corresponding output will vary
output accordingly.
Take 4~20mA as an example, and
set the upper-limit to K1000,
lower-limit to K0; when the reading
is K0, the output will be 4mA and
PV lower-limit when the reading is K1000, the
setup for a output will be 20mA. When set it to
#33 021 101 R/W O K0
corresponding a negative slope, and set the range
output to K0~K1000; when the reading is
K0, the output will be 20mA and
when the reading is K1000, the
output will be 4mA.
#34 Reserved for system use
Heating hysteresis
#35 023 103 R/W O ON-OFF K10
setup
(For DVP02TUN-S / DVP02TUR-S
Cooling hysteresis
#36 024 104 R/W O / DVP02TKN-S / DVP02TKR-S) K10
setup
For DVP02TUL-S / DVP02TKL-S
Analog output K0: 0~10V
#37 025 105 R/W O K0
mode K1: 0~20mA
K2: 4~20mA
Out of the LED K0=LED blinking
#38 026 106 R/W O K0
setting range K1=LED not blinking
Setting range: K-32768~K32767
Dead band setup
#39 027 107 R/W O Note: not for DVP02TUL-S / K10
for dual outputs
DVP02TKL-S
DVP02TUL-S / DVP02TKL-S:
analog output value K0~K4000
DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP
#40 028 108 R X Outputting --
02TKN-S/DVP02TKR-S：
Bit0: Digital output point, OUT1
Bit1: Digital output point OUT2

Set up the display

If the preset value (PV) is bigger 9_
than the display value, set the PV
#41 029 109 R O value for the K2
to be the same as the display
channel.
value, ranging from K0~K100.
Symbols: O: Latched. X: Non-latched.
R: Able to read data by FROM instruction. W: Able to write data by TO instruction.

29
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.1.5 PID Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU
Page1 Page11 Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
Add. (Hex) Add. (Hex)
K0：Normal, the value of MOUT
won’t be changed with the value of
#11 02B 10B R/W O MOUT_AUTO MV. K0
K1：Auto, the value of MOUT will be
changed with the value of MV.
When set to PID Manual, the MV
value will be outputted as the
#12 02C 10C R/W O MOUT K0
manually set MOUNT value,
between MV_MAX and MV_MIN.
The smaller the value of integral
delay parameter the slower the
#13 02D 10D R/W O α value accumulation of integral coefficients K65
would start. Setup range is from K0
to K100.
#14-
#17 Reserved
PID formula types
#18 032 112 R/W O PID_EQ K0: Independent Formula K1
K1: Dependent Formula

The calculation of the PID

derivative error
K0: Using the variations in the error
(E) to calculate the control value of
#19 033 113 R/W O PID_DE the derivative (Derivative of the K0
error).
K1: Using the variations in the PV
to calculate the control value of the
derivative (Derivative of the PV).

Error dead bandwidth: Range

within which an error (E) is 0. An
error (E) is equal to SV−PV or
PV-SV.
If the setting value is 0, the function
will not be enabled; otherwise, the
CPU module will check whether the
#20 034 114 R/W O ERR_DBW present error is less than the K0
_9 absolute value of ERR_DBW, and
check whether the present error
meets the cross-status condition.
If the present error is less than the
absolute value of ERR_DBW, and
meets the cross-status condition,
the present error will be count as 0,

30
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU
Page1 Page11 Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
Add. (Hex) Add. (Hex)
and the PID algorithm will be
implemented, otherwise the
present error will be brought into
the PID algorithm according to the
normal processing.
Feedforward output value, used for
#21 035 115 R/W O BIAS K0
the PID feedforward.
The MV output value is K0~K1000
#22 036 116 R/W X MV --
and the unit is 0.1.
Accumulated integral value
#23 037 117 R/W X I_MV（Low word） --
temporarily stored. This value is
usually used for reference only.
Users can clear or modify it
according to their needs.
I_MV（High When the MV is greater than the
#24 038 118 R/W X --
word） MV_MAX, or less than the
MV_MIN, the accumulated integral
value in I_MV will no longer be
altered.
PID working:
AUTO Tuning
#25 039 119 R/W O SV - PID Range < PV < SV + K1
(PID hysteresis)
PID Range
#26 03A 11A R/W O β value K0 ~ K100 and the unit is 0.01. K65
Kc_Kp floating Calculated proportional coefficient
#27 03B 11B R/W O point format
(Lo word) (Kc or Kp)
If the P coefficient is less than 0, 1.0
Kc_Kp floating the Kc_Kp will be 0. Independently,
#28 03C 11C R/W O point format if Kc_Kp is 0, it will not be
(Hi word) controlled by P.
Ti_Ki floating
#29 03D 11D R/W O point format Integral coefficient (Ti or Ki）
(Lo word)
If the calculated coefficient I is less 1.0
Ti_Ki floating than 0, Ti_Ki will be 0. If Ti_Ki is 0,
#30 03E 11E R/W O point format it will not be controlled by I.
(Hi word)
Td_Kd floating
#31 03F 11F R/W O point format Derivative coefficient (Td or Kd)
(Lo word) If the calculated coefficient D is
less than 0, Td_Kd will be 0. 0.1
Td_Kd floating
#32 040 120 R/W O point format If Ti_Ki is 0, it will not be controlled
(Hi word) by D.
Tf floating point Derivate parameter for suppressing 9_
#33 041 121 R/W O format
(Lo word) variations can filter derivatives,
which would be more effective with
0.0
Tf floating point greater parameter values.
#34 042 122 R/W O format
(Hi word) Generally, it is suggested to use
the result of auto tuning.

31
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU
Page1 Page11 Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
Add. (Hex) Add. (Hex)
Default integral
#35 043 123 R/W O K0~K10000 (The unit is 0.01) K0
coefficient

#36 044 124 R/W O Max. value of MV K0~K1000 (The unit is 0.1%) K1000

#37 045 125 R/W O Min value of. MV K0~K1000 (The unit is 0.1%) K0

Symbols: O: Latched. X: Non-latched.

R: Able to read data by FROM instruction. W: Able to write data by TO instruction.

9.5.1.6 Program Control Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page2 Page12
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）

Pattern number to start

#11 04B 12B R/W O K0~K7 K0
running
Step number to start
#12 04C 12C R/W O K0~K7 K0
running
K0~K99 indicates the running
The Cycle index of the
times of the Pattern has
#13 04D 12D R/W O Pattern number 0~7 to K0
reached 100
repeat running
K9999: running continuously
Read the current running
#14 04E 12E R X K0~K8 (8 indicates ending) K0
pattern number
Read the current running
#15 04F 12F R X K0~K7 K0
step number
Read the step running
#16 050 130 R X Unit (seconds) K0
time left
Pattern0_set up for the
#17 051 131 R/W O
max. step number to run
Pattern1_ set up for the
#18 052 132 R/W O
max. step number to run
Pattern2_ set up for the
#19 053 133 R/W O
max. step number to run
Pattern3_ set up for the
#20 054 134 R/W O
max. step number to run K0~K7 K0
_9 #21 055 135 R/W O
Pattern4_ set up for the
max. step number to run
Pattern5_ set up for the
#22 056 136 R/W O
max. step number to run
Pattern6_ set up for the
#23 057 137 R/W O
max. step number to run
#24 058 138 R/W O Pattern7_ set up for the

32
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page2 Page12
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）
max. step number to run
The current cycle index
number of the Pattern
#25 059 139 R X
number 0~7 to repeat
running
Temperature wait function K0~K999 (unit: 0.1)
#26 05A 13A R/W O K0
setup K9999: disable
Go back to the pattern
#27 05B 13B R/W O number that is currently
running
K0~K7 K0
Go back to the step
#28 05C 13C R/W O number that is currently
running
Time unit of program K0: The unit is 1 min.
#29 05D 13D R/W O K0
control K1: The unit is 0.1 sec.

9.5.1.7 Pattern0, 1 Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page3 Page13
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）
#11 06B 14B R/W O Pattern 0-0 Target temperature
#12 06C 14C R/W O Pattern 0-1 Target temperature
#13 06D 14D R/W O Pattern 0-2 Target temperature
#14 06E 14E R/W O Pattern 0-3 Target temperature
Range: K -32768~K32767 K0
#15 06F 14F R/W O Pattern 0-4 Target temperature
#16 070 150 R/W O Pattern 0-5 Target temperature
#17 071 151 R/W O Pattern 0-6 Target temperature
#18 072 152 R/W O Pattern 0-7 Target temperature
#19 073 153 R/W O Pattern 0-0 Running time
#20 074 154 R/W O Pattern 0-1 Running time
#21 075 155 R/W O Pattern 0-2 Running time
#22 076 156 R/W O Pattern 0-3 Running time Range: K0~K900 Unit
K0 9_
#23 077 157 R/W O Pattern 0-4 Running time (minutes)
#24 078 158 R/W O Pattern 0-5 Running time
#25 079 159 R/W O Pattern 0-6 Running time
#26 07A 15A R/W O Pattern 0-7 Running time
#27 07B 15B R/W O Pattern 1-0 Target temperature Range: K-32768~K32767 K0

33
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page3 Page13
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）
#28 07C 15C R/W O Pattern 1-1 Target temperature
#29 07D 15D R/W O Pattern 1-2 Target temperature
#30 07E 15E R/W O Pattern 1-3 Target temperature
#31 07F 15F R/W O Pattern 1-4 Target temperature
#32 080 160 R/W O Pattern 1-5 Target temperature
#33 081 161 R/W O Pattern 1-6 Target temperature
#34 082 162 R/W O Pattern 1-7 Target temperature
#35 083 163 R/W O Pattern 1-0 Running time
#36 084 164 R/W O Pattern 1-1 Running time
#37 085 165 R/W O Pattern 1-2 Running time
#38 086 166 R/W O Pattern 1-3 Running time Range: K0~K900 (Unit
K0
#39 087 167 R/W O Pattern 1-4 Running time minutes)
#40 088 168 R/W O Pattern 1-5 Running time
#41 089 169 R/W O Pattern 1-6 Running time
#42 08A 16A R/W O Pattern 1-7 Running time

9.5.1.8 Pattern 2, 3 Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page4 Page14
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）
#11 08B 16B R/W O Pattern 2-0 Target temperature
#12 08C 16C R/W O Pattern 2-1 Target temperature
#13 08D 16D R/W O Pattern 2-2 Target temperature
#14 08E 16E R/W O Pattern 2-3 Target temperature
Range: K-32768~K32767 K0
#15 08F 16F R/W O Pattern 2-4 Target temperature
#16 090 170 R/W O Pattern 2-5 Target temperature
#17 091 171 R/W O Pattern 2-6 Target temperature
#18 092 172 R/W O Pattern 2-7 Target temperature
#19 093 173 R/W O Pattern 2-0 Running time
#20 094 174 R/W O Pattern 2-1 Running time
_9 #21 095 175 R/W O Pattern 2-2 Running time
#22 096 176 R/W O Pattern 2-3 Running time Range: K0~K900 (Unit K0
#23 097 177 R/W O Pattern 2-4 Running time minutes)
#24 098 178 R/W O Pattern 2-5 Running time
#25 099 179 R/W O Pattern 2-6 Running time
#26 09A 17A R/W O Pattern 2-7 Running time

34
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page4 Page14
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）
#27 09B 17B R/W O Pattern 3-0 Target temperature
#28 09C 17C R/W O Pattern 3-1 Target temperature
#29 09D 17D R/W O Pattern 3-2 Target temperature
#30 09E 17E R/W O Pattern 3-3 Target temperature
Range: -32768~32767 K0
#31 09F 17F R/W O Pattern 3-4 Target temperature
#32 0A0 180 R/W O Pattern 3-5 Target temperature
#33 0A1 181 R/W O Pattern 3-6 Target temperature
#34 0A2 182 R/W O Pattern 3-7 Target temperature
#35 0A3 183 R/W O Pattern 3-0 Running time
#36 0A4 184 R/W O Pattern 3-1 Running time
#37 0A5 185 R/W O Pattern 3-2 Running time
#38 0A6 186 R/W O Pattern 3-3 Running time Range: K0~K900 Unit
K0
#39 0A7 187 R/W O Pattern 3-4 Running time (minutes)
#40 0A8 188 R/W O Pattern 3-5 Running time
#41 0A9 189 R/W O Pattern 3-6 Running time
#42 0AA 18A R/W O Pattern 3-7 Running time

9_

35
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.1.9 Pattern 4, 5 Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page5 Page15
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）
#11 0AB 18B R/W O Pattern 4-0 Target temperature
#12 0AC 18C R/W O Pattern 4-1 Target temperature
#13 0AD 18D R/W O Pattern 4-2 Target temperature
#14 0AE 18E R/W O Pattern 4-3 Target temperature
Range: K-32768~K32767 K0
#15 0AF 18F R/W O Pattern 4-4 Target temperature
#16 0B0 190 R/W O Pattern 4-5 Target temperature
#17 0B1 191 R/W O Pattern 4-6 Target temperature
#18 0B2 192 R/W O Pattern 4-7 Target temperature
#19 0B3 193 R/W O Pattern 4-0 Running time
#20 0B4 194 R/W O Pattern 4-1 Running time
#21 0B5 195 R/W O Pattern 4-2 Running time
#22 0B6 196 R/W O Pattern 4-3 Running time Range: K0~K900
K0
#23 0B7 197 R/W O Pattern 4-4 Running time (Unit: minutes)
#24 0B8 198 R/W O Pattern 4-5 Running time
#25 0B9 199 R/W O Pattern 4-6 Running time
#26 0BA 19A R/W O Pattern 4-7 Running time
#27 0BB 19B R/W O Pattern 5-0 Target temperature
#28 0BC 19C R/W O Pattern 5-1 Target temperature
#29 0BD 19D R/W O Pattern 5-2 Target temperature
#30 0BE 19E R/W O Pattern 5-3 Target temperature
Range: K-32768~K32767 K0
#31 0BF 19F R/W O Pattern 5-4 Target temperature
#32 0C0 1A0 R/W O Pattern 5-5 Target temperature
#33 0C1 1A1 R/W O Pattern 5-6 Target temperature
#34 0C2 1A2 R/W O Pattern 5-7 Target temperature
#35 0C3 1A3 R/W O Pattern 5-0 Running time
#36 0C4 1A4 R/W O Pattern 5-1 Running time
#37 0C5 1A5 R/W O Pattern 5-2 Running time
#38 0C6 1A6 R/W O Pattern 5-3 Running time Range: K0~K900
K0
_9 #39 0C7 1A7 R/W O Pattern 5-4 Running time (Unit: minutes)
#40 0C8 1A8 R/W O Pattern 5-5 Running time
#41 0C9 1A9 R/W O Pattern 5-6 Running time
#42 0CA 1AA R/W O Pattern 5-7 Running time

36
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.1.10 Pattern 6, 7 Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page6 Page16
Address Address Attribute Name Description Default
CR#
（Hex） （Hex）
#11 0CB 1AB R/W O Pattern 6-0 Target temperature
#12 0CC 1AC R/W O Pattern 6-1 Target temperature
#13 0CD 1AD R/W O Pattern 6-2 Target temperature
#14 0CE 1AE R/W O Pattern 6-3 Target temperature
Range: K-32768~K32767 K0
#15 0CF 1AF R/W O Pattern 6-4 Target temperature
#16 0D0 1B0 R/W O Pattern 6-5 Target temperature
#17 0D1 1B1 R/W O Pattern 6-6 Target temperature
#18 0D2 1B2 R/W O Pattern 6-7 Target temperature
#19 0D3 1B3 R/W O Pattern 6-0 Running time
#20 0D4 1B4 R/W O Pattern 6-1 Running time
#21 0D5 1B5 R/W O Pattern 6-2 Running time
#22 0D6 1B6 R/W O Pattern 6-3 Running time Range: K0~K900
K0
#23 0D7 1B7 R/W O Pattern 6-4 Running time (Unit: minutes)
#24 0D8 1B8 R/W O Pattern 6-5 Running time
#25 0D9 1B9 R/W O Pattern 6-6 Running time
#26 0DA 1BA R/W O Pattern 6-7 Running time
#27 0DB 1BB R/W O Pattern 7-0 Target temperature
#28 0DC 1BC R/W O Pattern 7-1 Target temperature
#29 0DD 1BD R/W O Pattern 7-2 Target temperature
#30 0DE 1BE R/W O Pattern 7-3 Target temperature
Range: K-32768~K32767 K0
#31 0DF 1BF R/W O Pattern 7-4 Target temperature
#32 0E0 1C0 R/W O Pattern 7-5 Target temperature
#33 0E1 1C1 R/W O Pattern 7-6 Target temperature
#34 0E2 1C2 R/W O Pattern 7-7 Target temperature
#35 0E3 1C3 R/W O Pattern 7-0 Running time
#36 0E4 1C4 R/W O Pattern 7-1 Running time
#37 0E5 1C5 R/W O Pattern 7-2 Running time
#38 0E6 1C6 R/W O Pattern 7-3 Running time Range: K0~K900
K0
#39 0E7 1C7 R/W O Pattern 7-4 Running time (Unit: minutes)
9_
#40 0E8 1C8 R/W O Pattern 7-5 Running time
#41 0E9 1C9 R/W O Pattern 7-6 Running time
#42 0EA 1CA R/W O Pattern 7-7 Running time
Symbols: O: Latched. X: Non-latched.
R: Able to read data by FROM instruction. W: Able to write data by TO instruction.

37
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.1.11 Automatic PID Calculation Setup Page

TK CH1 TK CH2
TU Page7 Page17 Defaul
Attribute Name Description
CR# Address Address t
(Hex) (Hex)
Set the point that you intend to
adjust with the setting value K1
The set point currently
#11 291 2B1 R/W X and K2. When the adjustment K0
being adjusted
finished, the value would change
to another set point automatically.
K1: Turn ON
K0: Turn OFF
Switch for
#12 292 2B2 R/W O After successfully adjusting both K0
auto-calculation
points, the auto-calculation
feature would be switch ON.
#13~ 293~ 2B3~
R/W O For internal calculation.
#19 299 2B9
#20 29A 2BA R/W O The first set point SV Value of the first set point SV K0
#21~ 29B~ 2BB~
R/W O For internal calculation.
#26 2A0 2C0
#27 2A1 2C1 R/W O The second set point SV Value of the second set point SV K0
#28~ 2A2~ 2C2~
R/W O For internal calculation.
#33 2A7 2C7

_9

38
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.2 Examples of Setting a Control Register

Since CR#11~CR#42 are defined differently from page to page, the register module features switching pages on the
screen. CR#10 is the register for page control, which should be written with the value of the corresponding page before
you read-write CR#11~CR#42. The programming example is shown as follows:

1. Read the sensor type of channel1.（Page0，CR#11）

2. Set the maximum MV value of channel2.（Page11，CR#36）

9_

39
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.3 Analog Input Description

The analog input value of the CH1 is shown at CR#2, and CH2 at CR#3. Please refer to the following table to set the
input sensor type register. The temperature of the platinum and thermocouple can be set in Celsius or Fahrenheit, unit
0.1 degree. Users can use offset to edit the settings.

Mode Analog Range Digital Range

-1 Channel Closed X X
0 0~5V 0 ~ 5V
1 0 ~ 10V 0 ~ 10V
2 0 ~ 20mA 0 ~ 20mA
K0 ~ K32000
3 4 ~ 20mA 4 ~ 20mA
Current / Voltage
4 0 ~ 50mV 0 ~ 50mV
0~10V
26 0 ~ 10V
(Quick AI)
28 -100mV~100mV -100mV~100mV K-32000~K32000
4 ~ 20mA
29 4 ~ 20mA K0 ~ K32000
(Quick AI)
5 Pt100 -200 ~ 600°C K-2000 ~K6000
Platinum 6 JPt100 -20 ~ 400°C K-200 ~ K4000
7 Pt1000 -200 ~ 600°C K-2000 ~K6000
8 J -100 ~ 1200°C K-1000~K12000
9 K -200 ~ 1300°C K-2000~K13000
10 R 0 ~ 1700°C K0 ~K17000
11 S 0 ~ 1700°C K0 ~K17000
12 T -200 ~ 400°C K-2000~K4000
13 E 0 ~ 600°C K0 ~K6000
Thermocouple 14 N -200 ~ 1300°C K-2000~K13000
15 B 100 ~ 1800°C K1000~K18000
16 L -200 ~ 850°C K-2000~K8500
17 U -200 ~ 500°C K-2000~K5000
18 TXK -200 ~ 800°C K-2000~K8000
19 C 0~1800°C K0~K18000
20 PL II -100~1370°C K-1000~K13700

Copper thermal 21 Cu50 -50~150°C K-500~K1500

resistance 22 Cu100 -50~150°C K-500~K1500
_9 23 Ni100 -100~180°C K-1000~K1800

Nickel thermal 24 Ni1000 -100~180°C K-1000~K1800

resistance 25 LGNi1000 -60~200°C K-600~K2000
27 Ni120 -80~260°C K-800~K2600

40
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.4 Outputs
9.5.4.1 The output value varies with the PV value

This functionality is only available for DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S series. When the PV varies, the corresponding output
will vary accordingly. Take 4~20mA as an example, and set the upper-limit to 1000, lower-limit to 0; when PV is 0, the
output will be 4mA and when PV is 1000, the output will be 20mA. When set it to a negative slope and set the range to
0~1000; when the PV is 0, the output will be 20mA and when the PV is 1000, the output will be 4mA. As the linear graph
shown below, the analog output will vary according to the PV value.

An al og O utp ut

Ma x.
Ou tpu t Va lu e

Min .
Ou tpu t Va lu e

Temp er atu re
L owe r- li mit o f P V Up pe r- li mit o f P V

9.5.4.2 Alarm Outputs

The alarm output is only available for DVP02TUN-S, DVP02TUR-S, DVP02TKN-S and DVP02TKR-S series, not for
DVP02TUL-S and DVP02TKL-S series. Alarm function is to set the input value to trigger the outputs to do corresponding
actions. There are 12 modes available for setups. The alarm output operations are shown below.

Setting
Alarm Type Alarm Output Operation
Value
0 Alarm function disabled. None
ON
Deviation upper- and lower-limit: This alarm output operates
1 when the PV is higher than the setting value SV+AL-H or lower
than the setting value SV-AL-L. OFF
AL-L SV AL-H
ON

Deviation upper-limit: This alarm output operates when the PV

2
is higher than the setting value SV+AL-H.
OFF
SV AL-H
ON
9_
Deviation lower-limit: This alarm output operates when the PV is
3
lower than the setting value SV-AL-L.
OFF
AL-L SV

41
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Setting
Alarm Type Alarm Output Operation
Value
ON

Upper and lower alarm reverse action: This alarm output

4
operates when the PV is between SV+AL-H and SV- AL_L.
OFF
AL-L SV AL-H
ON
Absolute value upper- and lower-limit: This alarm output
5 operates when the PV is higher than the setting value AL-H or
lower than the setting value AL-L. OFF
AL-L AL-H
ON

Absolute value upper-limit: This alarm output operates when the

6
PV is higher than the setting value AL-H.
OFF
AL-H
ON

Absolute value lower-limit: This alarm output operates when the

7
PV is lower than the setting value AL-L.
OFF
AL-L
ON
Standby alarm value upper- and lower-limit: This alarm output
operates when the PV is at the set value and the temperature is
8
higher than the setting value SV+AL-H or lower than the setting OFF
value SV- AL_L. AL-L SV AL-H
ON
Standby alarm value upper-limit: This alarm output operates
9 when the PV is at the set value and the temperature is higher
than the setting value SV+AL-H. OFF
SV AL-H
ON
Standby alarm value lower-limit: This alarm output operates
10 when the PV is at the set value and the temperature is lower
than the setting value SV- AL_L. OFF
AL-L SV
ON
Hysteresis upper-limit alarm output: This alarm output operates
if PV value is higher than the setting value SV+AL-H. This alarm
11
output is OFF when the PV is lower than the setting value
OFF
SV+AL-L. AL-L AL-H
ON
Hysteresis lower-limit alarm output: This alarm output operates
if PV value is lower than the setting value SV-AL-H. This alarm
12
output is OFF when the PV is higher than the setting value OFF
_9 SV-AL-L. AL-L AL-H

42
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.5 ON/OFF Control Mode

For DVP02TUR/DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TKR/DVP02TKN-S series, every channel has 2 digital outputs. Outputs control the
ON/OFF mode.

 Actions for the heating output:

The output is OFF, when the input is greater than the setting value. Output is ON, when the input is smaller than the total
value of the setting value + adjustment sensitivity setting value. For example, set the setting value to 100 degree and the
heating sensitivity adjustment to 10 degrees; when the temperature reached 100 degree, the digital output switches to
OFF. When the temperature is 90 degrees, it will heat up to 100 degrees, and then the digital output will switch to OFF.

Hea tin g se nsi tivi ty

ad ju stmen t
He ati ng
ON

OFF PV
SV

 Actions for the cooling output:

The output is ON, when the input is greater than the total value of the setting value + adjustment sensitivity setting value.
Output is OFF, when the input is smaller than the setting value. For example, set the setting value to 10 degrees and the
cooling sensitivity adjustment to 5 degrees; when the temperature reached 10 degrees, the digital output switches to OFF.
When the temperature is 15, it will cool down to 10 degrees, and then the digital output will switch to OFF.

Coo li ng se nsi tivi ty

a dj ustme nt

ON

Coo li ng
O FF PV

SV

9_

43
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Actions for dual outputs:

H eating sensitiv ity Cooling sensitiv ity

adjus tm ent Dead band adj ustment

ON

Heating Cooli ng
OFF PV

SV
When setting one output for heating and the other for cooling, a non-action zone (dead band) can be set as the figure
above. For example, set the setting value to 100 degrees, heating sensitivity adjustment to 10 degrees, cooling
sensitivity adjustment to 5 degree and dead band to 20 degrees; when the temperature is 90~110 degree, the outputs
will be OFF. Heating up the temperature to 90 degrees, the output will switch to OFF. When the temperature is below 80
degrees, the heating up will be started. Cooling down the temperature to 110 degrees, the output will switch to OFF.
When the temperature is over 115 degrees, the cooling will be started.

_9

44
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.6 Control Mode

When the PV is in the range of ERR_DBW, the PLC will run the PID operation according to the E value. When the PV is
over the SV, the cross status will be established, and the E value will be seen as 0 while running the PID operation until
the PV goes over the range of ERR_DBW. If PID_DE is True, the PLC will run the derivative of PV. When the cross
status is established, the Delta PV will be seen as 0 while running the derivative of PID operation. As the example shown
below, the PLC will run the PID operation in the section A and will see the values of E and Delta PV as 0 while running
the PID operation.

PID Formula:

 Independent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=False）

 Independent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=True）

9_

45
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Dependent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=False）

 Dependent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=True）

※All the CVs stated above are the MVs in the formula.

Auto tuning mode: When auto tuning is done, the value will become 0 and switch to the auto tuning mode
automatically.

PID Control Block Diagram:

PID Block Diagram (Independent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND
-
PV REVERSE
0
X(-1)

ERR_DBW

Kc_Kp
PID-P
>0 PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
<=0 +
0 +
Kc_Kp MV_LIMIT
1
MV
Ti_Ki
PID-I
>0
_9 +
MV_MAX, MV_MIN

<=0 +
0 +
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
+ MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT
PID-D PID_MAN
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

46
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

PID Block Diagram (Dependent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND PID-P
-
REVERSE
PV 0
X(-1)

Kc_Kp
ERR_DBW Kc_Kp
>0

<=0
0

PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
+
+
MV_LIMIT
1
Ti_Ki MV
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, M V_MIN
<=0
0
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT PID_MAN
PID-D
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

Note:

1. When tuning these 3 parameters, Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki and Td_Kd, set the Kc_Kp value first (according to their experiences),
and set the Ti_Ki and Td_Kd value to 0. When it can be controlled, users can increase the values of Ti_Ki and Td_Kd.
When the value of Kc_Kp is 1, it means that the proportional gain is 100%. That is, the error is increased by a factor of
one. When the proportional gain is less than 100%, the error is decreased. When th proportional gain is greater than
100%, the error is increased.

The parameters which have been tuned automatically are not necessarily suitable for every controlled environment.
Therefore, users can further modify the automatically tuned parameters. However, it is suggested to modify the values
of Ti_Ki or Td_Kd only.

PID Tuning Guide:

P gain

Achieve the target temperature more

quickly with a faster convergence
Increase P gain
speed, while Overshoot being
increased.
9_

Prevent overshooting, which would

cause longer time to achieve the target
Reduce P gain
temperature with a slower convergence
speed.

47
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

I gain

As increasing Overshoot, oscillation

Increase I gain amplitude would be increased as
(Decreasing integral time Ti) well, to reach the target temperature
with a faster convergence speed.

The convergence speed would be

Decrease I gain
(Increasing integral time Ti) slower to minimize overshoot and
oscillations.

D gain

Changes in temperature would be

Increase D gain
eased.

Changes in temperature would

Decrease D gain
become rapid.

To improve the situation that

temperature constantly oscillates
Special case
over the SV, decrease D gains or
simply control with PI.

_9

48
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.7 Programmable SV Control Mode

The temperature setting value is not fixed but a setting curve defined by users according to their requirements. By PID
control, the temperature input rises along with the defined temperature curve. The device provides 8 patterns and each
pattern with 8 steps, a linking parameter, a loop parameter, and a number of execution steps respectively. Each step has
2 parameters (temperature setting value and time). After setting these parameters up, each temperature controller will
have its own set of initial pattern and step for creating its own temperature setting curve. Some of the terms are
explained as follows:

1. Initial pattern: set the program to start running at a sequential number of patterns.

2. Initial Step: set the program to start running at a sequential number of steps.

3. Running time: set the temperature duration time, if not necessary, it can be set to 0.

4. Step: includes 2 parameter settings: a setting point X and a Running time T, indicating the setting value (SV) to rise to
X degree after the time T. If the setting point X is identical to the previous setting, this process is called a Soak,
otherwise it is called a Ramp; therefore this control procedure is also called a Ramp Soak control. The first
running procedure is preset as a Soak control, to set the temperature control to setting point X degree in
advanced and keep the temperature at X degree, at a duration time of T.

5. Number of loops: Extra loops to be carried out for the pattern. If set to 1, the pattern will be carried out 2 times.

6. Executing step: Number of steps executed for each pattern

7. Execution: Before execution, users need to set up all the parameters. If the setting control is in the running mode, the
program will start running from the initial pattern and initial step, carrying out commands one by one by their
set orders. When the setting control is in the ending mode, the SV will stop at the final setting. When the
setting control is in the stop mode and the temperature will be at the value before the stop, by re-selecting to
run, the program will start running from the initial pattern and initial step. When the setting control is in the
pause mode and the temperature is at the value before the pause, by re-selecting to run, the program will start
running from the step where the program was paused, carrying out the remaining parts. During execution, the
SV cannot be set up.

9.5.8 ERROR LEDIndicator

When the channel detects the analog input is out of range, the error code will show up and the error LED will also be
blinking to notify. Users can disable this functionality to inactivate the error LED blinking, but the error code will still show
up.

Parameter:

Page CR Description Setting Value

K0=LED blinking (default)

Basic Setup Page 38 Output out of range
K1=LED not blinking

9_

49
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.9 Automatic PID Calculation Feature (Support TK V1.06/TU

V4.18 and above)
9.5.9.1 Feature Description

As the set value (SV) being changed, the PID parameters would be calculated automatically based on the relation
between two set points after performed auto-tuning twice.

1. After auto-tuning two set points, the SV slope of a 2. When the SVs being changed, the corresponding PID
linear function would be calculated based on the parameters would be calculated according to the
changes of the waveform parameters between two calculated slope.
points.

9.5.9.2 Setup Instructions

Follow the below steps to set up (take channel 1 for example):

Step 1: Set the first set value (SV) to adjust.

CR Page CR# Description Setting Value

All pages 4 The target value User-defined

Step 2: Set the current point for auto-tuning.

CR Page CR# Description Setting Value

Automatic PID Calculation The current set point for
11 K1
Setup Page (Page7) auto-tuning.

Step 3: Start auto-tuning.

CR Page CR# Description Setting Value

8 Auto-tuning K1 or K2
All pages Setups to run/stop an
6 K1
operation
After finished auto-tuning, the current set point (Step2 CR) would be changed to the second point (K2) automatically.
_9
Step 4: After both set points being tuned (notice if CR#8 changes back to 0), set the second set value (SV) to adjust (same
as step1).

Step 5: Start auto-tuning (same as step3).

Step 6: When the setting is completed, the auto-calculation feature would be switched to ON automatically. And the PID
parameters would be output differently according to each SV

50
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.9.3 Additional Instructions

1. Choosing tuning point

It’s suggested that set the tuning points at 25% and 75% of the SV application range

2. Copying parameters

Under the same environment, CR#12~CR#33 on automatic PID calculation page can be copied to the same
position of other modules (including internal calculation parameters) so as to achieve the same calculation result.

3. Adjusting tuning point

In case that you want to reset a specific tuning point, simply reset the SV and the current tuning point, then perform
auto-tuning again.

9.5.10 RS-485 Communication Setup for DVP02TK-S

9.5.10.1 MODBUS Communication Protocol

For DVP02TK-S series, MODBUS supports formats: RTU and ASCII. When RTU is selected, the data length is 8 and the
following function codes are supported.

Function code03：read multiple words, up to 32 words can be read.

Function code06：write a single word.

Function code10：write multiple words, up to 32 words can be written.

9.5.10.2 Restore to Factory Settings

Users can restore the RS-485 communication settings back to defaults (9600/7/1/E, station number 1) by switching RUN
to STOP and then STOP to RUN after turning on the device within 5 seconds.
9_

51
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.10.3 RS-485 Communication Setup

There are 2 methods to setup RS-485 communication, via TK Wizard or setting the MODBUS address.

 TK Wizard (TKSoft): click the Module Information and set up baud rate, transfer mode and then click “Send” to
save the settings

 MODBUS address setup:

Write the value 0x00XY (refer to the following list for X and Y setups) in MODBUS address (0x0F09).

Example: the value 0x0000 (X=0/Y=0) indicates the baud rate is 9600, data length is 7, stop bits is 1 and the
parity is Even.

RS-485 Communication Setting Address = 0x0F09, written value is（0x00XY）

Value Description

_9 0 9600(default)

Baud Rate 1 19200

X Bit7~Bit4
（bps）
2 38400

3 57600

4 115200

52
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

RS-485 Communication Setting Address = 0x0F09, written value is（0x00XY）

5~16 reserved

0 7（default）
Bit3 Data Length
1 8

0 1-bit（default）
Bit2 Stop Bits
1 2-bit
Y
0 Even（default）

1 Odd
Bit1~Bit0 Parity
2 None

3 reserved

Data Length Stop Bits Parity

bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Y
（0：1-bit； （0：Even；1：Odd； Data Bits Stop Bits Parity
Value
（0：7；1：8）
1：2-bit） 2：None；3：reserved）

0 0 0 0 0 7 1 even

1 0 0 0 1 7 1 odd

2 0 0 1 0 7 1 none

3 0 0 1 1 7 1 even

4 0 1 0 0 7 2 even

5 0 1 0 1 7 2 odd

6 0 1 1 0 7 2 none

7 0 1 1 1 7 2 even

8 1 0 0 0 8 1 even

9 1 0 0 1 8 1 odd

A 1 0 1 0 8 1 none

B 1 0 1 1 8 1 even

C 1 1 0 0 8 2 even

D 1 1 0 1 8 2 odd 9_
E 1 1 1 0 8 2 none

F 1 1 1 1 8 2 even

53
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.11 TK Wizard-Connection Setup

9.5.11.1 Restore to Factory Settings for DVP02TK-S

Refer to section 9.5.9.2 for more information on restoring the RS-485 communication settings back to defaults (9600/7/1/E,
station number 1).

9.5.11.2 COMMGR Setup

Input the communication setting values to create a TK connection in COMMGR. After setting the values, click the

auto-detect button to check if the connection is successfully established. Click OK to confirm the settings.

_9

54
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.5.11.3 Settings in TKSoft

Click the icon Communication Setting in TKSoft to set up the communication.

Select the COMMGR driver and the station number.

9_

55
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.5.11.4 TKSoft-Scan the Connected Device

Once the setup completed, users can click the Scan button to have the system to detect the connected DVP02TK-S
series and the extension modules from the right side of DVP02TU-S.

Double click the DVP02TK-S / DVP02TU-S icon to open the setting page.

_9

56
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.6 Wiring
9.6.1 Wiring DVP04PT-S/DVP06PT-S
,
Pt100 0 *2
CH 1
L+
2 -Wi re L-
I-
Shielded c able*1
AG
*2
Pt100 CH6
L+
3-Wire L-
I-
S hielded cable* 1 AG

Note1: Use only the wires that are packed with the temperature sensor for analog input and separate from other power
line or any wire that may cause noise.

Note2: 3-wire RTD sensor provides a compensation loop that can be used to subtract the wire resistance while 2-wire
RTD sensor has no mechanism to compensate. Use cables (3-wired) with the same length (less than 200 m) and
wire resistance of less than 20 ohm.

Note3: If there is noise, please connect the shielded cables to the system earth point, and then ground the system earth
point or connect it to the distribution box.

Note4: Please keep wires as short as possible when connecting the module to a device whose temperature is going to be
measured, and keep the power cable used as far away from the cable connected to a load as possible to prevent
noise interference.

Note5: Please connect on a power supply module and on the temperature module to a system ground, and then
ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

9_

57
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.6.2 Wiring DVP04TC-S

Shi elded
cable* 1 C H1
+ L+ MUX
- L-
SLD
Thermoc oupl e
Shielded
c able*1 C H4
+ L+
- L-
S LD
Thermocouple Cold-junction 5V
*2 compensation

AG
Termi nal of
power module +15V
Sy stem groundi ng 0V DC/ DC
*3 AG
24V c o n ve r te r
-15V
Cl ass 3 g rounding (100 o f l ess )

Note1: Use only the wires that are supplied with J, K, R, S, T thermocouple sensor. Tighten PLC terminal screws to a
torque of 1.95 kg-cm (1.7 in-lbs).

Note2: Terminal SLD is a grounding location for noise suppression.

Note3: Please connect power supply module terminal and DVP04TC-S temperature measurement module terminal
to system earth ground.

Warning1: Do NOT wire empty terminals.

Warning2: Only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C and the length must be less than 50 m.

Warning3: TC modules must run for 30 minutes before they start to take any temperature measurement.

_9

58
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.6.3 Wiring DVP08NTC-S

P T /NT C/N X P K T Y81 series/

S H IB AU RA P S B series Mu x
CH 1
L1+
L1- Mux

AG

2-Wire

P T /NT C/N XP K T Y81 series/

S H IBA U RA P S B series
C H2
L2+
L2-
AG
S LD
2-Wire Shielded Cable

Note1: Use only the wires that are packed with the temperature sensor for analog input and separate from other power
line or any wire that may cause noise.

Note2: DVP08NTC-S only supports 2-wire RTD sensor, which has no mechanism to compensate.

Note3: If there is noise, please connect the shielded cables to the system earth point, and then ground the system earth
point or connect it to the distribution box.

Note4: Please keep wires as short as possible when connecting the module to a device whose temperature is going to be
measured, and keep the power cable used as far away from the cable connected to a load as possible to prevent
noise interference.

Note5: Please connect on a power supply module and on the temperature module to a system ground, and then
ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

9_

59
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

9.6.4 Wiring DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TUL-S/

DVP02TKN-S/ DVP02TKR-S/DVP02TKL-S

 Sensor input wiring

Ni 100/Ni1 00 0/ Ni1 20
LG-Ni1000/Cu 50 /Cu 10 0 電流輸出
Current Output
Pt100/J Pt 10 0/ Pt1000 Shielded CH1
隔離線*1 Cable*1 L+
I+
ADC
L-
I- I NA
2-Wire AG
SLD

P t100/ JPt100 CH2

Shielded
/Pt1000 隔離線*1
Cable*1 L+
I+
L-
I-
3-Wi re SLD AG

*1. Please isolate it from other power cable.

 Voltage/Current input wiring

-100mV ~+ 100 mV,

0 mV ~ +50 mV,
0 V~ +5V, Shielded
隔離線*1 C H1 電流輸出Output
Current
0 V~ +10V Cable*1
L+
+
I+
-
ADC
L-
I- INA
AG
SL D

0mA ~+ 20mA , CH2

4mA~ +20mA L+
+ I+
_9 - L-
I-
S LD AG

*1. Please isolate it from other power cable.

60
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

 Thermocouple input wiring

Thermocouple Current Output

L+
+ I+
- L- ADC
I- INA
SLD AG

 DVP02TUN-S/DVP02TKN-S Output point wiring

2 4V D C O UT1
OUT 2
+

C0
D: 1N4 0 0 1
D io d e o r eq u i va le n t co m po n e n t

24 V DC OU T3
O UT 4
+

C1
D: 1N4 0 0 1
D io d e o r eq u i va le n t co m po n e n t

 DVP02TUR-S/DVP02TKR-S Output point wiring

OUT3
240V AC
OUT4
C1

9_

61
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

OUT3
24V DC
OUT4
C1

Warning: Electric shock!

Digital relay output points are connected to hazardous locations.

 DVP02TUL-S/DVP02TKL-S Output point wiring

0V~+10V
OUT1
VO CH1
IO
AG
AG

0mA~+20mA, OUT2
4mA~+20mA
VO CH2
IO
AG
AG

_9

62
 Ch a pt er 9 D V P- S S er i es Te m pe r a tu r e M e as u r e me nt Mo d u le

9.7 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in PT, TC modules, an error indicator will start blinking. Once you see an error indicator starts
blinking, you can use the FROM instruction to read the error codes stored in CR#30. The bit 0 to bit 15 indicates the error
codes. It is possible to have two errors at the same time. 0 indicates normal and 1 indicates error. Refer to the following
table for more the causes and the solutions for troubleshooting.
RUN ERROR
Bit No. Description Solution
LED LED
bit0 OFF ON The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.
Input value exceeds the set
bit1 Blinking Blinking Check the input signal.
upper/lower bound.
Check whether the value written in the
bit2 Communication address setting error communication address is correct and
rewrite it
Blinking OFF Check if the written value of OFFSET
bit3 OFFSET/GAIN error
and GAIN are correct and rewrite them.

bit4 Temperature sensor is abnormal. Contact the factory.

bit5 Blinking Blinking The input value is out of range. Check the input signal.

bit6 Average time setting error Check the average time setting.

Check whether the instruction reads or

Blinking OFF
bit7 FROM/TO instruction error writes from incorrect CR.
Check whether the module is properly
connected.
The signal received by channel 1
bit8 Check the signal received by channel 1
exceeds the range of analog inputs
The signal received by channel 2
bit9 Check the signal received by channel 2
exceeds the range of analog inputs
Blinking Blinking
The signal received by channel 3
bit10 Check the signal received by channel 3
exceeds the range of analog inputs
The signal received by channel 4
bit11 Check the signal received by channel 4
exceeds the range of analog inputs

9_

63
 10
Chapter 10 DVP-S Series Position Control
Module

Table of Contents
10.1 DVP01PU-S Specification ............................................................................. 10-2

10.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions .................................................................. 10-3

10.2.1 LED Display ............................................................................................... 10-4

10.3 Terminals .................................................................................................... 10-4

10.3.1 Input/Output Terminal ................................................................................ 10-5

10.4 Control Register .......................................................................................... 10-6

10.5 Wiring ........................................................................................................ 10-10

10.6 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 10-11

10-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

10.1 DVP01PU-S Specification

Item Description
Power supply 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Distance value is set by CR
1. Setting range: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647
Distance instruction 2. Selectable unit: um, mdeg, 10-4 inch, Pulse
3. Selectable rate: 100, 101, 102, 103
4. Selectable position: absolute and relative position instruction.
Speed value is set by CR
1. Setting range: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 (conversion value of 10 ~ 200 kPPS
Speed instruction
pulse)
2. Selectable unit: pulse/s, cm/min, 10deg/min, inch/min
Photo coupler is for insulation and there are LED indications for all output/input signals.
Outputs: FP and RP (line driver output 5V)
External output
Output: CLR is the type of NPN open collector transistor output
(5 ~ 24V DC, less than 20mA)
Photo coupler is for insulation and there are LED indications for all output/input signals.
Input point: START, STOP, LSP, LSN, DOG (contact or open collector transistor, 24V
External input DC±10%, 5±1mA)
Inputs: ΦA, ΦB (line driver or open collector transistor, 5 ~ 24V DC, 6 ~15mA)
Input: PG0 (line driver or open collector transistor, 5 ~ 24V DC, 6 ~ 15mA)
Three selectable modes: Pulse/Dir, FP (CW)/RP (CCW), A/B (all modes are line driver
Pulse output format
output).
Position program & CR data can be read/write via FROM/TO intruction of PLC MPU. The 32-bit data is
data transmission composed of 2 continuous CR number. The range of 16-bit CR is CR#0 ~ CR#48.
Connect to DVP-PLC Modules are numbered from 0 ~ 7 with 0 closet and 7 farthest to the MPU. Up to 8
series modules can be connected without occupying any digital I/O.

10

10-2
 Ch a pt er 1 0 D V P- S S er ies Pos i ti o n Co n tr o l M od u l e

10.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions

3.00 60.00

3.00
4 6
1 25.20 60.00 3.40
5 7

8 14
10 12
2
11
90.00

3 13
3
3.00

Unit: mm

No. Name Description

Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Indicates the low voltage status of the module.
1 Low Voltage indicator ON: the external input power is lower than 19.5V.
OFF: the power supply is normal.
Error status of the module
ERROR indicator OFF: the module operates normally
Blink: CR#39 is not 0.
2 Model name Model name of the module

3 DINrail clip Secure the module on the set

The inputs are connected to sensors.

4 Terminals
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
5 Terminal indicator Terminal number.
6 Mounting hole For positioning between modules.
7 Nameplate Lable of the module.
8 Extension module connection port Connect the modules.
9 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module.
10 DIN rail slot（35mm） For the DIN rail.
11 Securing module slot For securing the extension module.
12 communication port Provide RS-485 communication wiring.
13 Power input port Expansion unit power input.
14 Extension port Connect the PLC or the modules.

10

10-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

10.2.1 LED Display

POWER ：Power indicator, +5V internal power

LV ：Low voltage indicator, lit when external input power is lower than 19.5V

ERROR ：Error indicator (ON/OFF blinking). It will blink when CR#39 is not 0.

LSP ：Right limit input indicator

LSN ：Left limit input indicator

PG0 ：Zero signal input indicator

START ：Start input

STOP ：Stop input

DOG ：DOG (near point signal) input

FP ：CW pulse output

RP ：CCW pulse output

ΦA ：A-phase input of manual pulse generator

ΦB ：B-phase input of manual pulse generator

CLR ：Output clear signal

10.3 Terminals

DVP01PU-S
s/s
STA R T
S TO P
DO G
LS P
LS N
PG0 +
PG0 -
A+

A-
B+
B-
CLR+
CLR-
F P+
F P-
RP +
R P-

10

10-4
 Ch a pt er 1 0 D V P- S S er ies Pos i ti o n Co n tr o l M od u l e

10.3.1 Input/Output Terminal

Description Terminal Content Response
+24V/ Power input/24V DC (-15 ~ +20%)
Power supply -
0V Current consumption 70±10mA; Startup peak current 1.3 A
START Start input terminal 4ms/12ms
STOP Stop input terminal 4ms
LSP/LSN Limit Stroke of right/left limit 1ms
ΦA+/ΦA- A-phase terminal (+, -) of manual pulse generator input (line driver input) 200kHz
ΦB+/ΦB- B-phase terminal (+, -) of manual pulse generator input (line driver input) 200kHz
Input PG0+/
Zero signal input terminal +, - (line driver input) 4ms
PG0-
Offers two different functions depending on operation mode.
DOG (1) It is near-point signal in zero return mode. 1ms
(2) It is start signal on interrupt 1st or interrupt 2nd speed mode.
S/S Signal common terminal of Inputs (START, STOP, DOG, LSP, LSN) -
CLR+/
Clear signal (clear signal of internal error counter for Servo drive) 4ms
CLR-
FP/RP mode: CW pulse output I/O mode: Output pulse
Output FP+/FP- 200kHz
AB-phase mode: A-phase output
FP/RP mode: CCW pulse output I/O mode: direction output
RP+/RP- 200kHz
AB-phase mode: B-phase output

10

10-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

10.4 Control Register

CR No.

Attribute
Address

Content Setting Range

Latched
HM LW

System setting, Read-only (For the model code, please refer to the
#0 H’4190 ○ R Model No.
model list H’0110..)
Range: 1 ~ +2,147,483,647 PPS/REV, factory setting: 2,000
#2 #1 H’4191 ○ R/W Pulse rate (A)
Pulse/Revolution (PLS/REV)
#4 #3 H’4193 ○ R/W Feed rate (B) Range: 1 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit/REV, factory setting: 1,000 (unit*1/REV)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

START response time

START input polarity

Zero return direction

Position rate setting

Pulse output format
STOP input polarity

Parameter

Acceleration curve

LSN input polarity

LSP input polarity
DOG trigger time
setting

Pulse direction
#5 H’4195 ○ R/W
Factory setting:

DOG polarity

Unit setting
H’0000

options

Maximum Range: 0 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (10 ~ 200 kPPS) *2

#7 #6 H’4196 ○ R/W
speed Vmax Factory setting: 200,000 unit*1
Bias speed Range: 0 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (0 ~ 200 kPPS pulse transfer value) *2
#9 #8 H’4198 ○ R/W
Vbias Factory setting: 0 unit*1
JOG speed Range: 0 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (10 ~ 200 kPPS pulse transfer value)
#11 #10 H’419A ○ R/W
VJOG *2 Factory setting: 5,000 unit*1
Zero return Range: 0 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (10 ~ 200 kPPS pulse transfer value)
#13 #12 H’419C ○ R/W
speed VRT *2 Factory setting: 50,000 unit*1
Zero return
Range: 0 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (10 ~ 200 kPPS pulse transfer value)
#15 #14 H’419E ○ R/W deceleration
*2 Factory setting: 1,000 unit*1
speed VCR
The number of
Range: 0 ~ +32,767 PLS
#16 H’41A0 ○ R/W PG0 in zero
Factory setting: 0 PLS
return mode N
The number of
Range: -32,768 ~ +32,767 PLS
#17 H’41A1 ○ R/W pulse in zero
Factory setting: 0 PLS
return mode P
Zero return b0: zero return mode,
#18 H’41A2 ○ R/W
mode H Mode b1: detect DOG falling-edge in zero return mode
Zero point Range: 0 ~ ±999,999 unit*1
#20 #19 H’41A3 ○ R/W
setting (HP) Factory setting: 0 unit*1
Acceleration Range: 10 ~ +32,767 ms
#21 H’41A5 ○ R/W
time Tacc Factory setting: 100 ms
Deceleration
#22 H’41A6 ○ R/W Range: 10 ~ +32,767 ms；factory setting: 100 ms
time Tdec
Target position Range: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (-2,147,483,648 ~
#24 #23 H’41A7 ╳ R/W
(I) P(I) +2,147,483,647 pulse transfer value) *2; factory setting: 0 unit*1
Running speed Range: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (10 ~ 200 kPPS pulse
#26 #25 H’41A9 ╳ R/W
(I) V(I) transfer value) *2; factory setting: 1,000 unit*1

Target position Range: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (-2,147,483,648 ~

#28 #27 H’41AB ╳ R/W
(II) P(II) +2,147,483,647 pulse transfer value) *2, factory setting: 0 unit*1
10 Running speed Range: 0 ~ +2,147,483,647 unit*1 (10 ~ 200 kPPS pulse transfer value)
#30 #29 H’41AD ╳ R/W
(II) V(II) *2 Factory setting: 2,000 unit*1

10-6
 Ch a pt er 1 0 D V P- S S er ies Pos i ti o n Co n tr o l M od u l e

CR No.

Attribute
Address
Content Setting Range

Latched
HM LW

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

CLR signal output mode

ABS/REL Coordinate
CLR output (On/Off)
Running

Current position = 0

CCW pulse STOP

instruction

Software START

CW pulse STOP
Zero return start

Software STOP
#31 H’41AF ╳ R/W
factory setting:

-
-
H’0000

Error reset
JOG+
JOG-
b11~
b15 b14 b13 b12 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b9

CR36, 35; display unit: 0  pulse, 1  unit

Current position: CR34, 33; current speed:

Manual pulse generator range limitation

Manual pulse generator input operation

Interrupt 2nd-speed position mode start

position mode start

Variable speed operation mode start
Work mode

2nd-speed position mode start

position mode start

#32 H’41B0 ╳ R/W Factory setting:
H’0001
Return to factory setting
-

LSP/LSN stop mode

1st-speed
MASK setting

STOP mode

1st-speed
Interrupt
Current position Range display: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 PLS
#34 #33 H’41B1 ╳ R/W
CP (PLS) Factory setting: 0 PLS
Current speed Range display: 0 ~ +2,147,483,647 PPS
#36 #35 H’41B3 ╳ R
CS (PPS) Factory setting: 0 PPS
RS-485 communication address setting: setting range 01 ~ 254
Factory setting: K1. Baud rate setting: 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400,
57,600, and 115,200 bps. ASCII mode data format is 7Bit, even bit and 1
Communication stop bit (7 E 1). RTU mode data format is 8Bit, even bit and 1 stop bit (8 E
address and 1)
#37 H’41B5 ╳ R/W
Baud rate b0: 4,800 bps (bit/sec.), b1: 9,600 bps (bit/sec.) (factory setting)
setting b2: 19,200 bps (bit/sec.), b3: 38,400 bps (bit/sec.)
b4: 57,600 bps (bit/sec.), b5: 115,200 bps (bit/sec.)
b6: reserved, b7: 0 for RTU, 1 for ASCII mode,
b8 ~ b15: communication address
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Route paused indication

CCW pulse is outputting

CW pulse is outputting
MPG input downward

Execution
Position completed

Zero return is done

MPG input upward

Error occurred flag

CP value overflow

status
Status indication

#38 H’41B6 ○ R/W

indication

factory setting:
-

H’XXXX
10

10-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR No.

Attribute
Address
Content Setting Range
Latched
HM LW

Please refer to the following note*3 explanation.

#39 H’41B7 ╳ R Error code
Factory setting: H’0000
Electronic
Please refer to the following note*4 explanation.
#40 H’41B8 ╳ R/W gearing number
Factory setting: H’1
of MPG input
Electronic
gearing Please refer to the following note*4 explanation.
#41 H’41B9 ╳ R/W
denominator of Factory setting: H’1
MPG input
Input frequency
The input frequency of manual pulse generator
#43 #42 H’41BA ╳ R/W of manual
Factory setting: 0
pulse generator
Accumulated The count value of CW manual pulse input is “ +” symbol, on the
pulse input no. contrary, the CCW manual pulse input is “-“symbol. And the count value
#45 #44 H’41BC ╳ R/W
of manual is nothing to do with the ratio setting of manual electronic gearing
pulse generator (CR#40, #41). Factory setting: 0.
Value Response speed When response speed setting is
≧5 4ms (factory setting) faster, the instructions of pulse
output and manual pulse
4 32ms
generator input will be more
Response 3 108ms synchronous.
speed of 2 256ms
#46 H’41BE ╳ R/W When response speed setting is
manual pulse
slower, the instruction of pulse
generator
output is slower than the
1 or 0 500ms instruction of manual pulse
generator input.
Factory setting: 5
bit # Status Description
b0 START input When START input is On, b0 is On.
b1 STOP input When STOP input is On, b1 is On.
b2 DOG input When DOG input is On, b2 is On.
b3 PG0 input When PG0 input is On, b3 is On.
b4 LSP input When LSP input is On, b4 is On.
#47 H’41BF ╳ R Terminal status
b5 LSN input When LSN input is On, b5 is On.
b6 When A phase input is On,
A phase input
b6 is On.
b7 When B phase input is On,
B phase input
b7 is On.
b8 CLR output When CLR output is On, b8 is On.
#48 H’41C0 ○ R System version System version is in hexadecimal. e.g. software V1.00 is for H’0100.

*1: Unit setting varies based on b0 and b1 setting of CR#5.

*2: Use max. Pulse output if upper limit is exceeded. Use min. pulse output if lower limit is exceeded.

10 *3. When ERROR LED is on, it indicates DVP01PU-S hardware malfunction or error parameter setting when error LED
flashes. ERR code is recorded in CR#39.

10-8
 Ch a pt er 1 0 D V P- S S er ies Pos i ti o n Co n tr o l M od u l e

Error code Description Error code Description

H’0000 No error H’0014 JOG speed (VJOG) setting error
H’0001 Target position (I) setting error H’0020 CW pulse is forbidden
H’0002 Target address (II) setting error H’0021 CCW pulse is forbidden
H’0010 Running speed (I) setting error H’0030 Low voltage
H’0011 Running speed (II) setting error H’0080 Hardware error in internal memory
H’0012 Zero return deceleration (VCR) setting error H’0081 Data write in error in internal memory
H’0013 Zero return (VRT) setting error

*4. When the working mode CR#32 b5 is set to On, it means that the manual pulse generator input working mode is
started.

A. Manual pulse generator to generate A/B phase pulse and input them to ΦA and ΦB. The relationship between the
FP/RP output and the input pulse is as shown in the figure below:

Servo drive
A-phase Servo motor
inp ut puls e X C R#45 FP
C R#46
= out pu t puls e RP
B - phase

B. During operation, if LSP or LSN is started, the output will stop immediately. If LSP is started, CW pulse is prohibited,
and CCW pulse is allowed. If LSN is started, CCW pulse is prohibited, and CW pulse is allowed.

C. Default for Positioning completed is CR#38 b6=Off. When positioning is completed, positioning completion
indication will become CR#38 b6=On.

D. Output operating speed is proportional to the input frequency of manual pulse generator and electronic gears
(CR#40, CR#41).

※ CR#0 ~ CR48: user can use the corresponding addresses H’4190 ~ 41C0 to read/write data via RS-485 communication.

1. Baud rate supportive: 4,800, 9,600, 38,400, 57,600, and 115,200 bps.

2. Modbus ASCII/RTU: ASCII mode is 7 bits, even bit and 1 stop bit (7, E, 1). RTU mode is 8 bits, even bit and 1
stop bit (8, E, 1).

3. Function code: 03’H for read data from CR; 06’H for write one word in CR; 10’H for write many words in CR.

10

10-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

10.5 Wiring

S TA RT

24 V
ST O P
0V

LSP
De l ta Ser vo

LSN A SD A -A 2 S er ie s

FP + PLS 43
DO G FP - /P L S 41
RP + S IG N 3 6
+2 4V RP - /S IG N 3 7
S /S
MP G p ul se
S hi el de d cab le 10
CL R+ DI2
A+
A -p h ase C L R- G N D 44
A- 5 -2 4 V DC
B+
B -p h ase
B-

5- 24 V DC
P G 0+
P G0 -

1. Please use 22-16AWG (1.5mm) wiring (either single or multiple core) for I/O wiring terminals. PLC terminal screws
should be tightened to 1.90kg-cm (1.65lb-in). Use copper conductors only, 60/75oC.

2. DO NOT arrange the wiring of I/O signal wires or power supply in the same wiring duct.

3. Make sure the terminals of power module and DVP01PU-S are properly grounded or connected to the cover
of power distribution cabinet.

4. DO NOT wire to null terminal .

5. Use only 60/75°C copper conductors.

10

10-10
 Ch a pt er 1 0 D V P- S S er ies Pos i ti o n Co n tr o l M od u l e

10.6 Troubleshooting
When the DVP01PU-S module encounters an error, the ERROR indicator will be illuminated. Use the FROM instructions
to read the error status data register (CR#39). Refer to the table below to identify the error and execute the corresponding
solutions.

ERROR
No. Description Solution
LED
H’0000 OFF Normal

1. Target position（I）cannot be 0。
2. If at the positive limit, the target position (I) should
H’0001 Blinking Target position（I）setting error not be a positive value.
3. If at the negative limit, the target position (I) should
not be a negative value.
H’0002 Blinking Target position（II）setting error Target position（II）cannot be 0.。
Check if the speed setting is within this range:
H’0010 Blinking Operating speed（I）setting error
VMAX>V（I）>VBIAS
Check if the speed setting is within this range:
H’0011 Blinking Operating speed（II）setting error
VMAX>V（II）>VBIAS
Zero return deceleration (VCR) setting Check if the speed setting is within this range:
H’0012 Blinking
error VRT>VCR
Check if the speed setting is within this range:
H’0013 Blinking Zero return (VRT) setting error
VMAX>VRT>VBIAS
Check if the JOG speed exceeds the maximum
H’0014 Blinking JOG speed (VJOG) setting error
speed VMAX.
Check if the running instruction CR#31 bit2 is set
H’0020 Blinking CW pulse is forbidden correctly and verify that whether the executed
instruction runs in the clockwise direction.
Check if the running instruction CR#31 bit3 is set
H’0021 Blinking CCW pulse is forbidden correctly and verify that whether the executed
instruction runs in the clockwise direction.
H’0030 Blinking Low voltage signal Check whether the module input voltage is correct.

H’0080 Blinking Hardware error in internal memory Reset the module

H’0081 Blinking Data writing error in internal memory Reset the module

10

1 0 - 11
 11
1
Chapter 11 DVP-S Series Left-Side High-Speed
Analog Input/Output Module

Table of Contents
11.1 GENERAL SPECİFİCATİONS ................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 DVP04AD-SL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 DVP04DA-SL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 11-3

11.2 MODULE PROFILES AND DIMENSIONS .................................................. 11-4

11.3 TERMINALS ........................................................................................... 11-5

11.4 CONTROL REGISTERS............................................................................ 11-5

11.4.1 DVP04AD-SL CONTROL REGISTER ............................................................... 11-5
11.4.2 DVP04DA-SL CONTROL REGISTER .............................................................. 11-10

11.5 WIRING .............................................................................................. 11-16

11.5.1 WIRING DVP04AD-SL............................................................................. 11-16
11.5.2 WIRING DVP04DA-SL ............................................................................ 11-17

11.6 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................ 11-18

11 - 1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

11.1 General Specifications

11.1.1 DVP04AD-SL Specifications

_11  Electrical Specifications

Model name DVP04AD-SL
Number of inputs 4
Analog-to-digital conversion Voltage input/current input
Power supply 24VDC（20.4VDC~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
Response time 250us/channel
Connect to the left side of CPU, numbered from 100 to 107 according to the position of
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
module from the closest to farthest to CPU.
Weight 106.5g

 Functional specifications

Analog/digital module Voltage input Current input

Analog input channel 4channel/each module

Range of analog input ±10V ±5V 0~5V 1~5V ±20mA 0~20mA 4~20mA
Range of digital
conversion ±32,000 ±32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000 ±32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000

-0.06~ 0.952~ ±20.24 -0.24~ 3.808~20.192

Hardware input limit*1 ±10.12V ±5.06V
5.06V 5.048V mA 20.24mA mA
Digital conversion -384~ -384~ -384~
limit*2 ±32,384 ±32,384 ±32,384 -384~32,384
32,384 32,384 32,384
Hardware resolution 16 bits 16 bits 15 bits 15 bits 16 bits 15 bits 15 bits
Input impedance ≧1MΩ 250Ω
Absolute input range*3 ± 15V ± 32mA
Digital data format 16 bits two’s complement number, 15 significant bits
Average function Yes, CR#8 ~ CR#11, setting range: K1 ~ K20.
Self-diagnosis function Detecting if exceeding upper and lower limits or channel disconnection.
25° C / 77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.3% of full scale.
Overall Accuracy
0° C to 55° C / 32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Response time 250us/channel
An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500VAC
*1. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input signal is
below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

11 - 2
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

*2. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit, and a conversion limit
error appears. For example, in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal is -10.25 V, exceeding
the hardware lower limit, it also exceeds the conversion lower limit. The module uses the lower limit value (-32384) as
the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3. If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.
11

11.1.2 DVP04DA-SL Specifications

 Electrical specifications
Module name DVP04DA-SL
Number of outputs 4
Analog-to-digital
Voltage output/ Current output
conversion
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Connector type Removable terminal block
The module is with short circuit protection, but if the duration of a short circuit is too long, it
Short circuit protection
can cause circuit damage. Current output can be open circuit.
Connect to the left side of CPU, numbered from 100 to 107 according to the position of
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
module from the closest to farthest to CPU.
Weight 107g

 Functional specifications

Analog/digital module Voltage output Current output

Analog output channel 4channel/each module
Rated output range ±10V 0~10V 0~20mA 4~20mA
Digital conversion range ±32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000
Digital conversion limit ±32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000 0~32,000
Hardware resolution 16 bits 15 bits 15 bits 15 bits
Maximum output current 10mA －

Load impedance ≧1KΩ ≦500Ω

Output impedance ≦0.5Ω ≧1MΩ

25° C / 77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.3% of full scale.
Overall accuracy
0° C to 55° C / 32° F to 131° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Response time 250us/channel

Digital data format 16 bits two’s complement number, 15 significant bits.

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/an

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500VAC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500VAC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500VAC

11 - 3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

11.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions

1 2 4
6
_11 7

90 [3.543] 8

63.4 [2.496]
9
3

5 10

3 [0.118] 60 [2.362] 33 .1 [ 1. 3 03 ]
5

Unit:mm

No. Name Description

1 Extension module connection port Connect the modules.
Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Error status of the module.
2 ON: A serious module error has occurred
ERROR LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF):
A non-serious module error occurs, can NOT operate normally
Run LED indicator Indicates the operating status of the module.
3 Model name Model name of the module.
The inputs are connected to sensors.
4 I/O Terminals
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
5 DINrail securing clip Secure the module on the set.
6 Extension unit positioning hole For positioning between modules.
7 Extension port Connect the PLC or the modules.
8 DIN rail slot（35mm） For the DIN rail.
9 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module.
10 Power input port Expansion unit power input.

11 - 4
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

11.3 Terminals
V1+ I1+ V1- FG V2+ I2+ V2- FG V3+ I3+ V3- FG V4+ I4+ V4- FG
CH1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4
DVP04AD-SL
DVP04AD-SL (4AI) 11

V1+ I1+ COM FG V2+ I2+ COM FG V3+ I3+ COM FG V4+ I4+ COM FG
CH1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4
DVP04DA-SL
DVP04DA-SL (4AO)

11.4 Control Registers

11.4.1 DVP04AD-SL Control Register
CR# Attrib. Register name Explanation
Set up by the system:
#0 O R Model name
DVP04AD-SL model code = H’4400
#1 O R Firmware version Display the current firmware version in hex.
#2 X R/W CH1 input mode setting Input mode: Default = H’0000.
Take CH1 for example:
#3 X R/W CH2 input mode setting Mode 0 (H’0000): Voltage input (±10V)
#4 X R/W CH3 input mode setting Mode 1 (H’0001): Current input (±20mA)
Mode 2 (H’0002): Current input (0~+20mA)
Mode 3 (H’0003): Current input (+4~+20mA)
Mode 4 (H’0004): Voltage input (±5V)
#5 X R/W CH4 input mode setting Mode 5 (H’0005): Voltage input (0V~+5V)
Mode 6 (H’0006): Voltage input (1V~+5V)
Mode -1 (H’FFFF): Channel unavailable
#8 X R/W CH1 sampling range
Set sampling range in CH1 ~ CH4:
#9 X R/W CH2 sampling range
Range = K1 ~ K20
#10 X R/W CH3 sampling range
Default = K10
#11 X R/W CH4 sampling range
#12 X R CH1 average input value
#13 X R CH2 average input value
Average value of input signals at CH1 ~ CH4
#14 X R CH3 average input value
#15 X R CH4 average input value
#16 X R CH1 present input value
#17 X R CH2 present input value
Present value of input signals at CH1 ~ CH4
#18 X R CH3 present input value
#19 X R CH4 present input value
#20 X R/W Set value of CH1 upper bound
#21 X R/W Set value of CH2 upper bound Set value of CH1~CH4 upper bound.
#22 X R/W Set value of CH3 upper bound Default = K32767.
#23 X R/W Set value of CH4 upper bound
#24 X R/W Set value of CH1 lower bound
Set value of CH1~CH4 lower bound.
#25 X R/W Set value of CH2 lower bound
Default = K-32768.
#26 X R/W Set value of CH3 lower bound

11 - 5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Attrib. Register name Explanation

#27 X R/W Set value of CH4 lower bound
#28 X R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH1
#29 X R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH2 Set the adjusted Offset value of CH1 ~ CH4. Default = K0,
_11 #30 X R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH3 unit= LSB.
#31 X R/W Adjusted Offset value of CH4
#34 X R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH1
#35 X R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH2 Set the adjusted Gain value in CH1 ~ CH4.
#36 X R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH3 Default = K16,000, unit= LSB.
#37 X R/W Adjusted Gain value of CH4
※ Input Mode 2(0mA ~ 20mA), Mode 3(4mA ~ 20mA), Mode 5(0V ~ 5V), Mode 6(1V~ 5V) do not support adjusted
OFFSET & GAIN value.
※ When input mode changes, the adjusted OFFSET and GAIN value automatically resets.
b0 ~ b3: corresponding to CH1 ~ CH4
Function: Return to default b4 ~ b15: reserved
#42 X R/W
setting Default = H’0000. Give CH1 setting for example: When b0 is
set to 1, all settings are reset to default setting.
Register for storing all error status. Refer to table of error
#43 X R Error status
status for more information. Default = H’0000.
Symbols:
O means latched. X means not latched.
R means can read data by using FROM instruction.
W means can write data by using TO instruction.
LSB (Least Significant Bit): 1. Voltage input: 1LSB=10V/32,000=312.5μV
2. Current input: 1LSB=20mA/32,000=625nA

※ CR#43 Error status value. See the table below.

Bit Error Status Content Value Bit Error Status Content Value
b0 K1 (H’0001) Power supply error b1 K2 (H’0002) Hardware error
b2 K4 (H’0004) Mode setting error b3 K8 (H’0008) Reserved
b4 K16 (H’0010) CH1 Upper / lower bound error b5 K32 (H’0020) CH2 Upper / lower bound error
b6 K64 (H’0040) CH3 Upper / lower bound error b7 K128 (H’0080) CH4 Upper / lower bound error
b8 K256 (H’0100) CH1 Conversion error b9 K512 (H’0200) CH2 Conversion error
b10 K1024 (H’0400) CH3 Conversion error b11 K2048 (H’0800) CH4 Conversion error
b12 K4096 (H’1000) Reserved b13 K8192 (H’2000) Hardware error
b14 K16384 (H’4000) Default setting error b15 K32768 (H’8000) Reserved
Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit and there may be more than 2 errors occurring at
the same time. 0 = normal; 1 = error.

11 - 6
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

※ Adjust A/D Conversion Curve

Users can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the Offset value (CR#28 ~ CR#31) and
Gain value (CR#34 ~ CR#37).

※ Input Mode 2(0mA ~ 20mA)、Mode 3(4mA ~ 20mA)、Mode 5(0V ~ 5V)、Mode 6 (1V~ 5V) do not support adjusted 11
OFFSET and GAIN value.

 Equation for voltage input Mode 0

 X (V ) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 10(V ) 
Y=Digital output, X=Voltage input
Resolution：0.3125mV=20V/64,000

 Equation for voltage input Mode 4/ Mode 5

 X (V ) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 5(V ) 
Y=Digital output, X=Voltage input
Resolution：0.15625mV=10V/64,000=5V/32,000

 Equation for current input Mode 1/ Mode 2

 X ( mA) 
Y = 16000 ×  × 32000 − Offset  (Gain − Offset )
 20( mA) 
Y=Digital output, X=Current input
Resolution：0.625μA=40mA/64,000=20mA/32,000

Gain: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 16,000.

Offset: The corresponding voltage/current input value when the digital output value = 0.

11 - 7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

※ A/D Conversion Curve

Mode 0 -10~+10V，Gain=16,000（=5V⁄312.5uV）
，Offset=0

Mode 1 -20~+20mA，Gain=16,000（=10𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⁄625𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛）
，Offset=0
_11
Range of digital conversion -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of
-32,384 LSB~+32,384 LSB
digital conversion

Mode 0 Mode 1

+32384
+32000 +32384
+32000
Digital
output +16000 Digital
output +16000

-10V 0 5V
-20mA 0 10mA
10V
Offset Gain 20mA
Offset Gain
-16000
-16000
Voltage input
Current input
-32000
-32384 -32000
-32384

Mode 2 0~+20mA，Gain=16,000（=10𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⁄625𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛）
，Offset=0
4~+20mA，Gain=19,200（=12𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⁄625𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛）
，
Mode 3
Offset=6,400（=4𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⁄625𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛）
Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital

-384 LSB~+32,384 LSB
conversion

Mode 2 Mode 3
+32384 +32384
+32000 +32000

Digital Digital
output +16000 output +16000

Gain Gain
0 0
-384 10mA 20mA -384 4mA 12mA 20mA
Offset Offset
Current input Current input

11 - 8
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

Mode 4 -5~+5V，Gain=16,000（=2.5𝑉𝑉⁄156.25𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢）
，Offset=0
Range of digital conversion -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital

-32,384 LSB~+32,384 LSB
conversion
11
Mode 4
+32384
+32000

Digital
output +16000

-5V 0 2.5V
5V
Offset Gain

-16000

Voltage input

-32000
-32384

Mode 5 0~+5V，Gain=16,000（=2.5𝑉𝑉⁄156.25𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢）
，Offset=0
Mode 6 1~+5V，Gain=19,200（=2.5𝑉𝑉⁄156.25𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢）
，Offset=6,400（=1𝑉𝑉⁄156.25𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢）
Range of digital conversion 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB
Max./Min. range of digital
-384 LSB~+32,384 LSB
conversion

Mode 5 Mode6
+32384 +32384
+32000 +32000

Digital
output Digital
+16000 output +16000

Gain Gain
0
0
-384 2.5V 5V
-384 1V 3V 5V
Offset
Voltage input Offset
Voltage input

11 - 9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

11.4.2 DVP04DA-SL Control Register

CR# Attrib. Register name Explanation
System used; data length is 8 bits (b7 ~ b0).
#0 O R Model name Model code = H’4401. User can read the data from
_11 program to check if there is I/O module.
Display the current firmware version in hex.
#1 O R Firmware version
For example: 1.0A means CR#1 = H’010A.
#2 X R/W CH1 output mode setting Output mode: Default = H’0000.
Take CH1 for example:
#3 X R/W CH2 output mode setting Mode 0 (H’0000): Voltage output (±10V)
#4 X R/W CH3 output mode setting Mode 1 (H’0001): Current output (0~+20mA)
Mode 2 (H’0002): Current output (+4~+20mA)
#5 X R/W CH4 output mode setting Mode 3 (H’0003): Voltage output (0V~10V)
Mode -1 (H’FFFF): All channels are unavailable
Please refer to the table of CR#6 below for detail.
#6 X R/W The enabling function of table output
Default = H’0000
Bit 0~ bit 3 activate the table output function on CH1 ~
CH4. Modifying the parameters in output table during
#7 X R/W Enable table output function
table output process is not allowed.
0: Stop, 1: Run, Default = H’0000.
Please refer to the table of CR#8 for detail.
#8 X R/W Curves of table output function
Default = H’0000
#16 X R/W CH1 output signal value
Voltage output range: K-32,000~K32,000 Current output
#17 X R/W CH2 output signal value
range: K0~K32,000
#18 X R/W CH3 output signal value
Default: K0
#19 X R/W CH4 output signal value
#20 X R CH1 output value in the current table
#21 X R CH2 output value in the current table
Default = K32767
#22 X R CH3 output value in the current table
#23 X R CH4 output value in the current table
#24 X R Current CH1 transition point in the table
#25 X R Current CH2 transition point in the table
Default = K0
#26 X R Current CH3 transition point in the table
#27 X R Current CH4 transition point in the table
#28 X R/W Adjusted OFFSET value of CH1
#29 X R/W Adjusted OFFSET value of CH2 Set the adjusted OFFSET value of CH1 ~ CH4.
#30 X R/W Adjusted OFFSET value of CH3 Default = K0
#31 X R/W Adjusted OFFSET value of CH4
#34 X R/W Adjusted GAIN value of CH1
#35 X R/W Adjusted GAIN value of CH2 Set the adjusted GAIN value of CH1 ~ CH4.
#36 X R/W Adjusted GAIN value of CH3 Default = K16,000.
#37 X R/W Adjusted GAIN value of CH4
※ Output Mode 2(4mA ~ 20mA), Mode 3(0V~10V) do not support adjusted OFFSET & GAIN value.
※ When output mode changes, the adjusted OFFSET and GAIN value automatically reset.
Register for storing all error status. Refer to table of error
#43 X R Error status
status for more information. Default setting: H’0000.
#44 X R Status of table output

11 - 1 0
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

CR# Attrib. Register name Explanation

Used when output mode=1
b0~b3: Display the output completed status of CH1~CH4.
Display value = 1 indicates the end of output.
b4~b7: Display the CH1~CH4 output table parameter 11
error status. Display value = 1 indicates parameter error.
b8~b15: reserved
Number of transition points for CH1
#100 X R/W
table output
Number of transition points for CH2 range: K0~K10
#125 X R/W
table output Default = K0
Number of transition points for CH3 (Refer to the transition point table below for more
#150 X R/W
table output information on the channel table outputs.)
Number of transition points for CH4
#175 X R/W
table output
Symbols: O means latched. X means not latched.
R means can read data by using FROM instruction.
W means can write data by using TO instruction.
LSB (Least Significant Bit):1. Voltage output: 1LSB = 10V/32,000 = 312.5μV.
2. Current output: 1LSB = 20mA/32,000 = 625nA

※ CR#6: The Enabling Function of Table Output. See the below

b15 ~ b12 b11 ~ b8 b7 ~ b4 b3 ~ b0

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
K0: Disable (Default)
K1: Acyclic Table Output
K2: Cyclic Table Output
Note: 1. Table output function is enabled when the table output mode is not set as 0.
2. When table output function is enabled, the value set in CR#16~CR#19 is invalid.CR#20~CR#23 stores the
present table output value for users to read. CR#24~CR#27 indicate the present transition point of table
output in each channel.

※ CR#8: Curves of Table Output Function. See the table below.

b15~b12 b11~b8 b7~b4 b3~b0

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
K0：Linearity (Default)
K1：S carve(A)
K2：S carve(B)
K3：S carve(C)

※ CR#43: Error status value. See the table below.

Bit Error Status Content Value

b0 K1 (H’0001) Power source abnormal
b1 K2 (H’0002) Hardware malfunction

b2 K4 (H’0004) Setting mode error

Note: Each error status is determined by the corresponding bit (b0 ~ b15) and there may be more than 2 errors
occurring at the same time. 0 = normal; 1 = error. b3~b15 reserved.

11 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

※ CR#100~CR#200: Transition points for table output. See the table below:

CR# Description Value

CR#100 Transition points of CH1 table output Max. = 10
CR#101 Output value of point 1 in CH1 D1
_11 CR#102 Duration between point 1 and point 2 in CH1 T1
CR#103 Output value of point 2 in CH1 D2
CR#104 Duration between point 2 and point 3 in CH1 T2
CR#105 Output value of point 3 in CH1 D3
CR#106 Duration between point 3 and point 4 in CH1 T3
CR#107 Output value of point 4 in CH1 D4
CR#108 Duration between point 4 and point 5 in CH1 T4
CR#109 Output value of point 5 in CH1 D5
CR#110 Duration between point 5 and point 6 in CH1 T5
CR#111 Output value of point 6 in CH1 D6
CR#112 Duration between point 6 and point 7 in CH1 T6
CR#113 Output value of point 7 in CH1 D7
CR#114 Duration between point 7 and point 8 in CH1 T7
CR#115 Output value of point 8 in CH1 D8
CR#116 Duration between point 8 and point 9 in CH1 T8
CR#117 Output value of point 9 in CH1 D9
CR#118 Duration between point 9 and point 10 in CH1 T9
CR#119 Output value of point 10 in CH1 D10

CR#120~ CR#124 Reserved -

Note: Duration between points. Set range: K1 ~ K100 (Unit: 10 ms)

Note: CR#100~CR#200 are CRs for transition point setting in CH1~CH4.
Take CH1 for example, CR#100 sets the total transition points. Max. 10 points (CR#101~CR#119: D1~D10)
can be allocated in the output waveform. Duration between points can be specified by T1~T9.
CR#120~CR#124 are reserved.
Same CR function applies on CH2 ~ CH4.

11 - 1 2
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

※ D/A Conversion Curve

Users can adjust the conversion curves according to the actual needs by changing the OFFSET value (CR#28 ~ CR#31)
and GAIN value (CR#34 ~ CR#37)

Output Mode 2(4mA ~ 20mA), Mode 3(0V~10V) do not support adjusted OFFSET and GAIN value. 11
 Equation for Voltage output Mode 0 adjustment

 X × (Gain − Offset )   10(V ) 

Y (V ) =  + Offset  ×  
 16000   32000 
Y=Voltage output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.3125mV=20V/64,000

 Equation for Current output Mode 1 adjustment

 X × (Gain − Offset )   20(mA) 

Y (mA) =  + Offset  ×  
 16000   32000 

Y=Current output, X=Digital input

Resolution: 0.625μA=20mA/32,000

GAIN: The corresponding voltage/current output value when setting the digital output value = 16,000.

OFFSET: The corresponding voltage/current output value when setting the digital output value = 0.

Mode 0 -10~+10V，GAIN=16,000（=5𝑉𝑉⁄312.5𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢）
，OFFSET=0
Range of digital data -32,000 LSB~+32,000 LSB
Max./Min. range of digital data -32,768 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 0

10V

Voltage GAIN
output 5V

-32,000 0 +32,767
-32,768 +16,000 +32,000

OFFSET
-5V

Digital input
-10V

11 - 1 3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Mode 1 0~+20mA，GAIN=16,000（=10𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⁄625𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛）
，OFFSET=0

Range of digital data 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital data 0 LSB~+32,767 LSB
_11
Mode 1

20m A

G ain
Current
output
10m A

0 + 327 67
+1 600 0 + 320 00
O ffs et

Digital input

+4~+20mA，GAIN=19,200（=12𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⁄625𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛）
，
Mode 2
OFFSET=6,400（=4𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚⁄625𝑛𝑛𝑛𝑛）

Range of digital data 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

Max./Min. range of digital data -6400 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 2

20m A
Ga in
Current
output 12m A

4m A
+3 27 67
-6 40 0 0 + 160 00 +3 200 0
O ffs et

Digit al input

11 - 1 4
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

Mode 3 0~+10V，GAIN=16,000（=5𝑉𝑉⁄312.5𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢），OFFSET=0

Range of digital data 0 LSB~+32,000 LSB

11
Max./Min. range of digital data 0 LSB~+32,767 LSB

Mode 3
10V

GAIN
Voltage 5V
output

+32,767
0 +16,000 +32,000
OFFSET
Digital input

11 - 1 5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

11.5 Wiring
11.5.1 Wiring DVP04AD-SL
 Active type
_11 AG
Voltage input CH1 1M
+ V1+
250 CH1
UIN *5 I1+ 1M
- VI1-
Shielded cable*1 FE
AG
Current input CH4 1M
V4+
+ *2 250 CH4
I4+ 1M
UIN
- VI4-
FE
Shielded cable*1
*3
Terminal of
power module
DC/DC +15V
*4 0V
System 24V Converter AG
grounding -15V
[ Figure 2 ]
Grounding (100 or less)

 Passive type

AG
Voltage input
+ CH1 1M
V1+
UIN 250 CH1
*5 I1+ 1M
- VI1-
FE
Shielded cable*1
AG

Current input CH4 1M

V4+
*2 250 CH4
- I4+ 1M
VI4-
+ FE
Shielded cable*1
*3
Terminal of
power module +15V
*4 0V DC/DC
System AG
24V Converter
grounding -15V
Grounding (100 or less)
[ Figure 3 ]

Note 1: When performing analog input, please isolate other power wirings.

Note 2: When the A/D module is connected to current signals, make sure you short-circuit “V+” and “I+” terminals.

Note 3: If the noise is too significant, please connect FE to the grounding terminal.

Note 4: Please connect the terminal on both the power module and A/D module to the system earth point and ground
the system contact or connect it to the cover of power distribution cabinet.

Note 5: If the ripples at the loaded input terminal are too significant that causes noise interference on the wiring, connect
the wiring to 0.1 ~ 0.47μF 25V capacitor.

11 - 1 6
 Ch a pt er 11 DV P- S Se r i es Le ft- S i d e Hi g h- S pe ed A n al o g I/O Mo d u le

11.5.2 Wiring DVP04DA-SL

Voltage output
*2 CH1
V+ CH1
I+
COM
11
AC drive, recorder, Isolation wire*1
scale value... FG

Current output CH4

V+ CH4
I+
COM
AC drive, recorder, FG
Isolation wire*1
scale value...

Terminal of
power module DC/DC +15V
24+
*3 DC24V AG
24- converter
System -15V
grounding
Class 3 grounding (100 or less) [ Figure 2 ]

Note 1: Please isolate analog output and other power wiring.

Note 2: If noise interferes from loaded input wiring terminal is significant, please connect a capacitor with 0.1 ~ 0.47μF
25V for noise filtering.

Note 3: Please connect power module terminal and analog output module terminal to system earth point and make
system earth point be grounded or connects to machine cover.

11 - 1 7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

11.6 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in the left-side high-speed analog (AD/DA) modules (DVP04AD-SL/DVP04DA-SL), an
error indicator will start blinking. Once you see an error indicator starts blinking, you can use the FROM instruction to read

_11 the error codes stored in CR#43. The bit 0 to bit 15 indicates the error codes. It is possible to have two errors at the same
time. 0 indicates normal and 1 indicates error. Refer to the following table for more the causes and the solutions for
troubleshooting

RUN ERROR LV
Bit No. Description Solution
LED LED LED
bit0 OFF OFF ON The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.

bit1 - - NA
Channel mode setting is out of
bit2 Blinking OFF Check the mode setting
range
bit3 - - NA
Upon restoring the input signal
Input signal exceeds the set within the set upper/lower limits,
bit4 Blinking OFF
upper/lower bound of CH1 this error state will be
automatically cleared.
Upon restoring the input signal
Input signal exceeds the set within the set upper/lower limits,
bit5 Blinking OFF
upper/lower bound of CH2 this error state will be
automatically cleared.
Upon restoring the input signal
Input signal exceeds the set within the set upper/lower limits,
bit6 RUN: Blinking OFF
upper/lower bound of CH3 this error state will be
Blinking
automatically cleared.
Upon restoring the input signal
STOP:
Input signal exceeds the set within the set upper/lower limits,
bit7 OFF Blinking OFF
upper/lower bound of CH4 this error state will be
automatically cleared.
The signal received by channel 1 Check the signal received by
bit8 Blinking OFF
exceeds the range of analog inputs channel 1
The signal received by channel 2 Check the signal received by
bit9 Blinking OFF
exceeds the range of analog inputs channel 2
The signal received by channel 3 Check the signal received by
bit10 Blinking OFF
exceeds the range of analog inputs channel 3
The signal received by channel 4 Check the signal received by
bit11 Blinking OFF
exceeds the range of analog inputs channel 4
bit12 - - NA

bit13 ON OFF Internal memory eror Contact the factory

bit14 ON OFF Abnormal factory calibration values Contact the factory

11 - 1 8
 12
Chapter 12 DVP-S Series Left-Side High-Speed
Load Cell Module

Table of Contents
12.1 Principle of Load Cell ................................................................................ 12-3

12.2 Introduction of Load Cell .......................................................................... 12-3

12.3 General Specification ............................................................................... 12-3

12.3.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL Specification ...................................................... 12-3
12.3.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Specification .............................. 12-4

12.4 Module Profiles and Dimensions ............................................................... 12-6

12.4.1 Indicators of DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL ...................................................... 12-7
12.4.2 Indicators of DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL .............................. 12-8

12.5 Terminals ................................................................................................. 12-9

12.6 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SLControl Registers ........................................... 12-10

12.6.1 DVP01LC-SLControl Register .................................................................... 12-10
12.6.2 DVP02LC-SL Control Register ................................................................... 12-13
12.6.3 Functions Description .............................................................................. 12-16
12.6.3.1 Measuring Net Weight .......................................................................... 12-16
12.6.3.2 Stability Check .................................................................................... 12-17
12.6.3.3 Determining Zero ................................................................................ 12-18
12.6.3.4 Filtering out Weights ............................................................................ 12-18

12.7 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Control Register ................. 12-19

12.7.1 Control Register ..................................................................................... 12-19
12.7.2 Functions Descriptions ............................................................................ 12-25
12.7.2.1 Measuring Net Weight .......................................................................... 12-25
12.7.2.2 Stability Check .................................................................................... 12-26
12.7.2.3 Determining Zero ................................................................................ 12-26
12.7.2.4 Filtering out Weight ............................................................................. 12-27
12.7.2.5 Correspondence between Current Outputs and Weights ............................ 12-27
12.7.2.6 Zero Tracking...................................................................................... 12-28
12.7.2.7 Weight Updates ................................................................................... 12-28
12.7.2.8 Output Values Set for Y Points .............................................................. 12-29

12-1
DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.8 Wiring .................................................................................................... 12-30

12.8.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL/DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/ DVP211LC-SL ......... 12-30
12.8.2 DVP211LC-SL Wiring Digital Input ............................................................ 12-31
12.8.3 DVP211LC-SL Wiring Output .................................................................... 12-32

12.9 Software Interface Instructions ............................................................. 12-33

12.9.1 Initial Settings ....................................................................................... 12-33
12.9.2 Communication Settings ......................................................................... 12-35
12.9.3 Parameter Settings ................................................................................. 12-37
12.9.4 Correction Setting .................................................................................. 12-38
12.9.5 Status Settings ...................................................................................... 12-40

12.10 Correction .............................................................................................. 12-42

12.10.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL Correction ........................................................ 12-42
12.10.1.1 Correction by MPU ........................................................................ 12-42
12.10.1.2 Correction by Software .................................................................. 12-44
12.10.1.3 Example Curve Graph After Calibration ............................................ 12-45
12.10.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Correction ................................ 12-46
12.10.2.1 Steps in correction ........................................................................ 12-47
12.10.2.2 Example 1 ................................................................................... 12-48
12.10.2.3 Example 2 ................................................................................... 12-50

12.11 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 12-54

12.11.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL ....................................................................... 12-54
12.11.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL ............................................... 12-54

12-2
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.1 Principle of Load Cell

If a metallic material undergoes tension or strain, it will become thin, and its electrical impedance will increase. If a metallic
material is compressed, its electrical impedance will become small. A strain gauge adopting this principle is called a load
cell. Such sensing device is able to convert physical pressure into electrical signals, and therefore it is widely used on
occasions on which loads, tension and pressure need to be converted into electrical signals

12.2 Introduction of Load Cell

A load cell module provides 4-wire or 6-wire load cells with various eigenvalues. Therefore, its response time can be
adjusted according to users’ requirements. On this basis, the requirements of load application markets can be easily met. 12
Besides, a DVP series PLC* can read data in a load cell module or write data to a load cell module by means of the
instruction FROM/TO.

*: DVP-SV series PLCs, DVP-EH2-L series PLCs, DVP-SA2 series PLCs, and DVP-SX2 series PLCs support left-side
extension modules.

12.3 General Specification

12.3.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL Specification
Module name DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL
Supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Power consumption 3W
Maximum current consumption 125mA
Input signal range ±40mVDC
Sensibility +5VDC +/-10%
：20 bits
Hardware（ADC）
Resolution
Data output：16 bits
Communication interface RS-232/RS-485
Applicable sensor type 4-wire or 6-wire load cell
Expanding a temperature coefficient ≤ ± 50ppm/K v. E
Reducing a temperature coefficient to zero ≤ ± 0.4μV/K
Linearity error ≤ 0.02%
Response time 2，10，20，40，80，200，380ms × channels

Eigenvalue applicable to a load cell 0~1，0~2，0~4，0~6mV/V

Maximum distance for connecting a load
100 meters
cell
Maximum output current 5VDC * 300mA
Allowable load 40~4,010Ω
Common-mode rejection ratio
≥ 100dB
(CMRR@50/60 Hz)
DVP01LC-SL: Setting range: K1~K9
Dynamic value filter
DVP02LC-SL: Setting range: K1~K5
Average value filter Setting range: K1~K100

Between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 V AC

Isolation
Between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 V AC
Between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 V AC

12-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Module name DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL

Connectable to the left side of MPU, numbered from 100 to 107
Series connection to DVP-PLC MPU according to the position of module from the closest to farthest to
MPU.
DVP01LC-SL 122g
Weight
DVP02LC-SL 132g
 Complying with DIN1319-1, the tolerance of measured value should be ≤ 0.05% under 20°C + 10K temperature range.

 When the corrected ambient temperature and the actual temperature have a difference of more than 10°C, it is
suggested that you re-correct it.
_12

12.3.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Specification

Module name DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL
Rated supply voltage 24VDC（20.4~28.8VDC）
（-15%~+20%）
Power consumption 5W
Static minimum/maximum voltage 20.4V/28.8VDC
Dynamic minimum/maximum voltage 18.5V/30.2VDC
Maximum current consumption 150mA
Input signal range ±200mVDC
Sensibility +5VDC +/-5%
：24 bits
Hardware（ADC）
Resolution
Data output：32 bits
Highest precision 0.04%
Communication interface RS-232，RS-485
Applicable sensor type 4-wire or 6-wire load cell
Expanding a temperature coefficient ≤ ± 20ppm/K v. E
Reducing a temperature coefficient to zero ≤ ± 0.1μV/K
Linearity error ≤ 0.015%
Response time 2.5、10、16、20、50、60、100、200, and 400ms

Eigenvalue applicable to a load cell 0~1、0~2、0~4、0~6、0~20、0~40, and 0~80mV/V

Maximum distance for connecting a load cell 100 meters
Maximum output current 5VDC * 300mA
Allowable load 40~4,010Ω
Filtering Extrema/ Average/ Low-pass filtering
Common-mode rejection ratio
≥100dB
(CMRR @50/60 Hz)
Between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 V AC
Isolation Between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 V AC
Between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 V AC
Connectable to the left side of MPU, numbered from 100 to 107
Series connection to DVP-PLC MPU according to the position of module from the closest to farthest to
MPU.
DVP201LC-SL 122g
Weight DVP202LC-SL
132g
DVP211LC-SL

12-4
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

DVP211LC-SL
Electrical specifications for input terminals Electrical specifications for output terminals
Input/Output terminal X0、X1 Y0、Y1、Y2、Y3
Type Digital input Transistor
Form DC(sinking or sourcing) --
Specifications Input current:24VDC，5mA Voltage specifications:5~30VDC*1
Input impedance 4.7KΩ --
Maximum switch
10kHz 1kHz 12
frequency

Action OFF→ON >15VDC --

level ON→OFF <5VDC --

Response OFF→ON <20μs <100μs

time ON→OFF <50μs <150μs
Resistive
-- 0.5A/1 output（4A/COM）*2
load
Maximum Inductive
load -- 15W（30VDC）
load
Bulb -- 2.5W（30VDC）
Note: In order to meet DIN 1319-1, an error needs to be less than or equal to 0.05% at 20 °C + 10 K.

#1: UP and ZP should be connected to a 24 V DC power supply. The current that an output terminal consumes is
approximately 1 mA.

#2: In an NPN mode, ZP is used. In a PNP mode, UP is used.

12-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.4 Module Profiles and Dimensions

3.00
90.00
_12

60.00 33.00

Unit: mm
No. Name Description
Extension unit positioning
1 For positioning between modules.
hole
2 DIN rail slot（35mm） For the DIN rail.
Extension module
3 Connect the modules.
connection port
4 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module.
Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Run LED indicator Indicates the operating status of the module
Error status of the module.
ON: A serious module error has occurred
5
ERROR LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF):
A non-serious module error occurs, can NOT operate normally
Indicates the low voltage status of the module
Low voltage LED indicator ON: module voltage is too low
OFF: module voltage is normal
DVP01/02LC: Channel Net Weight, Zero Point, Maximum Value, Stability Status
Indicator
6 Functional status indicator DVP201/202LC: Weight Display, Zero Weight, Weight Upper Limit, Stability
Status Indicator
DVP211LC: Stability Function, Loop Control, Digital Input/Output Status Indicator
The inputs are connected to sensors.
7 Terminals
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
8 RS-232 port For wiring RS-232 communication
9 DIN rail securing clip Secure the module on the set.
10 RS-485port For wiring RS-485 communication.
11 Power input port Expansion unit power input.

12-6
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.4.1 Indicators of DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL

DVP01LC-SL DVP02LC-SL

DVP01LC DVP02LC
POWER POWER
EXC+ EXC+
RUN RUN
EXC- EXC-
ERROR ERROR
SIG+ SIG+
L.V L.V
CH1 SIG- CH1 SIG-

SEN+ SEN+

SEN- SEN-

12
NET SHD NET SHD

ZERO ZERO

MAX MAX

MOTION MOTION
EXC+

EXC-

SIG+

CH2 SIG-
NET SEN+
ZERO SEN-
MAX SHD
MOTION

Name Color Function

POWER indicator Green Displaying power
RUN indicator Green Displaying the status of the module
ERROR indicator Red Displaying an error
L.V indicator Red Showing that the voltage of the an external power is low
Net indicator Orange Net/Gross weight indicator
Zero indicator Orange Once the weight value is in the zero point range, this indicator is ON.
Max indicator Orange Maximum weight indicator
Motion indicator Orange Showing that measurement is stable

12-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.4.2 Indicators of DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL

DVP201LC-SL DVP202LC-SL DVP211LC-SL

D VP 20 1 LC D VP2 02 L C D VP 211 L C
PO WE R P OW E R PO W ER
E XC + E XC + E XC +
RUN RUN RUN
E XC - E XC - E XC-
E RRO R E R R OR ER R OR
S I G+ S I G+ S I G+
L. V L.V L .V
C H 1 S I G- C H 1 S I G- S I G-

S E N+ S EN + S E N+

S E N- S E N- S EN-
CH1 C H1

_12
NE T S HD NE T S HD M OT I O N S HD

ZE R O ZE R O L OO P A0+

MAX MAX X0 A0 -
M O T I ON M O TI ON X1
E XC + S/S

E XC - X0

S I G+ X1

CH2 C H 2 S I G- UP

NE T S EN + Y0 ZP

ZE R O S E N- Y1 Y0

MAX S HD Y2 Y1

M O TI ON Y3 Y2

Y3

Name Color Function

POWER indicator Green Displaying power
RUN indicator Green Displaying the status of the module
ERROR indicator Red Displaying an error
L.V indicator Red Showing that the voltage of the an external power is low
LOOP indicator Green LOOP control
MOTION indicator Orange Showing that measurement is stable
X0/X1 Red Showing that X0/X1 is On/Off
Y0~Y3 Red Showing that Y0/Y1/Y2/Y3 is On/Off
NET indicator Orange Net/Gross weight indicator
ZERO indicator Orange Once the weight value is in the zero point range, this indicator is ON.
MAX indicator Orange Maximum weight indicator

12-8
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.5 Terminals

E XC+EX C- S I G+ SI G - S E N+SE N- S HD
DVP01LC-SL
D VP0 1L C- SL

EXC+ EXC - SIG+ SIG- SEN + SEN - SH D EXC + EXC- S IG+ S IG- SEN+ SEN- SH D

DVP02LC-SL
DV P02L C- SL
12

EXC+ EXC- SIG + SIG - SEN+ SEN- SHD

DVP201LC-SL
DVP201 LC-SL

EXC+ EXC- SIG + SIG - SEN+ SEN- SHD EXC+ EXC- SIG + SIG - SEN+ SEN- SHD
DVP202LC-SL
DVP202 LC-SL

EXC+ EXC- SIG + SIG - SEN+ SEN- SHD AO+ AO- S/S X0 X1 UP ZP Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3
DVP211LC-SL
DVP211 LC-S L

12-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.6 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SLControl Registers

12.6.1 DVP01LC-SLControl Register
CR# Add. Attrib. Register name Explanation
Set up by the system:
#0 H1000 O R Model name
DVP01LC-SL model code = H’4106
#1 H1001 O R Firmware version Displaying the current firmware version in hex.
Mode 0 (H’0000): 1 mV/V
_12 #2 H1002 O R/W Eigenvalue
Mode 1 (H’0001): 2 mV/V, default
Mode 2 (H’0002): 4 mV/V
Mode 3 (H’0003): 6 mV/V
Mode 0 (H’0000): 2 ms
Mode 1 (H’0001): 10 ms
Mode 2 (H’0002): 20 ms
#3 H1003 O R/W Reaction time for measurement Mode 3 (H’0003): 40 ms
Mode 4 (H’0004): 80 ms, default
Mode 5 (H’0005): 200 ms
Mode 6 (H’0006): 380 ms
Reading the present average value as tare.
#6 H1006 X R/W Tare gotten from CH1
bit0: CH1
Taking the present weight as the gross weight (K0)
#7 H1007 O R/W Gross/Net weight
or the net weight (K1).
#8 H1008 O R/W Gross weight from CH1 (Low word) Users can input the value or use the instruction to
#9 H1009 O R/W Gross weight from CH1 (High word) read the gross weight. Default: 0
Default: K10; Range: K1~K100
Average number of times gotten from
#10 H100A O R/W If the setting value exceeds the range, it will be
CH1
automatically changed to K1 or K100.
Weight gotten from CH1 Displaying the weight.
#12 H100C X R
(Low word) Default: K0
Weight gotten from CH1 Displaying the weight.
#13 H100D X R
(High word) Default: K0
Number of times the stability of the
#16 H1010 O R/W Default: K5; Range: K1~K500
values gotten from CH1 is checked
Range within which the stability of the
#18 H1012 O R/W Default: K10; Range: K1~K10,000
values gotten from CH1 is checked
Number of decimal places gotten from
#20 H1014 O R/W Default: K2; Range: K0~K4
CH1
Unit of measurement for weight gotten
#22 H1016 O R/W
from CH1
Four ASCII words at most
Unit of measurement for weight gotten
#23 H1017 O R/W
from CH1
For correcting the weight
Default: H’0000
H’0001: Reset the weight gotten from CH1 to zero
#26 H101A X R/W Weight correction command H’0002: The weight of the weights gotten from CH1
(Please use CR#41 to make the correction
parameter retentive after finishing correcting the
weight.)

12-10
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

CR# Add. Attrib. Register name Explanation

The default in CR#33 and CR#34 is K1,000. Range:
K-32,768~K32,767
Steps for the correction:
1: Place no weights on the load cell
#33 H1021 O R/W Weight of the weights gotten from CH1 2: Write H’000 into CR#26.
3: Place standard weights on the load cell.
4: Write the weight of the weights on the plate into
CR#33.
5: Write H’0002 into CR#26.
12
Maximum weight gotten from CH1
#35 H1023 O R The user can set the maximum weight. If the weight
(Low word)
gotten is larger than the maximum weight set by the
Maximum weight gotten from CH1 user, the error code will be recorded.
#36 H1024 O R
(High word)
For judging the zero status
If the weight is within this range, the status code will
Upper limit for taking the weight gotten
#37 H1025 O R/W be a zero bit, indicating that there are no weights.
from CH1 as zero
Default: K10
Range: K-32,768 to K32,767
For judging the zero status
If the weight is within this range, the status code will
Lower limit for taking the weight gotten
#39 H1027 O R/W be a zero bit, indicating that there is no weight.
from CH1 as zero
Default: K-10
Range: K-32,768 to K32,767
The present setting value is stored. All setting
values are written into the internal flash memory so
that they can be used next time DVP01LC-SL is
turned on.
H0: No action (default)
H’FFFF: The value is stored successfully.
H’5678: All setting values are written into the
#41 H1029 X R/W Storing the setting value (H’5678) internal flash memory.
After H’5678 is written into the register, all setting
values will be stored in the flash memory. After the
values are stored, the value in CR#41 becomes
H’FFFF. If the value written into the register is not
H’5678, the value will automatically return to H0. For
example, if K1 is written into the register, K1 will
return to K0.
Restoring DVP01LC-SL to its factory After H’1A2B is written to CR#42, DVP01LC-SL will
#42 H102A X R/W
settings be restored to its factory settings.
Setting the percentage of signals
#43 H102B X R/W Default: K2 Range: K1 to K9 (Unit: 10%)
filtered for CH1
b0 (H’0001): The weight gotten from CH1 is zero.
(No load)
b2 (H’0004): The weight gotten from CH1 exceeds
#50 H1032 X R Status code the maximum weight. (Overload)
b4 (H’0010): The measured value gotten from CH1
is stable.
b6 ~ b15: Reserved
#51 H1033 X R Error code All error statuses are stored in the register. See

1 2 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Add. Attrib. Register name Explanation

“Error Code Table” below.
Default: H’0000
#52 H1034 O R/W RS-232 station address The default in CR#52 and CR#54 is K1.
#53 H1035 O R/W RS-232 communication format Range: K1~K255
#54 H1036 O R/W RS-485 station address The default in CR#53 and CR#55 is H’0000; Range:
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1.
#55 H1037 O R/W RS-485 communication format See “Communication Format Table” below.
Symbols: O indicates that the register is latched. X indicates that the register is not latched.
_12 R indicates that the data can be read. W indicates that the data can be written.

※ Error Code Table for CR#51:

bit Value Error bit Value Error
b0 K1 (H’0001) The power supply is abnormal. b1 K2 (H’0002) The hardware breaks down.
The conversion gotten from CH1 is The voltage of SEN in CH1 is
b2 K4 (H’0004) b3 K8 (H’0008)
incorrect. incorrect.
B4 ~ b15 Reserved
Note: Every error status depends on its corresponding bit. There may be more than two error statuses occurring at
the same time. 0 indicates that there is no error. 1 indicates that an error occurs.

※ Communication Format Table for CR#53, CR#55:

bit15 bit14~bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
ASCII/RTU Reserved Serial transmission speed Data length Stop bit Parity bit
Description
bit15 ASCII/RTU 0 ASCII 1 RTU
0 9,600 bps 1 19,200 bps
bit7~bit4 Serial transmission speed 2 38,400 bps 3 57,600 bps
4 115,200 bps 5 Else none
bit3 Data length (RTU = 8 bits) 0 7 1 8
bit2 Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bits
0 Even 1 Odd
bit1~bit0 Parity bit
2 None 3 None

12-12
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.6.2 DVP02LC-SL Control Register

CR# Add. Attrib. Register name Explanation
Set up by the system:
#0 H1000 O R Model name
DVP02LC-SL model code = H’4206
#1 H1001 O R Firmware version Display the current firmware version in hex.
Mode 0 (H’0000): 1 mV/V
Mode 1 (H’0001): 2 mV/V, default
#2 H1002 O R/W Characteristic value
Mode 2 (H’0002): 4 mV/V
Mode 3 (H’0003): 6 mV/V
12
Mode 0 (H’0000): 2 ms
Mode 1 (H’0001): 10 ms
Mode 2 (H’0002): 20 ms
Reaction time for
#3 H1003 O R/W Mode 3 (H’0003): 40 ms
measurement
Mode 4 (H’0004): 80 ms, default
Mode 5 (H’0005): 200 ms
Mode 6 (H’0006): 380 ms
Sum up CH1 average value and CH2 average value and
#4 H1004 O R Average value of all channels equalize them.
Equation: (CH1 average value + CH2 average value)/2
Read present average value as tare weight value
#6 H1006 X R/W CH1 to CH2 read tare weight
bit0: CH1; bit1: CH2; bit2 to bit15: reserved
Display present weight as Gross (K0) or Net (K1).
bit0 to bit3: CH1; bit4 to bit7: CH2; bit8 to bit15: reserved.
#7 H1007 O R/W CH1 to CH2 gross/net weight
Take CH1 for example: bit3 to bit0 = 0000, gross; bit3 to
bit0 = 0001, net; bit3 to bit0 = 1111, channel disabled.
#8 H1008 O R/W CH1 tare weight The user can write in the weight or read it by commands.
#9 H1009 O R/W CH2 tare weight Default: K0; Range: -K32,768 to K32,767.
#10 H100A O R/W CH1 average times Default: K10; Range: K1 to K100.
When the set value exceeds the range, it will
#11 H100B O R/W CH2 average times
automatically be changed to K1 or K100.
#12 H100C X R CH1 average weight
Display average weight.
#13 H100D X R CH2 average weight
#14 H100E X R CH1 present weight
Display present weight.
#15 H100F X R CH2 present weight
#16 H1010 O R/W CH1 standstill times Default: K5
#17 H1011 O R/W CH2 standstill times Range: K1 to K500
#18 H1012 O R/W CH1 standstill range Default: K10
#19 H1013 O R/W CH2 standstill range Range: K1 to K10,000
#20 H1014 O R/W CH1 decimal place Default: K2
#21 H1015 O R/W CH2 decimal place Range: K0 to K4
#22 H1016 O R/W CH1 unit of measurement
#23 H1017 O R/W CH1 unit of measurement
Enter max. 4 ASCII words.
#24 H1018 O R/W CH2 unit of measurement
#25 H1019 O R/W CH2 unit of measurement
For the user to correct the weight.
Default: H’0000
#26 H101A X R/W Weight correction command
H’0001: CH1 Calibration command
H’0002: CH1 Weight base point command

12-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Add. Attrib. Register name Explanation

H’0003: CH2 Calibration command
H’0004: CH2 Weight base point command
(Please use CR#41 to make the correction parameter
retentive after finishing correcting the weight.)
For CR#33 to CR#34 default = K1,000; Range: K-32,768
#33 H1021 O R/W CH1 weight base point to K32,767
Steps for correction: Take CH1 for example
1: Place no weights on the load cell
2: Set up CR#26 command = “H’0001”
_12 3: Place standard weights on load cell
#34 H1022 O R/W CH2 weight base point
4: Write the weight of the weights on the plate into
CR#33.
5: Set up CR#26 command = “H’0002”
#35 H1023 O R CH1 max. weight Set up the max. weight. When the measured value
#36 H1024 O R CH2 max. weight exceeds the set value, error codes will be recorded.
Upper limit for CH1 zero point Reference for reset to zero. When the weight is within this
#37 H1025 O R/W
check range, the status code will be set to “zero bit”, indicating
the current zero weight status.
Upper limit for CH2 zero point
#38 H1026 O R/W Default: K10
check
Range: K-32,768 to K32,767
Lower limit for CH1 zero point Reference for reset to zero. When the weight is within this
#39 H1027 O R/W
check range, the status code will be set to “zero bit”, indicating
the current zero weight status.
Lower limit for CH2 zero point
#40 H1028 O R/W Default: K-10
check
Range: K-32,768 to K32,767
Save the present set value and write all the set values
into the internal Flash for use next time DVP02LC-SL is
switched on.
H0: No action, Default
H’FFFF: Saving is successful
#41 H1029 X R/W Saving set value (H’5678) H’5678: Write to internal Flash
When H’5678 is written in, all set values will be saved in
Flash. When the saving is completed, CR#41 will become
H’FFFF. If the value written in is not H’5678, it will
automatically return to H0, e.g. write K1 into CR# to
return to K0.
Restoring DVP02LC-SL to its After H’1A2B is written to CR#42, DVP02LC-SL will be
#42 H102A X R/W
factory settings restored to its factory settings.

#43 H102B X R/W CH1 filter percentage

Default: K2
Range: K1 to K5 (Unit: 10%)
#44 H102C X R/W CH2 filter percentage

#45 H102D X R/W CH1 filter average value

Display average weight after filtering.
Condition to enable filter: average time ≥ 30
#46 H102E X R/W CH2 filter average value

H’0001: CH1 Reset to zero command

#47 H102F X R/W Reset to zero command
H’0002: CH2 Reset to zero command
b0 (H’0001): CH1 zero weight (empty)
#50 H1032 X R Status code b1 (H’0002): CH2 zero weight (empty)
b2 (H’0004): CH1 exceeds max. weight (overload)

12-14
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

CR# Add. Attrib. Register name Explanation

b3 (H’0008): CH2 exceeds max. weight (overload)
b4 (H’0010): CH1 stable measured value
b5 (H’0020): CH2 stable measured value
b6 ~ b15: Reserved
Store all the error statuses. See “Error Code Table”
#51 H1033 X R Error code
below. Default: H’0000

#52 H1034 O R/W RS-232 node address

For CR#52, CR#54 default = 1
#53 H1035 O R/W RS-232 communication setting Range: K1 to K255 12
For CR#53, CR#55 default = H’0000;
#54 H1036 O R/W RS-485 node address Range: ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1.
See “Communication Format Table” below.
#55 H1037 O R/W RS-485 communication setting

Symbols: O means latched. X means not latched.

R means can read data. W means can write data.

※ Error Code Table for CR#51:

bit Content Error bit Content Error
b0 K1 (H’0001) Power supply abnormality b1 K2 (H’0002) Hardware abnormality
b2 K4 (H’0004) CH1 conversion error b3 K8 (H’0008) CH1 SEN voltage error
b4 K16 (H’0010) CH2 conversion error b5 K32 (H’0020) CH2 SEN voltage error
b6 ~ b15 K64 (H’0040) Reserved
Note: Every error status is decided by its corresponding bit, so there might be more than 2 error statuses occurring
at the same time. 0 refers to no error; 1 refers to error occurring.

※ Communication Format Table for CR#53, CR#55:

bit15 bit14~bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
ASCII/RTU Reserved Baud rate Data length Stop bit Parity
Description
bit15 ASCII/RTU 0 ASCII 1 RTU
0 9,600 bps 1 19,200 bps
bit7~bit4 Baud rate 2 38,400 bps 3 57,600 bps
4 115,200 bps 5 Reserved (unit: bps)
bit3 Data length (RTU = 8 bits) 0 7 1 8
bit2 Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bits
0 Even 1 Odd
bit1~bit0 Parity
2 reserved 3 reserved

12-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.6.3 Functions Description

12.6.3.1 Measuring Net Weight

You can choose to measure the net weight or the gross weight of an object. A net weight is the weight of a product, that is,
the actual weight of a product without its package. The weight of a package is a tare. A gross weight is a total weight,
namely a net weight plus a tare.

 Tare：A tare is the weight of a package

 Net Weight：A net weight is the weight of a product, that is, the actual weight of a product without its package.
_12
 Gross Weight：A gross weight is a total weight, namely the weight of a product itself (a net weight) plus the weight of
a package (a tare).

 Gross weight=Net weight+Tare

Example: A product weighs 10 kilograms, and the carton in which the product is packed weighs 0.2 kilograms. The
total weight gotten is 10 kilograms.

Net weight=10 kg

Tare=0.2 kg

Gross weight=10.2 kg

 Relevant control registers

 CR#6：Read Tare

 CR#7：Gross /Net

 CR#8~9：Tare Weight

 Example

Display net weight using CH1 measurement values and disable CH2. (If the weight of the packaging material is known,
the tare reading step can be skipped.)

1. Read tare weight:

Step1：Write H’0000 to CR#7.

Step2：Place the packaging material on CH1 Load Cell.

Step3：Write H’0001 to CR#6 to set the current weight of the packaging material as the tare weight.

2. Set CR#7=H’00F1.

12-16
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.6.3.2 Stability Check

When an object is put on a load cell, users can utilize this function to check whether the current measurement weight has
stabilized.

 If a weight measured is in a stability range specified by users (CR#18/CR#19), the bit in CR#50 will be set to 1.

 If a weight measured exceeds a range specified by users, the bit in CR#50 will be set to 0. It remains 0 until the
stability check count (CR#16, CR#17) is within the stability range again. Once the stability check count is within the
range, the bit of CR#50 will be set to 1.

Example: The measurement time set is 10 milliseconds, the number of weights measured in a stability range is 10, and
12
the stability range set is 1000 grams. If a variation exceeds 1000 grams, bit in CR#50 will be set to 0. If the variations in
100 milliseconds (10×10 ms) are within 1000 grams, bit in CR#50 will be set to 1. (Users should judge whether the present
weight measured is in the stability range set before they perform control.)

△：t Variations in av erage weights

t：k Measurement time set by users
k：mStability range s et by us ers <k
△k<
<k
△k<
m： Number of weights measured in <k
△k<

a s tabi lity range >k

△k>

A ver age w ei ght >k

△k>

>k
△k>

>k
△k>

>k
△k>

>k
△k>
△
△k>
>k
Ti me
t m
The s tabi li ty b i t
bi t

 Relevant control registers

1. DVP01LC-SL

 CR#16：Number of weights measured in a stability range

 CR#18：Stability check range

2. DVP02LC-SL

 CR#16，CR#17：Number of weights measured in a stability range

 CR#18，CR#19：Stability check range

12-17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.6.3.3 Determining Zero

Users can utilize this function to determine when an item has been completely removed from the Load Cell. When the
user observes that the stability bit for the measurement value is 1 and the zero point weight bit is also 1, it indicates that
the item has been successfully removed from the Load Cell. At this point, users can perform the next control step. (The
zero point weight bit is 1 within the zero point detection range.)
LC
No objec t

C H1
Loa d Cell
_12
C H2

Average weight

Zero range

Time

Zero weight

 Relevant control registers

 CR#37~CR#40：Range for determining whether a weight measured is 0 grams

12.6.3.4 Filtering out Weights

The averaging function involves summing up the read values to obtain a smoothed result, but in real-world environments,
unavoidable external forces can lead to drastic spikes in the readings. This can cause significant fluctuations in the
calculated average. The filtering function is designed to exclude abrupt spike values from the summation average,
ensuring that the filtered average is not heavily influenced by these sudden spikes. The filtering operation is triggered
when the averaging count is equal to or greater than 30, and the filtering ratio is within the range of 10% to 50%. This
helps mitigate the impact of abrupt spikes on the averaged values.
quan tities

filter ratio range

present measurement value

 Relevant control registers:

1. DVP01LC-SL

 CR#43：Filter ratio setting

2. DVP02LC-SL

 CR#43，CR#44：Filter ratio setting

 CR#45，CR#46：Filtered average

12-18
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.7 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Control

Register
12.7.1 Control Register
CR# Address Attribute Register name Explanation
The model code of a load cell module is defined by the
module’s system.
#0 H1000 O R Model name DVP201LC-SL’s model code=H’5106
DVP202LC-SL’s model code=H’5206
DVP211LC-SL’s model code=H’5906 12
Hexadecimal value
#1 H1001 O R Firmware version The current firmware version of a load cell module is
displayed.
CH1: Bit 0~bit 7; CH2: Bit 8~bit 15
Mode 0: 1 mV/V; Mode 4: 20 mV/V
#2 H1002 O R/W Characteristic value Mode 1: 2 mV/V; Mode 5: 40 mV/V
Mode 2: 4 mV/V; Mode 6: 80 mV/V
Mode 3: 6 mV/V
CH1: bit0~bit7; CH2: bit8~bit15
Mode 0: 2.5ms; Mode 5: 60ms
Reaction time for Mode 1: 10ms; Mode 6: 100ms
#3 H1003 O R/W
measurement Mode 2: 16ms; Mode 7: 200ms
Mode 3: 20ms; Mode 8: 400ms
Mode 4: 50ms (factory setting)
K1: Subtracting the tare K4: Subtracting the tare
measured by CH1 measured by CH2
Returning to zero/ K2: Not subtracting the K5: Not subtracting the tare
#6 H1006 X R/W
Subtracting a tare tare measured by CH1 measured by CH2
K3: Restoring the weight K6: Restoring the weight
measured by CH1 to 0 measured by CH2 to 0
CH1: Bit 0~bit 7; CH2: Bit 8~bit 15
K0: Displaying a gross weight
Displaying a gross weight/net
#7 H1007 O R/W K1: Displaying a net weight
weight
DVP202LC-SL can be configured to close this channel
(HFF)
Tare measured by CH1
#8 H1008 X R/W
(Low word)
Tare measured by CH1
#9 H1009 X R/W
(High word)
Displaying a tare
Tare measured by CH2
#10 H100A X R/W
(Low word)
Tare measured by CH2
#11 H100B X R/W
(High word)
Weight measured by CH1
#12 H100C X R
(Low word)
Weight measured by CH1
#13 H100D X R
(High word) Displaying a weight
Weight measured by C2
#14 H100E X R
(Low word)
#15 H100F X R Weight measured by C2

12-19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Address Attribute Register name Explanation

(High word)
Number of weights measured
#16 H1010 O R/W Setting range: K1~K500 (Factory setting: K5)
by CH1 in a stability range
Number of weights measured
#17 H1011 O R/W Setting range: K1~K500 (Factory setting: K5)
by CH2 in a stability range
#18 H1012 O R/W Stability range for CH1 Setting range: K1~K10000 (Factory setting: K10)
#19 H1013 O R/W Stability range for CH2 Setting range: K1~K10000 (Factory setting: K10)
Lower limit of the zero return Provide a judgment of whether the weight value is zero.
#20 H1014 O R/W
_12 for CH1 When the weight value is within this range, the status
code's empty load bit will be set, indicating that the
Lower limit of the zero return current weight value is in the empty load state. The
#21 H1015 O R/W
for CH2 factory default value is K-10, and the set value range is
K-1 to K-32768.
Total number of points which
#25 H1019 O R/W Setting range: K2~K20 (Factory setting: K2)
need to be calibrated
CH1: K1~K20
#26 H101A X R/W Calibration command
CH2: K21~K40
Selecting a calibration point for
#27 H101B O R/W K1~K19
CH1
Selecting a calibration point for
#28 H101C O R/W K1~K19
CH2
Raw data given to a calibration
#29 H101D O R/W
point for CH1 (Low word)
Raw data given to a calibration The firmware will load the relevant raw data
#30 H101E O R/W automatically while calibrating.
point for CH1 (High word)
Raw data given to a calibration You can get a similar result of measurement curves by
#31 H101F O R/W copying the raw data of calibrated points and settings
point for CH2 (Low word)
associated to the measurement to other modules, which
use the same model of sensors, without calibration.
Please notice that the above acts may cause
Raw data given to a calibration unpredictable errors and deviation in the result of
#32 H1020 O R/W measurement curves because of different features
point for CH2 (High word)
between sensors and environment.

Digital value given to a

#33 H1021 O R/W calibration point for CH1 (Low
word)
Digital value given to a Digital values (weight values) correspond to calibration
#34 H1022 O R/W calibration point for CH1 (High points1~19.
word) E.g. To calibrate a 100g weight to be shown as 1000 on
Digital value given to a the LCD display, you’ll have to write 1000 to CR#33
#35 H1023 O R/W calibration point for CH2 (Low before calibration. Please refer to chapter 12 section 10
word) for more details.
Digital value given to a
#36 H1024 O R/W calibration point for CH2 (High
word)
Maximum which can be
#37 H1025 O R/W
measured by CH1 (Low word) Specify the maximum weight which can be measured by
Maximum which can be CH1/CH2. If a weight measured exceeds the maximum
#38 H1026 O R/W
measured by CH1 (High word) weight, an error code (CR#51) will be stored.
#39 H1027 O R/W Maximum which can be

12-20
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

CR# Address Attribute Register name Explanation

measured by CH2 (Low word)
Maximum which can be
#40 H1028 O R/W
measured by CH2 (High word)
Storing all setting values, and writing them to the flash
memory in the load cell module used
Storing all setting values
#41 H1029 X R/W Others: No action (factory setting)
(H’5678)
H’5678: Writing all setting values to the flash memory in
the load cell module used

#42 H102A X R/W

Restoring all settings to factory
Restoring all settings to factory settings (H’55AA) 12
settings
Way in which weights K0: Not filtering weights (factory setting)
#43 H102B X R/W measured by CH1 are filtered K1: Extrema filtering
out K2: Average filtering
K3: LPF 5Hz
K4: LPF 10Hz
Way in which weights K5: LPF 20Hz
#44 H102C X R/W measured by CH2 are filtered K6: LPF 50/60Hz
out Note: When set to K3-K6 (Only supported by FW V1.14
and above), the transfer time would be set to 10ms
which is mandatory.
#45 H102D X R/W Filter parameter for CH1 Extrema filtering: K0~K8
Average filtering: The number of weights which need to
be averaged should be in the range of K1 to
#46 H102E X R/W Filter parameter for CH1
K100.(Supported only by FW V1.12 and above)
Low-pass filtering (LPF): Invalid
Upper limit for determining
whether the digital value Provide a judgment of whether the weight value is zero.
#48 H1030 O R/W
corresponding to a weight When the weight value is within this range, the status
measured by CH1 is 0 grams code's empty load bit will be set, indicating that the
Upper limit for determining current weight value is in the empty load state. The
whether the digital value factory default value is K10, and the set value range is
#49 H1031 O R/W
corresponding to a weight K0 to K32767.
measured by CH2 is 0 grams
The status of the load cell module used is stored in this
register. Please refer to the status table below for more
#51 H1033 X R/W Status code
information.
Factory setting: H’0000
#52 H1034 O R/W RS-232 station address The default value in CR#52/CR#54 is K1.
#53 H1035 O R/W RS-232 communication format The setting values in CR#52 and CR#54 should be in
the range of K1 to K255.
#54 H1036 O R/W RS-485 station address
The default value in CR#53/CR#55 is H’0000 (ASCII,
9600 bps, 7 data bits, even parity bit, one stop bit).
#55 H1037 O R/W RS-485 communication format Please refer to the communication format table below
for more information.
Zero point tracking range of Setting range: 0 ~ 30000; when set the setting to 0, it
#95 H105F O R/W
CH1 indicates zero point tracking is disabled.
Zero point tracking time of
#96 H1060 O R/W Setting range: 5 ~ 1000; unit: 0.1 s
CH1
Zero point tracking range of Setting range: 0 ~ 30000; when set the setting to 0, it
#97 H1061 O R/W
CH2 indicates zero point tracking is disabled.
#98 H1062 O R/W Zero point tracking time of Setting range: 5 ~ 1000; unit: 0.1 s

12-21
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Address Attribute Register name Explanation

CH2
#100 H1064 O R/W Current output Setting range: K0~K4000
#101 H1065 X R Digital input terminal Bit 0: X0; Bit 1: X1
#102 H1066 X R/W Digital output terminal Bit 0: Y0; Bit 1: Y1; Bit 2: Y2; Bit 3: Y3
K0: Digital value(CR#100) corresponding to a current
output in the range of 0 mA to 20 mA (factory setting)
K1: Digital value(CR#100) corresponding to a current
output in the range of 4 mA to 20mA
#103 H1067 O R/W Way of outputting a current
_12 K2: Weight corresponding to a current output in the
range of 0 mA to 20mA
K3: Weight corresponding to a current output in the
range of 4 mA to 20mA
X0: Bit 0~bit 7; X1: Bit 8~bit 15
H0: General digital input terminal (factory setting)
H1: If a digital input terminal is ON, a weight will be
restored to zero,
H2: If a digital input terminal is ON, a tare will be
measured.
H3: If a digital input terminal is ON, a tare will be
subtracted.
H4: If a digital input terminal is OFF, a net weight will be
measured.
H6: If a digital input terminal is ON, zero will be
adjusted.
H7: If a digital input terminal is ON, the first point will be
Way in which a digital input adjusted.
#104 H1068 O R/W
terminal operates
H8: rising edge triggered: Y0~Y3 open outputs;
falling edge triggered: Y0~Y3 close outputs
H9: rising edge triggered: Y0~Y3 close outputs;
falling edge triggered: Y0~Y3 open outputs
HA: rising edge triggered: Y0~Y3 hold outputs;
falling edge triggered: Y0~Y3 open outputs
HB: rising edge triggered: Y0~Y3 open outputs;
falling edge triggered: Y0~Y3 hold outputs
H’8 and H’B:
 Hold state: State remains Hold while changing Y0 ~
Y3 and CR#109 = 2 (HOLD state).
 When the output is in the active state: the
modified status of Y0~Y3 will be output
Bit 15~bit 12 Bit 11~bit 8 Bit 7~bit 4 Bit 3~bit 0
Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
H0: General digital output terminal (factory setting)
H1: If no weight is measured, a digital output terminal
will be ON.
Way in which a digital output H2: If no weight is measured, a digital output terminal
#105 H1069 O R/W
terminal operates will be OFF.
H3: If a weight measured is greater than the maximum
weight specified, a digital output terminal will be ON.
H4: If a weight measured is greater than the maximum
weight specified, a digital output terminal will be OFF.
H5: If an excitation voltage is abnormal, a digital output

12-22
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

CR# Address Attribute Register name Explanation

terminal will be ON.
H6: If an excitation voltage is abnormal, a digital output
terminal will be OFF.
H7: If a weight measured is in the stability range
specified, a digital output terminal will be ON.
H8: If a weight measured is in the stability range
specified, a digital output terminal will be OFF.
H’9: If a weight measured is greater than the
weight value that is set to output, a digital output
terminal will be ON. 12
H’A: If a weight measured is greater than t the
weight value that is set to output, a digital output
terminal will be OFF.

#106 H106A O R/W Weight changing of CH1 Default: K0; setting range: K0 ~ K32767

#107 H106B O R/W Weight changing of CH2 Default: K0; setting range: K0 ~ K32767

Work with CR#104 and Y points

0: Y point output enabled (default)
#109 H106D X R/W Status of Y point 1: Y point output closed (the status of Y0-Y3 is OFF)
2: Y point output on hold (the status of Y0-Y3 cannot be
changed)

Y0 weight output setting value

#110 H106E O R/W
(Low word)

Y0 weight output setting value

#111 H106F O R/W
(High word)

Y1 weight output setting value

#112 H1070 O R/W
(Low word)

Y1 weight output setting value

#113 H1071 O R/W
(High word) When the weight is greater than the weight value that is
set to output, you can set the Y point output to ON or
Y2 weight output setting value OFF.
#114 H1072 O R/W
(Low word)

Y2 weight output setting value

#115 H1073 O R/W
(High word)

Y3 weight output setting value

#116 H1074 O R/W
(Low word)

Y3 weight output setting value

#117 H1075 O R/W
(High word)

#118 H1076 O R/W Y0 delay output time Default: 0; setting range: 0 ~ 300;

12-23
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Address Attribute Register name Explanation

unit: 10 ms
#119 H1077 O R/W Y1 delay output time

#120 H1078 O R/W Y2 delay output time

#121 H1079 O R/W Y3 delay output time

Symbols: O indicates that the register is latched. X indicates that the register is not latched.
R indicates that the data can be read. W indicates that the data can be written.

※Function Code: 03H: Read data from the register; 06H: Write one word of data to the register; 10H: Write multiple words
_12
of data to the register

※ CR#51: Status code

bit Content Description bit Content Description

b0 K1（H’0001） Abnormal power b1 K2（H’0002） Hardware failure
The weight measured by CH1
exceeds the maximum weight
b2 K4（H’0004） b3 K8（H’0008） CH1 is adjusted incorrectly.
which can be measured, or the
voltage of SEN is incorrect.
The weight measured by CH1
b4 K16（H’0010） exceeds the maximum weight b5 K32（H’0020） No weight is measured by CH1.
which can be measured.
The conversion of a weight
A weight measured by CH1 is measured by CH2 into a digital
b6 K64（H’0040） b7 K128（H’0080）
in the stability range specified. value is incorrect, or the voltage of
SEN is incorrect.
The weight measured by CH2
b8 K256（H’0100） CH2 is adjusted incorrectly. b9 K512（H’0200） exceeds the maximum weight
which can be measured.
No weight is measured by A weight measured by CH2 is in
b10 K1024（H’0400） b11 K2048（H’0800）
CH2. the stability range specified.
b12~b15 reserved
Note: Each status is determined by the corresponding bit, and it is possible to generate two or more statuses at the
same time. 0 represents normal, while 1 indicates that one or more machine status occured.

※ CR#53、CR#55Communication format:
Bit 15 Bit 14~Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
ASCII/RTU Reserved Serial transmission speed Data length Stop bit Parity bit
Description
Bit 15 ASCII/RTU 0 ASCII 1 RTU
0 9,600 bps 1 19,200 bps
Bit 7~bit 4 Serial transmission speed 2 38,400 bps 3 57,600 bps
4 115,200 bps 5 Reserved
Bit 3 Data length (RTU=8 bits) 0 7 1 8
Bit 2 Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bits
0 Even 1 Odd
Bit 1~bit 0 Parity bit
2 Reserved 3 Reserved

12-24
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.7.2 Functions Descriptions

12.7.2.1 Measuring Net Weight

Users can choose to measure the net weight or the gross weight of an object. A net weight is the weight of a product, that
is, the actual weight of a product without its package. The weight of a package is a tare. A gross weight is a total weight,
namely a net weight plus a tare

 Tare:A tare is the weight of a package

 Net Weight:A net weight is the weight of a product, that is, the actual weight of a product without its package
12
 Gross Weight: A gross weight is a total weight, namely the weight of a product itself (a net weight) plus the weight of
a package (a tare)

 Gross weight=Net weight+Tare

Example: A product weighs 10 kilograms, and the carton in which the product is packed weighs 0.2 kilograms. The
total weight gotten is 10.2 kilograms.

Net weight=10KG，Tare=0.2KG，Gross weight=10.2KG。

 Relevant control registers

 CR#6： Returning to zero/Subtracting a tare

 CR#7：Displaying a gross weight/net weight

 CR#8~9：Measured tare

12-25
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.7.2.2 Stability Check

When an object is put on a load cell, users can utilize this function to check whether the current measurement weight has
stabilized

 If a weight measured is in a stability range specified by users (CR#18/CR#19), the bit in CR#51 will be set to 1

 If a weight measured exceeds a range specified by users, the bit in CR#51 will be set to 0. It remains 0 until the
stability check count (CR#16, CR#17) is within the stability range again. Once the stability check count is within the
range, the bit of CR#51 will be set to 1.

_12 Example: The measurement time set is 10 milliseconds, the number of weights measured in a stability range is 10, and
the stability range set is 1000 grams. If a variation exceeds 1000 grams, bit in CR#51 will be set to 0. If the variations in
100 milliseconds (10×10 ms) are within 1000 grams, bit in CR#51 will be set to 1. (Users should judge whether the present
weight measured is in the stability range set before they perform control.)

△：t Variations in av erage weights

t：k Measurement time set by users
k：mStability range s et by us ers <k
<k △k<
△k<
m： Number of weights measured in <k
△k<

a s tabi lity range >k

△k>

A ver age w ei ght >k

△k>

>k
△k>

>k
△k>

>k
△k>

>k
△k>
△
△k>
>k

Ti me
t m
The s tabi li ty b i t
bi t

 Relevant control registers

 CR#16，CR#17：Number of weights measured in a stability range

 CR#18，CR#19：Stability check range

12.7.2.3 Determining Zero

Users can utilize this function to determine when an item has been completely removed from the Load Cell. When the
user observes that the stability bit for the measurement value is 1 and the zero point weight bit is also 1, it indicates that
the item has been successfully removed from the Load Cell. At this point, users can perform the next control step. (The
zero point weight bit is 1 within the zero point detection range.)
DV P 20 1 LC- S L

No objec t

C H1
Loa d Cell

C H2

Average weight

Zero range

Time

Zero weight

 Relevant control registers

 CR#20/CR#21/CR#48/CR#49：Range for determining whether a weight measured is 0 grams.

12-26
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.7.2.4 Filtering out Weight

There are three ways to filter out weights

 Filtering out the maximum/minimum weight measured: If there is a maximum weight or a minimum weight, CR#45
can be used to filter out the maximum weight or the minimum weight. If the value in CR#45 is bigger, more weights
will be filtered out. Setting range: K0~K8

 Averaging weights: The values read are averaged so that a steady value is obtained. There may be peak values due
to unavoidable external factors, and the average value obtained changes accordingly. The maximum number of
values which can be averaged are 100.
12
 Low-pass filters (LPF) with different cutoff frequencies are provided. (Supported by firmware V1.14 and above.)
12.7.2.5 Correspondence between Current Outputs and Weights

Currents outputs directly correspond to weights. Currents vary with weights. Users can set a current output mode by
means of CR#103.
Current output Current output
20m A 20m A

0mA Digital value 4mA Digital value

K4000 (CR#100) K4000 (CR#100)
K0 K0

(Mode 0) (Mode 1)

Current output Current output

20m A 20m A

0mA Weight 4mA Weight

(CR#12/13) (CR#12/13)
K0 Maximum weight K0 Maximum weight
(CR#37/38) (CR#37/38)
(Mode 2) (Mode 3)

12-27
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Example: 10 kg correspond to 20 mA.

10kg

0mA
_12 0g 20mA

A load cell module is directly connected to the left side of a DVP series PLC. The instruction TO is used to set parameters.

CR#103 is set to K2, and CR#37/CR#38 is set to K10000. Please see the WPLSoft program shown below.

12.7.2.6 Zero Tracking

That is Auto-zero function. Sensor may lose flexibility and accuracy after being used for a long time. In this case, you can
set up a range for time and weight that zero tracking is attempted. Please refer to CR#95~CR#98 for relevant information
of settings.

12.7.2.7 Weight Updates

Weight values would be updated in real time while using control registers. Meanwhile, you are allowed to configure the
settings of changes in weight values in CR#106~CR#107 and the weight value would only be updated when the changes
is greater than the setting value.

12-28
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.7.2.8 Output Values Set for Y Points

When the weight is greater than the weight value that is set to output, you can set the Y point output to ON or OFF. With
delay output time, you can prevent multiple Y points from being enabled at the same time. Please refer to
CR#110~CR#121 for details of the related settings.

Weight
重量

12
Output Setting
輸 出設Value
定值

Time
時間

Y
濾波 時間
Filtering time 濾 波時間
Filtering time

12-29
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.8 Wiring
12.8.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL/DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/
DVP211LC-SL Wiring

EX C+ A+5V
EX C- AGND
F our -wir e
SIG+
_12 SIG-
CH 1
SE N+
SE N-

EX C+ A+5V
Six- wire EX C- AGND
SIG+
SIG-
CH 2
SE N+
SE N-

Connected to
on a power supply m odule *1 A+5V
System 0V DC/DC
ground 24V conver ter
AGND
T hir d gr ound
( Im pedance: Less than 100 )

Note 1: Please connect on a power supply module and on the load cell module to a system ground, and then
ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

12-30
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

 Multiple load cells connected in parallel are connected to a single load cell module. Take DVP202LC-SL for
example.

Load cell

Load cell
12
DVP202LC Load cell

CH1
Load cell

Load cell
CH2

Load cell

Load cell

Load cell

Note 1: Please connect on a power supply module and on the load cell module to a system ground, and
then ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

Note 2: If multiple load cells are connected in parallel, the total impedance should be greater than 40 Ω.

12.8.2 DVP211LC-SL Wiring Digital Input

When the digital input signal is DC input, there are two DC input types, Sinking and Sourcing. See the definition below.
 Sinking  Sourcing

I/O I/O
X0 X0
In ter na l Interna l
Ci rcu it C ircuit

S/S S /S

12-31
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.8.3 DVP211LC-SL Wiring Output

 NPN Transistor output  Analog output

Curre nt outp ut
UP 0mA~ +20mA
*2
DC L oad
+ AO +
Y0
VDC A O-
Driv es , rec order,
Shielde d cable *1 S HD
propo rtioning v alve
ZP

_12

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If noise in the input voltage results in noise interference in the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor with a
capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF with a working voltage of 25 V.

12-32
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.9 Software Interface Instructions

The following content takes the DVP01LC-SL model as an example.

12.9.1 Initial Settings

1. Connect DVP01LC-SL module to the PC, as illustrated below.

 Please follow the PIN definitions for the wiring.

P C CO M P o r t DV P 0 1 L C C O M P o r t
9 P I N D- S UB f e m a l e 8 P IN M IN I D IN
Rx 2 5 Tx 2 1
12
Tx 3 4 Rx 5 4 3
GN D 5 8 G ND 8 6
7
7 1, 2 5V
8
1
4
6

 There are 2 communication interfaces in DVP01LC-SL available for the communication with the PC and other
devices. COM1 is the RS-232 port, and COM2 is the RS-485 port. Both ports comply with standard Modbus
protocol. The PC can communicate directly with DVP01LC-SL through COM1.

 We recommend you use Delta’s power supply modules for DVP01LC-SL.

RS23 2

2. Open the software. Select “Option” -> “Communication Setting”.

12-33
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Set up the communication parameters according to the settings below.

_12

 Setting up responding time

Times of auto-retry: Default = 1, range: 0 ~ 50

Time interval of auto-retry: Default = 3, range: 1 ~ 20

 Setting up COM port

COM port: Select the communication port to be connected with the MPU.

Baud rate: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200

Data length: 7 bit or 8 bit. When the transmission mode is set to RTU, it will automatically be set to “8
bit”.

Stop bit: 1 bit or 2 bit

Parity: None, Odd or Even

Transfer (transmission) mode: RTU or ASCII

 Auto-detection

Click the “Auto-Detect” button, and all the connections will be auto-detected in the current transmission
mode.

4. After the communication settings are completed, click the icon on the toolbar, or select “Communication” ->
“Online” to establish the connection between the software and DVP01LC-SL.

12-34
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

5. When clicking “online”, a window for uploading module information will appear, asking whether to upload the module
data to the PC. If the user selects "Yes" the module's configuration values will be uploaded to the software and
overwrite the previous software settings.

6. Once you enter the online status, the screen will show the real-time data of DVP01LC-SL, including its current
firmware version, the average values of CH1. You can click a value, and a window displaying the enlarged character
will appear.

 The average values

12
Click on a value, and the enlarged characters of the value will appear.

7. In the connection, if you would like to upload the data in DVP01LC-SL to software, click the icon . Or click the icon
if you would like to download all the parameters set in the software to the module.

12.9.2 Communication Settings

The communication setting window allows you to set up the communication formats for RS-232 and RS-485, the
characteristic value (eigenvalue) and measuring time. When all the settings are done, click the icon to download the
parameters to DVP01LC-SL, or click “Upload” to display the parameters of DVP01LC-SL in the software. Click “Default”
and all the parameters set will return to the default settings.

12-35
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

(for illustration purposes only)

 Characteristic Value/Measurement time

 Characteristic value: The eigenvalue, corresponding to the value set in CR#2. Scroll down to select
1mV/V, 2 mV/V, 4 mV/V or 6 mV/V. The default setting is 2 mV/V.

 Measurement time: Corresponds to the value set in CR#3. Scroll down to select 2ms, 10ms, 20ms,
40ms or 80 ms. The default setting is 80 ms.

 RS-232 Communication
_12
 Station address: The node address, corresponding to the value set in CR#52. Click to set the station
address, the range is 1 to 255, and the default setting is 1

 Baud rate: Corresponds to bit4 to bit7 of CR#53. Scroll down to select 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or
115200. The default setting is 9600

 Transfer mode: The transmission mode, corresponding to bit15 of CR#53. Scroll down to select RTU or
ASCII. The default setting is ASCII.

 Data length: Corresponds to bit3 of CR#53. Scroll down to select 7 or 8. The default setting is 7. When
the transmission mode is set to be RTU, the data length will be automatically set to 8.

 Parity: Corresponds to bit0 to bit1 of CR#53. Scroll down to select none, odd or even. The default setting
is even.

 Stop bit: Corresponds to bit2 of CR#53. Scroll down to select 0 or 1. The default setting is 1.

 RS-485Communication

 Station address: The node address, corresponding to the value set in CR#54. Click to set the station
address, the range is 1 to 255, and the default setting is 1

 Baud rate: Corresponds to bit4 to bit7 of CR#55. Scroll down to select 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or
115200. The default setting is 9600

 Transfer mode: The transmission mode, corresponding to bit15 of CR#55. Scroll down to select RTU or
ASCII. The default setting is ASCII

 Data length: Corresponds to bit3 of CR#55. Scroll down to select 7 or 8. The default setting is 7. When
the transmission mode is set to be RTU, the data length will be automatically set to 8.

 Parity: Corresponds to bit0 to bit1 of CR#55. Scroll down to select none, odd or even. The default setting
is even.

 Stop bit: Corresponds to bit2 of CR#55. Scroll down to select 0 or 1. The default setting is 1.

12-36
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.9.3 Parameter Settings

The parameter setting window allows you to set up parameters for CH1 and CH2, including displaying the net weight or
gross weight, the tare weight, average times, maximum weights, units for measurements, the decimal point place, range
and times for standstill checks, zero point checks and filter percentages. When all the settings are done, click “download”
to download the parameters to DVP01LC-SL, or click “Upload” to display the parameters of DVP01LC-SL in the
software.

12

(for illustration purposes only)

 Gross/Net

Corresponds to the value in CR#7. Scroll down to select displaying the gross weight or net weight.

 Tare Weight

Enter the weight value for tare weight settings here or click "Tare" to set it. The range is -32768 to 32767, with
a default software value of 0.

 Maximum Weight

When the measured value exceeds the maximum weight, an error will be displayed in the status.

The range is -32768 to 32767, with a default software value of 32767.

 Unit of Weight Measurement

The weight measurement unit for CH1 corresponds to CR#22 and CR#23. Enter the weight unit here for user
reference, with a maximum of 4 characters. The default software value is "KG."

 Standstill times

The times of standstill checks, corresponding to the value in CR#16 and CR#17. Enter the times here. The

12-37
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

range is 1 to 500, and the default setting is 5.

 Standstill Range

The stability check range for CH1 corresponds to CR#18. Enter the value here to set the stability check range,
ranging from 1 to 10000. The default software value is 10.

 Zero Band

The upper limit of the zero band detection for CH1 corresponds to CR#37, and the lower limit corresponds to
CR#39. This range is used for zero-state detection reference. When the weight value is within this range, the
_12 status code is set to the zero bit, indicating an empty state. Enter values here to set the upper and lower limits
of the zero-point check range, with a range of -32768 to 32767. The default software value is -10 to 10.

 Average Times

The range is 1 to 100, and the default setting is 10.

 Filter ratio setting

The filter ratio setting for CH1 corresponds to CR#43. This is used to configure the filter ratio for the dynamic
filtering function, with a setting range of 1 to 9. The weighted average of the weight after dynamic filtering is
displayed in the CH1 filter average value on the toolbar, or can be viewed in CR#45 filter average value. The
default software value is 2

12.9.4 Correction Setting

Here we introduce parameters and corresponding control registers related to correction in the software. Parameters
include reset to zero point commands, weight base point commands and weight correction commands. When all the
settings are done, click “download” to download the parameters to DVP01LC-SL, or click “Upload” to display the
parameters of DVP01LC-SL in the software.

(for illustration purposes only)

 Zero weight value correction

Corresponds to CR#33 and CR#34. Enter the weight base value here. The default setting is 1,000.

 Relative Digital Values

12-38
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

Digital values corresponding to the actual weight of the calibration weight.

12

12-39
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.9.5 Status Settings

In the status setting window, you can view the measuring results and the operation status of DVP01LC-SL, including the
present average value in CH1, the unit of measurement, status codes and error codes.

_12

(for illustration purposes only)

 Weight value

The current measured weight value, displayed in the unit previously set for weight measurement.

 Status code

Corresponds to the value set in CR#50, indicating the measuring statuses at CH1 and CH2, including the
empty load, overload and whether the measured values are stable.

(for illustration purposes only)

 CH1 zero weight (empty): Corresponds to bit0 of CR#50. When the value measured at CH1 equals 0,
the indicator will turn red.

 CH1 max. weight (overload): Corresponds to bit2 of CR#50. When the value measured at CH1 exceeds
the maximum weight set, the indicator will turn red.

 CH1 stable measured value: Corresponds to bit4 of CR#50. When the value measured at CH1 is stable,
the indicator will turn red.

12-40
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

 Error code

Corresponds to the value in CR#51, displaying the operation status, including power supply abnormality,
hardware abnormality, SEN voltage errors and conversion errors.

12

(for illustration purposes only)

 Power supply abnormality: Corresponds to bit0 of CR#51. When the power supply encounters
abnormality, the indicator will turn red.

 Hardware abnormality: Corresponds to bit1 of CR#51. When the hardware encounters abnormality, the
indicator will turn red.

 CH1 SEN voltage error: Corresponds to bit3 of CR#51. When the SEN signal input at CH1 encounters
error, i.e. abnormal load cell signal occurs, the indicator will turn red.

 CH1 conversion error: Corresponds to bit4 of CR#51. When the conversion of the measured signal at
CH1 encounters an error, the indicator will turn red.

12-41
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.10 Correction
12.10.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL Correction
The following content uses the DVP01LC-SL model as an example.

Calibration is performed to align the module with the weight values of the Load Cell and allows for the adjustment of the
curve as desired. The calibration steps are illustrated in the diagram below. Calibration can be divided into mainframe
calibration and software calibration. Mainframe calibration involves connecting the DVP-PLC mainframe to the
DVP01LC-SL module and using TO/FROM instructions to carry out the calibration steps. Software calibration, on the
other hand, requires the PC to connect to the DVP01LC-SL module using an RS-232 communication cable. The module
_12
calibration steps are then performed in the software, without the need for sending control commands through the
DVP-PLC mainframe. The following will introduce the mainframe calibration and software calibration steps separately.

Load cell without

any load on it

Reset current
weight to zero

Add standard
weights
on load cell

Set the weight of

the weight to be
base point

12.10.1.1 Correction by MPU

In this example, we connect DVP02LC-SL to a DVP series PLC MPU and correct CH1 by TO instruction.

1. Connect the DVP01LC-SL module to the left side of the mainframe and provide power supply individually according
to the requirements.

2. Connect the Load Cell to module CH1, as illustrated in the diagram below. Please refer to section 12.8 for the wiring
details.

DVP 0 1LC-S L

CH1
Lo ad Ce ll

12-42
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

3. Set up every parameter and eigenvalue according to the actual measuring requirements and specifications of the
load cell. In this example, we use the default settings of all parameters.

4. Execute the reset to zero command by writing H’0001 into CR#26, as the WPLSoft program below.

M0
TO K100 K26 H1 K1

SET M0 12

5. Add a 1kg weight on the load cell. Please be aware of the maximum weight the load cell can take.
Standard weight (1kg)
DVP02LC-SL

CH1
Load cell

CH2

(for illustration purposes only)

6. Write the corresponding digital value for the 1kg calibration weight (in this example, 1kg corresponds to K1000) into
CR#33 and CR#34 (CH1 calibration weight baseline), as shown in the WPLSoft program in the following diagram.

M2
TO K100 K33 K1000 K1

SET M2

Note: Users can set arbitrary values, and the corresponding curve graph will also differ. Please refer to section
12.10.1.3 for guidance.

7. Execute the weight base point command by writing H’0002 into CR#26, as the WPLSoft program below.

M3
TO K100 K26 H2 K1

SET M3

8. Save the calibration results for future use upon the next power-up. Write H'5678 into CR#41, as illustrated in the
WPLSoft program shown below.

12-43
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.10.1.2 Correction by Software

In this example, we will demonstrate how to correct CH1 on DVP01LC-SL by the software.

1. Install the communication connection cable. Connect the PC to the DVP01LC-SL module using an RS-232
communication cable, and provide power supply according to the requirements.
2. Connect the Load Cell to module CH1, as illustrated in the diagram below. Please refer to section 12.8 for the wiring
details.
DVP 0 1LC-S L

_12 CH1
Lo ad Ce ll

3. Open the software and see 12.9.1 for how to set up the connection between the software and DVP01LC-SL.

4. Click “Parameters” on the left-hand side column to start setting up the parameters. Set up every parameter and
eigenvalue according to the actual measuring requirements and specifications of the load cell. After the parameter
setups are done, click “Download”.

(for illustration purposes only)

5. .Click on "Calibration" in the left window. Begin by entering the actual weight of the calibration weight as 1000 and
inputting the corresponding digital value as 1000 (in this example, 1kg corresponds to K1000). Click on the next step
command to start the calibration.

(for illustration purposes only)

6. In the state where no items are placed on the Load Cell, the CH1 weight display is equal to 0g. Click on the next step
command.

7. Place a standard 1kg calibration weight on the Load Cell. Note: Please refer to the maximum weight that the Load
Cell can bear at the time. Click on the next step command.
8. Calibration completed. The diagram below displays the relationship between the digital values and corresponding
weight values.

12-44
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.10.1.3 Example Curve Graph After Calibration

Weight

32Kg

calibration point”
1Kg

K0 K1000
Digital Value(LS B)
K32000
12

The digital values corresponding to the calibration weight can be written arbitrarily by the user, and the generated curve
graph will also differ. For example, if you modify the 1kg calibration weight corresponding to K1000 to 1kg corresponding
to K500, write it into CR#33 (CH1 calibration weight baseline), as shown in the WPLSoft program in the following diagram.

After calibration, the curve graph is as follows:

Weight

64Kg

calibration point
1Kg

Digital Value (LSB )

K0 K500 K32000

12-45
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.10.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL Correction

The purpose of making adjustment is to make the weight measured by a cell correspond to the digital value displayed in a
load cell module. Generally, two points are adjusted. After a system is set up, users can put no load on the scale. The
weight measured is 0 grams when no load is put on the scale. The users can put a given weight on the scale, and set a
digital value corresponding to the weight. The two points are adjusted. For example, if a load cell sensor which can
measure a maximum weight of 10 kg is used, and 1 kg correspond to K1000, the curve presented will be like the one
shown below.

_12
Weight

10 kg

Point
1 kg

Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)

Adjusting two points

In addition to the adjustment of two points, a load cell supports the adjustment of multiple points (20 points at most). A
characteristic curve is shown below.

Weight
Point 5
10 kg

Point 3
Point 4

Point 1
1 kg
Point 2

Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)

Adjusting multiple points

12-46
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

12.10.2.1 Steps in correction

Entering adjustment

Setting the total number of

points which need to be
adjusted (CR#25)
12
No weight

Writing K1 to CR#26

Selecting a point which needs

to be adjusted (CR#27/28)

Putting a weight and writing

the weight of the weight to
CR#33~CR#34/CR#35~CR#36

Writing an adjustment
command to CR#26

YES
Adjusting the next point

NO

Storing all the setting values

(Writing H'5678 to CR#41)

The adjustment is complete.

(Users put no weight so that no
weight is measured. After the
users write K3 or K6 to CR#6,
they can begin to use the load
cell module.)

12-47
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.10.2.2 Example 1

EX: One point is adjusted. (A weight which weighs 1 kg corresponds to 1000 lsb.)

A load cell module is directly connected to the left side of a DVP series PLC. The instruction TO is used to make
adjustment. The steps in making adjustment are as follows.

Step 1: Write K2 to CR#25. Please see the WPLSoft program shown below.

_12 Step 2: Connect a load cell to a module, and put no load on the load cell.

Step 3: Write H’0001 to CR#26. Please see the WPLSoft program shown below.

Step4: Select point 1 (default setting), and write H1 to CR#27. Please see the WPLSoft program shown below.

Step5: Put a standard weight which weighs 1000 g on the load cell.

S ta n da r d we i g ht (1 kg )

12-48
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

Step 6: Write K1000 (1000 g) to CR#33.

Step 7: Write H2 to CR#26.

12

Step 8: Make sure that the value displayed is correct, and make the adjustment retentive. Write H’5678 to CR#41. Please
see the WPLSoft program shown below.

12-49
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.10.2.3 Example 2

Example: Three points are adjusted.

Note: The "Decimal Point Setting" and "Weight Measurement Unit" on LCSoft are for software display purposes only and
will not affect the digital values of the module itself.

A load cell module is used independently. The steps in making adjustment are as follows.

Step 1: Select 3 in the The Num. of Adjustment box. The weight of the first weight is 500 g. It corresponds to 500 lsb.
The weight of the second weight is 1000 g. It corresponds to 1000 lsb. The weight of the third weight is 1500 g. It
_12 corresponds to 1500 lsb. Please see the figure below.

12-50
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

Step 2: Put no load on the load cell used. Click “Next.” Please see the figures below.

12

Step 3: Put a standard weight which weighs 500 g on the load cell used, and click Next. Please see the figure below.

12-51
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Step 4: Type “500” in the Wight value of weights box, type “500” in the Digital value of weights box, and click Next.
Please see the figures below.

_12

Step 5: Put a standard weight which weighs 1000 g on the load cell used. Type “1000” in the Wight value of weights box,
type “1000” in the Digital value of weights box, and click Next. Please see the figures below.

12-52
 Ch a pt er 1 2 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Lo a d Ce l l M o du l e

Step 6: Put a standard weight which weighs 1500 g on the load cell used. Type “1500” in the Wight value of weights
box, type “1500” in the Digital value of weights box, and click Next. Please see the figures below.

12

Step 7: The adjustment made is complete, and a curve is displayed. Please see the figures below.

12-53
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

12.11 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in the left-side high-speed weighing (LC) module, an error indicator will start blinking. Once you see
an error indicator starts blinking, you can use the FROM instruction to read the error codes stored in CR#51. The bit 0 to
bit 15 indicates the error codes. It is possible to have two errors at the same time. 0 indicates normal and 1 indicates error.
Refer to the following table for more the causes and the solutions for troubleshooting.

12.11.1 DVP01LC-SL/DVP02LC-SL
_12 RUN ERRO
Bit No. Descripton Solution
LED R LED
bit0 OFF Blinking The external voltage is abnormal Check the power supply.

bit1 No change Blinking Hardware malfunction Contact the factory.

bit2 No change Blinking CH1conversion error Check the input signal of CH1

bit3 No change Blinking CH1 SEN voltage error Check the wiring of CH1.

bit4 No change Blinking CH2 conversion error Check the input signal of CH2

bit5 No change Blinking CH2 SEN voltage error Check the wiring of CH2.

12.11.2 DVP201LC-SL/DVP202LC-SL/DVP211LC-SL
RUN ERROR
Bit No. Description Solution
LED LED
bit0 OFF ON The external voltage is abnormal Check the power supply.
No
bit1 ON Hardware malfunction Contact the factory
change
No CH1 input exceeds measurement
bit2 Blinking Check the wiring of CH1
change range or SEN voltage error
No CH1 recalibration, the calibration curve
bit3 Blinking CH1calibration error
change cannot be turned.
No Check if the input signal of CH2
bit4 Blinking CH1 exceeds the upper weight limit
change exceeds the upper weight limit.
No
bit5 Blinking CH1 no load Status flag, non-error
change
No
bit6 Blinking CH1 measurement value is stable Status flag, non-error
change
No CH2 input exceeds measurement
bit7 Blinking Check the wiring of CH2
change range or SEN voltage error
No CH2 recalibrates, the calibration curve
bit8 Blinking CH2calibration error
change cannot be turned.
No Check if the input signal of CH2
bit9 Blinking CH2 exceeds the upper weight limit
change exceeds the upper weight limit.
No
bit10 Blinking CH2 no load Status flag, non-error
change
No
bit11 Blinking CH2measurement value is stable Status flag, non-error
change

12-54
 13
Chapter 13 DVP-S Series Left-Side High-Speed
Communication Module

Table of Contents
13.1 DVPEN01-SL .......................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 13-3
13.1.2 Module Profiles and Dimension .............................................................. 13-5
13.1.3 Terminals ........................................................................................... 13-6
13.1.4 Installation and Wiring ......................................................................... 13-6
13.1.5 Control Register .................................................................................. 13-9
13.1.6 Software Setting ............................................................................... 13-14
13.1.7 Application Examples ......................................................................... 13-37
13.1.8 LED Indictor and Troubleshooting ........................................................ 13-66

13.2 DVPDNET-SL ........................................................................................ 13-67

13.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 13-67
13.2.2 Module Profiles and Dimension ............................................................ 13-69
13.2.3 Terminals ......................................................................................... 13-70
13.2.4 Installation ....................................................................................... 13-71
13.2.5 Connect to DeviceNet......................................................................... 13-72
13.2.6 Software Introduction ........................................................................ 13-73
13.2.7 Input and Output Mapping Areas ......................................................... 13-77
13.2.8 Sending Explicit Message from Ladder Diagram ..................................... 13-80
13.2.9 Bit-Strobe Command ......................................................................... 13-87
13.2.10 Display of Node Status on Network ...................................................... 13-88
13.2.11 Setup of Slave Mode .......................................................................... 13-89
13.2.12 Extended Baud Rate Setup ................................................................. 13-91
13.2.13 Application Example........................................................................... 13-96
13.2.14 Error Diagnosis & Troubleshooting ...................................................... 13-104

13.3 DVPCOPM-SL ..................................................................................... 13-107

13.3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................... 13-107
13.3.2 Module Profiles and Dimension ........................................................... 13-109
13.3.3 Terminals ........................................................................................ 13-110
13.3.4 Installation ...................................................................................... 13-111
13.3.5 Construct a CANopen Network ........................................................... 13-112
13.3.6 Input and Output Mapping Areas ........................................................ 13-128
13.3.7 Send SDO, NMT and Read Emergency by Ladder Diagram ..................... 13-131

13-1
 13.3.8 Network Node Status Display ............................................................. 13-141
13.3.9 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting ..................................................... 13-146
13.3.10 Indexes and Sub-indexes for DVPCOPM-SL Working as CANopen Slave ... 13-149

13.4 DVPPF02-SL....................................................................................... 13-152

13.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................... 13-152
13.4.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ......................................................... 13-153
13.4.3 Terminals ........................................................................................ 13-154
13.4.4 Installation ...................................................................................... 13-155
13.4.5 Establish PROFIBUS DP Network ........................................................ 13-156
13.4.6 Transmission Distance and Baud Rate ................................................. 13-157
13.4.7 GSD File .......................................................................................... 13-157
13.4.8 Mapping Areas and Status Registers ................................................... 13-157
13.4.9 DVPPF02-SL Configure ...................................................................... 13-158
13.4.10 Application Example ......................................................................... 13-159
13.4.11 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting ..................................................... 13-164

13.5 DVPSCM12-SL/DVPSCM52-SL ............................................................ 13-166

13.5.1 Introduction .................................................................................... 13-166
13.5.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ......................................................... 13-168
13.5.3 Terminals ........................................................................................ 13-169
13.5.4 Installation and Wiring ...................................................................... 13-169
13.5.5 Control Register ............................................................................... 13-171
13.5.6 Rapid Start ...................................................................................... 13-178
13.5.7 SCMSoft Introduction ........................................................................ 13-185
13.5.8 Application ...................................................................................... 13-194
13.5.9 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting ..................................................... 13-223

13-2
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1 DVPEN01-SL
13.1.1 Introduction
DVPEN01-SL is an Ethernet communication module for remote setting and communication through DVP-CPU project
editing software. DVPEN01-SL features functions such as sending E-mail, automatic network correction for RTC in PLC,
data exchange, etc. It supports MODBUS TCP communication protocol and can conduct remote monitoring by using
SCADA (Supervisor Control and Data Acquisition) software or HMI (Human Machine Interfaces). DVPEN01-SL can be the
master of MODBUS TCP, sending out MODBUS TCP instructions and controlling the peripheral equipment. In addition,
under MDI/MDI-X auto-detection, it does not need to use a crossing cable. See the contents below for more detailed
instructions on DVPEN01-SL module.
13.1.1.1 Function

 Auto-detects 10/100Mbps transmission speed

 MDI/MDI-X auto-detection 13
 Supports MODBUS TCP protocol (supports Master and Slave mode at the same time)

 Able to send out E-mails (Does not support TLS/SSL certificates)

 Auto-corrects the RTC in PLC through the Internet time correction function

 Supports point-to-point data exchange (Max. data exchange length: 200 bytes)

 Firmware version V2.18 and above (inclusive) support DVP-SV3 and DVP-SX3 hosts.

13.1.1.2 Specifications
 Internet interface

Item Specifications

Interface RJ-45 with Auto MDI/MDIX

Number of ports RS-232 1 Port
Transmission
IEEE802.3，IEEE802.3u
method
Transmission cable Category 5e/UC-PRG030-20A（3M）
Transmission speed 10/100Mbps Auto-Detect
Network protocol*1 DHCP、SMTP、SNMP、NTP、MC Protocol、MODBUS TCP

*1. When installed on the left side of DVP-SV3 and DVP-SX3 hosts, SMTP, SNMP, and MC Protocol are not supported.

Item Specification
24（data exchange table）
Client: Maximum number of connections
2（CR data exchange function）
MODBUS TCP
Server: Maximum number of connections 16
Maximum data length for a single connection 100 words
Communication type UDP
Client: Maximum number of connections 10
MC Protocol
Server: Maximum number of connections 8
Maximum data length for a single connection 100 words
RTU-EN01 Maximum connection count*2 4
IP filter
Number of entries in the whitelist. 8
function

13-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Item Specification
Version SNMPv2
SNMP Number of community 2
Permissions GET、GET/SET
SMTP
（Email Number of E-mails 4
function）

*2. The mapping function using RTU-EN01 does NOT take up MODBUS TCP connection slots.

 Serial communication interface

Item Specification
Interface RS-232
Number of ports 1 Port
_13 Function Supports only parameter settings.
Transmission cable UC-MS030-01A (3M) / UC-MS010-02A (1M) / UC-PRG020-12A (2M)

 Electrical specifications

Item Specification
Power supply voltage 24VDC (-15%~20%) (Power is supplied by the internal bus of MPU.)
Power consumption 1.5W
Insulation voltage 500V
Weight (g) 92 (g)

13-4
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.2 Module Profiles and Dimension

1 DVPEN 01
PO WER 5 DVPEN01
POWER

2 6
RS- 23 2 RS-2 32
10 0M 100 M
L INK LI NK

3
7

90.00
RS- 23 2 R S-2 32

60.00
8
L AN LAN

4 9
3.00 33.10
60.00 13
Unit: mm

No. Name Description

1 Model name Module model number.
Indicates the power status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator(Green) ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
ON: Network connection normal
LINK indicator(Green) Blinking: Network in operation
2
Off: Not connected to the network
Blinking: Data transmission in progress
RS-232 indicator(Red)
Off: No data transmission
ON: Ethernet transmission speed is 100Mbps
100M indicator(Orange)
OFF: Ethernet transmission speed is 10Mbps
3 Extension module connection port Connect the modules.
4 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module.
5 Extension unit positioning hole For positioning between modules.
6 Extension module connection port Connect the PLC or the module.
7 RS-232communication port For wiring RS-232 communication.
8 Ethernet communication port For connecting Ethernet network.
9 DIN rail securing clip Secure the modules on the set

13-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.3 Terminals
Ethernet（RJ-45）Pin Definition

Pin no. Definition Pin no. Definition

1 TX+ 5 N/C

2 TX- 6 RX-

3 RX+ 7 N/C

4 N/C 8 N/C
RS-232 Pin Definition
Pin no. Definition Pin no. Definition

1 N/C 5 TX

2 N/C 6 N/C
_13
3 N/C 7 N/C

4 RX 8 GND

13.1.4 Installation and Wiring

13.1.4.1 Installation

1. Connecting PLC MPU to DVPEN01-SL:

 Adjust the I/O module clip on the left side of the MPU

 Meet the I/O module port of the MPU with DVPEN01-SL as shown in the figure below.

 Fasten the I/O module clip on the left side of the MPU.

DVPEN01 DVP28SV
POWER

RS-232

100M

LINK

RS-232

LAN

13-6
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

2. Connecting DVPEN01-SL to other I/O modules

To connect DVPEN01-SL with the other I/O module, lift the extension clip of the I/O module by a screwdriver and open the
side cover.

13

13-7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.4.2 Wiring

Connect DVPEN01-SL to the Ethernet Hub by twisted pair cable CAT-5e. DVPEN01-SL has Auto MDI/MDIX function;
therefore, DVPEN01-SL does not need to use a crossing cable between the PC and DVPEN01-SL.

Network connections between the PC and DVPEN01-SL:

P C Master

Ethernet

DVP EN01 D VP-SV3/S X3 D VPE N01 DV P-S V3/S X3

_13

13-8
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.5 Control Register

CR#
Type Content Explanation
HW LW
#0 R Model name Read only; The model code of DVPEN01-SL = H’4050
Displaying the current firmware version in hex, e.g. V1.00 is
#1 R Firmware version
indicated as H’0100.
0: Disabled; 1: Enabled
#2 R Communication mode b0 Setting for MODBUS TCP mode
b1 Setting for data exchange mode
#3 W Trigger E-Mail Event 1
#4 W Trigger E-Mail Event 2
Trigger email sending
#5 W Trigger E-Mail Event 3
#6 W Trigger E-Mail Event 4
CR#3 ~ CR#6: After the E-Mail is sent, the CR will automatically be set to 0. Please use differential commands to trigger 13
CR#3 ~ CR#6 to avoid continual sending of e-mails.
#7 R Status of E-Mail 1, 2 b0~b7 Status of E-Mail 2 b8~b15 Status of E-Mail 1
#8 R Status of E-Mail 3, 4 b0~b7 Status of E-Mail 4 b8~b15 Status of E-Mail 3

CR#7 ~ CR#8: E-Mail Status. See the table below.

CR value E-Mail status CR value E-Mail status
0 Not being sent 11 Incorrect e-mail address of recipient
1 Processing 12 SMTP server communication error
2 Successfully sent 13 No available TCP connections
10 Unable to connect to SMTP server

#9 R/W Code after title of E-Mail 1

#10 R/W Code after title of E-Mail 2 Filled in by the user. The subject of the email will be included
#11 R/W Code after title of E-Mail 3 and sent along with the email.
#12 R/W Code after title of E-Mail 4
0: Disabled
1: Trigger the CR data exchange function once
#13 R/W Data exchange enabled flag
2: Continuously execute the data exchange table
3: Execute the data exchange mode table once.
CR#13:
CR content Description

0 Disabled

1 Trigger the CR data exchange function once

Use when the software setting startup condition is 'Program Start'.
2
After writing, continue executing data exchange until CR#13 is set to 0 to stop.
Use when the software setting startup condition is 'Program Start'.
3 After writing, perform one data exchange. When execution finished, automatically set CR#13 to 0.
Supported in version V2.06 and later.
Displays the status of CR data exchange function:
0: Data not received
#14 R Data exchange status register.
1: Data exchange in progress
2: Data exchange successful

13-9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR#
Type Content Explanation
HW LW
3: Data exchange failed
CR#14: 0 => data not received; 1 => data exchange being processed; 2 => data exchange successful; 3 => data
exchange fails.
1: Enabled; 0: Disabled (default)
#15 R/W RTU mapping enabled flag
Supported in firmware versions V2.0 and later.
b0: Connection status of RTU slave 1
Connection status for RTU- b1: Connection status of RTU slave 2
#16 R/W
EN01 mapping function. b2: Connection status of RTU slave 3
b3: Connection status of RTU slave 4
The communication minimum update period (ms) for
configuring the data exchange mode table can be set. The
#17 R/W Data exchange cycle time
default value is 0, indicating that the next record is sent
immediately upon receipt without waiting for a period.
_13
CR#19 b0 ~ b15: Error in data exchange table 1 ~ 16
Communication error status for
#19 #18 R CR#18 b0 ~ b7: Error in data exchange table 17 ~ 24
the data exchange table.
1: Error occurs
CR#21 b0-b15: Activation status of data exchange tables 1 ~ 16.
Initiate control for the data
21 20 R/W CR#20 b0-b7: Activation status of data exchange tables 17 ~ 24.
exchange item.
A status of 1 indicates that it is activated.
CR#18~CR#21：
Corresponding to the data exchange table numbers as follows:

CR#19 & CR#21

bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

NO. 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CR#18 & CR#20

bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 bit b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

NO. Reserved 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

The TCP retransmission timeout can be adjusted. When a TCP

packet exceeds this time, it will be automatically retransmitted.
TCP/IP RT(Retransmission If the response time from the slave is longer, this parameter can
22 R/W
Timeout) Setting be increased in order to reduce the number of retransmitted
packets.
Unit: ms, Range: 20~3000 ms, Default value: 20 ms.
Remote IP address for CR data Configure the IP address of the slave device for CR data
#26 #25 R/W
exchange function. exchange.
CR#25 ~ CR#26:
Before setting up the destination IP address, set CR#28 to 0. Ex: If the user wants to set the destination IP address to
192.168.0.2, write H’0002 to CR#25 and H’C0A8 to CR#26. (K192 = H’C0, K168 = H’A8, K0 = H’00, K2 = H’02)
Data exchange table Configure the MODBUS TCP function code used by the data
#27 R/W
synchronous read/write function. exchange table.
CR#27:
The default value is 0. When both read and write are configured, use function code 0x17 for data exchange.

13-10
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

CR#
Type Content Explanation
HW LW
When set to 1, use function code 0x03 for reading, function code 0x06 for single write, and function code 0x10 for
multiple writes
Selection of CR data exchange Select the slave IP address for CR data exchange from the
#28 R/W
IP list. data exchange table.
CR#28:
The default value is 0, using the values of CR#25 and CR#26 as the slave IP address.
When set to the slave station number in the data exchange table (i.e., K1~K255), it will search the IP address
corresponding to that station number in the data exchange table list.
Transmission buffer for CR data Starting address of the storage area for transmitting data in the
#29~#48 R/W
exchange. CR data exchange function.
Reception buffer for CR data Starting address of the storage area for receiving data in the
#49~#68 R
exchange. CR data exchange function.

#81 R/W
Read address for CR data
exchange.
Starting address of the buffer for transmitting data from the
slave in the CR data exchange function
13
Read data length for CR data Configure the number of registers for reading data in the CR
#82 R/W
exchange data exchange function (range: K1~K100).
Received address for CR data Starting address of the buffer for receiving data at the master
#83 R/W
exchange station in the CR data exchange function.
Written address for CR data Starting address of the buffer for receiving data from the slave
#84 R/W
exchange in the CR data exchange function.
Written data length for CR data Configure the number of registers for transmitting data in the
#85 R/W
exchange CR data exchange function (range: K1~K100).
Sent address for CR data Starting address of the buffer for transmitting data at the
#86 R/W
exchange master station in the CR data exchange function.
CR#81~CR #86:
Configure the MODBUS address for the local (master station) CR data exchange function's transmission buffer.
Unless there are specific requirements, it is not recommended to use this method.
For example, write H1000 (D0) to CR#81, write K1 to CR#82, fill in H1064 (D100) to CR#83; when the data exchange
is successful, the value of slave D0 will be written to master D100. Write H1002 (D2) to CR#84, write K4 to CR#85, fill
in H1008 (D8) to CR#86; when the data exchange is successful, the values of local (master) D8~D11 will be written to
slave D2~D5. It is enabled to simultaneously perform both transmit and receive functions.
If both CR#82 and CR#85 are 0, the CR data exchange transmission buffer (CR#29~CR#68) and the default number
of registers (K20) will be used.
0: Static IP address
#87 R/W Mode of setting IP address
1: DHCP
Setting an IP address
#89 #88 R/W IP address If an IP address is 192.168.1.5, set the value in CR#88 be
H0105, and the value in CR#89 be HC0A8.
Setting a netmask
#91 #90 R/W Netmask If a netmask is 255.255.255.0, set the value in CR#90 be
HFF00, and the value in CR#91 be HFFFF.
Setting a gateway IP address
#93 #92 R/W Gateway IP address If a gateway IP address is 192.168.1.5, set the value in CR#92
be H0105, and the value in CR#93 be HC0A8.
Executing the setting of an IP address.
Enabling the setting of an IP When set to 1, execute the IP configuration function.
#94 R/W
address After configuration is complete, the CR value is automatically
set back to 0.
#95 R Status of setting an IP address Showing the status of setting an IP address

1 3 - 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR#
Type Content Explanation
HW LW
0: Not executed.
1: In progress
2: IP configuration completed
Please verify the legality of the IP address and ensure that the
IP address and default gateway are on the same subnet.
UDP communication port number for the MC Protocol data
#102 R/W MC Protocol UDP port
exchange slave device, default value is 1025.
#105 #104 R Assuming the MAC address is 00 18 23 AA BB CC, set
MAC Address CR#104=H0018，CR#105=H23AA，
#106 R
CR#106=HBBCC

Configure the MODBUS TCP command transmission function

_13 #111 R/W bit processing mode bit mode:
0: Use 16-bit mode (default)
1: Use 8-bit mode
Unit: second
Range: 0 ~ 65535, setting it to 0 is equivalent to 65535.
MODBUS TCP keep-alive time-
#112 R/W The default value is 30s. If the connection is idle for more than
out
the connection keep-alive time, the idle connection will be
terminated.
Displays the current TCP connection status for MODBUS TCP:
Status of MODBUS TCP
#113 R 0: The current TCP connection is closed.
connection
1: TCP connection has been established.
MODBUS TCP communication Set the communication timeout period (ms) for the MODBUS
#114 R/W
time-out TCP command transmission function.
Sending MODBUS TCP Set the data transmission mode for the MODBUS TCP
#115 R/W
command command transmission function.
CR#115:
When set to 1, activate the data transmission for the MODBUS TCP command transmission function. After data
transmission is complete, the CR value is automatically set back to 0. Use rising or falling edge contacts to trigger.
When set to 2, activate the data transmission for the MODBUS TCP command transmission function. After data
transmission is complete, the TCP connection will be maintained, awaiting the next transmission.
When set to 3, it will terminate the current TCP connection.
Current status of the MODBUS TCP mode
0: Data not received
#116 R/W MODBUS TCP status 1: Data exchange in progress
2: Data exchange successful
3: Data exchange failed
Configure the IP address of the remote communication device
Destination IP in MODBUS for the MODBUS TCP command transmission function. Refer
#118 #117 R/W
TCP mode to the explanation for CR#25 and CR#26 for the configuration
method.
Configure the length of data in the communication in MODBUS
Data length in MODBUS TCP TCP mode
#119 R/W
mode In 8-bit mode, it ranges from K1 to K100
in 16-bit mode, it ranges from K1 to K200.
Buffers for data transmission in
#120~#219 R/W Buffers for sent/received data in MODBUS TCP mode
MODBUS TCP mode

13-12
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

CR#
Type Content Explanation
HW LW
Number of MODBUS TCP
#222 R Maximum: 16
Server connections
Number of MODBUS TCP
#223 R Maximum: 26
Client connections
CR#222~223:
 Supported in firmware version V2.18 and above.
 MODBUS TCP Client and Server quantities are counted separately.
 The number of MODBUS TCP Server connections includes connections used by project software monitoring.
Number of RTU corresponding
#229 R Maximum: 4
function client connections
#230 R Number of TCP connections Maximum:88
CR#229~230:
 Supported in firmware version V2.18 and above. 13
 RTU corresponding function connections and MODBUS TCP connections are counted separately.
 TCP connection count includes all connections using the TCP protocol (including but not limited to MODBUS
TCP, RTU), totaling both Client and Server connections.
The default value is 0. When set to 0x1013, reset the TCP/IP
#231 R/W TCP/IP Reset
function.
CR#231:
 Supported in firmware version V2.18 and above.
 Users must clear the value of CR#231 on their own.
 It will interrupt all existing communication. Please use it with caution.

#251 R Error code

Each bit represents a specific error condition.
CR#251:
Bit Error status

0 No network connected.

1 IP setting error

2 CR#13 is configured for data transmission, but data exchange is disabled.

3 CR#13 is configured for data transmission, but data exchange mode is not activated.

4 NTP-Server connection failed.

7 SMTP-Server connection faile.d

8 DHCP did not obtain correct network parameters.

Symbols:
R: Able to read data through the use of FROM instruction; W: Able to write data through the use of TO instruction
The No. for left-side high-speed I/O modules: 100 ~ 107 (m1 = 100 ~ 107)

13-13
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.6 Software Setting

This section gives instructions on how to set DVPEN01-SL by DCISoft and explanations on each setup page. Before you
start a setup page, you have to select Ethernet in the Communication Setting window. Next, you can search by IP address
or use Auto-Search. You also can open the setup page for DVPEN01-SL by RS-232. DVPEN01-SL is set by UDP port
20006; therefore, you have to be aware of the relevant settings of the firewall.

When installed on the left side of the DVP-SV3/SX3 main unit, you can also right-click on the module icon on the hardware
configuration page of DIADesigner and open DCISoft.

_13

13-14
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.6.1 Communication & Modules Searching Setting

 Communication settings

1. Open DCISoft in your PC and click on Communication Setting

13

2. Select Ethernet as the transmission type.

13-15
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Broadcast search

1. Click Search in DCISoft to search for all Delta Ethernet products on the network. The window on the left-hand side
shows the models found, and the window on the right-hand side displays the device list of all models.

_13

2. Click a model on the left-hand side, and you will see the device list of the model selected on the right-hand side.
Click the device to be set to enter the setup page.

13-16
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

3. You will see the basic setup page as follow.

13

 Designating a model to search

1. Right click Ethernet on the left-hand side window and click Configure to designate a model to search for.

13-17
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2. After configuring a model, select the DVPEN01-SL checkbox and click OK to auto-search for DVPEN01-SL
modules on the network.

_13

3. List of the current DVPEN01-SL modules

13-18
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Searching by IP address

1. Select Ethernet in the Communication Type section and enter the IP address. Click OK

13

2. Click IP Search to start searching for the designated IP address.

13-19
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. The DVPEN01-SL module found will be displayed in the right-hand side window. Double click to enter the setup
page.

_13

 Opening the DVPEN01-SL setup page by RS-232

1. Select RS232 as the transmission type in the Communication Setting window. You will have to designate a
communication port. When DVPEN01-SL is searched by RS-232, you do not need to set the parameters (i.e. data
length, parity, stop bits and baud rate)

2. After setting the communication port, click Search. If the searching is successful, the setup page for DVPEN01-SL
will open automatically.

13-20
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.6.2 Basic Settings

The basic settings include parameters as module name, language, enabling MODBUS TCP and time correction.

 Basic settings

13

1. Module Name

There can be many DVPEN01-SL modules in the network. Thus, you can set a module name for each module
to identify the module when you need to use them.

2. Module Language

You can select a language for each module name, and the windows will be displayed in the selected language.

3. Enable MODBUS TCP

To enable or disable MODBUS TCP. When MODBUS TCP is disabled, WPLSoft will not be able to upload or
download.

4. Enable Time Server

DVPEN01-SL adopts NTP (Network Time protocol), which means it can acquire correct time automatically from
the time server in the network and correct the RTC in the MPU every fixed period of time to ensure correct time
in the MPU. The Enable Time Server is unselected by default.

5. Start Daylight Saving Time

Daylight Saving Time; also known as summer time is a conventional local time adopted by many countries in
the world on a seasonal basis. Most commonly DST is obtained by adjusting the official local time forward, by
one hour, for the spring, summer, and early autumn periods. Daylight Saving Time is not implemented in Taiwan;
therefore, you do not need to check this item.

6. Time Server

IP address of the time server. You can acquire correct time from the time server to correct the time in the MPU.

13-21
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

7. Time Zone

A time zone is a region of the Earth that has adopted the same standard time, usually referred to as the local
time. Most adjacent time zones are exactly one hour apart, and by convention compute their local time as an
offset from Greenwich Mean Time (see also UTC). Standard time zones can be defined by geometrically
subdividing the Earth's spheroid into 24 lunes (wedge-shaped sections), bordered by meridians each 15° of
longitude apart. The local time in neighboring zones is then exactly one hour different. However, political and
geographical practicalities can result in irregularly shaped zones that follow political boundaries or that change
their time seasonally (as with daylight saving time), as well as being subject to occasional redefinition as
political conditions change. You should choice the Time zone that you are.

8. Protocol Select

DVPEN01-SL supports MODBUS TCP and the Mitsubishi MELSEC protocol in a UDP mode. The default
setting is MODBUS TCP.

_13

13-22
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.6.3 Network Settings

The first step for all the network equipment to connect to the network is to have its own IP address (Internet Protocol).
The IP address is like a number for every network equipment to be identified in the network

 Setting the static IP address of the PC

1. Enter the Control Panel window→ Enter the Network Connections window. Click on Local Area Connection.

13

2. You will see the Local Area Connection Status window. Click on Properties.

13-23
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Click on Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

_13

4. Enter 192.168.0.1 into the IP address box. Click on OK to complete the IP address setting of the PC.

13-24
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Setting the DVPEN01-SL network

13

1. IP Configuration:

There are two types of IP address, static IP addresses and DHCP.

Static IP address: Preset or manually modified by the user.

DHCP: Automatically updated by the server. There has to be a server in the LAN.

IP Explanation

Static Enter the IP address, subnet mask and gateway.

DHCP DHCP server offers the IP address, subnet mask and gateway.

2. IP Address:

IP address is the location of the equipment in the network. Every equipment connected to the network has to have
an IP address. Incorrect IP address will result in connection failure on the equipment or even other equipment. Ask
your ISP for IP address setup. The default IP address for DVPEN01-SL is 192.168.1.5.

3. Netmask:

Subnet mask is an important parameter for setting the subnet, used for checking if the destination IP address and
the local equipment are in the same subnet. If not, the equipment will send the packet to the gateway, and the
gateway will send the packet to another subnet. Incorrect setting may cause the destination equipment unable to
communicate with DVPEN01-SL. To check whether the setting is correct, conducting a bitwise AND operation on
one's own IP and the destination device's IP with their respective subnet masks. If the two values are identical, they
are within the same subnet. The default subnet mask of DVPEN01-SL is 255.255.255.0.

4. Gateway:

Gateway is the gate for two different subnets, allowing the two ends in different subnets to communicate. For
example, if the LAN has to be connected to WAN, it will need a gateway to bridge the communication. The IP
address of the gateway has to be in the same subnet as DVPEN01-SL. The default gateway IP address of
DVPEN01-SL is 192.168.1.1.

13-25
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.6.4 Emails Setting

DVPEN01-SL has E-mail functions for the user to pre-save a segment of text messages, which can be a descriptive
message or error message, into the subject of the E-mail. When the E-mail is triggered, DVPEN01-SL will send the
messages to the user by E-mail.

DVPEN01-SL does not support TLS/SSL encrypted communication. Please ensure to verify the communication
specifications of your email server before use.

Provide four sets of E-Mail current value information. Users can define the registers or bit information they want to read.
When a trigger occurs, DVPEN01-SL will retrieve the current values set for the specified registers or bits and add them to
the E-Mail. Each set provides a maximum of 100 consecutive register information. The introduction is as follows:

 Mails Setting

_13

13-26
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

1. SMTP Setting

The E-mail will first be sent to SMTP server, and SMTP server will send it to the designated address. For example,
assume there is an E-mail to be sent to [email protected], and the SMTP server is 172.16.144.122. The E-mail will
be sent to SMTP server first, and the server will further send it to the recipient [email protected].

The setting boxes are described below.

A. SMTP Server: Setting the IP address of the SMTP server.

B. Port: Entering the port of the SMTP server (The default value is 25.)

C. Mail From: Setting the mail address used to send E-mails (63 characters at most can be entered.)

D. Username: Account used to log in to the SMTP server.

E. Password: Password used to log in to the SMTP server.

2. E-mail Subject of Event

13
You can enter text message in the column, and the message will be placed in the subject of the E-mail and sent to
the recipient. DVPEN01-SL is able to contain 1~4 E-mail subjects (max. 63 English characters are allowed).

You can select additional information for the E-mail. Every E-mail is able to contain the present values in 100
consecutive registers.

3. Recipient E-mail Address

You can enter 4 E-mail addresses. One mail can be sent to 4 addresses (max. 63 English characters are allowed).

4. Selecting recipients

After you have set all the parameters for the E-mail, you will need to select recipients. The E-mail will be sent to the
designated recipients when the E-mail is triggered. The triggering condition is set when control registers (CR#3~CR#6)
are configured to 1.

5. See section 13.1.7.7 for more details and examples.

Note:

To correctly send out E-mails, there has to be a SMTP server in the network. When we send out an E-mail, the mail will be
sent to SMTP server first, and the server will further send the mail to the designated address.

13-27
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.6.5 SNMP

SNMP is a simple network management function. Users can read and control the registers in PLC by means of a SNMP
network management tool. (DVPEN01-SL version 2.06 and above support this function.

 SNMP Setting

_13

1. Enable SNMP: Disable/enable the SNMP function.

2. Community

Users can set two communities. The relevant setting boxes are described below.

 Community String: Name given to the community which is connected (63 English characters at most can be
entered.)

 Access Type: Select GET (reading) or GET/SET (reading/writing).

13-28
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.6.6 Data Exchange

DVPEN01-SL is able to designate a data exchange area for PLC MPUs to exchange and synchronize their data.

 Data exchange setting

13

1. Enable Data Exchange

Check/uncheck the station addresses to enable/disable data exchange. The station address can be selected
individually. For example, check Station Address 1 to enable the data exchange and uncheck the Station Address 2
to disable the data exchange as the image shown below. This can also be achieved by setting up CR#20~21. Please
refer to section 13.1.5 in this manual for more information.

2. Enable Condition

You can select “Always Enable” or “Program Control”. If Always Enable is selected, DVPEN01-SL will execute data
exchange continuously until the setting in DCISoft is changed. If Program Control is selected, DVPEN01-SL will
execute data exchange according to the program setting (CR#13=2: Executing data exchange; CR#13=0: Stopping
executing data exchange.)

3. Station Address and IP Address

You have to enter the IP address of DVPEN01-SL at the other end. For example, if you would like DVPEN01-SL to
exchange data with 192.168.0.1, set No. 1 as 192.168.0.1. When the data are being exchanged, if the value in CR#28
is H’0001, the data will be exchanged with 192.168.0.1.

13-29
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. Master Device, Slave Device, and Quantity

Reading (): Start address of the master’s receiving registerStart address of the slave’s sending register

Writing (): Start address of the master’s sending registerStart address of the slave’s receiving register

When data exchange is executed, DVPEN01-SL executes the writing () first before the reading ()

Quantity: A slave is able to send and receive the data in 100 consecutive registers at the same time.

※ For data exchange, D register is parted into 2 sections, D0000~D4095 and D4096~D9999. Please DO NOT use
different sections for the consecutive sent and received data (start address + number of data).

5. See section 13.1.7.9~ section13.1.7.11 for more details and examples.

13.1.6.7 MELSEC Protocol

_13 DVPEN01-SL can communicate with Mitsubishi devices by means of the MELSEC protocol. It supports the communication
with a master and the communication with slaves simultaneously. Only UDP communication is allowed. (DVPEN01-SL
version 2.10 and above support this function.)

 MELSEC Protocol mode setting

1. Protocol Select: Setting the MELSEC function.

2. Listen Port: Setting the communication port of the MELSEC protocol slave.

3. Network No./Station No.: Setting the network number and the station number of the MELSEC protocol device.

13-30
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 MELSEC Protocol data exchange setting

13

1. Enable MELSEC Protocol

Users can disable/enable the MELSEC protocol. After the MELSEC protocol is enabled, data exchange will be carried
out according to the data which has been set.

2. Enable Condition

Users can select Always Enable or Program Control. If Always Enable is selected, DVPEN01-SL will execute data
exchange continuously until the setting in DCISoft is changed. If Program Control is selected, DVPEN01-SL will
execute data exchange according to the program setting (CR#13=2: Executing data exchange; CR#13=0: Stopping
executing data exchange).

3. Slave ID and IP address

Users need to type the IP address and the slave ID of a Mitsubishi device which supports the MELSEC protocol. For
example, users can type the slave ID 1 and the IP address 192.168.0.1. If data exchange is executed, DVPEN01-SL
will exchange data with the device whose slave ID is 1 and IP address is 192.168.0.1 by means of the MELSEC
communication.

4. Delta Device, Mitshbishi Device, and Quantity

Reading (): Start address of the Delta device’s receiving registerStart address of the Mitsubishi device’s sending
register

Writing (): Start address of the Delta device’s sending registerStart address of the Mitsubishi device’s receiving
register

When data exchange is executed, DVPEN01-SL executes the writing () first before the reading ().

Quantity: A slave is able to send and receive the data in 100 consecutive registers at the same time.

Please refer to section 13.1.7.15 for more information.

13-31
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.6.8 RTU

Use the RTU function to conduct mapping between Delta’s network modules DVPEN01-SL and RTU-EN01.Set the
mapping information first, then users will be able to use WPLSoft in DVPEN01-SL to save and retrieve the mapped bit (M)
and register (D) in order to operate the remote RTU-EN01.

 RTU Setting

_13

1. Enable Remote I/O Mapping

Users can select the Enable Remote I/O Mapping checkbox. After the checkbox is selected, the network module
used will be mapped onto RTU-EN01 according to the data set.

2. Communication Parameters

Users can enter a time interval in the Communication Timeout box, and a cycle in the Update Cycle box.

3. PLC I/O Mapping

Users can set the bit devices and the registers which correspond to digital inputs(X), digital outputs(Y), and analog
registers (RCR) on RTU-EN01. The bit devices set start from M2000. The registers used for the reading of data start
from D2000, and the registers used for the writing of data start from D3000. The software automatically calculates
end addresses according to the numbers set.

4. Remote Device Mapping Setting

After users check Enable cell, users have to enter the station address of RTU-EN01, IP address, the number of digital
inputs (RX), the number of digital outputs (RY), the number of registers used for the reading of data(Read), and the
number of registers used for the writing of data(Write).

DVPEN01-SL can be mapped onto four slaves. The maximum number of digital inputs used for mapping, the
maximum number of digital outputs used for mapping, the maximum number of registers used for mapping are
described below:

Digital I/O（RX+RY）: 256

Analog（Read）register:64

Analog（Write）register:64

13-32
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.6.9 IP Filter

IP filter is used for restricting the connection of the network in case some uncertain IP addresses will cause errors. Only
the IP addresses set within a certain range can establish a connection. Other IP addresses will be rejected.

 IP Filter Setting

13

1. Enable IP Filter

Check the box to enable IP filter.

2. IP Address

IP addresses that are allowed to establish connections. Maximum 8 IP addresses are allowed.

3. Subnet Netmask

The subnet of the IP address is allowed to establish a connection. To see whether the destination IP address is allowed,
conduct bitwise AND operations between the allowed IP address and subnet mask and destination IP address and
subnet mask. If the two values obtained are the same, the destination IP address is allowed by the IP filter. For
example, assume the IP address is 192.168.0.1 and subnet mask 255.255.255.255, the only one IP address allowed
to establish a connection is 192.168.0.1. If the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the IP addresses s allowed to establish
connections will become 192.168.0.0~192.168.0.255.

13-33
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.6.10 Static ARP Table

ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used for obtaining the MAC address corresponding to the IP address in data
transmission. For example, there is a datum to be sent to 172.16.155.250, but you do not know the corresponding MAC
address. You can use ARP to look up the MAC address by IP address, and the corresponding MAC address will be saved,
so you do not need to look it up again when sending the next datum. Therefore, if you do not know the MAC address, you
will have to spend some time looking up the MAC address. If you want to enhance the transmission efficiency, use static
ARP table to save time. For example, assume the IP address is 192.168.0.1 and MAC is 00:14:22:56:0F:7F. As long as
there are data sent to 192.168.0.1, you will get the MAC address from the table.

 Static ARP Table Setting

_13

1. IP Address

Destination IP address in data transmission.

2. MAC Address

The MAC addresses corresponding to the IP address.

Note:

Incorrect settings may result in connection failure. Therefore, DO NOT include MAC addresses of devices outside the
network in the list.

13-34
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.6.11 Password Setting

To prevent the set values in DVPEN01-SL from being modified, you can set a password to lock the settings in DVPEN01-
SL.

 Password Setting

13

1. Modify

Check the box to modify the password.

2. New password

Maximum 4 characters are allowed. Leave the column blank to disable the password protection function.

3. Confirm Password

Enter the new password again.

4. See section 13.1.7.4 for more details.

Note:

After the password is locked, all the pages cannot be set unless you unlock the password. However, if you set DVPEN01-
SL by RS-232, you can return the setting to default setting whether the password is locked or not. For example, if you have
locked DVPEN01-SL but forget the password, you have to return DVPEN01-SL to factory default setting by RS-232, and
all the settings will return to default ones.

13-35
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.6.12 Return to Default Setting

If you need to clear all the settings after many modifications on the settings and return the settings to default ones, select
the Factory Setting checkbox.

 Return to Default Settings

_13

Select the Factory Setting checkbox, and click on Yes

Note:

If you set DVPEN01-SL by RS-232, you can return the setting to default setting whether the password is locked or not. It
takes approximately 10 seconds to return to default setting, so DO NOT switch off the power within the 10 seconds.

13-36
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7 Application Examples

13.1.7.1 Setting IP Address and Communication through WPLSoft

Application Setting the network parameters of DVPEN01-SL directly on the PC.

(1) IP address of the PC executing WPLSoft: 192.168.0.3

(2) Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0; Gateway: 192.168.0.1
Network environment (3) IP address of DVPEN01-SL: 192.168.0.4
(4) Connect the PC and DVPEN01-SL by RJ-45 cable.
Note: Both PC and DVPEN01-SL have to adopt a static IP address.

1. The connection
DVPEN01 DVP-PLC
PC

13

2. Start WPLSoft and click Ethernet in the Communication Setting Section.

3. Click Auto-Search Ethernet Module to search for all the Ethernet modules on the network.

13-37
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. All the devices connected to the network are shown in the Ethernet section. After DELTA DVPEN01-SL is clicked,
WPSoft can communicate with the MPU by means of DVPEN01-SL.

_13

5. Double-clicked DELTA DVPEN01-SL in the Ethernet section, and DCISoft will be started. Please refer to section
13.1.6.3 for more information about setting IP address.

6. After the IP address setting is complete, repeat step 2~step 4 to use the modified IP address for communication.

13-38
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.2 Connecting the PC with DVPEN01-SL through LAN

Application Setting the network parameters of DVPEN01-SL by WPLSoft through LAN.

(1) Connect the PC and DVPEN01-SL by using DHCP server through LAN.
Network environment (2) DVPEN01-SL obtains its IP address through DHCP mode.
Note: DVPEN01-SL can use a RJ-45 cable with/without a jump wire.

1. The connection
PC DHCP Server

DVPEN01 DVP-PLC
13
PC

Hub

2. Start WPLSoft and click Ethernet in the Communication Setting Section.

3. Click Auto-Search Ethernet Module to search for all the Ethernet modules on the network.

13-39
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. All the devices connected to the network are shown in the Ethernet section. After DELTA DVPEN01-SL is clicked,
WPSoft can communicate with the MPU by means of DVPEN01-SL.

5. Double-clicked DELTA DVPEN01-SL in the Ethernet section, DCISoft will be started. Please refer to section
_13 13.1.6.3 for more information about setting IP address.

6. After the IP address setting is complete, repeat step 2~step 4 to use the modified IP address for communication.

13-40
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.3 Password Setting and Removal

Application Setting and clearing a password by WPLSoft

(1) Set password in DVPEN01-SL

Network environment (2) Unlock DVPEN01-SL
(3) Clear the password in DVPEN01-SL

1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for the connection and how to set the communication.

2. Open the setup page and switch to the Security page

13

3. Select the Modify checkbox, and enter “aabb” in the Password box and the Confirm Password box. Click on OK to
save the password.

13-41
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. Open the setup page again, and DVPEN01-SL is now locked by the password. You cannot open any of the settings
now. Click on Confirm to leave the entering password window.

_13

5. Enter the password to temporarily unlock the protection and modify the parameters. If you close the setup page, the
locking will automatically be recovered.

13-42
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

6. To clear the password, simply leave the password columns blank. Click on Apply to clear the password.

13

7. After the password is cleared, you can modify the parameters.

13-43
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.7.4 When the Password is Lost (Return to Default Setting by RS-232)

Application Return to default setting by RS-232

(1) DVPEN01-SL is set with a password.

Network environment
(2) The password is forgotten. User can return to default setting by RS-232.
1. Use UC-PRG020-12A cable to connect the PC and DVPEN01-SL and open the setup page. Open the Security page.

_13

2. After the Factory Setting box is selected, a confirmation window will appear. Click on Yes to return to default settings
(in approx. 5~10 seconds), and the password will be cleared as well.

3. After the searching, all the parameters have already returned to their default settings.

13-44
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.5 IP Filter Protection

Application Setting the IP filter protection

(1) IP address of DVPEN01-SL: 192.168.0.4
Network environment
(2) Only connections to 192.168.0.7 and 172.16.0.1~172.16.0.255 are allowed.

1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for the connection and how to set the communication.

2. Open the setup page and switch to the IP Filter page

13

3. Select the Enable IP Filter checkbox. Enter “192.168.0.4” in the No. 1 IP Address box and “255.255.255.255” in the
No. 1 Subnet Netmask box.

13-45
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. Enter “192.168.0.1” in the No. 2 IP Address box and “255.255.255.0” in the No.2 Subnet Netmask box. Click on OK
to complete the setting. Only the equipment within the IP address range can be connected.

_13

13-46
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.6 Static ARP Table Setting

Application Setting static ARP table

(1) MAC address of equipment 192.168.1.6 is 00 : 18 : 23 : 10 : 00 : 35
Network environment
(2) MAC address of equipment 192.168.1.1 is 00 : 18 : 23 : 10 : 00 : 04

1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for the connection and how to set the communication.

2. Open the setup page and switch to the Static ARP Table page.

13

3. Select the Enable ARP Table checkbox. Enter “192.168.1.6” in the No. 1 IP Address box, and its corresponding
MAC address is “00:18:23:10:00:35”.

13-47
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. Enter “192.168.1.1” in No.2 IP Address box, and its MAC address is “00:18:23:10:00:04”. Click on OK to complete
the setting. Only the equipment within the IP address range can be connected.

_13

Note:

The MAC address of DVPEN01-SL can be obtained from WPLSoft or the MAC address sticker on the equipment.

The MAC address of PC can be found in the Network Connection Details widow (see below).

13-48
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.7 E-Mail Application

Application Sending an E-mail to notify the administrator when the current status of X0 and Y0 is changed.

(1) IP address of the SMTP server: 172.16.144.121

Network application (2) E-mail address of administrator: [email protected]
(3) An E-mail message will be generated when the status of X0 and Y0 is changed.
1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for the connection and how to set the communication.

2. DVPEN01-SL does not support TLS/SSL encrypted communication. Please verify the communication specifications
of the mail server before use.

3. Open the setup page and switch to the Mail page.

13

4. Set E-mails and select events. Enter the address of the SMTP server, the subjects of the E-mails, username/password,
the E-mail addresses of the recipients, the present values in the registers (D devices, T devices, and C devices)
attached to the E-mails, and the number of values. Check the Event cells for recipient 1. Click Apply to complete the
setting of E-mails.

13-49
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

5. After all the settings in DVPEN01-SL are completed, compile the ladder diagram in the MPU and download it to the
MPU. See below for the program design:
X0
T0 K100 K3 K1 K1
X0
T0 K100 K4 K1 K1
Y0
T0 K100 K5 K1 K1
Y0
T0 K100 K6 K1 K1

END

Explanations:
_13
 If the rising-edge of X0 is triggered, X0 will go from Off to On. Write “1” into CR#3 of DVPEN01-SL, and
the first E-mail will be sent out.

 If the falling-edge of X0 is triggered, X0 will go from On to Off. Write “1” into CR#4 of DVPEN01-SL, and
the second E-mail will be sent out.

 If the rising-edge of Y0 is triggered, Y0 will go from Off to On. Write “1” into CR#5 of DVPEN01-SL, and
the third E-mail will be sent out.

 If the falling-edge of Y0 is triggered, Y0 will go from On to Off. Write “1” into CR#6 of DVPEN01-SL, and
the fourth E-mail will be sent out.

13-50
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.8 Data Exchange Application (1)

Application Writing the time in RTC in PLC_B into D0~D6 of PLC_A

(1) Adopt a static IP address.
(2) IP address of PLC_A: 192.168.0.4
Network environment
(3) IP address of PLC_B: 192.168.0.5
(4) Update from PLC_B to PLC_A.

1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for the connection and how to set the communication.

2. Open the setup page of PLC_B and switch to the Data Exchange page.

13

3. Select the Enable Data Exchange checkbox. Select Program Control in the Enable Confition drop-down list box.
Enter the IP address of PLC_A “192.168.0.4” in the IP Address cell corresponding to station address 1. Click on
Apply to complete the setting.

13-51
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. After all the settings in PLC_B are completed, compile the ladder diagram in the MPU and download it to PLC_B. The
program designed is like the one shown below:

M1000
T RD D100

M1013 M2 M1
SET M1
M1
TOP K100 K28 K1 K1

TOP K100 K29 D100 K7

TOP K100 K14 K0 K1

TOP K100 K13 K1 K1

_13
SET M2

RST M1
M2
FROM K100 K14 D14 K1

= D14 K2 RST M2

= D14 K3 RST M2

END

Explanations:

• The data exchange will be executed every one second.

• Write the communication address of the destination PLC in CR#28, and DVPEN01-SL will automatically detect
by the previous setting that No. 1 IP address is “192.168.0.4".

• Write the data in RTC into CR#29~CR#35.

• Write “1” into CR#13 to start the data exchange.

CR#14=2 refers to successful exchange. CR#14=3 refers to failed exchange.

5. Compile the ladder diagram for PLC_A and download it to PLC_A.

M1013
FROM K100 K49 D0 K7

END

Explanations:

 The received data are stored in CR#49~CR#55.

 The data received every one second are written into D0~D6.

13-52
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.9 Data Exchange Application (2)

Select Always Enable in the Enable Condition drop-down list box. Enable a timer and write the
Application timer values into D0~D99. Continuously write the present values in D0~D99 of PLC_A into
D0~D99 of PLC_B, and write the values in D0~D99 of PLC-B into D200~D299 of PLC_A.
(1) Adopt a static IP address.
(2) IP address of PLC_A: 192.168.1.99
Network environment
(3) IP address of PLC_B: 192.168.1.97
(4) Update from PLC_A to PLC_B and PLC_B to PLC_A.
※ Firmware version 2.0 and above support this function.

1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for the connection and how to set the communication.

2. Open the setup page of PLC_A and switch to the Data Exchange page.

13

3. Choose 'Enable Data Exchange,' select the execution mode as 'Always Enable.' Check the ‘Enable’ option for the
first data exchange group, enter PLC_B IP as '192.168.1.97' in the first IP address of the group. Set D200←D0 and
D0→D0, both with a quantity of 100 records.

13-53
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. After all the settings in PLC_A are completed, you have to write a ladder diagram for the MPU and download it to
PLC_B. The program designed is like the one shown below:

_13

13-54
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.10 Data Exchange Application (3)

Enable a timer (X20) and write the timer values into D0~D99. Control the program (X21) and write
Application the present values in D0~D99 of PLC_A into D0~D99 of PLC_B, and write the values in D0~D99
of PLC-B into D200~D299 of PLC_A. Control the program (X21) to stop the execution.
(1) Adopt a static IP address.
(2) IP address of PLC_A: 192.168.1.99
Network environment
(3) IP address of PLC_B: 192.168.1.97
(4) Update from PLC_A to PLC_B and PLC_B to PLC_A.
※ Firmware version 2.0 and above support this function.

1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for the connection and how to set the communication.

2. Open the setup page of PLC_A and switch to the Data Exchange page.

13

3. Check ‘Enable Data Exchange,' select the execution mode as 'Program Control.' Check the ‘Enable’ option for the
first data exchange group, enter PLC_B IP as '192.168.1.97' in the first IP address of the group. Set D200←D0
and D0→D0, both with a quantity of 100 records.

13-55
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. After all the settings in PLC_A are completed, you have to write a ladder diagram for the MPU and download it to
PLC_B. The program designed is like the one shown below.

_13

13-56
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.11 Data Exchange Application (4)

Writing the time of the RTC in PLC_B into D0~D6 of PLC_A by, and using a ladder diagram
Application
to designate an IP address.
(1) Adopt a static IP address.
(2) IP address of PLC_A: 192.168.0.4
Network environment
(3) IP address of PLC_B: 192.168.0.5
(4) Update from PLC_B to PLC_A

1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for how to set the communication. Compile the ladder diagram in the MPU and
download it to PLC_B. The program designed is like the one shown below.

M1000
T RD D100
M1013 M2 M1
SET M1
13
M1
TOP K100 K28 K0 K1

TOP K100 K26 HC0A8 K1

TOP K100 K25 H4 K1

TOP K100 K29 D100 K7

TOP K100 K14 K0 K1

TOP K100 K13 K1 K1

SET M2

RST M1
M2
FROM K100 K14 D14 K1

= D14 K2 RST M2

= D14 K3 RST M2

END

Explanations:

• The data exchange will be executed every one second.

• Write “0” into CR#28, and PLC_B will use CR#25~CR#26 as the IP address of the destination PLC.

• Write the IP address of PLC_A into CR#25 and CR#26. The first two IP codes (192.168=H’C0A8) should be
written into CR#26, and the last two IP codes (0.4=H’0004) into CR#25.

• Write the data in RTC into CR#29~CR#35.

• Write “1” into CR#13 to start the data exchange.

CR#14=2 refers to successful execution. CR#14=3 refers to failed execution.

13-57
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2. Compile the ladder diagram for PLC_A and download it to PLC_A.

M1013
FROM K100 K49 D0 K7

END

Explanations:

The received data are stored in CR#49~CR#55.

The data received every one second are written into D0~D6.

_13

13-58
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.12 Data Exchange Application (5)

Writing the time in RTC in PLC_B directly into D0~D6 of PLC_A without writing in ladder
Application
diagram into PLC_A.
(1) Adopt a static IP address.
(2) IP address of PLC_A: 192.168.0.4
Network environment
(3) IP address of PLC_B: 192.168.0.5
(4) Update from PLC_B to PLC_A.
1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for how to set the communication.

2. Compile the ladder diagram in the MPU and download it to PLC_B. Do NOT need to write any corresponding ladder
diagram into PLC_A.

M1000
T RD D100
M1013 M2 M1
SET M1 13
M1
TOP K100 K28 K0 K1

TOP K100 K26 HC0A8 K1

TOP K100 K25 H4 K1

TOP K100 K81 H1000 K1

TOP K100 K84 H1000 K1

TOP K100 K85 K7 K1

TOP K100 K86 H1064 K1

TOP K100 K14 K0 K1

TOP K100 K13 K1 K1

SET M2

RST M1

M2
FROM K100 K14 D14 K1

= D14 K2 RST M2

= D14 K3 RST M2

END

13-59
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Explanations:

The data exchange will be executed every one second.

Write “0” into CR#28, and PLC_B will use CR#25~CR#26 as the IP address of the destination PLC.

Write the IP address of PLC_A into CR#25 and CR#26. The first two IP codes (192.168=H’C0A8) should be written
into CR#26, and the last two IP codes (0.4=H’0004) into CR#25.

Write the MODBUS address of D0 (H’1000) in PLC_A into CR#81 and CR#84.

Write the MODBUS address of D100 (register of RTC) (H’1064) into CR#86.

Write the number of registers K7 into CR#85.

Write “1” into CR#13 to start the data exchange.

CR#14=2 refers to successful execution. CR#14=3 refers to failed execution.

_13 Once the data exchange is successful, the values in D1313~D1318 in PLC_B will be written into D0~D6 of PLC_A.

13-60
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.13 MODBUS TCP Master Application

Application Compiling MODBUS instruction by PLC_B, making Y0 of PLC_A flashing

(1) Adopt a static IP address.

(2) IP address of PLC_A: 192.168.0.4
(3) IP address of PLC_B: 192.168.0.5
Network
(4) Update from PLC_B to PLC_A
environment
(5) Use MODBUS instruction 050500FF00 to set “On” Y0.
(6) Use MODBUS instruction 0505000000 to set “Off” Y0.
(7) Y0 goes between On/Off once every one second.
1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for how to set the communication

2. Compile the ladder diagram in the MPU and download it to PLC_B. See below for the program design. Do NOT need
to write any corresponding ladder diagram into PLC_A.
M1013 M2 M1 13
SET M1
M1
TOP K100 K118 HC0A8 K1

TOP K100 K117 H4 K1

TOP K100 K111 K1 K1

TOP K100 K120 H0 K1

13-61
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

TOP K100 K121 H5 K1

TOP K100 K122 H5 K1

TOP K100 K123 H0 K1

= D0 K0 TOP K100 K124 HFF K1

= D0 K1 TOP K100 K124 H0 K1

TOP K100 K125 H0 K1

TOP K100 K119 K6 K1

_13 TOP K100 K116 K0 K1

TOP K100 K115 K1 K1

INC D0

= D0 K2 MOV K0 D0

SET M2

RST M1

M2
FROM K100 K116 D14 K1

= D14 K2 RST M2

= D14 K3 RST M2

END

Explanations:

The data exchange will be executed every one second.

Write the IP address of PLC_A into CR#117 and CR#118. The first two IP codes (192.168=H’C0A8) should be written
into CR#118, and the last two IP codes (0.4=H’0004) into CR#117.

Set CR#111 as “1” to enable the 8-bit mode. The MODBUS instruction is stored in the low byte of CR#120~CR#247.

Write MODBUS instruction into CR#120~CR#125. CR#120 is the MODBUS address.

Write the length of the instruction into CR#119.

Write “1” into CR#115 to start the execution of MODBUS TCP instruction.

CR#116=2 refers to successful execution. CR#116=3 refers to failed execution.

If the execution is successful, Y0 on PLC_A will go between On and Off every one second.

13-62
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.14 RTU Mapping

Using RTU mapping to read/write the remote digital I/O and analog I/O registers.
Application
DVP28SV+DVPEN01-SLRTU-EN01+DVP06XA+DVP16SP.
Adopt static IP address.
IP address of DVPEN01-SL: 192.168.1.90
IP address of RTU-EN01: 92.168.1.91
Network Use DCISoft for RTU-EN01and check 10 mapping data for read and 10 mapping data for write.
environment Set the mapping start address and number of data for RX, RY, RCR (read) and RCR (write) at
DVPEN01-SL.
Enable the mapping function in DVP-SV PLC at DVPEN01-SL. Use M2000 and D2000 in DVP-SV to
read and M3000 and D3000 to write the value in the remote RTU-EN01.
1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for more information about setting communication

2. Use DCISoft for RTU-EN01 to set mapping control registers used for reading/writing.
13

3. Use DCISoft for DVPEN01-SL to set start addresses and numbers. (RX: M2000~M2009; RY: M3000~M3009; RCR
(Reading): D2000~D2009; RCR (Writing): D3000~D3009)

13-63
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. Edit a ladder diagram, and download it to DVPEN01-SL. The program edited is like the one shown below.

Explanations:

1. Enabling mapping: CR15=1

2. Disabling mapping: CR15=0

_13
3. After CR#15 is enabled, M2000~M2009 and D2000~D2009 will be used to read data, and present values will be read
before M3000~M3009 and D3000~D3009 are used to write data.

4. During the execution of mapping, other devices cannot be used to modify the values in mapping registers.

13-64
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.1.7.15 MELSEC Protocol Application

Using Always Enable in the Enable Condition drop-down list box to read/write registers in a
Application Mitsubishi PLC.
DVP28SV+DVPEN01-SLMitsubishi PLC

(1) Use a static IP address.

(2) The IP address of DVPEN01-SL is 192.168.1.5, and the sending communication port is
9002.
Network environment (3) The IP address of RTU-EN01 is 192.168.1.39, and the receiving communicaiton port is
9002.
(4) Data mapping: D100~D199 in DVP28SV are mapped onto D100~D199 in the Mitsubishi
PLC, and D0~D99 in the Mitsubishi PLC are mapped ont D0~D99 in DVP28SV.
※ Firmware version 2.10 and above support this function.

※ Please visit the Mitsubishi website for more information about the Mitsubish PLC models which support the MELSEC
communication protocol. 13
1. Please refer to section 13.1.7.1 for more information about setting communication.

2. Use the Mitsubishi software to set the IP address of the Mitsucishi PLC and the communication parameters.

 Communication protocol: MC protocl

 Communication mode: UDP

 Communication port: 9002

3. Write a program for the MPU, and download it to DVPEN01-SL. The program designed is like the one shown below

4. Use DCISof to set data exchange for DVPEN01-SL.

※ After the settings are downloaded, DVPEN01-SL will read the data in D0~D99 in the Mitsubish PLC into D0~D99 in
DVP28SV, and write the data in D100~D199 in DVP28SV into D100~D199 in the Mitsubish PLC.

13-65
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.1.8 LED Indictor and Troubleshooting

13.1.8.1 LED Indication
LED LED Status Indication How to correct
Constantly ON Power supply is normal. --
POWER Check whether the CPU module supplies
(green) Constantly OFF No power supply power normally, and DVPEN01-SL is
connected tightly.
There are data being transmitted in
Flashing --
the serial port
RS-232
Check whether the RS-232 cable is
(red)
Constantly OFF No data transmission connected to the COM port on DVPEN01-S
when in RS-232 communication.
Constantly ON Connected to Ethernet at 100Mbps --
Check whether the network cable is
_13 100M
connected correctly, the transmission speed
(orange) Constantly OFF Connected to Ethernet at 10Mbps
is 100Mbps, and the RJ45 connector is
connected normally.
Constantly ON The network connection is normal. --
Flashing Network in operation --
LINK
(green) Check whether the network cable is
Constantly OFF The network is not connected connected correctly, and the RJ45 connector
is connected normally.

13.1.8.2 Troubleshooting

Abnormality Cause Solution

DVPEN01-SL is not Check whether DVPEN01-SL is correctly connected to a
connected to a network. network.
If the computer and DVPEN01-SL are in different network
Blocked by network segments or separated by two or more switches, please
firewall or router. use the specified IP for detection or utilize RS-232 for
DCISoft search or page relevant configurations.
opening abnormality If occasionally experiencing situations where searches are
successful while at other times unsuccessful, it may be due
to network congestion, causing packets to be unable to
Network interference.
transmit in real-time. Please simplify the network and
proceed with the configuration again or utilize RS-232 for
relevant settings.
Able to open DVPEN01-SL Check whether the network setting for DVPEN01-SL is
setup page but fail to upload The network setting for correct. Consult the IT staff if you are using the Intranet in
/download program and DVPEN01-SL is incorrect. the company or refer to the network setting instructions
monitor by WPLSoft provided by your ISP.
The network setting for Check whether the network setting for DVPEN01-SL is
DVPEN01-SL is incorrect. correct.
Incorrect CR settings Check whether the CR is used correctly.
Unable to send emails Incorrect settings for e-
Confirm the IP address of the SMTP server.
mail server
The mail server does not
Please use email server that supports TLS/SSL.
support TLS/SSL

13-66
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2 DVPDNET-SL
13.2.1 Introduction
DVPDNET-SL running on the left side of PLC can serve as the DeviceNet master or slave with the PLC together.

1. When used as a master station, it has the following functions:

 Automatically exchanges data with the PLC MPU. Users can monitor the slave station by manipulating
specific registers on the PLC host.

 Supports client functionality for Explicit messages.

 Supports various IO connections with slave stations: Polled, Bit-Strobed, Change of State, Cyclic.

 Serves as an interface for DeviceNetBuilder configuration software and DeviceNet network connection.
The configuration software can directly configure the network through the DNET module.

 Supports sending Explicit message read/write slave station data through PLC ladder diagram. 13
 Maximum data length for input and output is 380 bytes, respectively.

2. When used as a slave station, it has the following functions:

 Automatically exchanges data with the PLC MPU. Users only need to program the PLC's D registers,
eliminating the need for FROM/TO instructions.

 Supports server functionality for Explicit messages and supports Group 2 only server connection mode.

 Supports polled connection.

 Maximum data length for input and output is 255 bytes, respectively.

13-67
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.1.1 Features

 Serves as DeviceNet master by connecting to the PLC and supports standard DeviceNet protocol.

 DeviceNet Builder provides the convenient graphic configuration interface; automatically scans and recognizes all
slaves on the DeviceNet network.

 Supports DeviceNet Master and Slave modes.

 Supports eight types of baud rates: 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 50 kbps, 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500 kbps, 800kbps, 1M kbp
13.2.1.2 Specification
Module name DVPDENT-SL
Supply voltage Provided by PLC MPU
DeviceNet connector Removable connector（5.08mm）
Transmission method CAN
_13 Transmission cable
TAP-CB01 cable and TAP-CB02 cable are recommended. (The shielded wire must
be grounded, and the cable should be away from the power line)
Message type Explicit connection, IO polled connection, bit-strobe connection, COS/CC connection
Standard mode: 125k、250k、500kbps
Baud rate
Extended mode:10k、20k、50k、125k、250k、500k、800k、1Mkbps
Master mode: 64
Product code
Slave mode: 82
Product type 12
Manufacturer ID 799（Delta Electronics Inc.）
Connect to the left side of CPU, numbered from 100 to 107 according to the position
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
of module from the closest to farthest to CPU
Weight 115g

13-68
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.2 Module Profiles and Dimension

6 5
DVPD N ET
1 MS

2
NS

3 4
5 6
1
x1 0

7
8
2
7
1 9
0

5 6
4
0
x1 0

7
8
90.00

2
1 9
0

DR 1

8
DR 0
I N1
I N0

63.40
9

6 4 13
3.00
60.00

Unit: mm

No. Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
2 Extension port Connect the PLC or the modules.
Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
OFF: no power
Green light blinking: Module not configured
Green light ON: Input/output data is normal
MS indicator Red light blinking: DNET as master: Abnormal operation of slave tasks in the
scan list
3
DNET as slave: Configuration issue
Red light ON: internal module error
OFF: No power/Failed to establish duplicate ID check procedure
Green light blinking: Online but not connected to the DeviceNet network
Green light ON: Online and connected to the DeviceNet network
NS indicator
Red light blinking: Communication error
Red light ON: Network failure, duplicate node address, no network power, or
network bus interruption (BUS-OFF)
4 DIN rail clip Secure the module on the set
The digital indicator is used to show the node address, error information, and
5 Digital indicator
error messages from the slave station of the DVPDNET-SL module
6 Extension clip For securing the extension module
7 Address switch DeviceNetcommunication address setting
8 Function switch Communication speed and I/O data action settings.
9 DeviceNet connection port Connect to DeviceNet

13-69
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.3 Terminals
DeviceNet Pin Definition
Pin Signal Color Function

1 V- Black 0VDC

2 CAN_L Blue Signal-

3 Drain - Shield

4 CAN_H White Signal+

5 V+ Red 24VDC

Note: Either end of the communication cable should be connected with a terminal resistor of 121Ω and the
resistors should be connected between “Signal+” and “Signal-”.

Address Switch
_13
4
5 6 Switch setting Content
7
3

8
2

1 9

0 … 63 Valid DeviceNet node address

0

5 6
4
7
3

8
2

Others Invalid DeviceNet MAC ID address setting

1 9
0

Example:

If you need to set the node address of DVPDNET-SL to 26, simply switch the corresponding switch of x101 to 2 and the
corresponding switch of x100 to 6.

Note:

 Please set up the node address when the power is switched off. After the setup is completed, re-power DVPDNET-
SL.

 Use the slotted screwdriver to rotate the switch carefully in case you scratch the switch.

Function Switch

DR1 DR0 Baud rate

OFF OFF 125kbps

OFF ON 250kbps

ON OFF 500kbps

ON ON Entering the mode of extended baud rate

IN0：
ON–When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be held
OFF–When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be cleared
IN1： reserved

Note:

 After setting up the function switch, re-power DVPDNET-SL and then the setting is effective.

 Use the slotted screwdriver to adjust the DIP switch carefully in case you scratch the switch.

13-70
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.4 Installation
1. Connecting DVPDNET-SL to PLC

 Adjust the extension clips on the left side of the PLC.

 Meet the extension port of the PLC with DVPDNET-SL as shown in the figure below.

 Fasten the extension clips.

DVPDNET DVP28SV

13
RUN

STOP

2. Install DVPDNET-SL and PLC on DIN Rail

 Use 35mm DIN rail.

 Open the DIN rail clip on the PLC and DVPDNET-SL. Insert the PLC and DVPDNET-SL onto the
DIN rail.

 Clip up the DIN rail clips on the PLC and DVPDNET-SL to fix the PLC and DVPDNET-SL on the DIN
rail, as shown below.

DVPDNET DVP28SV

35mm DIN rail

RUN

STOP

13-71
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Connect to DeviceNet Connection Port

 The colors on the PINs on the DeviceNet connection port match the colors of the connection cables.
Make sure you connect the cable to the right PIN.

 We recommend you also apply Delta’s power module in the connection.

_13

13.2.5 Connect to DeviceNet

Please wire according to the pin definitions of the communication connector and connect it to the DeviceNet network.

DVPDNET

Node Address:00
DeviceNet

RJ1 2

Node Address:02

13-72
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.6 Software Introduction

Before DVPDNET-SL starts to work, it must be configured through DeviceNet Builder software.

Note: Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping Areas.
We take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below.

13.2.6.1 Communication Channel Selection

Max. 8 DVPDNET-SL modules can be connected to the left side of the PLC and every DVPDNET-SL is a communication
channel. When there are three DVPDNET-SL modules connected to PLC’s left side and DeviceNet Builder software is
online, the following dialog box will pop up for you to select the current channel.

13

Parameter Explanation
The unit No. of the first DVPDNET-SL (DNET Scanner) on the left side of PLC is 1. PLC’s left side can be
Unit No.
connected with max 8 DVPDNET_SL. The further DVPDNET-S is from the PLC, the larger its unit No is.
Name DVPDNET-SL’s name in software.
Code For displaying the current mode of DVPDNET-SL: master mode or slave mode.
The register areas which PLC MPU distributes to DVPDNET-SL. The areas are mainly used to receive the
Input
message from DeviceNet Slaves and the data from slaves on the bus will be automatically updated to these
mapping
registers.
The register areas which the PLC has assigned to DVPDNET-SL. The areas are mainly used to control
Output
DeviceNet slave and the control data in these registers will be automatically sent to DeviceNet slave in the
mapping
bus. Slave will take some action accordingly after receiving the data.

13-73
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.6.2 Scan Module Setup

The following dialog is for setting DVPDNET-SL’s current mode: master mode or slave mode.

_13

Parameter Explanation
Master mode For setting DVPDNET-SL as master.
The cycle time for master to send and receive the real time data after real-time data connection
Scan interval time
is successful.
The result value of the parameter multiplied by 4 is the timeout time. (Unit: ms)
Expected Packet Rate Master assumes that the slave is offline if it receives no response from slave after the timeout
time is elapsed.
The parameter is effective only when DVPDNET is in master mode.
Extension baud rate Selecting “Enable” activates the function.
Select an appropriate baud rate according to actual demand.
Slave mode For setting DVPDNET-SL as slave
Bit-strobed Reserved; no actual purpose now.
The parameter is effective only when DVPDNET is in slave mode.
The filled byte numbers correspond to the data length of outputs and inputs as DVPDNET-S is
Polled
in slave mode. “TxSize” corresponds to “Output length” and “RxSize” corresponds to “Input
length”.
Change of State/Cyclic Reserved; no actual purpose now.
Mapping Available for AH models only; no actual purpose now.
Note: These parameters and the configuration information are downloaded to DVPDNET-SL together.

13-74
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.6.3 Scan List Setup

Double click the existing icon of DVPDNET-SL in the DeviceNet Builder interface and then the following dialog box appears
for configuring the scan module.

13

Parameter Explanation
All already scanned slaves appear in “Available list”.
Available nodes After the configuration data is downloaded to DVPDNET-SL, the slave in “Available nodes” will not
conduct the real-time data exchange with DVPDNET-SL.
After the configuration data is downloaded to DVPDNET-SL, the slave in “Scan list” will conduct the
Scan list
real-time data exchange with DVPDNET-SL.
Address The station No. for the slave on the DeviceNet bus.
Node name The node name that the node address corresponds to.

13-75
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.6.4 Input Table and Output Table

Select the device in “Scan list” and then the data length of input and output of the device will be displayed respectively in
the lower part of the following dialog box.

_13

Parameter Explanation
PLC’s registers and the corresponding output data are shown in “Output table”. The values in PLC’s
Output Table
registers will be sent to slave in real time as the control data of the slave.
PLC’s registers and the corresponding input data are shown in “input table”. The data that slave sends
Input Table
to master will be updated in PLC’s registers in real time.
The number of the registers in PLC; “D6289_H” indicates the high byte of register D6289; “D6289_L”
Register
indicates the low byte of register D6289.
Device image For displaying the data type and the name of current slave; “Poll” means the polled data.

13-76
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.7 Input and Output Mapping Areas

13.2.7.1 Data Mapping Areas

The input and output data mapping introduced here is the data mapping between the PLC and DVPDNET-SL. The
mapping relation keeps unchanged, and users are not allowed to revise the areas.

Max. 8 units of DVPDNET-SL modules can be connected on PLC’s left side. After all DVPDNET-SL modules are connected
to the PLC, the PLC will assign data mapping areas to each DVPDNET-SL.
DVPDNET DVPDNET DVPDNET DVPDNET DVPDNET DVPDNET DVPDNET DVPDNET DVP28SV

RUN

13
STOP

1. When DVPDNET-SL is used with different PLC, the input and output mapping areas for it are different. The details
are as follows:

 When the PLC is DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3, registers D16000~D19999 are occupied. The number of the first
DVPDNET-SL on the left side of the PLC is 1 and the number of the DVPDNET-SL module close to the left side
of the first DVPDNET-SL is 2, and subsequent DVPDNET-SL modules are No. 3, No. 4 and so on.

Mapping devices
Unit No.
Output mapping Input mapping
1 D16250~D16497 D16000~D16247
2 D16750~D16997 D16500~D16747
3 D17250~D17497 D17000~D17247
4 D17750~D17997 D17500~D17747
5 D18250~D18497 D18000~D18247
6 D18750~D18997 D18500~D18747
7 D19250~D19497 D19000~D19247
8 D19750~D19997 D19500~D19747
 When the PLC is another model in the DVP series (that is, not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3), registers D6000–D9999
are occupied. The number of the first DVPDNET-SL on the left side of the PLC is 1 and the number of the
DVPDNET-SL module close to the left side of the first DVPDNET-SL is 2, and subsequent DVPDNET-SL
modules are No. 3, No. 4 and so on.

Mapping devices
Unit No.
Output mapping Input mapping
1 D6250~D6497 D6000~D6247
2 D6750~D6997 D6500~D6747
3 D7250~D7497 D7000~D7247
4 D7750~D7997 D7500~D7747
5 D8250~D8497 D8000~D8247
6 D8750~D8997 D8500~D8747
7 D9250~D9497 D9000~D9247
8 D9750~D9997 D9500~D9747

13-77
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.7.2 I/O Mapping Area Assignment (in Master Mode)

 When the PLC is DVP-SV3 and DVP-SX3, and the DVPDNET-SL of number 1 is in master mode, the data mapping
areas are assigned as shown in the following table.

Input mapping area Output mapping area

Devices in PLC Function Data length Devices in PLC Function Data length
Explicit response Explicit request
D16000–D16031 32 words D16250–D16281 32 words
message program message program
Status of nodes in the
D16032–D16035 4 words D16282–D16285 Bit-strobe command 4 words
scan list
D16036 DVPDNET-SL status 1 word D16286 Reserved 1word
D16037–D16226 DeviceNet input data 190 words D16287–D16476 DeviceNet output data 190 words
D16227–D16247 Reserved 21 words D16477–D16497 Reserved 21 words

_13  When the PLC is another model in the DVP series (that is, not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3), and the DVPDNET-SL of
number 1 is in master mode, the data mapping areas are assigned as shown in the following table.

Input mapping area Output mapping area

Devices in PLC Function Data length Register No. in PLC Function Data length
Explicit response Explicit request
D6000–D6031 32 words D6250–D6281 32 words
message program message program
Status of nodes in the
D6032–D6035 4 words D6282–D6285 Bit-strobe command 4 words
scan list
D6036 DVPDNET-SL status 1 word D6286 Reserved 1word
D6037–D6226 DeviceNet input data 190 words D6287–D6476 DeviceNet output data 190 words
D6227–D6247 Reserved 21 words D6477–D6497 Reserved 21 words

Note:

If the number of the DVPDNET-SL is 2, the numbers of the registers in the two tables above will all be added by 500
respectively; if the number of the DVPDNET-SL is 3, the numbers of the registers in the two tables above will all be added
by 1000 respectively; if the number of the DVPDNET-SL is 4, the numbers of the registers in the two tables above will all
be added by 1500 respectively and so on.

13-78
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.7.3 I/O Mapping Area Assignment (in Slave Mode)

 When the PLC is DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3, and the DVPDNET-SL is in slave mode, the data mapping areas are
assigned as shown in the following table and these devices are for the real-time data exchange.

Input mapping area Output mapping area

Unit No
Initial device Max data length Initial device Max data length
1 D16000 255Bytes D16250 255Bytes
2 D16500 255Bytes D16750 255Bytes
3 D17000 255Bytes D17250 255Bytes
4 D17500 255Bytes D17750 255Bytes
5 D18000 255Bytes D18250 255Bytes
6 D18500 255Bytes D18750 255Bytes
7 D19000 255Bytes D19250 255Bytes
8 D19500 255Bytes D19750 255Bytes 13
When the unit No. of the DVPDNET_SL is 1, the control data which DeviceNet master sends out will be updated in
real time in PLC’s devices among which D16000 is the initial device. In the meanwhile, the values in PLC’s devices
among which D16250 is the initial device will be automatically sent back to DeviceNet master. In this way, the real-
time data exchange is realized.

 When the PLC is another model in the DVP series (that is, not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3) and the DVPDNET-SL is in
slave mode, the data mapping areas are assigned as shown in the following table and these devices are for the real-
time data exchange.

Input mapping area Output mapping area

Unit No
Initial device Max data length Initial device Max data length
1 D6000 255 Bytes D6250 255 Bytes
2 D6500 255 Bytes D6750 255 Bytes
3 D7000 255 Bytes D7250 255 Bytes
4 D7500 255 Bytes D7750 255 Bytes
5 D8000 255 Bytes D8250 255 Bytes
6 D8500 255 Bytes D8750 255 Bytes
7 D9000 255 Bytes D9250 255 Bytes
8 D9500 255 Bytes D9750 255 Bytes
When the unit No. of the DVPDNET_SL is 1, the control data which DeviceNet master sends out will be updated in
real time in PLC’s devices among which D6000 is the initial device. In the meanwhile, the values in PLC’s devices
among which D6250 is the initial device will be automatically sent back to DeviceNet master. In this way, the real-
time data exchange is realized.

13-79
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.8 Sending Explicit Message from Ladder Diagram

DVPDNET-SL supports the sending of explicit messages through WPL programs.

Note: Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping Areas
in Section 4.2. We take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below.

13.2.8.1 Principle of Explicit Message Sending


Explicit request message
(PLC  DVPDNET-SL)


Explicit response message
(DVPDNET-SL  PLC)

_13
DV PDNE T DV P28SV

RUN

STOP

Explicit request message

from master 
DeviceNet

DNA02
RJ12

VFD-B
Explicit response message
from slave 

①: The PLC sends the explicit request message based on WPL program to DVPDNET-SL.

②: Then DVPDNET-SL transfers the request message to the target equipment.

③: The target equipment processes the request message and replies with a response message to DVPDNET-SL.

④ : The PLC stores the response message from DVPDNET-SL to D register to finish one explicit message
transmission.

13-80
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.8.2 Structure of Explicit Message

You can edit explicit messages in “explicit request message editing area” and “explicit response message editing area”.
See the table below for the corresponding relation between the two areas and PLC devices. If you send the requested
message to D6250 – D6281, DVPDNET-SL will write the response message data to D6000 – D6031.

PLC device Mapping area Mapping length

D6000 – D6031 Explicit response message editing area 64 bytes
D6250 – D6281 Explicit request message editing area 64 bytes

1. Structure of request message. See the table below:

Requested message
PLC device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D6250 ReqID） Command

D6251 Message Header Port） Size

13
D6252 Service code） MAC ID
D6253 High byte of Class ID Low byte of Class ID
D6254 Message Data High byte of Instance ID Low byte of Instance ID
D6255 reserved Attribute ID (optional)
D6256~D6281 Service data

 Command: Fixed to “01Hex”.

 ReqID: The request ID. Whenever an explicit message is sent out, the message will be given a
ReqID for DVPDNET-SL to identify every message. For the next explicit message to be sent out,
you have to change the ID. ReqID = 0 indicates that DVPDNET-SL will not send out any explicit
message. Range of ReqID: 00Hex – FFHex.

 Size: The length of the message, starting from D6253. The high bytes of D6255 are reserved. When
the data length is being calculated, D6255 is counted as 1 byte. The maximum data length is 58
bytes. Errors will occur when the length is longer than 58 bytes. Unit: byte.

 Port: The communication port. Fixed to “00Hex".

 MAC ID: The node address of the target equipment on DeviceNet.

 Service Code: The service code of the explicit message. See the meanings of the codes in the table
below:

Service Code Explanation

01Hex Read all attributes (Get_Attribute_All)
02Hex Set up all attributes (Set_Attribute_All)
0EHex Read a single attribute (Get_Attribute_Single)
10Hex Set up a single attribute (Set_Attribute_Single)

13-81
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2. Structure of response message. See the table below:

Response Message
PLC device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D6000 ReqID Status
D6001 Message Header Port Size
D6002 Service Code MAC ID
D6003 – 6031 Message Data Service Response Data

 The definitions of ReqID, Port, Service Code and MAC ID are the same as their definitions in request
message.

 Size: The length of the message, starting from D6003. Max. 58 bytes. Errors will occur when the length
is longer than 58 bytes. Unit: byte.

_13  See the table below for the meanings of Status (status codes):

Status code Explanation

0 No explicit message is sent out.
1 The communication of explicit message is successful.
2 The explicit message is being sent out.
3 Error: No response from the target equipment.
4 Error: Command is invalid.
5 Error: Size of request message is invalid.
6 Error: Size of response message is invalid.
7 Error: Failing to establish a connection to the target equipment.
8 – 255 Reserved

3. Notes:

 DVPDNET-SL can only send out one explicit message at a time.

 Before sending the explicit message by using WPL program, we suggest you clear the request message
editing area and response message editing area.

 If the slave responds with a standard error code, and DVPDNET-SL consider the communication
successful, “The communication of the explicit message is successful.” indicates that the
communication has been completed successfully.

13-82
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

4. Application example(I)

Control requirement When M0 = On, read Class 1>>Instance 1>>Attribute 1 of IDF9502

A. Connection Figure
DV P DNE T DV P 28S V

RU N

S TOP

Node Address:00

DeviceNet

13

Node Address:02
RJ12

Note:

Delta DeviceNet slave module, IFD9502 can connect VFD AC motor drive to the DeviceNet network.

B. Parameters setting and devices explanation

 Setting of DVPDNET-SL
Parameter Setting value Explanation
Node address 00 Set the node address of the DVPDNET-SL to “00”.
Baud rate 500kbps Set the communication speed of the DVPDNET-SL and the bus to “500kbps”.

 Setting of IFD9502
Parameter Setting value Explanation
Node address 02 Set the node address of the IFD9502 to “02".
Baud rate 500kbps Set the communication speed of the IFD9502 and the bus to “500kbps”.

 Settings of VFD-B

Parameter Setting value Explanation

02-00 04 The main frequency is operated on RS-485 interface.
The operation commands are operated on the communication interface.
02-01 03
Operation by keys is valid.
09-00 01 Communication address of the VFD-B: 01
09-01 03 Baud rate: 38,400
09-04 03 Modbus RTU mode, data format <8, N, 2>

13-83
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Explanations on devices

Explanation
PLC device Content
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D6250 0101 Hex ReqID= 01 Hex Command= 01 Hex
D6251 0005 Hex Port= 00 Hex Size= 05 Hex
D6252 0E02 Hex Service Code= 0E Hex MAC ID= 02 Hex
Request message
editing area D6253 0001 Hex High bye of Class ID=00 Hex Low byte of Class ID= 01 Hex

D6254 0001 Hex High byte of Instance ID= 00Hex Low byte of Instance ID= 01 Hex

D6255 0001 Hex N/A Attribute ID= 01 Hex

D6000 0101 Hex ReqID= 01 Hex Status= 01 Hex

_13 Response message

D6001 0002 Hex Port= 00 Hex Size= 02 Hex

editing area D6002 8E02 Hex Service Code= 8E Hex MAC ID= 02 Hex
High byte of Service Data= 03
D6003 031F Hex Low byte of Service Data= 1F Hex
Hex

C. PLC program

M1002
ZRST D6000 D6031
Reset response message editing area
& request message editing area
ZRST D6250 D6281

M0
MOV H0101 D6250 ReqID = 01, Command = 01

MOV H0005 D6251 Port = 00, Size = 05

MOV H0E02 D6252 Service Code = 0E, MAC ID = 02

MOV H0100 D6253 Class ID to be read = 01

MOV H0100 D6254 Instance ID to be read = 01

MOV H0100 D6255 Attribute ID to be read = 01

D. Program explanation

 In the beginning of the program, clear the contents in the response message editing area and request
message editing area to 0.

 When M0 is On, DVPDNET-SL sends out the request message to read Class 1>>Instance 1>> Attribute 1
of the target equipment (node address: 02). If the communication of the explicit message is successful,
the slave will send back a response message.

 When M0 is On, DVPDNET-SL only sends out the request message once. To send out the request
message again, you will have to change the value of ReqID.

 The reading is successful and the data back from the target equipment are stored in D6000 – D6003.

 If the reading is successful, the contents of Class 1 > > Instance 1 > > Attribute 1 of IFD9502 will be stored
in D6003. In this example, the content in D6003 should be 031F Hex.

13-84
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

5. Application example (II)

Control requirement M1 = On, set 0x99>>Instance 1>>Attribute 2 of IFD9502 to “0004Hex”.

A. Connection Figure

13

Note:

Delta DeviceNet slave module, IFD9502 can connect the temperature controller to the DeviceNet network.

B. Parameters setting and devices explanation

 Setting of DVPDNET-SL
Parameter Setting value Explanation
Node address 00 Set the node address of the DVPDNET-SL to “00”.
Baud rate 500kbps Set the communication speed of the DVPDNET-SL and bus to “500kbps”.

 Setting of IFD9502
Parameter Setting value Explanation
Node address 02 Set the node address of the IFD9502 to “02”.
Baud rate 500kbps Set the communication speed of the IFD9502 and the bus to “500kbps”.

 Setting of VFD-B
Parameter Setting value Explanation
02-00 04 The main frequency is operated on RS-485 interface.
The operation commands are operated on the communication interface.
02-01 03
Operation by keys is valid.
09-00 01 Communication address of the VFD-B: 01
09-01 03 Baud rate: 38,400
09-04 03 Modbus RTU mode, data format <8, N, 2>

13-85
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Explanations on devices
Explanation
PLC device Content
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D6250 0101 Hex ReqID= 01 Hex Command= 01 Hex
D6251 0005 Hex Port= 00 Hex Size= 07 Hex
D6252 0E02 Hex Service Code= 10 Hex MAC ID= 02 Hex
Request message
D6253 0099 Hex High byte of Class ID= 00 Hex Low byte of Class ID= 99 Hex
editing area
D6254 0001 Hex High byte of Instance ID= 00 Hex Low byte of Instance ID= 01 Hex
D6255 0002 Hex N/A Attribute ID= 02 Hex
D6256 0004 Hex High byte of data= 00 Hex Low byte of data= 04 Hex
D6000 0101 Hex ReqID = 01 Hex Status= 01 Hex
Response message D6001 0002 Hex Port = 00Hex Size= 02 Hex
editing area D6002 9002 Hex Service Code = 90E Hex MAC ID= 02Hex
_13 D6003 0004 Hex High byte of Service Data= 00 Hex Low byte of Service Data= 04 Hex

C. PLC program

M1002
ZRST D6000 D6031
Reset response message editing area
& request message editing area
ZRST D6250 D6281

M1
MOV H0101 D6250 ReqID = 01, Command = 01

MOV H0008 D6251 Port = 00, Size = 08

MOV H0E02 D6252 Service Code = 0E, MAC ID = 02

MOV H0099 D6253 Class ID to be write= 99

MOV H0001 D6254 Instance ID to be written = 01

MOV H0002 D6255 Attribute ID to be written = 02

MOV H0004 D6256 Data to be written = 0004

13-86
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

D. Program explanation

 In the beginning of the program, clear the contents in the response message editing area and request
message editing area to 0.

 When M1 is On, DVPDNET-SL sends out the request message. Write 0004 Hex into Class 99 >> Instance
1 >> Attribute 2 of the target equipment (node address: 02). If the communication of the explicit message
is successful, the slave will send back a response message.

 When M1 is On, DVPDNET-SL only sends out the request message once. To send out the request
message again, you will have to change the value of ReqID.

 If the writing is successful, the message back from the target equipment will be stored in D6000 – D6003.

13
13.2.9 Bit-Strobe Command
Bit-strobe is one of the standard I/O transmission methods for DeviceNet. The size of the command is fixed to 8 bytes (i.e.
64 bits), and every bit corresponds to a slave.

Note: Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping Areas.
We take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below.

Corresponding nodes on the network

PLC device
b15 b14 b13 … b1 b0
D6282 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 … Node 1 Node 0
D6283 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 … Node 17 Node 16
D6284 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 … Node 33 Node 32
D6285 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 … Node 49 Node 48
When b0 of D6282 is 0, the node 0 equipment will be selected, and it will need to respond with a message to the master.

When both b0 and b1 of D6282 are 0, node 0 and node 1 are selected and they need to send back the response
message to the master.

D6283 D6282
b31 b30 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b2 b1 b0
Node 0
Node 1
Node 2

Node 14

In the bit-strobe mode, the master will not send control data to slave nodes.

However, when its corresponding bit is set to 0, the slave node will have to respond with I/O data to the master.

When its corresponding bit is set to 1, the slave node will not have to respond with I/O data to the master.

13-87
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.10 Display of Node Status on Network

13.2.10.1 Display of Status of Nodes in Scan List

This function is available for monitoring whether some DeviceNet slave is offline or not. DVPDNET-SL can conduct the
real-time monitoring of the nodes in the scan list and map the status of every node to a bit. Different PLCs on the right of
the DVPDNET-SL module correspond to different devices. The details are as follows.

 When the PLC is DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3 on the right of the DVPDNET-SL module, you can acquire the status of
nodes by monitoring D16032–D16035.

 See the table below for the corresponding relation between PLC devices and the nodes on the network:

Corresponding nodes on the network

PLC device
b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0
D16032 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Node 0
D16033 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 …… Node 17 Node 16
_13 D16034 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 …… Node 33 Node 32
D16035 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 …… Node 49 Node 48

 When the PLC on the right side of DVPDNET-SL module is another model in the DVP series, you can acquire the
status of nodes by monitoring D6032 – D6035.

 See the table below for the corresponding relation between PLC devices and the nodes on the network.

Corresponding nodes on the network

PLC device
b15 b14 b13 … b1 b0
D6032 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 … Node 1 Node 0
D6033 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 … Node 17 Node 16
D6034 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 … Node 33 Node 32
D6035 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 … Node 49 Node 48

When the node in the scan list is normal, the corresponding bit is OFF. If the node occurs with abnormality, its corresponding
bit will become ON.

13.2.10.2 Status of DVPDNET-SL

You can acquire the real-time status of DVPDNET-SL by monitoring D6036/D16036. When DVPDNET-SL runs normally,
the content in D6036/D16036 is 0. While DVPDNET-SL is being initialized, the value in the high byte of D6036/D16036 is
1 and the low byte is 0. When an error occurs in DVPDNET-SL, the value in the high byte of D6036/D16036 is 2 and the
low byte contains an error code. For detains on error codes, please refer to Digital Display Diagnosis.

(Note: Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping
Areas. We take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below)

Explanation
PLC device
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Status of DVPDNET-SL Error codes of DVPDNET-SL
D6036
(0: normal, 1: initializing, 2: in error) (Refer to Digital Display Diagnosis)

13-88
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.11 Setup of Slave Mode

DVPDNET-SL can serve as slave through modifying the mode in the software. As DVPDNET-SL serves as slave, the
default input / output data length is 8 bytes and max input / output data length is 255 bytes.

DVPDNET-SL can work in slave mode by using the following method.

1. Connect the devices according to the figure below. The PC accesses the PLC via RS232 or RS485.
DVPDNET-SL
DVP28SV
DeviceNet Builder

13
Note: Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping Areas.
We take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below.

2. Open DeviceNet Builder software, select “Setup” => “Communication Setting” => “System Channel”, and the “Serial
Port Setting” dialog box will appear as below.

3. Set up the communication parameters for the PC and DVP-SV, e.g. the communication port, address, baud rate and
communication format. Click on “OK” after the configuration is finished.

Item Function Default

COM Port COM port on the PC to be used to communicate with DVP-SV COM1
Address Communication address of DVP-SV 01
Baud rate Communication speed between the PC and DVP-SV 9,600 (bps)
Data Bits 7
Parity Communication protocol between the PC and DVP-SV Even Parity
Stop Bit 1
Mode Communication mode between the PC and DVP-SV ASCII

13-89
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. Select “Network” => "Online” and the “Select Communication Channel” dialog box will appear. Click on “OK” to start
scanning the DeviceNet network after selecting “analog online” in the following window.

_13
5. Select “Network” >> “Scan module” and then “Scan module setting” dialog box appears. After “Slave mode” is
selected there, fill the appropriate slave data length. Finally click on “OK” to finish the setting.

6. Select “Network” >> “Download” and then below dialog box appears. Click on “Y” to download the configuration data
to DVPDNET-SL.

7. After download is finished, power PLC off and then repower it. At this time, DVPDNET-SL has been set as slave
mode.

13-90
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.12 Extended Baud Rate Setup

13.2.12.1 Extended Baud Rate Setup (in Master Mode)

1. Connect the device to the Devicenet network according to the following figure. The PC accesses the PLC via RS232
or RS485.
DVPDNET-SL
DVP28SV
DeviceNet Builder

Note: Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping Areas. 13
We take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below.

2. Open DeviceNet Builder software and select “Setup” => “Communication Setting” => “System Channel”. And then
the following dialog box appears.

3. Set up the communication parameters for the PC and DVP-SV, e.g. the communication port, address, baud rate and
communication format. Click on “OK” after the configuration is finished.

Item Function Default

COM Port COM port on the PC to be used to communicate with DVP-SV COM1
Address Communication address of DVP-SV 01
Baud rate Communication speed between the PC and DVP-SV 9,600 (bps)
Data Bits 7
Parity Communication protocol between the PC and DVP-SV Even Parity
Stop Bit 1
Mode Communication mode between the PC and DVP-SV ASCII

13-91
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. Select “Network” => "Online” and the following “Select Communication Channel” dialog box will appear. Click on
“OK”.

_13
5. Select “Network” => "Setup of scan module” and the following "Setup of scan module” dialog box appears. Select
“Master mode” and “Startup” to activate the function of extended baud rate. In the meanwhile, select the appropriate
baud rate according to the actual demand. Click “OK” to finish setting.

6. Select “Network” => “Download” and the following dialog box appears. Click “OK” to download the configuration
data to DVPDNET-SL.

7. After download is completed, set DVPDNET-SL’s function switch DR0 and DR1 as ON and then repower PLC to
finish the setting of the extended baud rate.

13-92
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.12.2 Extended Baud Rate Setup (in Slave Mode)

1. Connect relevant devices to the DeviceNet network according to the following figure.
DVPDNET-SL(Master)
DVP28SV
DeviceNet Builder

DeviceN et

13

DVP28SV
DVPDNET-SL(Slave)

Note:

The DVPDNET-SL at the bottom of the figure above has been set to work in slave mode. (See Section 13.2.11).

The node addresses of the two DVPDNET-SLs must not be identical.

The baud rates of the two DVPDNET-SLs are both 500K bps.

Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping Areas. We
take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below.

2. Open DeviceNet Builder software and select “Setup” => “Communication Setting” => “System Channel” to see the
following dialog box.

13-93
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Set up the communication parameters for the PC and DVP-SV, e.g. the communication port, address, baud rate and
communication format. Click on “OK” after the configuration is finished.

Item Function Default

COM Port COM port on the PC to be used to communicate with DVP-SV COM1
Address Communication address of DVP-SV 01
Baud rate Communication speed between the PC and DVP-SV 9,600 (bps)
Data Bits 7
Parity Communication protocol between the PC and DVP-SV Even Parity
Stop Bit 1
Mode Communication mode between the PC and DVP-SV ASCII
4. Select “Network” => "Online” and the “Select Communication Channel” dialog box will appear. Click on “OK” to start
scanning the entire DeviceNet network.

_13

13-94
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

5. After scanning is successful, right click DNET (Slave) to select “Parameter editing”.

13

6. Set parameter 5 as “Enable” and select the baud rate in parameter 6 in the following page. Click on “Download” to
download the newly set parameter value to DVPDNET-SL (Slave).

7. After the download is completed, set DVPDNET-SL (Slave)’s function switch: DR0 and DR1 as ON. And then repower
PLC to finish the setting of the extended baud rate.

13-95
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.13 Application Example

This section provides an example on how to construct and configure the DeviceNet network.

Control requirement Using X points of DVP28SV to control RUN/STOP of the remote AC motor drive VFD-L.

Note:

Different PLC corresponds to different device addresses. For details, please refer to Input and Output Mapping Areas.
We take DVP-SV as the PLC for description below.

13.2.13.1 Construct DeviceNet Network

1. Connection Figure
DVPDNET-SL
DVP28SV

_13 START X0

STOP X1 D eviceNet Builder

RS232

DeviceNet
RTU-DNET

VFD -L
RT U -DN ET

V FD-L

RS485

Note:

Delta DeviceNet remote IO communication module, RTU-DNET supports the MODBUS communication function.

2. Set up DVPDNET-SL, RTU-DNET and VFD-L according to the table below.

DeviceNet Module Node address Baud rate

DVPDNET-SL 01 500kbps
RTU-DNET 02 500kbps

VFD-L parameter Setting Description

02-00 4 Transmit the frequency of VFD-L via RS485.
02-01 3 Control the operation of VFD-L via RS485.
09-00 1 Set the node address of VFD-L in Modbus to 1.
09-01 1 Set the baud rate of VFD-L in Modbus to 9600
09-04 1 Set the communication format of VFD-L in Modbus to 7, E, 1, ASCII.

13-96
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.13.2 Configure DeviceNet Network

 Configuring DeviceNet slave

1. Open DeviceNet Builder software and select “Setup” => “Communication Setting” => “System Channel”, and then the
“Serial Port Setting” dialog box will appear as below.

13

2. Set up the communication parameters for the PC and DVP-SV, e.g. the communication port, address, baud rate and
communication format. Click on “OK” after the configuration is finished.

Item Function Default

COM Port COM port on the PC to be used to communicate with DVP-SV COM1
Address Communication address of DVP-SV 01
Baud rate Communication speed between the PC and DVP-SV 9,600 (bps)
Data Bits 7
Parity Communication protocol between the PC and DVP-SV Even Parity
Stop Bit 1
Mode Communication mode between the PC and DVP-SV ASCII
3. Select “Network” => "Online”, and the “Select Communication Channel” dialog box will appear. Click on “OK” to start
scanning the DeviceNet network.

13-97
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

4. If there is no progress in the bar on the dialog box, it means the connection between the PC and DVP-SV is abnormal,
or there are other programs also using the COM port on the PC. After the scan is completed, the dialog box will tell
you that the scan is completed, and the icons and device names of all the nodes scanned on the network will be
shown on the screen. See the figure below, in which the node addresses of DVPDNET-SL and RTU-DNET are 01
and 02 respectively.

_13

5. Double click on RTU-DNET (node 02), and the "Node Configuration…” dialog box will appear.

13-98
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

6. Clicking on “IO Configure…” button in “Node Configuration” dialog box, you will see “RTU Configuration” page where
you click on “Scan IO” button and “Warning” dialog box will appear. With a click on “OK”, DeviceNet Builder will detect
the devices connected to RTU-DNET as below.

13

7. Because no special module is connected to the right side of RTU-DNET, “None” word will show up in the locations of
the special modules in the following window. The number of points for X and Y are both 0. Then click on “Gateway
setting”.

13-99
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

8. In the interface of “Modbus gateway setting”, use the parameters of one slave and fill in relevant values there. You
can refer to the user manual of RTU-DNET.

_13

Note: The slave mentioned here is the slave on the Modbus network and has nothing directly to do with the DeviceNet
network.

9. Click on “OK” in the window above and then click on “Download” in the following window to download the configuration
data to RTU-DNET. After the download is finished, the configuration of RTU-DNET is finished.

13-100
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Configuration of DeviceNet Master

1. Double click on DNET Scanner (node 01), and the “Scan Module Configuration..." dialog box will pop up. You can find
the currently available nodes, RTU-DNET and VFD-B Drives 230V 3HP, in the list on the left side. On the right side,
there is an empty “Scan List”.

13

2. Move the DeviceNet slave devices in the "Available Nodes” list on the left side to the "Scan List” on the right side.
Select one node and click on > . In this way, move all the nodes to the scan list.

13-101
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Confirm all the settings and click on “OK”. Next, download the configuration to DVPDNET-SL. If DVP-SV is in RUN
mode while you are downloading the configuration, a “Warning” dialog box will appear.

4. Click on “OK” to continue the download. Make sure DVP-SV is in RUN mode.

 Configure the DeviceNet network in the steps above. The mapping relation between DVPDNET-SL and slave
_13 device is shown as below.

DVP28SV → DVPDNET-SL → slave device

DVP28SV DVPDNET-SL RTU-DNET & VFD-L

D6287 Control word of VFD-L (2000H)

D6288 Control frequency of VFD-L (2001H)

DVP28SV ← DVPDNET-SL ← slave device

DVP28SV DVPDNET-SL RTU-DNET & VFD-L

D6037 Output frequency of VFD-L（2103H）

13-102
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.2.13.3 Ladder Diagram Program

This section introduces how to edit the ladder diagram program to meet the requirement of controlling the DeviceNet
network.

When X0=ON, VFD-L AC motor drive runs;

When X1=ON, VFD-L AC motor drive stops;
Control requirement
After VFD-L has been operating for 6 seconds, Y0 of DVP28SV is ON if the specified frequency
of VFD-L is not reached yet.

Explanation of PLC Program

X0
MOV H12 D6287
When X0=ON, VFD-L starts up and 13
its target frequency is 20Hz.
MOV K2000 D6288

X1
MOV H1 D6287 When X1=ON, VFD-L stops running.

X0
TMR T0 K60
Y0 will be ON in DVP28SV if the
T0 frequency of VFD-L has not reached
LD<> K2000 D6037 ( Y0 ) 20Hz after starting up for 6 seconds

13-103
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.2.14 Error Diagnosis & Troubleshooting

DVPDNET-SL supports two diagnostic methods: indicator diagnosis and digital display diagnosis.

DVPDNET
POWER
MS
NS

13.2.14.1 LED Indicator Diagnosis

 Power LED
LED status Indication How to correct
_13 Make sure that the power supply to DVPDNET-SL is
Off The power supply is abnormal.
normal.
Green light on The power supply is normal. --

 NS LED
LED status Indication How to correct
1. Make sure that the power supply and connection to
No power; or duplicated ID checking DVPDNET-SL is fine.
Off
has not completed 2. Make sure that there is at least 1 node that is able to
communicate on the network.
No correction is needed; refer to the digital display
Green light blinking No communication
diagnosis and eliminate the error.
Green light on Normal operation --
Red light Refer to the digital display diagnosis and eliminate the
Error in communication
blinking error.
1. Make sure that all the devices have a unique node
address.
Network error; duplicated ID; bus-off or
Red light on 2. Check the network connection is proper.
no power supply
3. Check if the node address of RTU-DNET is valid.
4. Check if the network power is normal.

 MS LED
LED status Indication How to correct
Make sure that the power supply and connection to
Off No power
DVPDNET-SL is fine.
Configure the scan list and re-download it to DVPDNET-
Green light blinking The master is not configured.
SL.
Green light on Normal operation --
DNET as the master: Abnormal
operation of slave tasks in the scan Check the digital indicator and make sure the
Red light
list. configuration data of the salve in the scan list is
blinking
DNET as the slave: Configuration consistent with the salve actually connected.
issues.
1. Check if the configuration is valid.
Red light on Internal error 2. Re-power it. If the error still exists, send it back to the
factory.

13-104
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 MS LED & NS LED

LED status
Indication How to correct
NS LED MS LED
Make sure that the power supply to DVPDNET-
OFF OFF No power
SL is normal.
Make sure that there is at least one node which
Duplicated ID check has not can communicate with DVPDNET-SL normally,
OFF Green light ON
completed. at the same baud rate as DVPDNET-SL on the
network.
1. Ensure that the node address of DVPDNET-
MAC ID detection failure or
Red light ON Green light on SL is unique.
bus-off
2. Re-power DVPDNET-SL.
1. Check if the network cable is correctly
No 24V DC power from
Red light ON Red light blinking connected to DVPDNET-SL.
DeviceNet network
2. Check the 24V DC network power.
Red light ON Red light ON Hardware error Return to your factory or distributor for repair. 13

13.2.14.2 Digital Display Diagnosis

Code Indication How to correct

Node address of DVPDNET-SL
0 – 63 --
(in normal operation)
80 DVPDNET-SL is in STOP status. Turn the PLC to RUN to start I/O data exchange.
1. Ensure that the node address of DVPDNET-SL is unique.
F0 Duplicated MAC ID check failure
2. Re-power DVPDNET-SL.
F1 No slave device in the scan list. Configure the scan list and download it to DVPDNET-SL.
Check if the power supply to the DVPDNET-SL and PLC is
F2 Low voltage is detected.
normal.
Change IN1of the function switch from On to Off and re-
F3 Entering test mode
power the DVPDNET-SL.
1. Check if the network cable connection is proper.
2. Check if the baud rates of the nodes on the network are
F4 Bus-off
consistent.
3. Re-power DVPDNET-SL.
1. Make sure that the cable is correctly connected.
F5 No network power
2. Ensure that the power supply to the network is normal.
If the error still exists after re-power, send your DVPDNET-
F6 Internal error; Flash or RAM check error
SL back to the factory for repair.
If the error still exists after re-power, send your DVPDNET-
F7 Internal error; GPIO check error
SL back to the factory for repair.
If the error still exists after re-power, send your DVPDNET-
F8 Error produced in factory manufacturing
SL back to the factory for repair.
If the error still exists after re-power, send your DVPDNET-
F9 Internal error; EEPROM access failure
SL back to the factory for repair.
1. Configure the network correctly and re-download it to
DVPDNET-SL.
FA Invalid configuration data
2. Check if the node address of the slave in the scan list is
the same as the node address of DVPDNET-SL.

13-105
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Code Indication How to correct

Make sure that the device parameter in the scan list matches
Device key parameter does not match
E0 the desired key parameter, including vendor ID, product
the scan list table.
code, device type and version.
Data size returned does not match the
E1 Re-configure the scan list using correct data size.
scan list.
1. Check if there is any change for the node address of the
Slave device in the scan list does not slave.
E2
exist or is offline. 2. Check if the communication cable is disconnected or
connected loosely.
DVPDNET-SL fails to transmit a Make sure that the connection is valid and check if the baud
E3
message. rate is correct.
Error detected in sequence of
E4 Check if the slave is operating normally.
fragmented I/O messages from device
Slave device returns error when
_13 E5 DVPDNET-SL attempts to communicate Check if the slave is operating normally.
with it.
Data size returned is bigger than Ensure that the size of the IO data of the slave is the same
E6
expected. as that configured in scan list.
If the code is displayed long, do the troubleshooting
according to the following steps.
1. Make sure that at least two nodes work normally on the
network.
2. Check if both ends of the network are connected with a
E7 DVPDNET-SL is checking MAC ID. terminal resistor of 121Ω respectively.
3. Check if the baud rates of the node devices on the
network are identical.
4. Check if the communication cable is normal so as to avoid
that the cable is disconnected or connected loosely.
5. Re-power the DVPDNET-SL module.

13-106
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.3 DVPCOPM-SL
13.3.1 Introduction
DVPCOPM-SL is a CANopen module operating on the left side of the PLC. The PLC can have a maximum of 8 DVPCOPM-
SL modules connected to its left side. DVPCOPM-SL master module is responsible for the data exchange between the
PLC and other slaves on the bus when the PLC is connected to the CANopen network via DVPCOPM-SL. To achieve data
exchange, DVPCOPM-SL master module is used for transmitting the data in the PLC to slaves on the bus and meanwhile
returns the data in slaves to the PLC.

The PLC connected to the right side of DVPCOPM-SL includes DVP-28SV, DVP-SX2, DVP-EH2-L, DVP-SV3 DVP-SX3
and more.

13.3.1.1 Features

DVPCOPM-SL can be used as the master in CANopen network, as well as the slave for other masters.

1. As a master, DVPCOPM-SL features: 13

 Complying with CANopen standard protocol DS301 V4.02

 Supporting NMT Master Service

 Error control: Supporting Heartbeat/Node Guarding Protocol

 Supporting PDO Service:

Max. 200 RxPDOs and 390 bytes of data

Max. 200 TxPDOs and 390 bytes of data

Each slave can be allocated a maximum of 8 TxPDOs and 8 RxPDOs.

PDO transmission type: Supporting event trigger, time trigger, synchronous cycle, and synchronous non-cycle.

PDO mapping: Every PDO can be configured with a maximum of 32 parameters.

Type of mapping data supported:

Storage space Data type

1 bit BOOL

8 bits SINT USINT BYTE

16 bits INT UINT WORD

32 bits DINT UDINT REAL DWORD

64 bits LINT ULINT LREAL LWORD

 Supporting SDO Service

Number of Server: 0

Number of Client: 3

Supporting standard expedited SDO transfer.

Supporting Auto SDO function. Able to execute up to 20 Auto SDOs to each slave.

Supporting reading/writing of data in slaves by using SDO Service in the ladder diagram in PLC.

 Supporting Emergency Protocol：

Able to store 5 latest Emergency messages for each slave.

13-107
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Able to indicate Emergency messages in a slave through a digital display.

Able to read Emergency messages through the ladder diagram in PLC.

 SYNC producer, range: 0 ~ 65,535 ms.

 As the interface between Delta CANopen Builder software and CANopen network. The software can configure
the network directly through DVPCOPM-SL.

 Automatically exchanges data with the PLC. Users only need to edit a program for D registers mapped in the
PLC without using FROM and TO instructions when programming. When DVPCOPM-SL is connected to the PLC
which is DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3, the registers D16000~D19999 are occupied. When DVPCOPM-SL is connected
to other DVP series PLC which is not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3, the registers D6000~D9999 are occupied.

2. As a slave, DVPCOPM-SL features:

 Complying with CANopen standard protocol DS301 V4.02

_13  Supporting NMT Slave Service

 Error control: Supporting Heartbeat Protocol

 Supporting PDO Service: Each slave can be configured with a maximum of 8 TxPDOs and 8 RxPDOs.

 PDO transmission type: Supporting event trigger, time trigger, synchronous cycle, synchronous non-cycle.

 Supporting SDO Service.

Number of Server: 1

Number of Client: 0

Supporting standard expedited SDO transfer.

 Supporting Emergency Protocol.

Able to indicate Emergency event in the slave through a digital display.

13.3.1.2 Specification
Model name DVPCOPM-SL
Power supply Supplied by internal bus from PLC CPU
Power consumption 1.7W
CANopenconnector Removable connector（5.08mm）
Transmission method CAN
Transmission cable Contains two communication wires, one shielded wire and one ground wire
Message type PDO、SDO、SYNC(synchronous object)、Emergency(Emergency object)、NMT

Baud rate 10k、20k、50k、125k、250k、500k、800k、1M bps(bits/sec)

Product code 82
Device type 0（Non-Profile）

Manufacturer ID 477（Delta Electronics Inc.）

Connectable to the left side of CPU, numbered from 100 to 107 according to the
Connect to DVP-PLC CPU
position of module from the closest to farthest to MPU
Weight 115g

13-108
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.3.2 Module Profiles and Dimension

6 5
D VPCOPM DVPCOPM
1 P OWER

R UN
POWER
RUN

3
E RR
ERR

x1 6
1
2
NODE ADDRESS

7
x 16

NODE ADDRESS
0
x1 6 0
x 16

90.00
DR 2

8
DR 2
DR 1
DR 1
DR 0
DR 0
IN 0
IN 0

63.40
9 S HLD

CA N-
SHLD

CAN-
G ND
GND

6 4
3.00 13
60.00 33.10
Unit: mm

No. Name Description

1 Model name Model number
2 Extension port Connect the PLC or the modules

Indicates the status of the power supply

POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power

OFF: No power supply

Green light flashing once: DVPCOPM-SL is in stopped state
3 RUNLED indicator
Green light flashing: DVPCOPM-SL is in a pre-operation state
Red light ON: DVPCOPM-SL is in a normal state
OFF: Normal
Red light flashing once: Bus error exceeds the warning level
ERRORLED indicator
Red light flashing twice: Slave station disconnected
Red light steady on: Bus off
4 DIN rail clip Secure the module on the set.
Displaying Node Address of DVPCOPM-SL Module
5 Digital display
Displaying Error Information from Slave Station
Fixing clip for I/O
6 For securing the extension module.
module
7 Address switch CANopen communication address setting
8 Function switch Baud rate and I/O data action settings
9 CANopen port Connect CANopen network.

13-109
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.3 Terminals
13.3.3.1 CANopen Port

The port is used for the connection to CANopen network. Wire by using the connector enclosed with DVPCOPM-SL.

PIN Signal Content

5 1 GND GND
CAN+ 4 2 CAN_L Signal-
SHLD 3
3 Shield Shield
CAN- 2
GND 1 4 CAN_H Signal+

5 - reserved

13.3.3.2 Address Switch

_13 The switch is used for setting up the node address of DVPCOPM-SL on CANopen network. Range: 1 ~ 7F (0, 88 ~ FF are
forbidden).

1 Switch setting Content

x16
NODE ADDRESS

1~7F Valid CANopen node address

0
x16
0，80~FF Invalid CANopen node address

Example: If you need to set the node address of DVPCOPM-SL to 26 (1AH), simply switch the corresponding switch of
x161 to 1 and the corresponding switch of x160 to A.

Note:

1. Use a slotted screwdriver to rotate the switch carefully in case you scratch the switch.

2. Please set up the node address when the power is switched off. After the setup is completed, repower
DVPCOPM-SL.

13.3.3.3 Function Switch

The switch is used for setting up the baud rate for the communication between DVPCOPM-SL and CANopen network (DR0
~ DR2). See the table below for the baud rates and maximum communication distances.

DR2 DR1 DR0 IN0 Baud rate

OFF OFF OFF 10kbps
OFF OFF ON 20kbps
DR 2 OFF ON OFF 50kbps
DR 1
OFF ON ON 125kbps
DR 0 reserved
ON OFF OFF 250kbps
IN 0
ON OFF ON 500kbps
ON ON OFF 800kbps
ON ON ON 1Mbps
Note:

 Please use a slotted screwdriver to turn the DIP switch carefully.

 Please set up the function switch when the module is powered off. After setting is over, power on the
module again.

1 3 - 11 0
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.3.4 Installation
1. Connecting DVPCOPM-SL to PLC

 Open the fixing clip on top and bottom of PLC. Meet the extension port of DVPCOPM-SL with PLC, as shown in
number.

 Press the fixing clips on top and bottom of PLC and check if the connection is fine, as shown in number.

DVPCOPM DVP28SV
POWE R

R UN

ER R

1
x16
NODE ADDRESS

0
x16

1
DR 2
DR 1

13
DR 0
IN 0

CA N+ RUN
S HLD

CA N-
STOP
G ND

2. Installing DVPCOPM-SL and PLC on DIN Rail.

 Use 35mm DIN rail.

 Open the DIN rail clip on PLC and DVPCOPM-SL. Insert PLC and DVPCOPM-SL onto the DIN rail.

 Clip up the DIN rail clips on PLC and DVPCOPM-SL to fix PLC and DVPCOPM-SL on the DIN rail, as shown below.

DVP COPM DVP28SV

POWER

RUN

ERR
35mm DIN rail
1
x16
NODE ADDRESS

0
x16

DR 2
DR 1
DR 0
IN 0

CAN+ RUN

SHLD

CAN-
STOP
GND

1 3 - 111
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Connecting to CANopen Port

 Please wire according to the PIN definition of the connection port.

 Plug the communication connector to the CANopen port of DVPCOPM-SL as follows.

_13 RS232

13.3.5 Construct a CANopen Network

In this section, we will introduce how to build a complete CANopen network by using DVPCOPM-SL and other slaves.

Before constructing a network, you have to first know clearly what the network is for and start a preliminary planning for
the data to be exchanged. The plan shall include the slaves to be used, type of transmission and the data to be exchanged,
total length of data to be exchanged, requirement on the response time for data exchange, and so on. The information
will decide whether the network you build is a sensible one, or whether it satisfies your needs, and even affects the later-
on network sustainability and flexibility of network capacity upgrade.

In the example below, we will illustrate how to control RUN/STOP and speed of a Delta ASD-B servo drive by a Delta digital
I/O module DVP-08ST.
13.3.5.1 Construct CANopen Network

Equipment and software required:

Equipment & software Function

DVP-PS02 24V power supply module, supplying power to CANopen.

DVP-PS01 24V power supply module, supplying power to remote I/O DVP-08ST and DVP-SA PLC.

DVP-28SV DVP-SV PLC

DVPCOPM-SL CANopen master

DVP-12SA DVP-SA PLC

DVP-08ST Digital I/O module

IFD9503 CANopen bus adapter

ASD-B Delta B series servo drive

WPLSoft DVP series PLC programming software

Delta CANopen Builder CANopen configuration software for DVPCOM-SL master

1 3 - 11 2
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Set up DVPCOPM-SL and IFD9503 according to the table below. For how to operate IFD9503, please refer to the operation
manual of IFD9503.

Module Node address Baud rate (bps)

DVPCOPM-SL 01 1M

IFD9503 02 (connected to server) 1M

IFD9503 03 (connected to SA) 1M

Set up ASD-B as follows:

Parameter Setting value Explanation

P1-01 02 Control mode: speed mode

P1-09 100 (rpm) Internal speed command 1 (SP1)

P1-10 300 (rpm) Internal speed command 2 (SP2) 13

P1-11 500 (rpm) Internal speed command 3 (SP3)

P2-10 101 Function of DI1: Servo on

P2-11 114 Function of DI2: SPD0

P2-12 115 Function of DI3: SPD1

P2-18 102 Function of DO1: Output when servo on

P3-00 1 Modbus communication address

P3-01 5 (115,200 bps) Modbus baud rate

P3-02 1 (7,E,1) Modbus data format

P3-06 3F DI1 ~ DI6 controlled by communication

Constructing a CANopen network following the figure below.

DV P-P S02 DVPCO PM- SL DV P-S V3/S X3 CANopen
DV PCO PM DV P2 8S V

net work con fig ura tion to ol

L
N

0V

Node 1 Ethernet
CANopen

Node 2 Node 3
P OR T1 P ORT 2
P OR T1 PO RT 2

L
N
D V P-0 8S T
DVP -1 2 SA

0V

IF D9503
AS D-B
DV P-12SA DV P-08ST

For the connection between IFD9503 and PLC, IFD9503 and ASD-B, or IFD9503 and other equipment, please refer to
IFD9503 operation manual. For the electrical specifications and wiring of ASD-B, please refer to ASD-B operation manual.

1 3 - 11 3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.5.2 Data Mapping in CANopen Network

 Data mapping in DVP-12SA

DVP-08ST provides 8 channels of digital inputs and 1 byte of input data in total. In this example, we will use X0 of DVP-
08ST to run/stop ASD-B and use X1 and X2 to select a speed for the servo drive. Y0 is for the output signal of ASD-B
status. See the table below for details.

Channel Function

X0 Controlling RUN/STOP of ASD-B

Selecting the speed of ASD-B:

X1 = 0, X2 = 1, selecting SP1
X1, X2
X1 = 1, X2 = 0, selecting SP2
X1 = 1, X2 = 1, selecting SP3

_13 Status of ASD-B:

Y0 On: RUN
OFF: STOP
When IFD9503 is connected to DVP-12SA, the default length of input data is 8 bytes and output data is 8 bytes for the
data exchange with DVPCOPM-SL master. D256 in DVP-12SA is the start device for input data, and D0 is the start device
for output data. To realize the control function of X0, X1 and X2, we place the statuses of X0 ~ X2 to bit 0 ~ bit 2 of D256.
That is, when X0 = On, bit 0 of D256 will become 1. When X1 = On, bit 1 of D256 will become 1. In this way, we can realize
the control of RUN, STOP and speed of ASD-B by the changes in D256 through WPLSoft. The status word data in ASD-B
will then be sent to D0. That is, when bit 0 of D0 becomes 1, there will be signals at Y0.

Mapping between DVPCOPM-SL master and DVP-12SA:

Mapping register in Master Transmission direction Mapping register in Slave

D6032 D256
D6033 D257
D6034 D258
D6035 D259
D6282 D0
D6283 D1
D6284 D2
D6285 D3
 Data mapping in ASD-B

In this example, IFD9503 is the interface for the connection between ASD-B and CANopen network. In default setting,
IFD9503 provides 1 word of input data and 1 word of output data to exchange with DVPCOPM-SL master.

Mapping between DVPCOPM-SL master and ASD-B:

Mapping register in Master Transmission direction Mapping parameter in Slave

P4-09
D6036
(Digital output status)
P4-07
D6286
(Multi-function digital input)

1 3 - 11 4
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.3.5.3 Configure Network by Delta CANopenBuilder Software

 Using CANopenBuilder to scan the network

1. Open CANopenBuilder software, as below:

13

2. Select “Setup” => “Communication Setting” => “System Channel”, and the "Serial Port Setting” dialog box will appear.

1 3 - 11 5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Set up the parameters for communication between the PC and DVP-SV, e.g. the communication port, address, baud
rate and communication format.

Item Function Default

COM Port COM port on the PC to be used to communicate with DVP-SV COM1
Address Communication address of DVP-SV 01
Baud rate Communication speed between the PC and DVP-SV 9,600 (bps)
Data Bits 7
Parity Communication protocol between the PC and DVP-SV Even Parity
Stop Bit 1
Mode Communication mode between the PC and DVP-SV ASCII

4. Select “Network” => “Online”, and the “Select Communication Channel” dialog box will appear. In this example, if the
_13
connection with DVP-SV is in normal status, you will see the screen as below.

If there are more than one DVPCOPM-SL module (less than 8) connected to the left side of DVP-SV and suppose there
are two connected in this example, you will see the screen as below after clicking on “Online”. The DVPCOPM-SL which
is closest to DVP-SV is regarded as the first module, and so on.

1 3 - 11 6
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Select the DVPCOPM-SL which needs to establish the communication. Click on “OK” and start to scan all the slaves in
the network. If the network installation and power supply are normal, you will see the screen as below.

13

5. In normal condition, after the scan is over, you will find the master and all the slaves displayed in CANopen network,
as below.

1 3 - 11 7
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Setting up parameters in CANopen master

Select “Network” => ”Master Parameter”, and you will see the dialog box as below.

_13

Work Mode: The work mode of DVPCOPM-SL. You can select either “Master Mode” or “Slave Mode”.

Cycle Period: The regular interval at which synchronous messages are sent

Master’s heartbeat time: The cycle time for DVPCOPM-SL to send out the heartbeat message.

After all the parameters are set up, click on “OK".

 Setting up parameters in CANopen slave, take the parameter settings in ASD-B for example.

1. Double-click on ASD-B, and you will see the dialog box as below.

1 3 - 11 8
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

2. Relevant parameter settings

 Error Control Protocol: In the “Node Configuration…” page, click on “Error Control Protocol”, and you will see
the dialog box appearing as below.

13

Explanation of the parameters above:

Parameter Name Explanation Remark

The master sends the guard message to the

Guard time slave based on the time interval specified by
“Guard Time”. When “Heartbeat” is
selected, “Node
Node Guarding Life time=Guard Time x Life Time Factor.
Guarding” cannot be
The slave does not respond to the polling from selected.
Life Time Factor
the master within the period of Life Time and
then master assumes the slave is offline.
The slave sends the heartbeat message to
Node heartbeat
the master within the cycle of “Node heartbeat
producer time The time for “Master
producer time”
consumer timeout”
Heartbeat If the master failed to receive the heartbeat should be longer than
Master consumer message from the slave within the period of that for “slave heartbeat
time-out “master consumer timeout”, the master would producer time”.
assume the slave is offline.

All nodes configured in CANopen network are

Node list --
all displayed in the node list.

The node configured with “error control Only one node can be
Heartbeat consumer setting” can monitor whether the nodes in the configured in “Heartbeat
window of “Heartbeat consumer” are offline. consumer”.
Icon Select some node in “Node list” and add it to --

1 3 - 11 9
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Parameter Name Explanation Remark

the window of “heartbeat monitoring” by

clicking the icon .
Select one node in “Heartbeat” and then
Icon delete the selected node by clicking the icon --
.
Select one node in “Heartbeat monitoring”
“Edit” Button and revise the monitoring time clicking --
“Edit…”
By clicking “OK” return to the dialogue box of
“OK” Button “Node configuration” and the parameters set --
in “Error control setting” are saved
By clicking “Cancel” return to the dialogue box
“Cancel” Button of “Node configuration” and the parameters --
_13 set in “Error control setting” are invalid.

 Auto SDO Configuration

In the “Node Configuration” page, click on “Auto SDO Configuration”, and you will see the page as below.

Click on “Add” to edit an auto SDO. Click on “Edit” to modify the selected auto SDO. Each slave can be configured
with 20 auto SDOs at most.

The auto SDO can only be used for writing parameter values, rather than reading parameters and can only write to
a slave once before the slave enters the operational state from the pre-operational state.

The following window pops up by clicking on “Add” button in the window above. “Index (hex)” and “Sub-Index
(hex)” are the index and sub-index of the parameters to be accessed; “Length (dec)” is determined by the data
type of the parameter to be accessed with the unit: byte.

13-120
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

The value in “Length (dec)” is 2 for the word-type parameter. “Data (hex)” is the data in hex format to be written into
the parameter, the low byte in the left, high byte in the right and space between two bytes. For data type: double
words, the low word is in the left and high word is in the right.

 PDO mapping
13
In the “Node Configuration…” page, select a TxPDO or RxPDO in “Configured PDO” and click on “PDO Mapping”,
and you will come to the “PDO Mapping…” page as below. You can add the parameters in “Available Objects from
EDS file” into “Mapped Objects”. The total length of the parameters added in each PDO CAN’T exceed 8 bytes. After
the configuration is completed, click on “OK”.

In the “Node Configuration…” page, click on “Properties” to enter the "PDO Properties” page and modify COB-ID and
Transmit type. After the configuration is completed, click on “OK”. In the “Node Configuration…” page, click on “Define
PDO” to define RxPDO or TxPDO.

In this example, we adopt the default configuration. Finally, click “OK” in the “Node Configuration…” page.

13-121
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

_13

PDO COB-ID setting rule is as follows.

RxPDO Number COB-ID (HEX) TxPDO Number COB-ID (HEX)

RxPDO1 200 + slave node address TxPDO1 180 + slave node address
RxPDO2 300 + slave node address TxPDO2 280 + slave node address
RxPDO3 400 + slave node address TxPDO3 380 + slave node address
RxPDO4 500 + slave node address TxPDO4 480 + slave node address

Note:

The COB-IDs of RxPDO5~ RxPDO8 and TxPDO5~ TxPDO8 can be those of RxPDO1~ RxPDO4 and TxPDO1~
TxPDO4 of slaves which have not been used on the network yet. COB-ID of every PDO must NOT be identical.

PDO transmission types are listed as below.

Transmission Type Description Remark

Master transmits a SYNCH message to slave every

SYNCH cycle. When there is a change for RxPDO data,
RxPDO data is transmitted to slave and the data that slave
RxPDO
receives is valid after receiving the next SYNCH message.
When there is no change in RxPDO data, master does not
transmit RxPDO data to slave.
0 SYNCH non-cycle
Master transmits a SYNCH message to slave every
SYNCH cycle. When TxPDO data changes, slave sends
the TxPDO data to master after receiving SYNCH
TxPDO
message, TxPDO data that master receives is valid
immediately. When there is no change in TxPDO data,
slave does not transmit TxPDO data to master.
Master transmits a SYNCH message to slave every
SYNCH cycle. Master sends out RxPDO data to slave
1 RxPDO once every SYNCH cycle. RxPDO data that slave SYNCH Cycle
receives from master is valid after slave receives the next
SYNCH message.

13-122
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Transmission Type Description Remark

Master transmits a SYNCH message to slave every

SYNCH cycle. Slave sends out TXPDO data to master
TxPDO
once after receiving one SYNCH message. And then the
TxPDO data master receives is valid immediately.
Master transmits a SYNCH message to slave every
SYNCH cycle. Master transmits RxPDO data to slave
RxPDO every two SYNCH cycles. The RxPDO data slave receives
will be valid after slave receives the next SYNCH
2 message. SYNCH Cycle
Master transmits a SYNCH message to slave every
SYNCH cycle. Slave sends out TxPDO data to master
TxPDO
once after receiving 2 SYNCH messages. And the TxPDO
data master receives is valid immediately.
RxPDO Deduce from the transmission types: 1 and 2.
3～240 SYNCH Cycle 13
TxPDO Deduce from the transmission types: 1 and 2.
When there is any change in RxPDO, RxPDO data is
transmitted to slave and the PxPDO that slave receives is
RxPDO
valid immediately. When there is no change in RxPDO,
master does not send RxPDO data to slave.
When Event timer and inhibit timer are both 0, TxPDO
data is transmitted to master after TXPDO data changes
and the data that master receives will be valid
immediately; when TxPDO data does not change, slave
254 ASYNCH
does not send out TxPDO data to master.
When neither of Event timer and inhibit timer are 0, slave
TxPDO
sends out TxPDO data to master once every a period of
Event timer. After TxPDO data is sent out, no TxPDO data
is allowed to be sent out again within the period of inhibit
timer and when TxPDO data changes, TxPDO data is
transmitted to master at once and the data that master
receives will be valid immediately.
RxPDO Same as the transmission type: 254
255 ASYNCH
TxPDO Same as the transmission type: 254

13-123
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Node List Setting

1. Double click on “DVPCOPM Master” icon, and you will see the “Node List Setting” dialog box as below.

_13

2. In this example, first select DVP-SS/SA/EH PLC of Node 003 and click on > to add this node into the node list.
After that, select Node 003 in the node list, and you will be able to see how the I/O data correspond to D registers in
DVP-SV from the Output Table and Input Table below.

13-124
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

3. Add Node 002 into the node list in the same way, and you will be able to see how the I/O data correspond to D
registers in DVP-SV from the Output Table and Input Table below. Click on “OK” to complete setting up the node list.

13

 Download data to the master

1. Select “Network“ => “Download” to download the configuration data to DVPCOPM-SL master. If the PLC is in RUN
status at this moment, you will be given a warning saying that you have to stop the operation before the download.

2. Click on “OK” to stop the PLC and start to download the data to the master.

3. After the download is completed, you will be given another warning, asking you if you would like to run the PLC again.
Click on “OK” to restart the PLC program, or click on “Cancel” to stop the PLC.

13-125
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.5.4 Save Configuration Data

Select “File” => "Save” to save current configuration data.

13.3.5.5 CANopen Network Control

In this section, we will introduce how to write WPL program to satisfy the requirement of the control over CANopen network.

1. Target

 When SW0 on Slave 3 is closed, the servo drive on Slave 2 will start to run.

 When SW0 on Slave 3 is open, the servo drive on Slave 2 will stop.

 When the status of SW1 and SW2 on Slave 3 is switched, the running speed of servo drive on Slave 2 can be
modified.

_13  When the servo drive is running, the signal LED of Slave 2 will be On.

 When the servo drive stops, the signal LED of Slave 2 will be Off.

2. The program in DVP-SV CPU(master)

M1002
SET M0
M0
MOV D6032 D6286

MOV D6036 D6282

END

Program explanations:

 The 2nd row of the program indicates sending the content of D256 in DVP-SA (mapped in D6032 of DVP-SV) to the
control word (mapped in D6286 of DVP-SV) of the servo drive.

 The 3rd row of the program indicates sending the output status of the servo drive (mapped in D6036 of DVP-SV) to
D0 in DVP-SA (mapped in D6282 of DVP-SV).

13-126
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

The program in DVP-SA CPU (slave):

M1002
MOV HC6 D1120

SET M1120

RST M1143

SET M0

M0
MOV K2X20 D256

MOV D0 K2M10 13
M10
Y0

END

Program explanations:

 The first 3 rows of the program set up the communication format between DVP-SA and IFD9503, which is 115,200bps,
7E1-ASCII, and COM2 communication port.

 When M0 = On, send the input status of X20 ~ X27 of DVP-08ST to D256, and send the data in b0 ~ b15 of D0 to
M10 ~ M25.

 When D0 = 1, M10 will be On, and Y0 of DVP-SA will output.

13-127
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.6 Input and Output Mapping Areas

1. When DVPCOPM-SL serves as CANopen master, the input and output mapping areas are described as below.

 When the PLC is DVP-SV3 and DVP-SX3, the input and output mapping areas for different positions on the left
side of the PLC are shown in the table below. The position of the first one on the left of the PLC is 1, the second
one is 2, and so on.

Mapping Area
Output Mapping Area Input Mapping Area
Position

1 D16250~D16476 D16000~D16226

2 D16750~D16976 D16500~D16726

3 D17250~D17476 D17000~D17226

4 D17750~D17976 D17500~D17726
_13
5 D18250~D18476 D18000~D18226

6 D18750~D18976 D18500~D18726

7 D19250~D19476 D19000~D19226

8 D19750~D19976 D19500~D19726

 When the PLC is another model in the DVP series (i.e., not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3) the input and output mapping
areas for different positions on the left side of the PLC are shown in the table below. The position of the first one
on the left of the PLC is 1, the second one is 2, and so on.

Mapping Area
Output Mapping Area Input Mapping Area
Position
1 D6250~D6476 D6000~D6226

2 D6750~D6976 D6500~D6726

3 D7250~D7476 D7000~D7226

4 D7750~D7976 D7500~D7726

5 D8250~D8476 D8000~D8226

6 D8750~D8976 D8500~D8726

7 D9250~D9476 D9000~D9226

8 D9750~D9976 D9500~D9726

13-128
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

2. When DVPCOPM-SL serves as CANopen master, the request message areas and response message areas of SDO,
NMT and Emergency, and PDO mapping areas are described as below.

 When the PLC is DVP-SV3 and DVP-SX3, the request message areas and response message areas of SDO,
NMT and Emergency, and PDO mapping areas for different positions on the left side of the PLC are shown in the
table below. The position of the first one on the left of the PLC is 1, the second one is 2, and so on.

Response
Mapping Request Message
Message Area of RxPDO Mapping TxPDO Mapping
area Area of SDO, NMT,
SDO, NMT, Area Area
Position Emergency
Emergency
1 D16250~D16281 D16000~D16031 D16282~D16476 D16032~D16226

2 D16750~D16781 D16500~D16531 D16782~D16976 D16532~D16726

3 D17250~D17281 D17000~D17031 D17282~D17476 D17032~D17226

4 D17750~D17781 D17500~D17531 D17782~D17976 D17532~D17726 13

5 D18250~D18281 D18000~D18031 D18282~D18476 D18032~D18226

6 D18750~D18781 D18500~D18531 D18782~D18976 D18532~D18726

7 D19250~D19281 D19000~D19031 D19282~D19476 D19032~D19226

8 D19750~D19781 D19500~D19531 D19782~D19976 D19532~D19726

 When the PLC is another main unit in the DVP series (i.e., not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3), the request message areas
and response message areas of SDO, NMT and Emergency, and PDO mapping areas for different positions on
the left side of the PLC are shown in the table below. The position of the first one on the left of the PLC is 1, the
second one is 2, and so on.

Mapping Request Message Response Message

RxPDO Mapping TxPDO Mapping
area Area of SDO, NMT, Area of SDO, NMT,
Area Area
Position Emergency Emergency

1 D6250~D6281 D6000~D6031 D6282~D6476 D6032~D6226

2 D6750~D6781 D6500~D6531 D6782~D6976 D6532~D6726
3 D7250~D7281 D7000~D7031 D7282~D7476 D7032~D7226
4 D7750~D7781 D7500~D7531 D7782~D7976 D7532~D7726
5 D8250~D8281 D8000~D8031 D8282~D8476 D8032~D8226
6 D8750~D8781 D8500~D8531 D8782~D8976 D8532~D8726
7 D9250~D9281 D9000~D9031 D9282~D9476 D9032~D9226
8 D9750~D9781 D9500~D9531 D9782~D9976 D9532~D9726

13-129
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. When DVPCOPM-SL serves as CANopen slave, the input and output mapping areas for different positions of the left
side of the PLC are as below.

 When the PLC is DVP-SV3 and DVP-SX3, the input and output mapping areas for different positions on the left
side of the PLC are shown in the table below. The position of the first one on the left of the PLC is 1, the second
one is 2, and so on.

Mapping area
Output Mapping Area Input Mapping Area
Position

1 D16282~D16476 D16032~D16226

2 D16782~D16976 D16532~D16726

3 D17282~D17476 D17032~D17226

4 D17782~ D17976 D17532~D17726

_13 5 D18282~ D18476 D18032~D18226

6 D18782~D18976 D18532~D18726

7 D19282~D19476 D19032~D19226

8 D19782~D19976 D19532~D19726

 When the PLC is another model in the DVP series (i.e., not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3), the input and output mapping
areas for different positions on the left side of the PLC are shown in the table below. The position of the first one
on the left of the PLC is 1, the second one is 2, and so on.

Mapping area
Output Mapping Area Input Mapping Area
Position
1 D6282~D6476 D6032~D6226

2 D6782~D6976 D6532~D6726

3 D7282~D7476 D7032~D7226

4 D7782~D7976 D7532~D7726

5 D8282~D8476 D8032~D8226

6 D8782~D8976 D8532~D8726

7 D9282~D9476 D9032~D9226

8 D9782~D9976 D9532~D9726

13-130
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.3.7 Send SDO, NMT and Read Emergency by Ladder Diagram

13.3.7.1 Principle

See the chart below for sending SDO by WPL program:

SDO request message A

(PLC -> COPM)
D
SDO response message
(COPM -> PLC)

DVPCOPM DVP28SV

13
RU N

STOP

DVPCOPM-SL DVP28SV
SDO request message from master

SDO response message from slave

B
C
P
O
R
T
1

P
O
R
T
2

IFD9503
VFD-B

A: PLC sends out the request message to DVPCOPM-SL (master).

B: DVPCOPM-SL (master) sends out the request message to the target equipment.

C: The target equipment processes the request message and sends the response message to DVPCOPM-SL.

D: PLC receives SDO, NMT and Emergency data.

Note: The corresponding device addresses are different for DVPCOPM-SL with different PLC. Please refer to Input and
Output Mapping Areas for DVPCOPM-SL for details. In this case, the PLC is exemplified by DVP-28SV.

13-131
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.7.2 Structures of SDO Request and Response Message

You can edit SDO, NMT and Emergency in “request message editing area”. Take the first DVPCOPM-SL master placed
on the left-hand side of DVP-SV for example. See the table below for the corresponding relation between “request message
editing area” and “response message editing area” and the devices in PLC.

PLC device Mapping area Data length

D6000 ~ D6031 SDO response message and Emergency response message 64 bytes

D6250 ~ D6281 SDO request message, NMT service message and Emergency request message 64 bytes

1. Structure of SDO request message:

Request Message
PLC device
_13 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6250 ReqID Command

D6251 Message Header Reserved Size

D6252 Type MAC ID

D6253 Index high byte Index low byte

D6254 Reserved Sub-index

D6255 Message Data Datum 1 Datum 0

D6256 Datum 3 Datum 2

D6257 ~ D6281 Reserved

 Command: Fixed to “01Hex”.

 ReqID: Request ID. Whenever an SDO request message is sent out, the message will be given a ReqID for CANopen
master to identify. For the next request message to be sent out, you have to change the ID number. Range of ReqID:
00Hex ~ FFHex.

 Size: Data length of the message. Max. 8 bytes. Unit: byte.

 MAC ID: Node address of the target equipment on the CANopen network.

 Type: In SDO request message, 01Hex refers to SDO data read service; 02Hex refers to SDO data write service; In
the SDO response messages, 43Hex indicates reading 4 bytes of data, and 4BHex indicates reading 2 bytes of data.
4FHex means to read 1 byte of data; 60Hex means to write 1/2/4 byte(s) of data; 80Hex means to end SDO command.
For example, if the type is 02Hex in SDO request message, the type is 60Hex in the SDO response message when
writing data is successful.

13-132
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

2. Structure of SDO response message:

Response message
PLC device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6000 ReqID Status

D6001 Message header Reserved Size

D6002 Type MAC ID

D6003 Index high byte Index low byte

D6004 Reserved Sub-index

D6005 Message data Datum 1 Datum 0

D6006 Datum 3 Datum 2

D6007 ~ D6031 Reserved

13

 Status code:

Status code Explanation

0 No data transmission request

1 The SDO message transmission is successful.

2 The SDO message is being transmitted.

3 Error: SDO transmission timeout

4 Error: Illegal command

5 Error: Size of the request message is illegal.

6 Error: Size of the response message is illegal.

7 Error: Equipment to be sent messages is busy.

8 Error: Illegal type

9 Error: Incorrect node address

0A Error information (See the error code for SDO response message)

0B ~ FF Reserved

 ReqID: Normally, the same as the ReqID in the request message.

 Size: Data length of the message, the maximum length is 20. Unit: Bytes

 MAC ID: Node address of the target equipment on the CANopen network.

 Type: In the SDO response message, 43Hex means that 4-byte data are read; 4BHex means that 2-byte data are
read; 4FHex means that 1-byte data are read; 60Hex means that 1/2/4 byte (s) of data are written, 80Hex means
ending the SDO command. E.g., if the type is 02Hex in the SDO request message, the type in the SDO response
message is 60Hex when writing data is successful.

13-133
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.7.3 Structure of NMT Service Message

You can send the NMT request message to D6250 ~ D6281, and the slave will not respond with a message.

Note: The corresponding device addresses are different for DVPCOPM-SL with different PLC. Please refer to Input and
Output Mapping Areas for DVPCOPM-SL for details. Here the PLC is DVP-28SV.

Request Message
PLC device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6250 ReqID Command

D6251 Message Header Reserved Size (fixed to 04Hex)

D6252 Type (fixed to 03Hex) MAC ID

D6253 Reserved NMT service code

Message Data
_13 D6254 Reserved MAC ID

 Command: Fixed to “01Hex”.

 ReqID: Request ID. Whenever a NMT request message is sent out, the message will be given a ReqID for the
CANopen master to identify. For the next NMT request message to be sent out, you have to change the ID number.
Range of ReqID: 00Hex ~ FFHex.

 MAC ID: Node address of the target equipment on the CANopen network.

 NMT service code:

01Hex: Enable remote node; 02Hex: Disable remote node; 80Hex: Enter pre-operational status; 81Hex: Reset
application; 82Hex: Reset communication.

Example: If you want to stop node 03 equipment on the CANopen network, you have to set NMT service code to “02Hex”
and MAC ID to “03".
13.3.7.4 Structures of Emergency Request and Response Messages

The corresponding device addresses are different for DVPCOPM-SL with different PLC. Please refer to Input and Output
Mapping Areas for DVPCOPM-SL for details. The PLC here is DVP-28SV.

1. See the table below for the format of Emergency request message:

Request Message
PLC device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6250 ReqID Command

D6251 Message Header Reserved Size (fixed to 0)

D6252 Type (fixed to 04Hex) MAC ID

D6253 ~ D6281 Message Data Reserved

13-134
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

2. See the table below for the format of Emergency response message:

Response Message
PLC device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6000 ReqID Status

D6001 Message Header Reserved Size (2A Hex)

D6002 Type (04Hex) MAC ID

D6003 Total number of data Number of data stored

D6004 Datum 1 Datum 0

D6005 Datum 3 Datum 2

Message Data
D6006 Datum 5 Datum 4
13
D6007 Datum 7 Datum 6

D6008 ~ D6011 Emergency2

D6012 ~ D6015 Emergency3

D6016 ~ D6019 Emergency4

Message Data
D6020~ D6023 Emergency5

D6024~ D6031 Reserved

 Command: Fixed to “01Hex”.

 ReqID: Request ID. Whenever an Emergency message is sent out, the message will be given a ReqID for the
CANopen master to identify. For the next Emergency message to be sent out, you have to change the ID number.
Range of ReqID: 00Hex ~ FFHex.

 MAC ID: Node address of the target equipment on CANopen network.

 Total number of data: Total number of Emergency messages CANopen master receives.

 Number of data stored: The latest number of Emergency messages CANopen master receives. (Every slave gives
less than 5 Emergency messages.)

Note:

 CANopen master can only send out one SDO, NMT or Emergency request message to one piece of equipment
every time.

 When you use WPL program to send out SDO, NMT or Emergency request messages, we recommend you clear
the “request message editing area” and “response message editing area” to 0.

13-135
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.7.5 Application Examples

In this section, we will illustrate how to write a WPL program to send out SDO and NMT messages or read Emergency
request messages.

(Note: the PLC is DVP-28SV here.)

1. Example I

 Control requirement:

When M0 turns ON, the actual output frequency of the AC motor drive is read via SDO. The corresponding index/ sub-
index of the actual output frequency of the AC motor drive is 2021/4.
DVPCOPM DVP28SV

_13 C AN+ RU N

SH LD

C AN- STOP
GN D

Node 1 Master
CANopen

Node 2

RJ12

RS485
IFD9503 VFD-B

Required settings in DVPCOPM-SL:

Parameter Setting Explanation

Node address 01 Set the node address of DVPCOPM-SL to “01”.
Baud rate 1 Mbps Set the communication speed between DVPCOPM-SL and bus to “1 Mbps”.

Required settings in IFD9503:

Parameter Setting Explanation

Node address 02 Set the node address of IFD9503 to “02”.

Baud rate 1 Mbps Set the communication speed between IFD9503 and bus to “1 Mbps”.

13-136
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Required settings in VFD-B AC motor drive

Parameter Setting Explanation

02-00 04 The main frequency is operated by RS-485 interface.

The running command is operated by communication interface.
02-01 03
Operation by keys is valid.
09-00 01 Communication address of VFD-B: 01

09-01 03 Baud rate: 38,400 bps

09-04 03 Modbus RTU mode, format <8, N, 2>

Devices in PLC:

Explanation
PLC device Content
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13
D6250 0101Hex ReqID = 01Hex Command = 01Hex
D6251 0004Hex Reserved Size = 04Hex
SDO request
D6252 0102Hex Type = 01Hex MAC ID = 02Hex
message editing area
D6253 2021Hex High byte of index = 20Hex Low byte of index = 21Hex
D6254 0004Hex Reserved Sub index = 04Hex
D6000 0101Hex ReqID = 01Hex Status = 01Hex
D6001 0006Hex Reserved Size = 06Hex

SDO response D6002 4B02Hex Type = 4BHex MAC ID = 02Hex

message editing area D6003 2021Hex High byte of index = 20Hex Low byte of index = 21Hex
D6004 0004Hex Reserved Sub index = 04Hex
D6005 0100Hex Datum 1= 01Hex Datum 0 = 00Hex
The value 0100Hex in D6005 indicates that the actual output frequency of the AC motor drive is 2.56 Hz.

 PLC program

13-137
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Program explanation

At the beginning of the program, the SDO request information mapping area and the SDO response information mapping
area are first cleared to zero.

When M0 = On, CANopen master will send out a SDO request message to read the contents in index 2021 and subindex
4 of the target equipment (at node address 02). If the communication is successful, the slave will return a response
message.

When M0 = On, CANopen master will send out the request message only once. If you would like it to send out one more
request message, you will have to change the ReqID.

Upon successful reading, the data returned from the target equipment are stored in D6000 ~ D6005.

2. Example II

 Control requirement:

_13 When M0 turns ON, the target temperature of the DTA temperature controller is set to 26.0℃ via SDO. The corresponding
index/ sub-index of the target temperature of the DTA is 2047/2.
DVPCOPM DVP28SV

CAN+ RU N

SHLD
CAN- STOP
GND

Node 1 Master
CANopen

Node 2

PV
°C
°F

SV

AT OUT A L M1 A L M2

SET
D T A4 8 4 8

RS-485
IFD9503 DTA

Required settings in DVPCOPM-SL

Parameter Setting Explanation

Node address 01 Set the node address of DVPCOPM-SL to “01”.
Baud rate 1 Mbps Set the communication speed between DVPCOPM-SL and the bus to “1 Mbps”.
Required settings in IFD9503

Parameter Setting Explanation

Node address 02 Set the node address of IFD9503 to “02”.

Baud rate 1 Mbps Set the communication speed between IFD9503 and the bus to “1 Mbps”.

13-138
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Required settings in DTA temperature controller

Parameter Setting Explanation

On C WE: Enable/disable communication write-in

ASCII C-SL: Select ASCII or RTU format

1 C NO: Set up communication address

38400 BPS: Set up communication speed

7 LENGTH: Set up data length

E PARITY:Set up parity bit

1 STOP BIT:Set up stop bit

℃ UNIT: Select temperature unit, °C or °F

 Devices in PLC
13

Explanation
PLC Device Content
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6250 0101Hex ReqID = 01Hex Command = 01Hex

D6251 0006Hex Reserved Size = 06Hex

SDO request D6252 0202Hex Type = 02Hex MAC ID = 02Hex

message editing area D6253 2047Hex High byte of index = 20Hex Low byte of index = 47Hex

D6254 0002Hex Reserved Sub index = 02Hex

D6255 0401 Hex Datum 1= 04Hex Datum 0= 01Hex

D6000 0101Hex ReqID = 01Hex Status = 01Hex

D6001 0004Hex Reserved Size = 04Hex

SDO response
D6002 6002Hex Type = 60Hex MAC ID = 02Hex
message editing area
D6003 2047Hex High byte of index = 20Hex Low byte of index = 47Hex

D6004 0002Hex Reserved Sub index = 02Hex

13-139
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 PLC program

M1002
ZRST D6000 D6031
Reset response message editing area
and request message editing area.
ZRST D6250 D6281

M0
MOV H0101 D6250 ReqID = 01, Command = 01

MOV H0006 D6251 Size = 06

MOV H0202 D6252 Type = 02, MAC ID = 02

_13
MOV H2047 D6253 Index = 2047H

MOV H0002 D6254 Sub index = 02

MOV H0401 D6255 Target temperature for DTA: 0104H

END

Program explanation:

 At the beginning of the program, the SDO request message editing area and SDO response message editing
area are first cleared to zero.

 When M0= On, CANopen master will send out a SDO request message to write 0104Hex into index 2047, sub
index 2 of the target equipment (at node address 02). If the communication is successful, the slave will return a
response message.

 When M0 = On, CANopen master will send out the request message only once. If you would like it to send out
one more message, you will have to change the ReqID.

 Upon successful reading, the messages returned from the target equipment are stored in D6000 ~ D6004.

13-140
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.3.8 Network Node Status Display

The state of all slaves on the CANopen network can be read through reading 5002/1 (index/subindex) value by sending
SDO messages via the ladder diagram; the master state of the CANopen network can be read through reading 5003/1
(index/subindex) value by sending SDO messages via the ladder diagram; the CANopen network state can be read through
reading 5004/1 (index/subindex) value by sending SDO messages via the ladder diagram.
13.3.8.1 Slave State of CANopen Network

Users can read the content value in H’5002>>H’01 (index>>subindex) to acquire the status of the slaves on the CANopen
network by sending SDO.

Index Subindex Object Name Data Type Attribute Default

H’00 Entry Unsigned 16 bits Read-only ---

H’5002
H’01 Status word of node 1 ~ node 127 Unsigned 128 bits Read-only ---
13
The corresponding relations between index H”5002>> subindex H’01 and network nodes are as follows.

Corresponding Network Node

H’5002>>H’01
b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0

Word 0 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Reserved

Word 1 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 …… Node 17 Node 16

Word 2 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 …… Node 33 Node 32

Word 3 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 …… Node 49 Node 48

Word 4 Node 79 Node 78 Node 77 …… Node 65 Node 64

Word 5 Node 95 Node 94 Node 93 …… Node 81 Node 80

Word 6 Node 111 Node 110 Node 109 …… Node 97 Node 96

Word 7 Node 127 Node 126 Node 125 …… Node 113 Node 112

The corresponding bits are in OFF status when the nodes in the node list of the master module are normal; the
corresponding bits are in ON status when the nodes in the node list of the master module are abnormal, e.g. Initializing
fails or other abnormality causes slave offline.

13.3.8.2 Master Status of CANopen Network

Users can read the content value in H’5003>>H’01 to acquire the master module status on the CANopen network by
sending SDO messages. When the master module is at normal work, the content value in H’5003>>H’01 is 0; when there
is any error in the master module, the content value in H’5003>>H’01 is the corresponding error code.

Index Subindex Object Name Data Type Attribute Default

H’00 Entry Unsigned 16 bits Read-only ---

H’5003
H’01 Status of the master module Unsigned 16 bits Read-only ---

13-141
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Explanation of the Content value for H’5003>>H’01.

Content Value Explanation Actions

No slave has been added to the node Add the slave to the node list and redownload configuration
F1
list of CANopen Builder. to DVPCOPM-SL
In process of downloading configuration
F2 Wait till the configuration download is finished.
to DVPCOPM-SL.
Redownload configuration. Replace it with a new
F3 DVPCOPM-SL in error status
DVPCOPM-SL if the error still exists.
Check the wiring for all cables of CANopen network is
F4 Bus-off is detected proper; ensure all nodes on the network work at same baud
rate and finally repower DVPCOPM-SL.
The setting for DVPCOPM-SL node The DVPCOPM-SL node address should be set in the
F5
address is incorrect range of 1~127.
Check and ensure the work power for DVPCOPM-SL is
_13 F9 Low-voltage detection error
normal.
The inner firmware of DVPCOPM-SL is
FA Repower DVPCOPM-SL.
in error state.
The storage space sending data in Check and ensure bus cable connection is normal and then
FB
DVPCOPM-SL is full. repower DVPCOPM-SL.
The storage space receiving data in Check and ensure bus cable connection is normal and then
FC
DVPCOPM-SL is full. repower DVPCOPM-SL.
0 The master is in normal status --

13.3.8.3 CANopen Network Status

Users can read the content value in H’5004>>H’01 to acquire CANopen network status by editing ladder diagram to send
SDO. When all nodes on the CANopen network are all at normal work, the content value in H’5004>>H’01 is 0; when any
node of CANopen network is abnormal or initializing fails, the content value in H’5004>>H’01 is 1.

Index Subindex Object Name Data Type Attribute Default

H’00 Entry Unsigned 16 bits Read-only ---

H’5004
H’01 CANopen network status Unsigned 16 bits Read-only ---

13.3.8.4 Data Structures of SDO Request and Response Messages

Here, the SDO request message structure is for 5002/1 (index/ subindex), 5003/1 (index/ subindex), 5004/1 (index/
subindex) only and can be realized by editing the request message mapping area. Take DVPCOPM-SL, the first master
module on the left of PLC as an example, the table below shows the corresponding relations between request and response
message mapping areas, and PLC devices.

Note: The corresponding device addresses are different for DVPCOPM-SL with different PLC. Please refer to Input and
Output Mapping Areas for DVPCOPM-SL for details. The PLC here is DVP-28SV.

PLC Device Mapping Area Mapping Length

D6000~D6031 SDO response message area 64 bytes
D6250~D6281 SDO request message area 64 bytes

13-142
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Structure of SDO Request Message

Request Message
PLC Device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6250 Request ID Command code

D6251 Message header Reserved Data length

D6252 Type MAC ID

D6253 Main index high byte Main index low byte

D6254 Reserved Subindex

D6255 Message data Data1 Data 0

D6256 Data 3 Data 2

D6257 ~ D6281 Reserved

13
 Command code: Fixed to 01 ( Hex )

 Request ID: Every SDO request message to be sent out should be given a request ID. CANopen master
identifies every request message via “ Request ID ” which must be changed for the next
communication after current communication is finished. The value range for Request ID is 00 (Hex) ~ FF
(Hex).

 Data length: Data length of the message is fixed to 4 bits.

 MAC ID: Node address of CANopen network master.

 Type: Fixed to 1 in SDO request message which indicates SDO data reading service.

Structure of SDO Response Message

Response Message
PLC Device
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D6000 Response ID Status code

D6001 Message Header Reserved Data Length

D6002 Type MAC ID

D6003 Main index high byte Main index low byte

D6004 Reserved Subindex

D6005 Data 1 Data 0

D6006 Data 3 Data 2

D6007 Data 5 Data 4

D6008 Message Data Data 7 Data 6

D6009 Data 9 Data 8

D6010 Data 11 Data 10

D6011 Data 13 Data 12

D6012 Data 15 Data 14

D6013 ~ D6031 Reserved

13-143
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Status Code

Status Code Explanation

0 No data transmission request

1 SDO message transmission succeeds.

2 SDO message is being transmitted.

3 Error – SDO message transmitting is time-out.

4 Error – Command code is invalid.

5 Error – The transmitted data length is invalid.

6 Error – Response data length is invalid.

7 Error – The device which is to be used for transmission is busy.

_13
8 Error – Type code is invalid.

9 Error – Node address is wrong.

0A Error information ( refer to the error code in SDO response message)

0B~FF Reserved

 Response ID: Normally, the same as Request ID in a request message; in abnormal status, Response ID
is 0.

 Data length: Data length of message data; maximum value: 32; Unit: byte.

 MAC ID: Node address of CANopen network master.

 Type: In SDO response message, 43 (Hex) represents that data of 4 bytes are read; 4B (Hex) represents
that data of 2 bytes are read; 4F (Hex) represents that data of 1 byte are read and 42(Hex) represents
data longer than 4 bytes are read.

13.3.8.5 Application Examples

【Control Requirement】

Edit a ladder diagram to achieve the monitor function on a CANopen network as follows.

3. Real-time monitoring of the state of the slaves in the node list of the master module;

4. Real-time monitoring of the state of the master module;

5. Real-time monitoring of the state of the CANopen network.

Note: The corresponding device addresses are different for DVPCOPM-SL with different PLC. Please refer to Input and
Output Mapping Areas for DVPCOPM-SL for details. Here the PLC is DVP-28SV

13-144
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

M100 2
ZR ST D60 00 D60 31

ZR ST D62 50 D 628 1
Reset res ponse mess age e diting area
and request mes sage editing area
M1 000
MO V D 200 D62 50

R eq ID =H _Byte (D 200 )，Comma nd =0 1

MO V H00 04 D 625 1

Si ze =04

MO V H0 17F D62 52

Type=01，Re ad fun cti on，ma ste r nod e add re ss=7F

13
MO V D2 01 D62 53

Ind ex=D 201 C onte nt va lue

MO V H 000 1 D62 54

Su b ind ex =01H
M100 2
MOV H50 02 D20 1

MOV H01 01 D2 00

L D= D600 0 H0 101 BMO V D60 05 D1 K8

L D= D600 0 H0 103 MOV H 500 3 D 201

MOV H 020 1 D 200

When D6000=H0101 or D6000=H0103, transmit the status of nodes 1~127 to D1~D8,

transmit the main index 5003 to D201, and simultaneously s end H0201 to register D200

L D= D600 0 H0 201 MOV D60 05 D9

L D= D600 0 H0 203 MOV H 500 4 D 201

MOV H 030 1 D 200

When D6000=H0201 or D6000=H0203, tr ansmit the status of master module to D9,

transmit the main index 5004 to D201, and simultaneously s end H0301 to register D200

LD= D60 00 H 0301 MOV D60 05 D1 0

LD= D60 00 H 0303 MOV H500 2 D 201

MOV H010 1 D200

When D6000=H0301 or D6000=H0303, transmit the status of network to D10,

transmit the main index 5002 to D201, and simultaneously send H0101 to register D200

13-145
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.3.9 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting

DVPCOPM-SL has three LED indicators and a digital display on it. POWER LED indicates whether the power supply to
DVPCOPM-SL is normal. RUN LED and ERR LED indicate the current status. The digital display shows the node address
of DVPCOPM-SL and error information from the slave.

DVPCOPM
POWER
RUN
ERR

13.3.9.1 LED Indicator

 POWER LED
_13 LED status Indication Solution

OFF Power supply is abnormal. Ensure that the power supply to DVPCOPM-SL is normal.

Green light On Power supply is normal. --

 RUN LED
LED status Indication Solution
Green light Upper computer is downloading network configuration
DVPCOPM-SL in STOP status
single flash and DVPCOPM-SL is waiting till the download is finished.
1. Ensure that the bus cables wiring on the CANopen
network is proper.
2. Ensure that the baud rates of the master and other
Green light
DVPCOPM-SL in pre-operational status slaves are identical.
blinking
3. Check if the configured slave has been connected
to the network.
4. Check if the slave is offline.
Green light On DVPCOPM-SL is in operational status --

RUN LED green light single flash versus blinking:

ON
200ms

Gr een light
single fl ash 1000ms
200ms

OF F

ON
2 00ms

Gre en l igh t
bli nkin g 20 0ms

OF F

13-146
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 ERR LED
LED status Indication Solution
Off Normal --
1. Check if CANopen bus is the standard cable.
Red light double
Slave is offline. 2. Check if both terminals of CANopen bus are connected
flash
with a terminal resistor separately.
1. Check if CANopen bus is the standard cable.
2. Check if both terminals of CANopen bus are connected
Red light single Bus error exceeds the warning
with a terminal resistor separately.
flash level.
3. Check if the interference around CANopen bus is too
strong.
1. Check if connection for CANopen network bus cables is
Red light steady proper.
Bus-off
on 2. Check if DVPCOPM-S and other slaves are identical in
baud rate.
13
Error LED red light single flash versus double flashes:

ON
20 0m s

Re d l ig ht
si ng l e fl ash 100 0ms

OF F

ON
200m s 200 ms

Re d li ght
do ub le fl ash 200 ms 1 000 ms

O FF

13.3.9.2 Codes in Digital Display

 DVPCOPM-SL as master

Code Indication How to correct

The node address of DVPCOPM-SL when

1 ~ 7F --
in normal operation.
The slave has not been added to the node Add the slave into the node list and then redownload it to
F1
list of CANopen builder software. DVPCOPM-SL.
The data are being downloaded to
F2 Wait till configuration download is finished
DVPCOPM-SL.
Redownload parameter configuration and change into a
F3 DVPCOPM-SL in error status
new DVPCOPM-SL if the error still exists.
Check if CANopen network bus cables are properly
F4 Bus-off is detected.
connected.

Incorrect DVPCOPM-SL’s node address The node address for DVPCOPM-SL should be set in the
F5
setting. range of 1~127.
F6 Internal error: manufacturing process Repower DVPCOPM-SL. If the error still exists, change to

13-147
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Code Indication How to correct

F7 Internal error: GPIO check a new DVPCOPM-SL.

F8 Internal error: memory check
Check and make sure the power of DVPCOPM-SL works
F9 Low voltage is detected.
normally.
The firmware of DVPCOPM-SL is in error
FA Repower DVPCOPM-SL.
status.
Check and ensure CANopen network bus cables are
FB The sending buffer in DVPCOPM-SL is full.
properly connected and then repower DVPCOPM-SL
The receiving buffer in DVPCOPM-SL is Check and ensure CANopen network bus cables are
FC
full. properly connected and then repower DVPCOPM-SL.
DVPCOPM-SL receives the Emergency Read relevant information through PLC or Delta CANopen
E0
message sent by the slave. Builder software.
PDO data length returned from the slave is
_13 E1 not consistent with the length set in the
Reset the PDO data length in the slave and download the
new setting to DVPCOPM-SL.
node list.
PDO message from the slave has not been
E2 Check and make sure the setting is correct.
received.
E3 Auto SDO download failed. Check and make sure auto SDO is correct.
E4 PDO parameter setting has failed. Make sure the PDO parameters setting is legal.
Make sure all the slaves connected are consistent with the
E5 Error in key parameters setting.
slaves configured.

E6 Slave is offline. Make sure the power supply to the slave works normally
and the CANopen network is connected properly.

E7 Slave error control timeout.

Reset the node address and make sure the new address is
E8 Master / slave node address repeated.
not a repeated one.

 DVPCOPM-SL as slave

Code Indication How to correct

The node address of DVPCOPM-SL when

1 ~ 7F --
in normal operation.
The parameters in DVPCOPM-SL are
A0 Wait till initializing is finished.
being initialized.
Check if the bus cables in CANopen network are
A1 DVPCOPM-SL is in pre-operational status.
connected properly.
The configuration data are being
A3 Wait till configuration is finished downloading.
downloaded to DVPCOPM-SL.

Check if the bus cables in CANopen network are

B0 Heartbeat message timeout
connected properly.

PDO length returned from the slave is Reset the PDO data length in the slave and download the
B1
inconsistent with that set in the node list. new setting to DVPCOPM-SL.

F4 Bus-off is detected Check if the bus cables in CANopen network are

13-148
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Code Indication How to correct

connected properly; ensure all the nodes in the network
work are at the same baud rate. Repower DVPCOPM-SL.
Make sure the bus works normally and repower
FB The sending buffer in DVPCOPM-SL is full.
DVPCOPM-SL.
The receiving buffer in DVPCOPM-SL is Check if the bus cables in CANopen network are
FC
full. connected properly and repower DVPCOPM-SL.

13.3.10 Indexes and Sub-indexes for DVPCOPM-SL Working as

CANopen Slave
When DVPCOPM-SL serves as CANopen slave, the indexes/sub-indexes for different positions of the module on the left
side of the PLC correspond to the registers in the PLC as shown in the following table. The position of the first one on the
left of the PLC is 1, the position of the second one is 2, and so on. 13
Note: The corresponding device addresses are different for DVPCOPM-SL with different PLC. Please refer to Input and
Output Mapping Areas for DVPCOPM-SL for details. Here the PLC is DVP-28SV.
Correspond
Input/output
to Index Sub-index range Register in the PLC
mapping area
Position
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D6282~D6313
1 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D6032~D6063
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D6782~D6813
2 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D6532~D6563
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D7282~D7313
3 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D7032~D7063
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D7782~D7813
4 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D7532~D7563
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D8282~D8313
5 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D8032~D8063
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D8782~D8813
6 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D8532~D8563
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D9282~D9313
7 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D9032~D9063
H’2000 H’01~ H’20 Output mapping D9782~D9813
8 area
H’2001 H’01~ H’20 Input mapping area D9532~D9563

Take the first one on the left side of the PLC for example. When DVPCOPM-SL serves as CANopen slave, its indexes and
sub-indexes, and attributes correspond to the registers in the PLC as shown in the following table.

13-149
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Output mapping area

Register in the PLC

Index Sub-index Object name Data type Attribute
(Output mapping area)
H’01 Data_in [0] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6282
H’02 Data_in [1] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6283
H’03 Data_in [2] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6284
H’04 Data_in [3] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6285
H’05 Data_in [4] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6286
H’06 Data_in [5] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6287
H’2000 H’07 Data_in [6] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6288
H’08 Data_in [7] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6289

_13 H’09 Data_in [8] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6290

H’0A Data_in [9] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6291
H’0B Data_in [10] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6292
H’0C Data_in [11] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6293
H’0D Data_in [12] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6294
H’0E Data_in [13] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6295
H’0F Data_in [14] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6296
H’10 Data_in [15] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6297
H’11 Data_in [16] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6298
H’12 Data_in [17] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6299
H’13 Data_in [18] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6300
H’14 Data_in [19] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6301
H’15 Data_in [20] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6302
H’16 Data_in [21] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6303
H’2000 H’17 Data_in [22] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6304
H’18 Data_in [23] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6305
H’19 Data_in [24] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6306
H’1A Data_in [25] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6307
H’1B Data_in [26] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6308
H’1C Data_in [27] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6309
H’1D Data_in [28] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6310
H’1E Data_in [29] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6311
H’1F Data_in [30] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6312
H’20 Data_in [31] Signed 16-bit Write-only D6313

13-150
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Input mapping area

Register in the PLC

Index Sub-index Object name Data type Attribute
(Input mapping area)
H’01 Data_out[0] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6032
H’02 Data_out[1] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6033
H’03 Data_out[2] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6034
H’04 Data_out [3] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6035
H’05 Data_out [4] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6036
H’06 Data_out [5] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6037
H’07 Data_out [6] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6038
H’08 Data_out [7] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6039
H’2001 H’09 Data_out [8] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6040
13
H’0A Data_out [9] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6041
H’0B Data_out [10] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6042
H’0C Data_out [11] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6043
H’0D Data_out [12] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6044
H’0E Data[_out 13] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6045
H’0F Data_out [14] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6046
H’10 Data_out [15] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6047
H’11 Data_out [16] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6048
H’12 Data_out [17] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6049
H’13 Data_out [18] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6050
H’14 Data_out [19] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6051
H’15 Data_out [20] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6052
H’16 Data_out [21] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6053
H’17 Data_out [22] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6054
H’18 Data_out [23] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6055
H’2001 H’19 Data_out [24] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6056
H’1A Data_out [25] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6057
H’1B Data_out [26] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6058
H’1C Data_out [27] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6059
H’1D Data_out [28] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6060
H’1E Data_out [29] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6061
H’1F Data_out [30] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6062
H’20 Data_out [31] Signed 16-bit Read-only D6063

13-151
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.4 DVPPF02-SL
13.4.1 Introduction
DVPPF02-SL is a PROFIBUS DP slave communication module, used for connecting the Delta DVP-SV, DVP-SX2, DVP-
SV3, DVP-SX3 series PLC to the PROFIBUS DP network. DVPPF02-SL is a left-side extension module, and no external
power supply is required when using it. The power is supplied by the PLC MPU (main processing unit).

13.4.1.1 Features

 Supports the loop data transmission between the PROFIBUS DP master and many slaves.

 Auto-detects baud rate; supports max. 12M bps.

 Self-diagnosis

_13  A PLC MPU is extendable to max. 8 modules on its left-hand side.

 Supports max. 100 words of I/O output and 100 words of I/O input.

13.4.1.2 Specification

 PROFIBUS DP Port

Interface DB9 connector

Transmission method High-speed RS-485

Transmission cable Shielded twisted pair cable

Electrical isolation 500 VDC

 Communication

Data type Cyclic data exchange

Module name DVPPF02-SL
GSD document DELA0AFE.GSD
Product ID 0AFE
Serial baudrate supported
9.6k, 19.2k, 93.75k, 187.5k, 500k, 1.5M, 3M, 6M, 12M bps (bits/second)
(auto-detection)

 Electrical Specification

Power supply voltage supplied by the PLC MPU

Insulation voltage 500 VDC

Power consumption 2W

Weight 115 g

13-152
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.4.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions

2 3 4 8
1
5 9 10

3
DVPPF02 12

x16

13
x16

90
6

13
60 33 11

Unit: mm

No. Name Description

1 Extension module connection port Connect the modules
2 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module
3 Mounting hole For positioning between modules
Indicates the status of the power supply
4 POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Green Light ON: connection established between the master and slave
5 NET indicator stations.
Red Light ON: DVPPF02-SL not connected to the master station.
PROFIBUS DP communication
6 Connect to the PROFIBUS DP network
connector
7 DIN rail clip Secure the module on the set
8 Digital display Display the status code of DVPPF02-SL
9 Address switch Set the node address
10 Mounting hole For positioning between modules
11 Nameplate Indicate product information such as model, product serial number, etc.
12 Extension module connection port Connect the PLC or the modules
13 DIN rail slot（35mm） For the DIN rail

13-153
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.4.3 Terminals
13.4.3.1 Address Switch

The address switches on DVPPF02-SL are used for setting up the node address of DVPPF02-SL on the PROFIBUS DP
network. The switches are two rotary switches x160 and x161. Range for each switch: 0 ~ F. See the table below for the
setup range for the switches.

1 Address Definition
x16
NODE ADDRESS

1~7D Valid PROFIBUS address

0
x16
0，7E~FF Invalid PROFIBUS address

Example: If you are to set the node address of DVPPF02-SL to 26 (decimal), simply switch x161 to 1 and x160 to A. 26
(decimal) = 1A (hex) = 1×161 + A×160.
_13
Note:

 Set up the address of DVPPF02-SL when the power is off. Re-power the module after you finish setting
up the address.

 Changing the setting of address when DVPPF02-SL is operating is regarded invalid.

 Use slotted screwdriver carefully to adjust the address in case you scrape the module.

13.4.3.2 PROFIBUS DP Connector

Pin Definition Pin Definition

9 5 1 - 6 VP

2 - 7 -

3 Rxd⁄Txd-P 8 Rxd ⁄ Txd-N

6 1 4 - 9 -

5 DGND

13-154
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.4.4 Installation
1. Connect DVPPF02-SL to PLC MPU

 Open the fastening ports for the I/O module on the left-hand side of the PLC MPU and insert the DVPPF02-SL
alongside the fastening clips, as .
 Press the clips to make sure the connection is tight, as .

DV P28 SV

1
13
RUN

STOP

2. Install DVPPF02-SL and PLC MPU on DIN Rail

 Use 35mm DIN rail.

 Open the DIN rail clips on DVPPF02-SL and the PLC MPU. Insert DVPPF02-SL and the PLC MPU onto the
DIN rail.

 Clip up the DIN rail clip on DVPPF02-SL and the PLC MPU to fix them on the DIN rail.

D VPPF0 2 D VP28 SV

35mm DIN rail

x 16

x 16

R UN

ST OP

13-155
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

3. Connect to PROFIBUS DP Port

Insert the PROFIBUS DP bus connector into the PROFIBUS DP port on DVPF02-SL. Screw it tight to ensure DVPF02-SL
and the PROFIBUS DP bus are properly connected.

_13

13.4.5 Establish PROFIBUS DP Network

DVPPF02-SL is used for connecting SX2/SV/SV3/SX3 series PLC to the PROFIBUS DP network.

13-156
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.4.6 Transmission Distance and Baud Rate

The baud rate for PROFIBUS DP communication ranges from 9.6k to12M bits per second (bps). The length of cable is
determined by the transmission speed. The transmission distance can be from 100 to 1,200 meters. See the table below
for the baudrates DVPPF02-SL support and their corresponding transmission distance.

Baud rate（bps） 9.6k 19.2k 93.75k 187.5k 500k 1.5M 3M 6M 12M

Distance（m） 1200 1200 1200 1000 400 200 100 100 100

13.4.7 GSD File

GSD file is a text file, used for identifying the PROFIBUS DP device (master or slave). A GSD file includes data required
for configuring a slave on the PROFIBUS DP master, information on the supplier, baud rates supported and applicable I/O.
When using DVPPF02-SL, first import the GSD file to the software for configuring the PROFIBUS DP master, then
DVPPF02-SL and items to be configured will be displayed in the software. You can download the GSD file for DVPPF02-
SL from Delta’s website: http://www.deltaww.com.
13
13.4.8 Mapping Areas and Status Registers
When the PLC is DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3, see the table below for the I/O mapping and status registers of DVPPF02-SL at
different locations. The number of the first DVPDNET-SL on the left side of the PLC is 1 and the number of the DVPDNET-
SL module close to the left side of the first DVPDNET-SL is 2, and subsequent DVPDNET-SL modules are No. 3, No. 4
and so on.

Direction Output mapping Input mapping DVPPF02-SL

Location Slave  Master Master  Slave Status register
1 D16250~D16349 D16000~D16099 D16100
2 D16750~D16849 D16500~D16599 D16600
3 D17250~D17349 D17000~D17099 D17100
4 D17750~D17849 D17500~D17599 D17600
5 D18250~D18349 D18000~D18099 D18100
6 D18750~D18849 D18500~D18599 D18600
7 D19250~D19349 D19000~D19099 D19100
8 D19750~D19849 D19500~D19599 D19600

When the PLC is another model in the DVP series (that is, not DVP-SV3 or DVP-SX3), see the table below for the I/O
mapping and status registers of DVPPF02-SL at different locations. The number of the first DVPDNET-SL on the left side
of the PLC is 1 and the number of the DVPDNET-SL module close to the left side of the first DVPDNET-SL is 2, and
subsequent DVPDNET-SL modules are No. 3, No. 4 and so on.

Direction Output mapping Input mapping DVPPF02-SL

Location Slave  Master Master  Slave Status register
1 D6250~D6349 D6000~D6099 D6100
2 D6750~D6849 D6500~D6599 D6600
3 D7250~D7349 D7000~D7099 D7100
4 D7750~D7849 D7500~D7599 D7600
5 D8250~D8349 D8000~D8099 D8100
6 D8750~D8849 D8500~D8599 D8600
7 D9250~D9349 D9000~D9099 D9100

13-157
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Direction Output mapping Input mapping DVPPF02-SL

Location Slave  Master Master  Slave Status register
8 D9750~D9849 D9500~D9599 D9600

Explanations on status registers for DVPPF02-SL:

High byte Low byte

Code Definition Code Definition

0 Normal status 0 No error

1 Initializing F1 DVPPF02-SL is initializing.
F0 The node address of DVPPF02-SL is out of range.
F2 Error in low voltage detection
F3 DVPPF02-SL enters factory test mode.
_13
2 Error F4 DVPPF02-SL is disconnected from the master.
F5 Error in parameter
F7 Hardware error
F9 Configuration error

13.4.9 DVPPF02-SL Configure

13.4.9.1 DVPPF02-SL Configure

Please refer to Chapter 10 of the SYCON.net software manual for detailed setup instructions.

13.4.9.2 I/O Configuration of DVPPF02-SL

When DVPPF02-SL is configured in the software for the PROFIBUS DP master, it offers many choices for configuration,
satisfying all kinds of data length demands. See the table below. The output configuration means the data is sent from the
master to the salve; the input configuration means from the salve to the master.

Output configuration Input configuration I/O configuration

1 Word Out 1 Word Out 1 Word Out 1 Word In
2 Word Out 2 Word Out 2 Word Out 1 Word In
4 Word Out 4 Word Out 4 Word Out 1 Word In
8 Word Out 8 Word Out 8 Word Out 1 Word In
16 Word Out 16 Word Out 16 Word Out 1 Word In
32 Word Out 32 Word Out 32 Word Out 1 Word In
64 Word Out 64 Word Out 64 Word Out 1 Word In

13-158
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.4.10 Application Example

13.4.10.1 Control Requirement

Exchange data between the master AH10PFBM-5A and the slave DVPPF02-SL through the PROFIBUS DP network.
13.4.10.2 Connect DVPPF02-SL to the PROFIBUS DP Network

1. The AH10PFBM-5A PLC is the PROFIBUS DP master and DVPPF02-SL the slave. See figure below for the network
structure.

13

2. Set the PROFIBUS address of DVPPF02-SL to “2”

3. Connect a DVP-SV PLC on the right side of DVPPF02-SL and check if the connection is proper.

Note: The corresponding device addresses are different for DVPCOPM-SL with different PLC. Please refer to Input and
Output Mapping Areas for DVPCOPM-SL for details. Here the PLC is DVP-28SV.
13.4.10.3 Software Instructions

1. ISPSoft software is Delta's PLC programming software, and it can be downloaded from Delta's official website:
http://www.deltaww.com/.

2. In this example, we take AH10PFBM-5A as PROFIBUS DP master, and illustrate with SYCON.net software.
13.4.10.4 Master Station Configuration

Please refer to Chapter 10 of the SYCON.net software manual for details.

13-159
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.4.10.5 I/O Mapping Relationship between Master PLC and Slave PLC

The input and output areas assigned by the master module for the AH master PLC are shown in the diagram below.

(For detailed setup instructions, please refer to Section 15.1 of the SYCON.net software manual.)

_13

The diagram below illustrates the starting addresses and lengths of the OUTPUT and INPUT areas assigned by the master
module for the master PLC. Data from the OUTPUT area is transmitted to the slave, while the INPUT area receives data
sent from the slave.

13-160
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

The diagram below illustrates the mapping addresses allocated by the master station for the slave configuration module
parameters. By the upper and lower diagrams, it can be observed that the slave configuration module corresponds to the
starting register numbers of the master PLC's OUTPUT and INPUT areas.

Offset Address: Corresponding to the offset of the starting addresses of the INPUT and OUTPUT areas allocated by the
AH master station PLC, unit: Byte

Calculation method for the starting D registers of the slave configuration module corresponding to the master station PLC:

Starting register number of OUTPUT area D registers corresponding to the slave configuration module = Starting address
of OUTPUT area + (offset address / 2).

Starting register number of INPUT area D registers corresponding to the slave configuration module = Starting address of
INPUT area + (offset address / 2).

The above explain the connection between the master and the DVPPF02-SL slave. The mapping relationship between the
master PLC's D registers and the slave configuration module is related to the master station parameter settings. For
detailed setup instructions, please refer to Section 10.3.2 of the SYCON.net software manual. 13
In this example, the starting addresses assigned by the AH master PLC for the INPUT and OUTPUT areas are D1000 and
D3000, respectively.

The mapping relationship between the master PLC and the configuration options of the DVPPF02-SL slave is as follows:

Master PLC Register DVPPF02-SL configuration Offset

D3000 1 Word In 0

D3001 1 Word In，1 Word Out 2

D1000 1 Word Out 0

D1001 1 Word In，1 Word Out 2

The corresponding registers for data exchange between the master station and slave station are shown in the following
table:

AH10PFBM-5A master accesses the Direction of data transmission DVPPF02-SL slave accesses the registers
registers corresponding to AH PLC in PROFIBUS DP network corresponding to SV PLC

D3000 D6000

D3001 D6001

D1000 D6250

D1001 D6251

13-161
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.4.10.6 PLC Programming

【The program for master PLC】

Using ISPSoft software to write the program for the master station PLC, when the master PLC is running and M0 is ON, it
controls the configuration options of the DVPPF02-SL. When M1 is ON, the master PLC reads the corresponding values
of the DVPPF02-SL configuration options.

_13

(For illustration purposes only)

 Program introduction of Master PLC:

1. The master program is written in sections 2 and 3.

2. When M0 is ON, write 1000 to D3000 and 2000 to D3001. The master station will transmit the data of D3000
and D3001 through the PROFIBUS DP bus to the slave's D6000 and D6001.

3. When M1 is ON, write the data of D1000 to D100 and the data of D1001 to D110. The data of D1000 and
D1001 are transmitted from the slave's D6250 and D6251 to the master through the PROFIBUS DP bus.

【The program for slave PLC】

Using the WPL software to write the program for the slave PLC, when the slave PLC is running and M0 is ON, it controls
the configuration options of the DVPPF02-SL. When M1 is ON, the slave PLC reads the corresponding values of the
DVPPF02-SL configuration options.

13-162
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13

(For illustration purposes only)

 Program introduction of Slave PLC

1. Delta PLC programs can be designed using the Delta WPLSoft software. For details on programming methods,
please refer to the software manual.

2. When M0 is ON, write 3000 to D6250 and 4000 to D6251. The DVPPF02-SL will transmit the data of D6250
and D6251 through the PROFIBUS DP bus to the master’s D1000 and D1001.

3. When M1 is ON, write the value of D6000 to D10 and the value of D6001 to D11. The data of D6000 and
D6001 are transmitted from the master (D3000 and D3001) to the DVPPF02-SL through the PROFIBUS DP
bus.

13-163
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.4.11 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting

13.4.11.1 LED Indicator

 POWER LED

LED status Indication How to correct

Green light ON The power supply is normal. --
1. Check if the connection between DVPPF02-SL
and the PLC MPU is normal.
OFF No power supply
2. Check if the power supply from the PLC MPU is
normal.

 NET LED

LED status Indication How to correct

_13 Green light ON

A connection is established
--
between the master and slave.
1. Check if DVPPF02-SL is connected with the
PROFIBUS DP bus.
2. Check if the communication cable between
DVPPF02-SL and the PROFIBUS DP master is well
DVPPF02-SL has not established
Red light ON connected.
a connection with the master.
3. Check if the actual address of DVPPF02-SL is
consistent with the address configured in the
software.
4. Check if the GSD file is used correctly.

13.4.11.2 Digital Display

Code Indication How to correct

The node address of DVPPF02-
1 ~ 7D --
SL when it is operating normally.
The node address of DVPPF02-
F0 Set the node address of DVPPF02-SL to be 1 to 125.
SL is out of range.
F1 DVPPF02-SL is initializing. --
1. Check if the connection between DVPPF02-SL and
the PLC MPU is normal.
F2 Error in low voltage detection
2. Check if the power supply from the PLC MPU is
normal.
DVPPF02-SL enters factory test When PLC is SV and SX2, write 0 to D6350
F3
mode. When PLC is SV3 and SX3, write 0 to D16350
DVPPF02-SL is disconnected Check if the communication cable between DVPPF02-
F4
from the master. SL and the PROFIBUS DP master is well connected.
F5 Error in parameter Check if the GSD file is used correctly.
F7 Hardware error Send the module back to factory for repair.
F9 Configuration error Check if the GSD file is used correctly.
The PLC MPU connected to
80 Switch the PLC MPU to RUN.
DVPPF02-SL is in STOP status.

13-164
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Operation of Digital Display

1. When DVPPF02-SL is in normal operation status and the PLC MPU is in RUN status, the digital display will
only show its node address.

2. When DVPPF02-SL is in normal operation status and the PLC MPU is in STOP status, the digital display will
show its node address and the STOP status code alternately.

3. When DVPPF02-SL is initializing or in error status and the PLC MPU is in RUN status, the digital display will
show its node address, initialization code or error code alternately.

4. When DVPPF02-SL is initializing or in error status and the PLC MPU is in STOP status, the digital display will
show its node address, initialization or error code and STOP status code alternately.

13

13-165
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5 DVPSCM12-SL/DVPSCM52-SL
13.5.1 Introduction
DVPSCM is a serial communication module. It supports MODBUS UD Link (user-defined format of RS-485). Besides, it
can be used as a RS-422 communication port or RS-485 communication port, programming, uploading, downloading, and
monitoring can be carried out using Delta PLC software. SCMSoft, the setting software of DVPSCM12/52-SL, is built in
Delta communication software DCISoft. Please download DCISoft software from Delta website.

DVPSCM52-SL is a slave communication module using a building automation control network communication protocol
BACnet MS/TP. It is equipped with all the functions of DVPSCM12-SL and supports the BACnet MS/TP slave
communication protocol. It can read/write the BV values or AV values from/into a BACnet MS/TP master. SCMSoft, the
setting software of DVPSCM52-SL, is built in Delta communication software DCISoft. Please download DCISoft_v1.08 or
above from Delta website.
13.5.1.1 Features
_13  It provides RS-422 and RS-485 communication ports (COM1 & COM2).

 RS-422/RS-485 communication and the power supply are isolated from each other.

 There are two built-in 120Ω terminal resistors and switches.

 Each communication port can connect to at most 32 devices.

 It has the MODBUS data exchange functions (MODBUS Advance).

 It has the user-defined communication protocol, and the process planning function (UD Link).

 DVPSCM52-SL supports the BACnet MS/TP slave functions, and can connect to a superior device.

 The MPUs supports: DVP-SA2 (V1.0), DVP-SX2 (V1.2), DVP-SV (V2.2), DVP-SE (V1.0)，EH2-L (V2.20), and
EH3-L (V1.00) series.

 Firmware version V1.10 and above support DVP-SV3 and DVP-SX3 PLC.
13.5.1.2 Specifications

 RS-485/RS-422 interface

Item Specifications

Terminal European terminal blocks with spring plugs

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200, 230400, and
Transmission speed
460800 bps
Communication format Stop bit: 1, 2; Parity bit: None, Odd, Even; Data bit: 7, 8
MODBUS ASCII/RTU, UD Link, and BACnet MS/TP slave (supported by
Communication protocol
DVPSCM52-SL)

 Electrical Specifications

Item Specifications

Supply voltage 24 V DC (supplied by the internal bus through the MPU)

Power consumption 1.5 W
Insulation voltage 2500 VDC
Weight 95g

13-166
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 BACnet Protocol Implementation Statement

1. Introduction of the standard BACnet device

Model Introduction

DVPSCM52-SL BACnet Application Specific Controller（B-ASC）

2. Supported BIBBs

Model BIBBs BIBB name

DS-RP-B Data Sharing-ReadProperty-B
DS-WP-B Data Sharing-WriteProperty-B
DM-DDB-B Device Management-DynamicDeviceBinding-B
DVPSCM52-SL DM-DOB-B Device Management-DynamicObjectBinding-B
DM-DCC-B Device Management-DeviceCommunicationControl-B 13
DS-RPM-B Data Sharing-ReadPropertyMultiple-B
DS-WPM-B Data Sharing-WritePropertyMultiple-B

3. Supported opjects

Model Object Creation Deletion

Analog value Not supported Not supported
DVPSCM52-SL Binary value Not supported Not supported
Device Not supported Not supported

4. Data Link Layer Options

Model Data Link Supported Baud Rate

DVPSCM52-SL MS/TP Slave 9600/1920/38400/76800

5. Supported character set

Model Character set

DVPSCM52-SL ANSI X3.4

13-167
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions

76.30
1
2 8

3 9
4 10
90.00
11

60.00
5

12
3.00

6 13

_13 7 60.00 33.10

Unit: mm

No. Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module
Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
2 OFF: no power
OFF: SCM module status is STOP
RUNLED indicator
ON: SCM module status is RUN
ON: hardware error has occurred
Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF):
2 ERROR LED indicator
system configuration or communication error.
OFF: no error
3 Extension module connection port Connect the modules.
Blinking: RS-485/RS-422 transmission/reception in progress
4 TX1、RX1、RS-485/RS-422indicator
OFF: RS-485/RS-422 no transmission/reception
Blinking: RS-485/RS-422 transmission/reception in progress
5 TX2、RX2、RS-485/RS-422indicator
OFF: RS-485/RS-422 no transmission/reception
6 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module
7 DIN rail securing clip Secure the module on the set
120Ω termination resistor enhances the system's anti-interference
8 Terminal resistor 1 switch
capability
9 Extension port Connect the PLC or the modules
10 RS-485/RS-422communication port 1 Used for communication wiring
120Ω termination resistor enhances the system's anti-interference
11 Terminal resistor 2 switch
capability
12 RS-485/RS-422 communication port 2 Used for communication wiring
13 Extension unit positioning hole For positioning between modules

13-168
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.3 Terminals
RS-485/RS-422 communication ports definitions
Terminal no. RS-485 RS-422

1 - TX+

2 - TX-

3 D+ RX+

4 D- RX-

5 SG SG

6 - SG

13.5.4 Installation and Wiring

13.5.4.1 Installation 13
1. The MPU of the PLC connects to the SCM module.

 Adjust the clips connecting to the left-side module on the MPU.

 Direct the I/O module to the interface on the MPU, Combine the I/O module with the MPU as shown in the
figure below.

 Tighten the clips connecting to the left-side module on the MPU.

DVP28SV

13-169
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2. SCM module connects to other I/O modules

Before the SCM module connects to the inferior I/O module, the fixing clip for the I/O module has to be loosened by the
screwdriver, and the side cover has to be opened.

_13

13.5.4.2 Wiring

SCM module can be connected to other Delta industrial products via standard MODBUS communication, including Touch
Panel HMI, Text Panel HMI, programmable logic controllers, inverters and servo motors. The connection examples are as
follows:

HMI : 5

9600, 8, E, 1, RTU
COM1 : 247

38400, 7, E, 1, ASCII COM2 : 246

TC : 13
VFD
:
10
PLC : 12
ASDA : 11

13-170
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.5 Control Register

CR# Attribute Name of the register Description

The code is set up by the system.

0 R Model code Model code of DVPSCM12-SL=H’4041
Model code of DVPSCM52-SL=H’4042

The firmware version is displayed in a hexadecimal value. For

1 R Firmware version
example, H’0100 indicates that the firmware version is V1.00.

2 Reserved
Group number triggered by
3 R/W The group number triggered by COM1 UD Link
COM1 UD Link
Reference address of the It is used when COM1 UD Link chooses “Base+Offset”.
4 R/W data sent through COM1 in “Reference data register+Offset” defines the actual source device
UD Link for the data sending.
Reference address of the It is used when COM1 UD Link chooses “Base+Offset”. “Reference 13
5 R/W data received through data register+Offset” defines the actual source device for the data
COM1 in UD Link receiving.
6 Reserved
Group number triggered by
7 R/W The Group number triggered by COM2 UD Link
COM2 UD Link
Reference address of the It is used when COM2 UD Link chooses “Base+Offset”.
8 R/W data sent through COM2 in “Reference data register+Offset” defines the actual source device
UD Link for the data sending.
Reference address of the It is used when COM2 UD Link chooses “Base+Offset”. “Reference
9 R/W data received through data register+Offset” defines the actual source device for the data
COM2 in UD Link receiving.
10 R Module status RUN or STOP
The flag for an error in the module, please refer to the following
11~19 R Error Flag
explanation.
20~27 R UD Link status The execution status of UD Link

28~29 Reserved

0: Not triggered,
Triggering the UD Link
30 R/W 1~254: Number of times the UD Link sequence is triggered
sequence
255: Always triggered
Triggering the data
High byte: bit; Low byte: word
31 R/W exchange through COM1
0: Not triggered; 1: Triggered once; 2: Always triggered
to read bits or words
Triggering the data
High byte: bit; Low byte: word
32 R/W exchange through COM2
0: Not triggered; 1: Triggered once; 2: Always triggered
to read bits or words.
Triggering the data
High byte: bit; Low byte: word
33 R/W exchange through COM1
0: Not triggered; 1: Triggered once; 2: Always triggered
to write bits or words.
Triggering the data
High byte: bit; Low byte: word
34 R/W exchange through COM2
0: Not triggered; 1: Triggered once; 2: Always triggered
to write bits or words.
Selecting the “reading bits Bit = 0: Disabling the function of reading bits through COM1.
35~36 R/W
through COM1” checkbox Bit = 1: Enabling the function of reading bits through COM1.

13-171
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Attribute Name of the register Description

Selecting the “reading
Bit = 0: Disabling the function of reading words through COM1.
37~38 R/W words through COM1”
Bit = 1: Enabling the function of reading words through COM1.
checkbox
Selecting the “reading bits Bit = 0: Disabling the function of reading bits through COM2.
39~40 R/W
through COM2” checkbox Bit = 1: Enabling the function of reading bits through COM2.
Selecting the “reading
Bit = 0: Disabling the function of reading words through COM2.
41~42 R/W words through COM2”
Bit = 1: Enabling the function of reading words through COM1.
checkbox
Selecting the “writing bits Bit = 0: Disabling the function of writing bits through COM1.
43~44 R/W
through COM1” checkbox Bit = 1: Enabling the function of writing bits through COM1.
Selecting the “writing
Bit = 0: Disabling the function of writing words through COM1.
45 ~ 46 R/W words through COM1”
Bit = 1: Enabling the function of writing words through COM1.
checkbox
_13 47~48 R/W
Selecting the “writing bits Bit = 0: Disabling the function of writing bits through COM2.
through COM2” checkbox Bit = 1: Enabling the function of writing bits through COM2.
Selecting the “writing
Bit = 0: Disabling the function of writing words through COM2.
49~50 R/W words through COM2”
Bit = 1: Enabling the function of writing words through COM2.
checkbox

51 R/W COM1 station number Range: 1~247

0：1200
1：2400
2：4800
3：9600
4：19200
52 R/W COM1 baud rate 5：38400
6：57600
7：76800
8：115200
9：230400
10：460800

0：7，Even，1
1：7，Even，2
2：7，Odd，1
3：7，Odd，2
4：7，None，1
COM1 format (Data 5：7，None，2
53 R/W
Length，Parity，Stop Bits) 6：8，Even，1
7：8，Even，2
8：8，Odd，1
9：8，Odd，2
10：8，None，1
11：8，None，2

13-172
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

CR# Attribute Name of the register Description

High byte: communication protocol
(0：MODBUS；1：UD Link；2：BACnet MS/TP slave)
Low byte: communication interface(0：RS-485；1：RS-422)
interface
DVPSCM12-SL
RS-485 RS-422
MODBUS 16#0000 16#0001
protocol
COM1protocol and UD Link 16#0100 16#0101
54 R/W
interface

interface
DVPSCM52-SL
RS-485 RS-422
MODBUS 16#0000 16#0001

protocol
UD Link 16#0100 16#0101 13
BACnet
16#0200 16#0201
MS/TP slave
COM1 communication
55 R/W 1~65535ms (65535 indicates no timeout).
timeout
56 R/W COM1 transmission delay 0~65535ms

57 R/W COM1 transmission mode 0：ASCII；1：RTU

Number of COM1
58 R/W 0~255
communication retry
59~60 Reserved
61 R/W COM2 station number Range: 1~247
0：1200
1：2400
2：4800
3：9600
4：19200
62 R/W COM2 baud rate 5：38400
6：57600
7：76800
8：115200
9：230400
10：460800

0：7，Even，1
1：7，Even，2
2：7，Odd，1
COM2 format（Data
3：7，Odd，2
63 R/W Length，Parity，Stop
4：7，None，1
Bits）
5：7，None，2
6：8，Even，1
7：8，Even，2

13-173
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

CR# Attribute Name of the register Description

8：8，Odd，1
9：8，Odd，2
10：8，None，1
11：8，None，2
High byte: communication protocol
(0：MODBUS；1：UD Link；2：BACnet MS/TP slave)
Low byte: interface (0：RS-485；1：RS-422)
interface
DVPSCM12-SL
RS-485 RS-422
MODBUS 16#0000 16#0001
protocol
COM2 protocol and UD Link 16#0100 16#0101
64 R/W
_13 interface

interface
DVPSCM52-SL
RS-485 RS-422
MODBUS 16#0000 16#0001
UD Link 16#0100 16#0101
protocol
BACnet
16#0200 16#0201
MS/TP slave
COM2 communication
65 R/W 1~65535ms (65535 indicates no timeout)
timeout
66 R/W COM2 transmission delay 0~65535ms

67 R/W COM2 transmission mode 0：ASCII；1：RTU

Numbers of COM2
68 R/W 0~255
communication retry
69~70 reserved
High byte: COM1, low byte: COM2
COM2
ON and ON and
OFF
latched non-latched
OFF 16#0000 16#0011 16#0022
ON and
16#1100 16#1111 16#1122
COM1 latched
71 R/W COM ON/OFF setting
ON and
16#2200 16#2211 16#2222
non-latched
0x00: OFF
0x11: setting ON and latched
0x22: setting ON and non-latched
When the CR value is set to the above values, executing the
COM1/2 configuration function. CR value will automatically set
back to 16#0000 after the configuration trigger.
High byte: COM1; Low byte: COM2.
Display the execution status of COM1 and COM2 settings. Code
72 R COM status setting
explained below:
0x00: Not configured

13-174
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

CR# Attribute Name of the register Description

0x01: Configuration successful
0x02: Configuration in progress
0x03: Error - Station number setting out of range
0x04: Error - Baud rate setting out of range
0x05: Error - Format setting out of range
0x06: Error - Communication interface setting out of range
0x07: Error - Communication timeout setting out of range
0x08: Error - Transmission mode setting out of range
0x09: Error - Communication retry count setting out of range
0x0A: Error - Configuration ON/OFF setting out of range
16#55AA: Restore to factory settings. After the setting is triggered,
73 R/W Restore to factory settings
the CR value is automatically set back to 16#0000.
16#0000: Not configured
Restore to factory default
74 R
status
16#0001: Configuration successful 13
16#0002: Configuration in progress
75~115 reserved
1: Enabling the sending
Sending the MODBUS
116 R/W After the sending of the MODBUS command is complete, CR#116
command
is reset to 0.
Processing status of the 0: Not yet received; 1: Processing; 2: Received; 3: Reception
117 R/W
MODBUS command failure
Destination of the
118 R/W 1: COM1, 2: COM2
MODBUS command
Length of the MODBUS
119 R/W Setting the length of the MODBUS command
command
Contents of the MODBUS The space for storing the MODBUS command which is
120~249 R/W
command sent/received
Symbol:
R: data can be read using the FROM instruction;
W: data can be written using the TO instruction.
The left-side high-speed special module codes are used in the range from K100 to K107.

※ Additional remarks

1. CR#11: Error code

Error code Description

0x0001 Hardware error
0x0002 UD Link error
0x0004 There is a communication error in the communication port.
0x0008 MODBUS communication error
0x0010 Restore to factory setting

13-175
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

2. CR#12: Hardware error flag

Bit 15 ~ 4 3 2 1 0
SRAM is GPIO is FLASH is
Description Reserved LV occurs.
damaged. damaged. damaged.

3. CR#13：COM1 UD Link error flag

CR#14：COM2 UD Link error flag

Bit Description Bit Description

0 Group number is not found. 8 UD Link data check error
1 Command number is not found. 9 Unknown processing procedure
2 Packet editing error 10 Unknown Rx packet segment format
3 There is a comparison error in the data received. 11 Unknown Rx packet segment format
4 Checksum error 12 The length read from the register is out of range
_13 5 reserved 13 The length written into the register is out of range
6 The data received is not sufficient for comparing 14 reserved
7 The data received is beyond expectation. 15 reserved

4. CR#15：COM1 MODBUS error flag

CR#16：COM2 MODBUS error flag

Error code Name Description

0x0001 Illegal function Unsupported function code
0x0002 Illegal data address Unsupported address
0x0003 Illegal data value Unsupported data value
0x0004 Slave device failure The slave fails.
0x0005 Transform failure Value conversion error

5. CR#17: COM1 communication error flag

CR#18: COM2 communication error flag
CR#19: internal communication error flag

Bit Description Bit Description

0 Sending format error 8 Reserved
1 Parity check error 9 Reserved
2 Too late to receive the data. 10 Reserved
3 Communication timeout error 11 Reserved
4 Checksum error 12 Reserved
5 Internal communication timeout 13 Buffer for the sending is full.
6 Internal communication error 14 Buffer for the receiving is full.
7 Reserved 15 Reserved

13-176
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

The modification of communication parameters through CR#51-CR#74 requires firmware version V1.10 or above support.

The following example demonstrates the modification of the station number for COM1:

(1) Reset CR#72 for subsequent confirmation of execution status.

(2) Write 5 to CR#51 to set the station number for COM1 to 5.

(3) Write 16#1100 to CR#71, indicating the writing of COM1 parameters with latched function.

 If latched function is not required, write 16#2200.

 If setting COM2, write the configuration value to the low byte.

13

(4) Confirm the setting status

 CR#72 = 16#0100:COM1 is configured correctly.

 If COM2 is configured, the low byte will display the status of COM2.

13-177
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.6 Rapid Start

This chapter introduces how to execute MODBUS RS-485/RS-422 communication through the communications ports on
the SCM module.

When installed on the left side of the DVP-SV3/SX3 PLC, you can also right-click on the module icon on the DIADesigner
hardware configuration page to open SCMSoft.

_13

 Communication setting

Open DCISoft, click “Tools” >“Communication Setting”. The user can choose the communication port, and set the
information related to RS-232. If an Ethernet module (DVPEN01-SL) is used with the SCM module, the user can select
“Ethernet” in “Communication Type” box to upload/download the program.

13-178
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Opening a SCM project and MODBUS Advance

① Click “SCMSoft” in DCISoft to open the setting page.

② Click “New Project” in SCMSoft to establish a SCM project.

③ Finally, click “MODBUS Advance Wizard” to open the setting page for the reading/writing.

13

13-179
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Setting MODBUS Advance

In order to expedite the communication using MODBUS, SCMSoft provides “MODBUS Advance Wizard”. The user only
needs to designate the registers for the data sending and receiving, or the absolute positions. The settings will be
downloaded to the SCM module through the communication port chosen by the user. After the flag is enabled, the
designated reading and writing are complete. The following are the steps of setting the wizard.

1. MODBUS Advance－PLC Setting

Click “Setup” to set the communication between the MPU of the PLC and SCMSoft. If the setting has been
completed at【Communication setting】, the user does not have to set the communication here again.

2. SCM Setting

When setting the communication format of the communication port on the SCM module, the user can designate the
left-side module number, and the communication port, and set the station address, the baudrate, the physical type,
the transfer mode, and the format.
_13

3. MODBUS Advance－Reading/Writing

Set “Read Bit”/“Read Word” and “Write Bit”/ “Write Word”.

13-180
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Right click “Add Item” to increase bits and words. The bits are listed in the upper column, and the words are listed
in the lower column.

13

Double-clicking the added item to edit the parameter.

13-181
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

【Master】

PLC Type: It displays the PLC type. You can click “Tools” in SCMSoft to change the PLC type.
Enter the address of the data register D in the PLC to store the value read from the
Data:
slave.
Description: Enter the description of the device. The maximum length is 30 bytes.

【Slave】

Slave ID: The number of the salve device from which the data is read
You can choose the Delta PLC type. If PLC used is not a Delta PLC, please leave the
Device Type:
column blank.
Length (bit): Indicates the length of the data being read. The maximum length is 100 bits.
_13 You can choose either “Hex” or “Modbus 6 Digit”. “Hex” represents 6 hexadecimal
Data Type: digits, and “Modbus 6 Digit” represents 6 decimal digits. If the device type is a Delta
PLC type, the data type in this column will automatically become the data register D.
Start Address: The start address of the data.

If the absolute position of the present value of the Delta DTA temperature controller is the hexadecimal value, 4700 (H’4700),
and the station address is 10, the present value can be read and stored in D100 in the MPU of the PLC through COM1 on
the SCM module. The settings are as follows:

13-182
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Download

After the setting is complete, check whether the other parameter settings conform to the slave setting. Then, click
“Download”.

 Communication status

The SCM module provides the communication state of MODBUS Advance. There are four sections ─ Read Bit, Read
Word, Write Bit, and Write Word. The execution status in each line is stored in the bits in the data registers. If D100 is
entered into No.1, the execution status of the data exchange in No.1 will be displayed in the first bit (b0) in D100, and by
analogy, the execution status of the data exchange in No.2 will be displayed in the second bit (b1) if D100 is entered into 13
N0.2.

Dn
Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
No. 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

D（n+1）

Bit b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

No. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

The default address is D500. You can change the start address in MODBUS Advance.

13-183
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Enable

Control the data exchange through the instruction TO in WPLSoft to read bits/read words/write bits/write words
(CR#31~CR#34).

CR# Attribute Name of the register Description

Triggering the data exchange High byte: bit; Low byte: word
31 R/W
through COM1 to read bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered
Triggering the data exchange High byte: bit; Low byte: word
32 R/W
through COM2 to read bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered
Triggering the data exchange High byte: bit; Low byte: word
33 R/W
through COM1 to write bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered
Triggering the data exchange High byte: bit; Low byte: word
34 R/W
through COM2 to write bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered

_13 If you want to keep executing the word-reading, enter K2 into CR#31. If you want to execute the word-reading once,
enter K1 into CR#31.

After M0 is triggered, COM1 on the SCM module will keep reading the present value which will be stored in D100, and
the status value of bit0 in D0 is 1.

13-184
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.7 SCMSoft Introduction

This chapter will introduce the setting software of the SCM module ─ SCMSoft.

13.5.7.1 SCM Project

By establishing an SCM project, the SCM module makes the execution plan for COM1 and COM2. SCM project includes
four parts ─ COM PORT Setting, UD Link, MODBUS Advance, and COM port history.

Set the communication formats and the parameters that COM1 and COM2 execute on the
COM PORT Setting:
SCM module. (Ch 13.5.7.2).

UD Link: Define the contents of the RS-485/RS-422 packets. (Ch13.5.7.3).

Connect to the standard MODBUS RS-485/422 device. If other Delta automation products
MODBUS Advance: and other standard MODBUS communication devices are used, you can use this function.
(Ch 13.5.7.4).
Set whether to record the history of the communication port on the SCM module.
COM port history:
(Ch 13.5.7.5). 13
13.5.7.2 COM PORT Setting

Setting the serial communication format:

If the standard MODBUS is used, select MODBUS. If the user-defined RS-485/RS-

Protocol:
422 format is used, select UD Link.
Set the slave IDs of COM1 and COM2. The superior device connects to the SCM
Slave ID: module through the slave ID. The default slave ID of COM1 is 247, and that of COM2
is 246.
It supports communication rates 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
Baud rate:
76800, 115200, 230400, 460800 bps.

Physical Type: RS-485 or RS-422

If there has been no response for a certain period of time after the instruction is
Communication Timeout: transmitted through the communication port, that period of time is called the
communication timeout. The default communication timeout is 3000 ms.

13-185
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

The default time interval between the instructions is 0 ms, that is, the next instruction
Transmitter Delay:
is transmitted immediately after the reply is received.

Transfer Mode: ASCII or RTU

It means the number of times the communication has been retried after the
Communication Retry Times:
communication fails. If there is still no response, the communication stops.

13.5.7.3 UD Link (User-defined Link)

UD Link provides non-Modbus RS-485/RS-422 link function. The packets can be edited according to the communication
formats. The steps of establishing UD Link are as follows:

1. Create a group Edit TX packets and RX packets Create commands Trigger and execute the instructions as a
group

_13

2. Create a group  Edit TX packets and RX packets  Create commands Create other groups Create
sequences Trigger and execute the instructions as sequences.

First of all, establish the transmission instructions (TXs) and the reception instructions (RXs) in the group. Then, set the
execution sequence and the number of times for TXs and RXs through the commands. Finally, trigger and execute the
instructions as a group. In addition, if various groups of group packets are required in a large system, the user can create
the groups in the sequences, and set the execution sequence.

13-186
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.7.3.1 TX Packetand RX Packet

Create various TX packets and RX packets in a group. The contents of TX packets and RX packets may include several
messages, one address, one length, and one checksum.

13

 Packet Name: Edit the name of the packet.

 Packet View: It displays the contents of the packet.

 Packet Segment Edit: Adjust the sequence of the packet segment and add/delete the packet segment.

No.: It is the packet segment number. You can edit at most 64 segments in a packet.

Class: The class of the segment includes the message, the address, the length and the checksum.

Format: The format of the segment includes Hex, ASCII, Code, and etc.

Segment View: The description of the segment.

 Message: Edit the constant message and the variable message. Both the constant message and the variable
message can be used with a packet head, a start bit, an end bit, or a data segment. One packet can include many
messages.

 Address: Edit either the constant address or the variable address. One packet includes only one address segment.

 Length: Edit the length of the packet. One packet includes only one length segment.

 Checksum: Edit the checksum. One packet includes only one checksum segment.

13-187
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Constant: The data is a fixed value.

 Format: The format of the data can be Hex, ASCII, or Code. When the format of the data is Code, it indicates that
the data uses the control code.

 Value: Enter the constant value.

_13

 Variable: The data is a variable which mapping register can be the internal register in the SCM module or the register
in the PLC.

 Format: Set the format of the data.

Null: Does NOT make any change to the format of the data.

Hex: The ASCII data can be converted into the hexadecimal value. The words which cannot be converted will become
zeros.

ASCII: The hexadecimal value can be converted into the ASCII data. The words which cannot be converted will
become zeros.

 Variable Property

Function: The variable functions include “Read R ()”, “Write W ()”, and no action “*”. For TX packets, you can choose
“Read R ()” .For RX packets, you can choose “Read R ()”, “Write W ()”, or no action “*”.

Mapping register: You can choose the internal register in the SCM module or the register in the MPU of the PLC. The
internal registers in the SCM module include I1, I2, O1, and O2. The registers in the PLC include
the data registers and “Base+Offset”.

Register Definition Register Definition

D Internal D register in the PLC Base+Offset Used with the control register.

Used to receive/send the data

I1 O1 Used to send the data through COM1.
through COM1.

Used to receive/send the data

I2 O2 Used to send the data through COM2.
through COM2.

13-188
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Length

Class: The length segment can be either 1 byte or 2 bytes.

Format: The format of the length segment can be the hexadecimal value or the ASCII data.

Value: The user can enter the length value according to the format setting.

 Checksum

Class: The user can choose the class of the checksum segment.

Format: The user can choose the format of the checksum segment.

Initial Value: The user can set the initial value of the checksum.

Reverse: Reverse the checksum (word) in bytes.

13

13-189
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.7.3.2 Command

After creating many TX packets and RX packets, you can choose the packets to be sent and received through creating the
commands and plan the sequence of executing the commands.

_13

Command No.: Each command has its own number. You can designate the sequence of executing the commands through
these numbers.

Command Type: Choose “Send”, “Receive”, or “Send & Receive”.

Send Packet: Choose the group name which has been created in the groups.

Receive Packet: Choose the group name which has been created in the groups.

Success: Designate the action following the execution of a command. Choose “Next”, ”Goto”, or “End”.

Next: Execute the next command. If the number of the command being executed is one, the number of the next
command will be executed is two.

Goto: Directly designate the command whose number is much larger.

End: The execution of commands comes to an end.

Fail: Designate the action following the execution of a command. Choose “Next”, ”Goto”, or “End”.

Next: Execute the next command. If the number of the command being executed is one, the number of the next
command will be executed is two.

Goto: Directly designate the command whose number is much larger.

End: The execution of commands comes to an end.

Retry: The number of times the sending of a command has been retried after the sending fails.

Repeat: The number of times the sending of a command has been repeated after the command has been executed
successfully.

Send Wait: The default time interval between the instructions is 0 ms, that is, the next instruction is transmitted immediately
after the reply is received.

Timeout: If there has been no response for a certain period of time after the instruction is transmitted through the
communication port, that period of time is called the communication timeout. The default communication timeout
is 50 ms.

13-190
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.7.3.3 Sequence

Click “Add Group” by right-click the mouse in Sequence to check the groups which will be executed. These groups will be
downloaded as a sequence and executed through the serial port. In addition, you can click “Error Execute Group No.” twice
to set the group which will be executed when an error occurs. When there is an error in executing a group, the group which
is set in “Error Execute Group No.” will be executed.

13

13.5.7.4 MODBUS Advance

Please refer to section 13.5.6 for more related introduction.

13-191
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.7.5 COM PORT History

The function of the COM PORT historical data is to record all packets during the SCM communication process in the buffer
within SCM, providing users with debugging capabilities. The buffer, shared for both transmission and reception, has a size
of approximately 2 KBytes and only retains the latest communication data, discarding older information. Additionally, the
buffer is non-latched, meaning that data will be lost if there is a power outage. The SCMSoft allows users to activate,
deactivate, or upload the buffer data within SCM.

In the COM PORT historical data, three options are available through right-clicking. The functionalities are described as
follows: "Start COM PORT Historical Data": Initiates the recording of the communication process for all COM PORTs in
SCM. "Stop COM PORT Historical Data": Halts the recording of the communication process for all COM PORTs in SCM.
"Upload COM PORT Historical Data": Uploads all communication data recorded internally in SCM to SCMSoft. Please note
that recording of all SCM communication data will automatically cease before uploading. To resume recording, it is
necessary to reselect "Start COM PORT Historical Data.”

_13
13.5.7.6 BACnet MS/TP Slave Function（Supported by DVPSCM52-SL）

If you want to connect an SCM module to a BACnet MPU, you have to set the BACnet parameters and the BACnet object
for the SCM module.

For firmware versions V1.08 and below, the host device needs to write to AV or BV before being able to read them. For
versions V1.10 and above, the host device can directly read AV and BV values without the need for prior write operations.

13.5.7.6.1 BACnet Parameters

The BACnet parameters include the BACnet MAC address, the baud rate, and the physical type.

BACnet MAC address: 1 ~ 247 (Default: 247), Please notice that the maximum MAC address that some masters
support is 127.

Baud rates supported by BACnet: 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, and 76800 bps

Physical type: options are RS-485 or RS-422.

13-192
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.7.6.2 BACnet Object

Network Number: Th network number on the BACnet network is unique. It cannot be used repeatedly. (Default: 65536).

13

BACnet object edit: Editing the AV and BV values which correspond to the data registers and coils in the Delta PLC master
connecting to the SCM module

The lenghth of tha AV value corresponds to two data registers in the Delta PLC, and the lenghth of the BV value
corresponds to one coil in the Delta PLC.

Object: You can select “AV” or “BV”. “AV” corresponds to the data registers in the PLC, and “BV” corresponds the coil in
the PLC.

SCM address: Set the address of the AV, or the BV. The setting range is 0~383.

Length: A unit is a double word.

PLC: The start address in the Delta PLC.

13-193
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.8 Application
13.5.8.1 MODBUS

This chapter introduces how the SCM module connects to other Delta industrial products such as the human-machine
interfaces, the text panels, the PLCs, the motor drives, and the servo motors through the standard MODBUS. The
connection diagram is as below:

_13

Address from Address into

Station Communication Register in Register in
Product which the data which the data
address protocol the MPU the MPU
is read is written
HMI 5 9600, RTU, 8, E, 1 - -
2000H
VFD 10 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 2103H D100 D150~D151
2001H
0101H 0101H
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D200, D201 D250, D251
020AH 020AH
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100~D109 D300~D309 D200~D204 D350~D354
TC 13 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 1000H (PV) D400 1001H (SV) D451

13-194
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.8.1.1 Connection between the MODBUS Slave and the Delta Product

For SCM as the MODBUS slave, you only have to set the parameters such as the station address and the baud rate to
allow the connection with the master.

Open SCMSoft 『New Project』 COM PORT setting: 『Add SCM COM』 Set the communication parameters.

13

13-195
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Set the communication parameters of COM1: station address 247 (default), Modbus RTU, 9600, 8, Even, 1.

13.5.8.1.2 Connection between the MODBUS Master and the Delta Product

_13 1. Set the communication parameters of COM2: station address 246 (default), Modbus ASCII, 38400, 7, Even, 1.

2. Add MODBUS Advance.

13-196
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

3. Set the data exchange in the slave: Add Item  Click the added item twice to set the reading/writing information in
the slave.

13

VFD（D1002103H）
，（D150，D151H2000，H2001）

13-197
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

ASDA（D2000101H，D201020AH）

_13

（D2500101H，D251020AH）

13-198
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

PLC (D300~D309 in the masterD100~D109 in the slave), (D350~D354 in the masterD150~D154 in the slave)

13

TC（D4001000H）
，（D4511001H）

13-199
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

After the setting is complete, the user can designate the communication port using MODBUS Advance ─ COM port 2 on
the first left-side module.

_13

4. Download the parameters: Set the communication. After the setting is complete, click “OK” to exit from the
communication setting, and the parameters are set.

13-200
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13

Click “Download”, choose the left-side module which will be downloaded, and click “OK”. If only one device is
connected, click “OK” directly.

13-201
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

_13

5. Enable the data echange function: Control the data exchange through the instruction TO in WPLSoft to read bits/read
words/write bits/write words (CR#31~CR#34).

Triggering the data exchange through High byte: bit; Low byte: word
31 R/W
COM1 to read bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered
Triggering the data exchange through High byte: bit; Low byte: word
32 R/W
COM2 to read bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered
Triggering the data exchange through High byte: bit; Low byte: word
33 R/W
COM1 to write bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered
Triggering the data exchange through High byte: bit; Low byte: word
34 R/W
COM2 to write bits or words. 0: Not triggered, 1: Triggered once, 2: Always triggered
If you want to keep executing the word-reading, enter K2 into CR#32. If want to execute the word-reading once, enter K1
into CR#32.

If you want to keep executing the word-writing, enter K2 into CR#34. If want to execute the word-writing once, enter K1
into CR#34.

After M0 is triggered, the data will be read from the salve address which has been set through COM2 on the SCM module.

After M1 is triggered, the data will be written into the slave address which has been set through COM2 on the SCM module.

13-202
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13.5.8.2 Connect to WPLSoft

The SCM module can be used as the additional communication port of the PLC master. When RS-485 communication of
the PLC master is executed, you can use WPLSoft to monitor the master through the SCM module. The default
communication format of COM1 on the SCM module is 9600, 7, Even, 1, and the station address is 247.

1. Set WPLSoft: Open WPLSoft. Click “Options” and choose “Communication Setting”.

13

2. Choose RS-232 in Communication Setting, designate “COMP Port”, and enter the communication parameters. The
communication parameters here should conform to the default setting of COM1 on the SCM module. If other
communication parameters are used, they need to be modified in COM PORT Setting of the SCM module. In addition,
the setting of “Station Address” should conform to COM1 on the SCM module rather than the station address of the
MPU of the PLC.

3. Click “OK” to upload/download WPLSoft program from/to the MPU of the PLC.

13-203
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.8.3 RS-485

This section introduces how SCM connects to other Delta industrial products through RS-485 (the non-standard MODBUS).

13.5.8.3.1 Connect to Electricity Meter

There are two common modes of connecting to the electricity meter. One is through the standard MODBUS, the other is
through RS-485. This section introduces how the SCM module connects to the electricity meter through RS-485 in UD
Link.

1. The record type

Set the station address of the electricity meter to 5. The electricity meter includes three record types ─ abbreviated,
control and full record types.

(Abbreviated) (Control)

Word Word
_13 number
Content Description
number
Content Description

1 10h Start bit 1 68h Start bit

2 0 … FAh, FFh Device address (IA) 2 03h Length
3 Function code (FF) 3 03h Length (repeat)
Checksum (CS) 4 68h Start bit (repeat)
4
(IA+FF)
5 0 … FAh, FFh Device address (IA)
5 16h End marker
6 Function code (FF)

(Full) 7 Parameter index (PI)

Word Checksum (CS)

Content Description 8
number (Add from IA to PI.)

1 68h Start bit 9 16h End marker

2 Length
3 Length (repeat)
4 68h Start bit (repeat)
5 0 … FAh, FFh Device address (IA)
6 Function code (FF)
7 Parameter index (PI)
… n word, data block
Checksum (CS)
Length+5 (Add from IA to the
previous item.)
Length+6 16h End marker

13-204
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

2. The usage
There are nine types of usage in which the SCM module communicates with the electricity meter through the
combination of three record types.

Type Instruction to the electricity meter Response (through the record type)
Reset
1 N/A
Abbreviated record
Query about the status of the device: abbreviated
2 Abbreviated record
record
Measured value and error (cyclic data)
3 Full record
Abbreviated record
Event data analyzed erroneously
4 Full record
Abbreviated record
Measured value
5 Full record
Control record
13
6 Output parameter: control record Full record
7 Status: control record Full record
8 Device specifications: control record Full record
9 Real-time timing data: control record Full record

3. Edit the UD Link

【Type 1】

Only send the abbreviated record（abbreviated record）

：

『Start word』+『device address (IA)』+『Function code (FF)』+『Checksum (CS)』+『End marker』

 10h + D0 + 09h +（IA+FF）+ 16h

 Start word: 10h  Read the device address from D0 (IA).

13-205
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Function code (FF): 09h  Checksum (1byte; adding the previous two items up):

_13  End word: 16h

 The editing is complete:

There is no response address for type 1, so do NOT need to edit the function code of the response (Rx).

Edit the SCM command: Sending Tx Packet1; no response address.

13-206
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13

【Type 2】

Send the abbreviated record and respond with the abbreviated record. The setting of the sending is as that in type 1. You
can copy the setting directly. Notice that the function code is 29h.

 Copy the setting in Reset group.

13-207
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Paste the setting to TX Packet in Query group.

_13

Respond with the abbreviated record.

『Start word』+『Device address (IA)』+『Function code (FF)』+『Checksum (CS)』+『End marker』

 10h + D0 + 09h +（IA+FF）+ 16h

 Start word: 10h  Check whether the response address and the
device address previously read from D0 (IA) are
the same.

13-208
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Ignore the function code (FF) of the response:  Checksum

(*, 1): Ignore the word whose length is 1. If want
(1byte, adding the previous two items up):
to store the function code, refer to the setting of
the device address (IA) to store the function
code in the D register.

13

 End word: 16h

 The editing is complete:

13-209
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Edit the SCM command: Sending Tx Packet1 and receiving Rx Packet1.

_13

【Type3】

Send the abbreviated record and respond with the full record.

For the sending of the abbreviated record, the user can copy or refer to those in type 1 and type 2. Notice that the function
code (FF) is 89h.

13-210
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Respond with the full record.

『Start word』+『Length』+『Length (repeat)』+『Start word』+『Device address (IA)』+『Function code (FF)』

+『Parameter index (PI)』+『Data block (DB)』+『Checksum (CS)』+『End marker』

 68h +（Null）+（Null）+ 68h + D0 +（Null）+ D100

 Start word: 68h  Length + Length (repeat): Ignore these two words.
They can be ignored or stored.

13

 Start word: 68h  Device address (IA): Check whether the response
address and the device address previously read
from D0 (IA) are the same.

1 3 - 2 11
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Note: Some unimportant words can be ignored. You can just store the data which is needed in the registers (Dx), and the
data whose length of the response code is unknown can be stored in the registers by means of this method.

Edit the SCM command: Sending Tx Packet1, and receiving Rx Packet1.

_13

【Type4】

Send the abbreviated record and respond with the full record.

For the sending of the abbreviated record, the user can copy or refer to those in type 1 and type 2. Notice that the function
code (FF) is A9h.

13-212
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

Respond with the full record.

『Start word』+『Length』+『Length (repeat)』+『Start word』+『Device address (IA)』+『Function code (FF)』+

『Parameter index (PI)』+『Data block (DB)』+『Checksum (CS)』+『End marker』

 68h + 06h + 06h + 68h + D0 + (1 word）+ (3 words) + (the content gotten from adding from IA to the end) + 16h

 Star word-Length-Length-Star word  Check whether the response address and the device
address previously read from D0 (IA) are the same.

13

 FF：Ignore the function code.  Store PI+DB in D100.

13-213
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

 Checksum:  End word:

_13 Edit the SCM command: Sending Tx Packet1, and receiving Rx Packet1

13-214
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

【Type 5】

Send the Control record and respond with the full record.

When the control record is sent, the function code (FF) is 89h.

『Start word』+『Length』+『Length (repeat)』+『Start word』+『Device address (IA)』+『Function code (FF)』+『Parameter

index (PI)』+『Checksum (CS)』+『End marker』

 68h + 03h + 03h + 68h + D0 + 89h + D1 + (the content gotten from adding from IA to the end) + 16h.

 Start word-Length-Length-Start word  The device address is read from D0.

13

 Function code: 89h  The parameter index is read from D1.

13-215
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

Respond with the full record.

『Start word』+『Length』+『Length (repeat)』+『Start word』+『Device address (IA)』+『Function code (FF)』+

『Parameter index (PI)』+『Data block (DB)』+『Checksum (CS)』+『End marker』

 68h + (Null) + (Null) + 68h + D0 + (Null) + D1 + D100 + (the content gotten from adding from IA to the end) + 16h

 Start word:  Length-Length (two words): Ignore the two words.

_13

 Start word: 68h  Check whether the response address and the
device address previously read from D0 (IA) are
the same.

13-216
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

 Function code:  Check whether the parameter index of the

receiving and that of the sending are the same.

13

4. Download: After setting all types, download the UD Link to the SCM module. Open SCMSoft 『New Project』
 COM PORT Setting: 『Add SCM COM』 Set the communication parameters.

13-217
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

_13

Set the communication parameters of COM1: Station address 247 (default), UD Link, 9600, 8, Even, 1.

13-218
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

5. WPLSoft triggers UD Link

The group number set in each type is triggered by “To instruction” in WPLSoft which triggers the execution of UD Link. K1
is written into CR3 if the group number is 1 and by analogy, K2 is written into CR3 if the group number is 2.

CR# Attribute Name of the register Description

3 R/W Group number triggered by COM1 UD Link The Group number triggered by COM1 UD Link

The sending of type 1~5 is controlled by M1~M5. Each triggering includes writing the station address of the electricity
meter and the function code into D0 and D1 respectively. When the data is written into the registers, the higher bit precedes
the lower bit. For example, the user has to enter H’0555 when the station address is 5, and the same applies to the reading
of the response address from D100.

13

13-219
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.8.4 BACnet MS/TP Slave Function（Supported by DVPSCM52-SL）

Set the BACnet parameters and the BACnet object for the SCM module, and then download them to the SCM module to
connect to the BACnet MS/TP module.

For firmware versions V1.08 and below, the host device needs to write to AV or BV before being able to read them. For
versions V1.10 and above, the host device can directly read AV and BV values without the need for prior write operations.

【BACnet parameters】

_13

BACnet MAC address: 1~247 (Default: 247). It can NOT be the same as the address of other device on the BACnet
network.

Baud rate: 1200 bps~460800 bps (Default: 9600). It MUST be the same as the setting for the BACnet MS/TP MPU.

Physical Type: options are RS-485 or RS-422.

【BACnet object】

Network Number: The network number on the BACnet network is unique. It CAN’T be used repeatedly. (Default: 65536)

13-220
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

BACnet object edit: Editing the AV and BV values which correspond to the data registers and coils in the Delta PLC master
connecting to the SCM module

The lenghth of tha AV value corresponds to two data registers in the Delta PLC, and the lenghth of the BV value
corresponds to one coil in the Delta PLC.

13

Object: The user can select “AV” or “BV”. “AV” corresponds to data the registers in the PLC, and “BV” corresponds the coil
in the PLC.

SCM address: The user can set the address of the AV, or the address of the BV. The setting range is 0~383.

Length: A unit is a double word.

PLC: The start address in the Delta PLC.

【Download】

13-221
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

_13

Click “Download”, choose the left-side module which will be downloaded, and click “OK”. If only one device is connected,
click “OK” directly.

13-222
 Ch a pt er 1 3 D V P- S S er ies L e ft- S i de H i gh- S pe e d Co m mu n ic at i o n Mo d u le

13

After the parameters are downloaded, the AV and BV values in the software correspond to the registers and bit in the PLC
connected to the SCM module.

13.5.9 LED Indicator and Troubleshooting

13.5.9.1 LED Indicator
LED Status Indication How to correct
On Power supply is normal --
POWER Green light
Off No power supply Check if the power is on
On DVPSCM52-SL in RUN status --
RUN Green light
Off DVPSCM52-SL in STOP status --
On Hardware error Contact factory
1. Errors in system settings or
ERR Red light Flashes communication Reset to default values
2. Returning to Factory Setting
Off No errors --
Flashes RS-485/RS-422 in transmission --
TX1/TX2 Orange light
Off No RS-485/RS-422 transmission --
Flashes RS-485/RS-422 in reception --
RX1/RX2 Orange light
Off No RS-485/RS-422 reception --
RS-485/ On RS-485 mode --
Green light
RS-422 Off RS-422 mode --

13-223
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

13.5.9.2 Troubleshooting
Abnormality Cause Solution
PLC MPU not powered Check the power supply for the PLC MPU
POWER LED OFF DVPSCM52-SL not connected with the Check if DVPSCM52-SL is tightly connected with the
PLC MPU PLC MPU
Ensure the use of shielded twisted pair RS-485
Wiring error
communication cables and correct connections.
Please check the TX indicator; if it is flashing
As MODBUS master,
Slave communication function error normally, confirm whether the communication
no response from the
functionality of the slave device is normal.
slave
The MODBUS advanced settings were Please check the TX indicator; if it is not flashing, re-
not downloaded, or there is an error in download the advanced parameters for MODBUS
the CR configuration. and ensure that CR triggers data exchange correctly.
Ensure the use of shielded twisted pair RS-485
Wiring error
_13 As MODBUS slave, communication cables and correct connections
no response to the Please check the RX indicator; if it is flashing
master Parameters setting error normally, confirm whether the historical data and
communication format are correct.
Ensure the use of shielded twisted pair RS-485
Wiring error
communication cables and correct connections
Verify that the length setting for receiving packet
variable messages is correct. If there are no specific
The received packet length is set
UD requirements, it is recommended to set the length
incorrectly
Linkcommunication attribute function to ' * ' to allow the device to
error determine it autonomously.
Confirm that the functionality setting for the variable
The variable attributes for receiving attributes of receiving packets is 'Write W()', so that
packets are set incorrectly. the device will write the received variable messages
into the registers.

13-224
 14
Chapter 14 DVP-S Series Left-Side Position
Module

Table of Contents
14.1 DVP02PU-SL Specification ................................................................................ 2

14.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions ....................................................................... 4

14.3 Terminals ......................................................................................................... 5

14.3.1 Installation Precautions ..................................................................... 5

14.4 Control Register ............................................................................................... 6

14.5 Wiring .............................................................................................................. 6

14.6 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 7

14-1
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

14.1 DVP02PU-SL Specification

 Electrical specification
Module name DVP02PU-SL
Number of inputs High-speed input points: 3; normal input points 5; high-speed output: 4 (2-axis)
Supply voltage 24VDC(1.5W) from PLC CPU
Connector type Removable terminal block (distance to the terminal is 3.5 mm)
Connect to the left side of CPU, numbered from 100 to 107 according to the position of
Connect to DVP PLC CPU
module from the closest to farthest to CPU.
Weight 105g

 Functional specifications – Input Points

Model
High-speed Input Normal Input
Item
Number of inputs 3（A+/A-，B+/B-，Z+/Z-） 5（X0~X4）
Connector type Removable terminal blocks
Input form Differential input Direct current (sinking or sourcing)
Input current 5~24VDC，5~15mA 24VDC，5mA
_14 OFF→ON >3VDC >15VDC
Action level
ON→OFF <1.5VDC <5VDC
Response time <1.5us <0.1ms
200kHz（A+/A-，B+/B-）
Maximum input frequency 1kHz
20kHz（Z+/Z-）
Input impedance 4.7kΩ
Input isolation 500VAC
Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.

14-2
 Chapter 14 DVP-S Series Left-Side Position Control Module

 Functional specifications – Output Points

Model
High-speed Output
Item
Number of outputs Four (2-axis)
Connector type Removable terminal blocks
Output form differential output
Output voltage 5VDC *1
Leakage current < 10uA
Minimum load 1mA / 5VDC
Resistance 20mA
Maximum load Inductance N/A
Bulb N/A
Maximum output frequency 200kHz
OFF→ON 0.15us
Maximum Response time
ON→OFF 0.15us

Output isolation 500VAC

Note*1: Actual output 4VDC（No load）~2.66VDC（20mA）

14-3
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

14.2 Module Profiles and Dimensions

1 4 3. 4
3 6
2
7

33
8

90
9

3
5 60 4.7

Unit: mm

No. Name Description

_14 1 Extension module connection port Connect the modules.
Indicates the status of the power supply
POWER LED indicator ON: the power is on
OFF: no power
Error status of the module
OFF: the module is normal.
2 Error LED indicator (Red)
Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF):
hardware error occurs in the module, can NOT operate normally
Run LED indicator Operating status of the module
ON: Receives an input signal
Input LED indicator
OFF: Receives no input signal
3 Model serial Model serial
The inputs are connected to sensors.
4 Terminals
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
5 DIN rail clip Secure the module on the set
6 Mounting hole For positioning between modules
7 Extension module connection port Connect the PLC or the modules
8 DIN rail slot (35mm） For the DIN rail
9 Extension unit fixing clip For securing the extension module

14-4
 Chapter 14 DVP-S Series Left-Side Position Control Module

14.3 Terminals
DVP02PU-SL
Y0+
Y0 -
Y1+
Y1-
Y2+
Y2-
Y3+
Y3-
A+
A-

B+
B-
Z+
Z-
S/S
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4

14.3.1 Installation Precautions

 The power supply device shall be compliance with UL 62368-1/UL60950 LPS (Limited Power Source), or UL61010-1
/ UL61010-2-201 LE (Limited Energy).

 Le dispositif d'alimentation doit être conforme à la norme UL 62368-1/UL60950 LPS (Source d'alimentation limitée)
ou UL61010-1 / UL61010-2-201 LE (Énergie limitée).

 Please be sure to use certified power supply with SELV output or certified power supply providing double insulation
evaluated by UL60950, or UL61010-1 and UL61010-2-201 standards.

 Veuillez-vous assurer d'utiliser une alimentation électrique certifiée avec une sortie SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage)
ou une alimentation certifiée fournissant une double isolation évaluée selon les normes UL60950, ou UL61010-1 et
UL61010-2-201.

 If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may
be impaired.

 Si l'équipement est utilisé d'une manière non spécifiée par le fabricant, la protection fournie par l'équipement pourrait
être compromise.

 The installation that the safety of any system incorporating the equipment is the responsibility of the assembler of the
system.

 L'installateur du système est responsable de la sécurité de tout système intégrant l'équipement.

 Clean by dry cloth only.

 Nettoyer uniquement avec un chiffon sec.

14-5
 DV P S er i es M od u le M an u a l

14.4 Control Register

Since this module does NOT use control registers to read/write data, you need to use API to perform data reading and
writing. You can use API to execute DVP positioning module features, including setting output control parameters of PU
module (API1402 PUCONF), reading PU module output state (API1403 PUSTAT), PU module output pulse without
acceleration (API1404 DPUPLS), Relative position output of PU module with acceleration and deceleration (API1405
DPUDRI), Absolute addressing output of PU module with acceleration and deceleration (API1406 DPUDRA), PU module
homing (API 1407 DPUZRN), PU module jog output (API1408 DPUJOG), PU module MPG output (API1409 DPUMPG),
and High-speed counter function of PU module (API1410 DPUCNT). Refer to API14 Module Instruction form DVP-
ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Programming Manual for more information on operation.

14.5 Wiring

X4
D el ta s er v o dri ve
ASD A - A2 S eries
X3
_14 Y0+ PLS 43
Y0- /PLS 41
X2 Y1+ SIGN 36
Y1- /SIGN 37
X1

X0

+24V D el ta s er v o dri ve
S/S
ASD A - A2 S eries
MPG Sh ield ed Y2+ PLS 43
c ab le
Y2- /PLS 41
A+
Phas e A Y3+ SIGN 36
A-
Y3- /SIGN 37
B+
Phas e B
B-
Z+
Phas e Z
Z-

Note:

Refer to Chapter 6 Applied Instruction (Module Instructions API14xx) from DVP-ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Series Programming
Manual and Delta Servo Drive Manual for more details on output modes.

14-6
 Chapter 14 DVP-S Series Left-Side Position Control Module

14.6 Troubleshooting
When an error occurs in PU modules, you can check the state code to identify the causes, error indicator will not display.
Please refer to special extension module exchange function (SM228, you can find more detailed information in section
2.2.16 ‘Additional Remarks on SM/SR’ in the DVP-ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Series Programming Manual).

For detailed operation and application examples regarding the API instructions, please refter to ‘API14 Module Instructions’
in DVP-ES3/EX3/SV3/SX3 Series Programming Manual.

 Error indicator and troubleshooting description

RUN LED ERROR LED Description Solution

1. Check if the power supply of PLC CPU
is normal.
2. Check if the connection between PLC
The power supply from PLC CPU
OFF ON CPU and the module is well-connected.
to the module is abnormal.

If the above points are ture, change your

module.
The previous firmware update was failed.
Blinking every The previous firmware update is Contact your local authorized distributors
OFF
0.2 seconds abnormal. for another firmware update for the
module.
1. Check if the positive and negative is set.
2. Check if the software/hardware positive
The light is lit for 0.5
limit is reached?
No change seconds and then The postivie limit is reached.
unlit for 3 seconds.
Leave the positive limit and go towards the
negative direction.
1. Check if the positive and negative is set.
The light is blinking 2. Check if the software/hardware negative
every 0.5 seconds limit is reached?
No change The negative limit is reached.
for two times and
unlit for 3 seconds. Leave the negative limit and go towards
the positive direction.
The light is blinking
Incorrect position setting may lead to
every 0.5 seconds
No change Current position value overflow incorrect movement. You can use PUSTAT
for three times and
instruction to clear the current position.
unlit for 3 seconds.

14-7
Industrial Automation Headquarters
Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 330477, Taiwan
TEL: +886-3-362-6301 / FAX: +886-3-371-6301

Asia EMEA
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Sales: [email protected]
Post code : 201209 Marketing: [email protected]
TEL: +86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: +86-21-6872-3996 Technical Support: [email protected]
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Customer Support: [email protected]
Service: [email protected]
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900
Industrial Automation Sales Department
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 Automotive Campus 260, 5708 JZ Helmond, The Netherlands
TEL: +81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: +81-3-5733-1255 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3900
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Seoul, 08501 South Korea
Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +82-2-515-5305 / FAX: +82-2-515-5302
TEL: +49 2921 987 238
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
TEL: +65-6747-5155 / FAX: +65-6744-9228 Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
Mail: [email protected]
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon,
PIN 122001, Haryana, India Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
TEL: +91-124-4874900 / FAX: +91-124-4874945 Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL. TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Mail: [email protected]
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand
TEL: +66-2709-2800 / FAX: +66-2709-2827 Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Via Meda 2–22060 Novedrate(CO)
Delta Electronics (Australia) Pty Ltd. Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
Unit 2, Building A, 18-24 Ricketts Road, Mail: [email protected]
Mount Waverley, Victoria 3149 Australia TEL: +39 039 8900365
Mail: [email protected]
Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
TEL: +61-1300-335-823 / +61-3-9543-3720
Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
Americas Mail: [email protected]
TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
5101 Davis Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. Eltek Dubai (Eltek MEA DMCC)
TEL: +1-919-767-3813 / FAX: +1-919-767-3969 OFFICE 2504, 25th Floor, Saba Tower 1,
Jumeirah Lakes Towers, Dubai, UAE
Delta Electronics Brazil Ltd. Mail: [email protected]
Estrada Velha Rio-São Paulo, 5300 Eugênio de TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Melo - São José dos Campos CEP: 12247-004 - SP - Brazil
TEL: +55-12-3932-2300 / FAX: +55-12-3932-237

Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Gustavo Baz No. 309 Edificio E PB 103
Colonia La Loma, CP 54060
Tlalnepantla, Estado de México
TEL: +52-55-3603-9200

*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice. DVP-0399820-01
2023/07/31